Panasonic KX-TD500 System Reference Manual Download | Manualshive

Page: 941 / 1574

background image

10-C-1

C. Configuration Screen

1.00 System Assignment

Configuration - System Assignment | OFL | PRG | SCR | SEL
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + ----- + ----- + ----- + ------

+ ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +

| Expansion Shelf ------------------- | 1 Shelf |
| TSW Additional | |
| CONF ------------------------ | No |
| OHCA (For DPITS) -------- | No |

+ ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +

1 COMMON 2

3

4

5

6 HRD CPY 7

8

Summary

This screen is used to configure the system for:

• Expansion shelf (1, or both 1 and 2)
• TSW Conference Expansion Card
• TSW OHCA Card

To expand the conference trunks, TSW
Conference Expansion Card (KX-TD50104) must
be installed.
To execute the OHCA function with DPITS, TSW
OHCA Card (KX-TD50105) must be installed.
(Password level : One)

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value

Expansion Shelf Automatic set No : expansion shelf not installed

1 Shelf : expansion shelf 1 available
2 Shelves : both expansion shelves 1 and 2 available

TSW Additional CONF Automatic set Yes : conference expansion card installed

No : conference expansion card not installed

TSW Additional OHCA Automatic set Yes : TSW OHCA card installed
(for DPITS) No : TSW OHCA card not installed

Reference

1-E-2.00

1-E-24.00
2-C-3.01

1-E-26.00
2-C-3.02

«
...
939
940
941
942
943
...
»

Summary of Contents for KX-TD500

Page 1: ...KX TD500 SYSTEM System Reference Manual Vol 1 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co Ltd Central P O Box 288 Osaka 530 91 Japan Printed in Japan PSQX1167ZA K0396KM0 C Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co Ltd 1997 ...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ... Maintenance VT220 and Compatibles Section 9 Preparation for Programming and Maintenance Dumb Type Terminal Section 10 System Programming VT220 and Compatibles Section 11 System Programming Dumb Type Terminal Section 12 System Programming Proprietary Integrated Telephone System PITS Section 13 Station Programming Proprietary Integrated Telephone System PITS Section 14 Station Programming Attendant...

Page 4: ......

Page 5: ...to the telephone line If the telephone operates properly do not reconnect the unit to the line until the trouble has been repaired by an authorized Panasonic Factory Service Center If the telephone does not operate properly chances are that the trouble is in the telephone system and not in the unit Do not use benzine thinner or similar solvents Do not use abrasive powder to clean the cabinet Wipe ...

Page 6: ...he marking label If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home consult your dealer or local power company 8 This product is equipped with a three wire grounding type plug a plug having a third grounding pin This plug will only fit into a grounding type power outlet This is a safety feature If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet contact your electrician to replace your ...

Page 7: ...een damaged F If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance 14 Avoid using a telephone other than a cordless type during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning 15 Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS SAFETY INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS When installing telephone wiring basic safety precauti...

Page 8: ......

Page 9: ...Section 1 System Outline ...

Page 10: ......

Page 11: ...ntroduction 1 D 1 2 00 System Interface 1 D 1 3 00 Programming 1 D 2 4 00 Test 1 D 2 5 00 Monitor 1 D 3 6 00 Backup Utility 1 D 3 E System Configuration 1 E 1 1 00 Basic Shelf 1 E 1 2 00 Expansion Shelf 1 E 2 3 00 Attendant Console 1 E 3 4 00 CPU Card 1 E 3 5 00 TSW Card 1 E 4 6 00 Power Unit 1 E 4 7 00 LCOT Card 1 E 5 8 00 RCOT Card 1 E 5 9 00 PCOT Card 1 E 6 10 00 GCOT Card 1 E 6 11 00 PLC Card ...

Page 12: ...00 OPX Card 1 E 11 21 00 DPH Card 1 E 11 22 00 AGC Card 1 E 12 23 00 RMT Card 1 E 12 24 00 CONF Card 1 E 13 25 00 OHCA Card 1 E 13 26 00 DPITS OHCA DOHCA Card 1 E 13 27 00 OPX Power Unit 1 E 13 28 00 E M Card 1 E 14 29 00 T 1 Card 1 E 14 30 00 E 1 Card 1 E 14 ...

Page 13: ...tibles This section describes the basic usage and available functions of VT220 and Compatibles Section 9 Preparation for Programming and Operation Dumb This section describes the basic usage and command reference of Dumb terminal Section 10 System Programming VT220 and Compatibles This section provides information for the programming of the system database using VT220 and Compatibles Section 11 Sy...

Page 14: ...m Class of Service Executive Busy Override Deny System Numbering Plan Busy Override Deny Set Busy Override Deny Cancel 11 C 7 00 11 C 11 00 10 D 4 01 10 D 6 04 3 shows the reference number for programming Dumb terminal user Note In this manual all reference numbers are described using Section Number Subsection Number and Title Number Example 2 00 System Administration from a Remote Location Descri...

Page 15: ...hones PITS but Single Line Telephones SLT can be used as Extension Telephones in this system 4 00 Communications Needs To meet the user s communications needs this system provides the following features Outgoing Call Features Toll Restrictions allow the manager to restrict extension users from making certain types of calls Restriction is administered through outward restriction and toll restrictio...

Page 16: ...g allows extension users to make announcement through built in speaker of Proprietary Integrated Telephone PITS and or external Pager Equipments Other Features Station Message Detail Recording SMDR generates detailed call information on all CO calls and sends this information to the printer SMDR also generates detailed data on Error Log Records System Programming Data and Traffic Information Off P...

Page 17: ...d interfaces 8 central office loop start trunks and the TDM bus It is available to connect 8 CO lines to the system per LCOT card With loop start you seize a line by bridging through a resistance the tip and ring both wires of your telephone line LCOT Card with Pay Tone Detection PCOT This card is a version of the LCOT card with the capability to detect a pay tone of CO line This is useful to char...

Page 18: ...ote Circuit RMT Card This card is necessary for accessing the system from a remote location Other cards Doorphone Circuit DPH Card This card interfaces 4 doorphones and the TDM bus Up to 4 doorphones can be connected to the system Time Switch Conference Expansion Card TSW Conference Card This card provides 64 additional conference trunks and is installed on the TSW card Off Hook Call Announcement ...

Page 19: ...elf and the slot number must be 1 5 or 9 You cannot assign any cards which exceed the system capacity When the system starts up with excess cards by the automatic configuration mode they will be ignored Refer to Section 2 F 2 00 CPU Rotary Switch Features for the automatic configuration 1 A 7 Item PITS Extension SLT Extension CO Line PITS Extension SLT Extension PITS Extension CO Line System 512 4...

Page 20: ......

Page 21: ...t with Message Waiting MSLC Card Loop Start Central Office Trunk LCOT Card Ground Start Central Office Trunk GCOT Card Direct Inward Dialing Trunk DID Card Direct Inward Dialing Trunk DID MFC Card with MFC Both way Direct Inward Dialing Trunk DID 2W Card Loop Start Central Office Trunk Card with Polarity Reversal Detection RCOT Card E M Card Off Premise Extension Trunk OPX Card Off Premise Extensi...

Page 22: ...ne 12 CO s Single Line Telephone with FLASH button and Message Waiting Lamp Single Line Telephone with FLASH button and Message Waiting Lamp Proprietary Telephone with 1 Line LCD 12 CO s Digital Proprietary Telephone 24 CO s Digital Proprietary Telephone with 2 Line LCD 24 CO s Digital Proprietary Telephone with 6 Line LCD 12 CO s Digital Proprietary Telephone 6 CO s Single Line Telephone with FLA...

Page 23: ...nections Printer Data Terminal Automobile type batteries Consisting of two 12VDC 24VDC To AC Outlet Radio Radio Amplifier Amplifier Paging Speaker 1 Paging Speaker 2 DIG ITA L SU PER HY BR ID SYS TEM RU N OF F LIN E ALA RM ...

Page 24: ...of extension is available Refer to Section 3 F 9 00 Parallel Connection of Extensions for further information Central Office Lines Doorphone 1 Doorphone 2 Doorphone 3 Doorphone 4 KX TD500 System one pair two pair Single Line Telephone one pair KX T30830 two pair Data Terminal one pair two pair KX T30820 KX T30850 three pair Cordless Phone one pair KX T7130 two pair Telephone with Answering Machine...

Page 25: ...GE VOLUME MIC XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX AUTO SCAN 10CH 10CH Pan ason ic Pan ason ic AUT O SCA N AUT O SCA N 10CH 10CH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 CH CH LOW LOW MUTE 1 4 7 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 Pan aso nic Pan aso nic TONE PROGRAM AUTO REDIAL PAUSE ON OFF TALK D P E R T U V P R S W X Y J K L G H I A B C D E F M N O XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX XX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXX FULL FULL XXXXXX XX...

Page 26: ......

Page 27: ...c Station Release Distinctive Dial Tone Distinctive Busy Tone Confirmation Tone Tone and Ringing Patterns Toll Restriction for Local Trunk Dial Access Toll Restriction for Individual Trunk Group Dial Access Direct Trunk Access Operator International Call Restriction 7 Digit Toll Restriction Toll Restriction for Speed Dialing Tone Pulse Conversion Automatic Pause Insertion Dual Console Operation At...

Page 28: ... Extension OPX Walking Station Outgoing Message OGM Recording and Playing Back Intercept Routing No Answer Rerouting Calling Party Control CPC Detection CO Busy Out Parallel Connection of Extensions Voice Mail Integration DTMF Tone Integration Charge Management Continued ...

Page 29: ...de Walking COS Class of Service Operator Call On Hook Dialing Speed Dialing System Speed Dialing Station One Touch Dialing Last Number Redial LNR Saved Number Redial SNR Automatic Redial Pickup Dialing Serial Call Line Selection Answering Direct Answering Ringing Line Preference Prime Line Preference Call Waiting Executive Busy Override Deny Do Not Disturb DND Answering Extension Calls Voice Calli...

Page 30: ...ransfer Call Transfer via Attendant Console Released Link Operation Call Coverage Path Escape Hunt Station Voice Mail Transfer Programmable Privacy Privacy Release Privacy Attach Hands Free Operation Conference Unattended Conference Doorphone Flash External Feature Access Microphone Mute Tone Through End to End DTMF Signaling Paging All Extensions Group Paging Paging External Pagers Paging All Ext...

Page 31: ...ock Out Remote Station Feature Control Absent Message Capability Message Waiting Data Line Security DSS Console features Automatic Transfer Dial Tone Transfer CO Access Control Search by Name Department OGM Recording and Playing Back Power Failure Operation Trunk Verify Direct Voice Mail Access p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p p Features PITS SLT ATT ...

Page 32: ......

Page 33: ...s can be accessed either locally or remotely using the system RS 232C interface The system may be configured for local direct access from the data terminal or via a modem connection that allows the data terminal to be located at a greater distance from the system than is allowed for an RS 232C interface For remote access a data terminal and modem are required at the maintenance location and the RM...

Page 34: ... described in Section 15 Maintenance VT220 and Compatibles and Section 16 Maintenance Dumb Self Test System Detected Troubles The KX TD500 system has the capability of the diagnostic self test which is automatically executed at the desired time everyday It takes a long time to perform the diagnosis of the whole devices TSW card line cards ports resources etc If the system detects a device which is...

Page 35: ... individually Station Trunk Group Attendant Console DISA OGM1 OGM2 AGC Refer to Section 15 G Monitor for further information about monitor 6 00 Backup Utility Making backups of the system programming data and keeping it is extremely important in the unlikely event that system programming data are lost in a system failure Backup Utility consists of save and load Save is to transmit a file of data f...

Page 36: ......

Page 37: ...tart central office trunk LCOT Card b Loop start central office trunk with Pay Tone Detection PCOT Card c Loop start central office trunk with Polarity Reversal Detection RCOT Card d Ground start central office trunk GCOT Card e Hybrid line circuit HLC Card f Digital hybrid line circuit DHLC Card g Proprietary ITS line circuit PLC Card h Digital proprietary ITS line circuit DLC Card i Single line ...

Page 38: ...supply and 14 mounting spaces for any optional card required for system expansion Expansion Shelf is installed on top of the basic shelf Construction of Expansion Shelf 1 and 2 Expansion Shelf consists of the following P O W E R F S 1 F S 2 F S 3 F S 4 F S 5 F S 6 F S 7 F S 8 F S 9 F S 10 F S 11 F S 12 F S 13 F S 14 No 1 2 Number 1 14 Name POWER for Power Unit FS1 to 14 Free Slot for optional serv...

Page 39: ...res Operation Attendant console is operable for the following Call Processing mode System programming Diagnostics 4 00 CPU Card Functions 1 Call process and basic shelf main protocol Microprocessor 80386EX Time switch TSW control detection of system clock alarm basic shelf power down and expansion shelf power down alarm watch dog 2 System switch interface There are Operation Switch MODE 10 modes 0...

Page 40: ... for music on hold or BGM Operation 1 A knob for adjusting volume of external paging is turned with a screw driver from front of TSW card 2 LED indicator on the TSW card lights when system reset or TSW local reset occurs 6 00 Power Unit Functions 1 Power supply 5 9 15 GND for a shelf 2 External battery interface 12V Battery power 12V is input from a battery interface unit in basic shelf with a 4 w...

Page 41: ...on the LCOT card lights when the system reset or LCOT local reset occurs 1 E 5 8 00 RCOT Card Functions RCOT KX T96183 Loop Start Central Office Trunk with Reverse Detection card 8 CO Lines card 1 Loop start CO interface CPC detection 1 DTMF driver With loop start you seize a line by bridging through a resistance the tip and ring both wires of your telephone line Polarity reversal detection 2 Powe...

Page 42: ...tivated Operation LED indicator on the GCOT card lights when the system reset or GCOT local reset occurs 9 00 PCOT Card Functions PCOT KX T96189 Loop Start Central Office Trunk with Pay Tone Detection card 4 CO Lines card 1 Loop start CO interface CPC detection 1 DTMF driver With loop start you seize a line by bridging through a resistance the tip and ring both wires of your telephone line Pay ton...

Page 43: ...stance 600 ohms including SLT Power supply 30V with current limitation circuit 2 DTMF receivers dial pulse detector 2 Power Failure Transfer PFT by each port The KX T96174X has three interfaces of PFT When power failure occurs SLT Tip Ring are led by a PFT relay but SLT PFT modular and LCOT GCOT PCOT RCOT modular should be connected each other by connection cords in advance 3 Diagnostic transfer D...

Page 44: ...failure transfer is quite same as that of SLC card 5 Diagnostic transfer by each port Diagnostic transfer is quite same as that of SLC card Operation LED indicator on the HLC card lights when the system reset or HLC local reset occurs 1 E 8 14 00 DLC Card Functions DLC card KX TD50172 1 Digital PITS and DSS console interface 16 circuits card Maximum loop resistance 40 ohms Power supply 15V supplie...

Page 45: ...y each port The interface for diagnostic transfer is similar to the SLC card Refer to the section 3 F 18 00 Extra Device Port XDP Connection for XDP Operation LED indicator on the DHLC card lights when the system reset or DHLC local reset occurs 16 00 ESLC Card Functions ESLC card KX TD50175 16 extensions card 1 Standard SLT interface Maximum loop resistance 600 ohms including SLT Power supply 30V...

Page 46: ...ns 1 DID Direct Inward Dialing card KX T96182 Wink start immediate start DID interface 4 circuits card 45V used in circuits is originated from DC DC converter in DID card DID card will receive pulse signal only 2 Both way DID card KX T96182D wink start immediate start DID interface 4 circuits card a Incomming 45V used in circuit is originated from DC DC converter in DID card Signaling Pulse DTMF b...

Page 47: ...ctions Doorphone card KX T96161 1 Doorphone interface 4 circuits card 4 doorphones can be connected using a modular connector 2 Door opener interface 4 circuits card DPH card has 4 relays for door opener 220VAC 1A The relay opens for doorlock closes for door release It also opens in the case of power failure Operation Terminal plate on the DPH card has 8 terminals 2 leads from door opener are dire...

Page 48: ...rted in a CO CO speech path 2 4 DTMF receivers DTMF transceiver is used as DTMF repeater So AGC card microprocessor controls DTMF repeater 3 8 Speech End Detectors Speech end detector of AGC is quite same as that of DISA card Operation LED indicator on the AGC card lights when the system reset or AGC local reset occurs 23 00 RMT Card Functions RMT Remote Circuit card KX T96196 Modem 300 1200 bps f...

Page 49: ...on user to intrude through the speaker into another extension that is in conversation using the handset This feature is available only the following PITS telephones KX T123230D KX T123235 KX T7130 26 00 DPITS OHCA DOHCA Card Functions DPITS OHCA card KX TD50105 This card is mounted on TSW card for OHCA feature for DPITS This feature is available only the KX T7235 27 00 OPX Power Unit Functions OPX...

Page 50: ...1 E 14 29 00 T 1 Card Functions T 1 interface 1 circuits card T 1 is a digital transmission link with a capacity of 1 544Mbps T 1 carry 24 voice conversations Frame Format D4 ESF Line Coding AMI B8ZS Channel Type LCO GCO DID OPX TIE Signaling Pulse DTMF DTMF 24 receivers and 6 generators Operation LED indicator on T 1 card lights when the system reset or T 1 card local reset T 1 line fault occurs ...

Page 51: ...Section 2 Installation ...

Page 52: ......

Page 53: ...nstallation of Top Cover 2 B 14 3 04 Cable Connections 2 B 15 4 00 Ground Wiring 2 B 17 5 00 Fixing on the Floor 2 B 18 5 01 Setting Out and Drilling 2 B 18 5 02 Fixing on the Floor 2 B 19 C Installation of Cards 2 C 1 1 00 Before Installation 2 C 1 1 01 Slot Construction 2 C 1 1 02 Guide Plate 2 C 2 2 00 Connection of Standard System 2 C 3 2 01 CPU Card 2 C 3 2 02 TSW Card 2 C 3 2 03 Power Unit 2...

Page 54: ...r KX A46DX 2 C 61 D Connection of Optional Peripheral Equipment 2 D 1 1 00 Paging Equipment 2 D 1 2 00 External Music Source 2 D 2 3 00 RS 232C Interface 2 D 3 3 01 Connection to the Printer 2 D 5 3 02 Connection to the Data Terminal 2 D 6 E Installation of Attendant Console 2 E 1 1 00 Configuration 2 E 1 2 00 Attendant Console Assembly 2 E 3 3 00 Handset Connection 2 E 4 4 00 Installation and Rem...

Page 55: ...ning Protectors 2 G 1 1 00 Overview 2 G 1 2 00 Recommended Lightning Protectors 2 G 1 3 00 Installation 2 G 1 4 00 Outside Installation 2 G 2 5 00 Installation of an Earth Rod 2 G 3 6 00 Installation of the KX A207 2 G 4 2 3 ...

Page 56: ......

Page 57: ...ed to install the KX TD500 System Detailed instructions for planning the installation site installing the shelves and optional cards and cabling of peripheral equipments are provided Further information on system expansion and peripheral equipment installation is included 2 A 1 ...

Page 58: ...f maintenance and inspection be especially careful to allow space for cooling above and at the sides of the KX TD500 system 2 Wiring Cautions Make sure to keep the following instructions when wiring 1 Do not wire the telephone cable in parallel with an AC power source computer telex etc If the cables are run near those wires shield the cables with metal tubing or use shielded cables and ground the...

Page 59: ...shelf can be equipped with up to 224 lines including Extensions and CO lines The system can consist of one two or three shelves Basic Expansion 1 and Expansion 2 Each shelf contains its own power supply 1 00 Basic Shelf Basic Shelf is always required and it can be equipped with up to 192 lines including Extension and CO lines The basic shelf includes top cover and base shelf The following figure s...

Page 60: ...ower Switch Turns ON and OFF the Power of Whole Unit 13 Ground Wire Connector GND 14 Base Front Panel 15 LED Cable 16 LED Cable Connector Connects the LED Cable 17 Side Panel Right 18 Flat Cable Connector Connects the Flat Cable from Expansion Shelf 19 Cable Opening 20 Base Board 21 Fan Cable 1 01 Basic Shelf Assembly PO WER ON 1 FU SE OFF DIG ITA L SU PE R HY BR ID SY ST EM RU N OF F LIN E AL AR ...

Page 61: ...ion Shelf 1 on the Basic Shelf The 2 Shelf system can be equipped with up to 416 lines including extensions and CO lines The following figure shows a 2 Shelf System composed of a basic shelf and an expansion shelf POWER ON 1 FUSE OFF POWER ON 1 FUSE OFF DIGITAL SU PE R HYB RID SY ST EM RUN OFF LINE AL AR M 2 B 3 ...

Page 62: ...cts the Battery Adapter Cable 6 Fuse 7 Power Supply Cable 8 Front Panel 9 LED Cable Connector Connects the LED Cable 10 Side Panel Right 11 Flat Cable 12 Cable Opening 2 01 Expansion Shelf Assembly PO WER ON 1 FU SE OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Note The construction of Expansion Shelf 1 and Expansion Shelf 2 is identical to each other 2 B 4 ...

Page 63: ...elf Removing the Top Cover 1 LED cable LED cable connector Screws Screws PO WER ON 1 FU SE OFF DIG ITA L SU PE R HY BR ID SY ST EM RU N OF F LIN E AL AR M 2 1 Disconnect the LED cable on the top cover from the LED cable connector on the basic shelf 2 Remove the top cover by loosening the four screws Top cover 2 B 5 ...

Page 64: ...osening the four screws Screws Screws Screws Screws Guides 2 B 6 Expansion Shelf Front Panel 1 Rotate the key on the front panel counterclockwise to unlock 2 Open the front panel toward you at right angles to the expansion shelf 3 Remove the front panel by lifting it straight up PO WER ON 1 FU SE OFF PO WER ON 1 FU SE OFF 1 3 2 ...

Page 65: ... holes of the expansion shelf exactly on the holes of the basic shelf PO WER ON 1 FU SE OFF PO WER ON 1 FU SE OFF 2 When the holes are placed properly fix them with the three screws immediately to prevent the expansion shelf from falling down Screws Note If the system is to be expanded to 3 Shelf System proceed to Section 2 B 3 00 Expansion to 3 Shelf System 2 B 7 ...

Page 66: ...Note You need to remove this part before stacking 2 or 3 shelf on the basic shelf 2 B 8 2 04 Removing a Part of the Top Cover 1 Remove the part which is located on the back side of the top cover ...

Page 67: ...nsion shelf Note Before installing the top cover remove a screw as shown in the illustration above Otherwise the top cover cannot be installed properly This screw is necessary for installing an expansion shelf PO WER ON 1 FU SE OFF PO WER ON 1 FU SE OFF DIG ITA L SU PE R HY BR ID SY ST EM RU N OF F LIN E AL AR M 2 When the holes are placed properly fix them with the four screws immediately to prev...

Page 68: ...D cable on the top cover into the LED cable connector on the expansion shelf 2 Plug the flat cable on the expansion shelf into the flat cable connector on the basic shelf PO WER ON 1 FU SE OFF PO WER ON 1 FU SE OFF DIG ITA L SU PE R HY BR ID SY ST EM RU N OF F LIN E AL AR M POWER ON 1 FUSE OFF Power Supply Cable Plug the power supply cable into the power supply cable connector AC OUT 2 Top cover E...

Page 69: ...System remove the front panel and side panels from Expansion Shelf 2 following the procedures described in Section 2 B 2 00 Expansion to 2 Shelf System If a part of the top cover is not removed it is necessary to remove the part of the top cover just like the 2 Shelf System Refer to Section 2 B 2 04 Removing a Part of the Top Cover The figure below shows a 3 Shelf System composed of a basic shelf ...

Page 70: ...Shelf System place the holes of the expansion shelf 2 exactly on the holes of the expansion shelf 1 PO WER ON 1 FU SE OF F PO WER ON 1 FU SE OF F PO WER ON 1 FU SE OF F 2 Screws When the holes are placed properly fix them with the three screws immediately to prevent the expansion shelf 2 from falling down 3 01 Stacking on the 2 Shelf System 2 B 12 ...

Page 71: ...Remove the part which is located on the back side of the top cover Remove the plastic cover on the back cover of the Expansion Shelf 2 Note Remove these parts before stacking the Expansion Shelf 2 and 3 Note Do not remove the plastic cover of the Expansion Shelf 1 ...

Page 72: ...he holes of the top cover exactly on the holes of the expansion shelf 2 PO WER ON 1 FU SE OF F PO WER ON 1 FU SE OF F PO WER ON 1 FU SE OF F DIG ITA L SUP ER HYB RID SYS TEM RU N OFF LIN E ALA RM 2 Screws Screws When the holes are placed properly fix them with the four screws immediately to prevent the top cover from falling down 3 03 Installation of Top Cover 2 B 14 ...

Page 73: ...PE R HY BR ID SY ST EM RU N OF F LIN E AL AR M LED Cable Flat Cable LED cable Flat cable Flat cable connector 1 Plug the LED cable on the top cover into the LED cable connector on the expansion shelf 2 2 Plug the flat cable on the expansion shelf 2 into the flat cable connector on the basic shelf 2 B 15 ...

Page 74: ...PE R HY BR ID SY ST EM RU N OF F LIN E AL AR M POWER ON 1 FUSE OFF Power Supply Cable Plug the power supply cable on the Expansion Shelf 2 into the power supply cable connector AC OUT 3 Top cover Expansion shelf 2 Expansion shelf 1 Basic shelf Base shelf Power supply cable 2 B 16 ...

Page 75: ...Y BR ID SY ST EM RU N OF F LIN E AL AR M GROUND 4 00 Ground Wiring IMPORTANT Make sure to connect the frame of the KX TD500 system to the earth ground properly to protect the unit Connect the ground wire to the ground wire connector GND 2 B 17 ...

Page 76: ...n fixing the KX TD500 System to the floor anchor plugs should always be used to prevent the system from falling down 1 4 32 inch Anchor plug Hammer Hole 8 32 inch 5 00 Fixing on the Floor 5 01 Setting Out and Drilling 14 31 32 Basic system 26 25 32 2 Shelf system 40 3 Shelf system 1 3 8 12 14 32 A 10 10 32 2 2 32 13 5 32 1 10 32 2 4 32 2 4 32 11 12 32 2 B 18 ...

Page 77: ...re Fasten each hardware with four screws 3 Fix the shelf securely to the floor using screws and flat washers Screw Washer Anchor plug Latch Hole 2 Position the shelf on the floor Check alignment and level of the shelf POWER ON 1 FU SE OFF DIG ITA L SU PE R HY BR ID SY ST EM RU N OF F LIN E AL AR M 2 B 19 ...

Page 78: ......

Page 79: ...on shelf 1 P O W E R F S 1 F S 2 F S 3 F S 4 F S 5 F S 6 F S 7 F S 8 F S 9 F S 10 F S 11 F S 12 F S 13 F S 14 Basic shelf P O W E R F S 1 F S 2 F S 3 F S 4 F S 5 F S 6 F S 7 F S 8 F S 9 F S 10 F S 11 F S 12 B S 1 B S 2 Name POWER for Power Unit BS1 Basic Slot 1 for CPU card BS2 Basic Slot 2 for TSW card FS1 to 12 Free Slot 1 to 12 for optional service card Number 1 1 1 12 No 1 2 3 4 Basic shelf Ex...

Page 80: ...mponents side to the right along with the upper and lower guide rails Press the upper and lower latch firmly until the upper latch is located inside of the shelf See Fig 2 and Fig 3 Please do not touch the components side of the service card 3 After installing the service cards attach the Guide Plate to the upper front side of the basic shelf and expansion shelf 1 and 2 if provided with five screw...

Page 81: ...US 2 Music source Selector Switch This card is already inserted at the factory in the TSW in the Basic shelf Music Source Selector Switch INT MUS Set when using the internal music source MUS 2 Set when using the external music source TSW is marked 2 03 Power Unit POWER ON I FUSE OFF O Power unit is already inserted at the factory in the POWER in the Basic shelf and the Expansion shelf 1 2 ...

Page 82: ...Connection to the TSW card KX TD50104 TSW CONF 50 pin connector Make sure the card is in the correct direction 56 pin connector Jack TSW Card TSW Conference Card 1 Insert the 30 pin connector plug on the TSW CONF card into the 30 pin connector jack on the TSW card 2 Install the TSW card into the Basic Slot 2 BS2 See page 2 C 3 2 C 4 56 pin connector Plug 50 pin connector ...

Page 83: ...o the TSW card KX TD50105 DOHCA 36 pin connector Plug Make sure the card is in the correct direction 40 pin connector Jack TSW Card KX TD50105 DOHCA The OHCA function with DPITS needs this card The OHCA function with DPITS is provided with the KX T7235 only TSW OHCA Card 40 pin connector 36 pin connector Jack ...

Page 84: ...nnector plug 9 pin connector jack 5 pin connector jack 4 pin connector jack HLC card OHCA card 1 Insert the connector plug on the OHCA card into the connector jack on the PLC card 2 Install the HLC card into a free slot See page 2 C 20 Two extensions are available for the OHCA function with one OHCA card Refer to page 2 C 8 The OHCA function is provided with the following PITS telephones only KX T...

Page 85: ...hat the extensions which use OHCA function have OHCA cards 2 Insert the connector plug on the OHCA card into the connector jack on the PLC card 3 Install the PLC card to a free slot See page 2 C 22 Two extensions are available for the OHCA function with one OHCA card Refer to page 2 C 8 The OHCA function is provided with the following PITS telephones only KX T123235 KX T123230D or KX T7130 2 C 7 ...

Page 86: ...U BLU BLK BLK ORN ORN BLK BLK GRN GRN BLK BLK BRN BRN BLK BLK SLT SLT BLK YEL BLU BLU YEL YEL ORN ORN YEL YEL GRN GRN YEL YEL BRN BRN YEL YEL SLT SLT YEL VIO BLU BLU VIO VIO ORN ORN VIO VIO GRN GRN VIO VIO BRN BRN VIO VIO SLT SLT VIO CLIP NO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 NO 1 NO 2 NO 3 NO...

Page 87: ...ce of the Attendant Console line cord 2 conductor wiring 26 AWG Under 680 feet 24 AWG Under 1130 feet 22 AWG Under 1770 feet 2 Connection to the Attendant Console KX T96300 Use 2 conductor wiring cord ATLC Card KX T96141 Insert the modular plug of the Attendant Console line cord 2 conductor wiring into the modular jack on the ATLC card Attendant Console KX T96300 2 C 9 ...

Page 88: ...G ITAL SUP ER HYB RID SYS TEM RUN OFF LINE ALA RM Panasonic Panasonic Door Opener 1 Maximum cabling distance of the Doorphone and the Door Opener line 26 AWG Under 230 feet 24 AWG Under 370 feet 22 AWG Under 590 feet Doorphone 2 C 10 26 AWG Under 230 feet 24 AWG Under 370 feet 22 AWG Under 590 feet ...

Page 89: ...ccording to your wall type See the followings 2 Installation of the Doorphone KX T30865 When the doorphone plate has been fixed to the wall When you wish to install the doorphone directly to the wall 3 Connect the wires from the terminal box to the screws located in the front cover 4 Secure both halves together and re install the screw To the terminal box See page 2 C 12 2 C 11 ...

Page 90: ...e terminal box 1 4 Connect the wires of doorphone 3 to the red and green screws of the terminal box 2 5 Connect the wires of doorphone 4 to the yellow and black screws of the terminal box 2 3 Wiring of the Doorphone Terminal Box 1 YELLOW RED BLACK GREEN Terminal Box 2 Doorphone 1 KX T30865 4 conductor wiring is required 4 conductor wiring is required Doorphone 3 KX T30865 Doorphone 4 KX T30865 KX ...

Page 91: ...one 2 door opener 2 doorphone 3 door opener 3 doorphone 4 door opener 4 Paired Paired Paired Paired Set the door opener paired with the doorphone Only the telephone which received the doorphone call and in conversation can open the door using door opener System program determines the telephones that can receive the doorphone calls and use the door opener 2 C 13 ...

Page 92: ...ITA L SU PE R HY BR ID SY ST EM RU N OF F LIN E AL AR M 25 50 1 26 Connector type 50 pin Amphenol 57JE series or the equivalent To Extensions Insert the 50 pin connector plug of the extension line cord into the 50 pin connector jack on the DHLC card Refer to the Installation of the Amphenol 57JE series on page 2 C 40 2 Connection of cable pins See page 2 C 27 2 C 14 ...

Page 93: ...one DPITS or APITS Single Line Telephone 26 AWG Under 460 feet 24 AWG Under 750 feet 22 AWG Under 1180 feet 26 AWG Under 460 feet 24 AWG Under 750 feet 22 AWG Under 1180 feet 26 AWG Under 2290 feet 24 AWG Under 3700 feet 22 AWG Under 5900 feet 4 Auxiliary connection Refer to the section 2 C 5 00 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer 2 C 15 ...

Page 94: ...onnector jack on the DLC card Refer to the Installation of the Amphenol 57JE series on page 2 C 40 2 Connection of cable pins See page 2 C 28 1 Connection of the extension line cord POWER ON 1 FU SE OFF DIG ITA L SU PE R HY BR ID SY ST EM RU N OF F LIN E AL AR M 25 50 1 26 Connector type Connector type 50 pin Amphenol 57JE series or the equivalent To Extensions 2 C 16 50172 ...

Page 95: ...IGI TAL 3 Maximum cabling distance of the extension line cord twisted cable DSS Console 26 AWG Under 460 feet 24 AWG Under 750 feet 22 AWG Under 1180 feet 26 AWG Under 460 feet 24 AWG Under 750 feet 22 AWG Under 1180 feet Digital Proprietary Telephone DPITS 2 C 17 ...

Page 96: ...in connector jack on the ESLC card Refer to the Installation of the Amphenol 57JE series on page 2 C 40 2 Connection of cable pins See page 2 C 29 1 Connection of the extension line cord POWER ON 1 FU SE OFF DIG ITA L SU PE R HY BR ID SY ST EM RU N OF F LIN E AL AR M 25 50 1 26 Connector type Connector type 50 pin Amphenol 57JE series or the equivalent To Extensions 2 C 18 ...

Page 97: ...mum cabling distance of the extension line cord twisted cable Single Line Telephone 26 AWG Under 2290 feet 24 AWG Under 3700 feet 22 AWG Under 5900 feet 4 Auxiliary connection Refer to the section 2 C 5 00 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer 2 C 19 ...

Page 98: ...ard KX T96170 KX T96170 PUSH HLC HLC HLC is marked Insert this card into a free slot 1 Connection of the extension line cord To Extensions Insert the 50 pin connector plug of the extension line cord into the 50 pin connector jack on the HLC card Refer to the Installation of the Amphenol 57JE series on page 2 C 40 2 Connection of cable pins See page 2 C 27 2 C 20 ...

Page 99: ...y Telephone Single Line Telephone 26 AWG Under 460 feet 24 AWG Under 750 feet 22 AWG Under 1180 feet 26 AWG Under 460 feet 24 AWG Under 750 feet 22 AWG Under 1180 feet 26 AWG Under 2290 feet 24 AWG Under 3700 feet 22 AWG Under 5900 feet 4 Auxiliary connection Refer to the section 2 C 5 00 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer 2 C 21 ...

Page 100: ... connector jack on the PLC card Refer to the Installation of the Amphenol 57JE series on page 2 C 40 2 Connection of cable pins See page 2 C 27 1 Connection of the extension line cord POWER ON 1 FU SE OFF DIG ITA L SU PE R HY BR ID SY ST EM RU N OF F LIN E AL AR M 25 50 1 26 Connector type Connector type 50 pin Amphenol 57JE series or the equivalent To Extensions 2 C 22 ...

Page 101: ...LA RM 3 Maximum cabling distance of the extension line cord twisted cable DSS Console 26 AWG Under 460 feet 24 AWG Under 750 feet 22 AWG Under 1180 feet 26 AWG Under 460 feet 24 AWG Under 750 feet 22 AWG Under 1180 feet Proprietary Telephone 2 C 23 ...

Page 102: ... connector jack on the SLC card Refer to the Installation of the Amphenol 57JE series on page 2 C 40 2 Connection of cable pins See page 2 C 27 1 Connection of the extension line cord POWER ON 1 FU SE OFF DIG ITA L SU PE R HY BR ID SY ST EM RU N OF F LIN E AL AR M 25 50 1 26 Connector type Connector type 50 pin Amphenol 57JE series or the equivalent To Extensions 2 C 24 ...

Page 103: ...ted cable DIG ITAL SUP ER HYB RID SYS TEM RUN OFF LINE ALA RM Single Line Telephone 26 AWG Under 2290 feet 24 AWG Under 3700 feet 22 AWG Under 5900 feet 4 Auxiliary connection Refer to the section 2 C 5 00 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer 2 C 25 ...

Page 104: ...ID SY ST EM RU N OF F LIN E AL AR M 25 50 1 26 Connector type 50 pin Amphenol 57JE series or the equivalent KX A204 Cable 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 IN OUT IN OUT OUT IN 1 2 3 4 C C continuous There are fi...

Page 105: ...lack Yellow White Blue 1 2 3 4 5 6 Line cord Bridging Clips Station wiring 3 pair twisted cabling 1 Cable Pin Numbers to be connected HLC PLC SLC DHLC Card Between Clip Terminal and the system Conn Pin 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 34 9 35 10 36 11 37 12 38 13 39 14 40 15 41 16 42 17 43 18 44 19 45 20 46 21 47 22 48 23 49 24 50 25 Cable Color ORN RED ORN BLK YEL RED YEL BLK GRN RED GRN B...

Page 106: ... 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 C C C C C C C C C C No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 No 5 No 6 No 7 No 8 No 9 No 10 No 11 No 12 No 13 No 14 No 15 No 16 D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2 Extension C continuous Conn Pin 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 34 9 35 10 36 11 37 12 38 13 39 14 40 15 41 16 42 17 43 18 44 19 45 20 46 21 47 22 48 23 49 24 50 25 Cab...

Page 107: ... 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 C C C C C C C C C C No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 No 5 No 6 No 7 No 8 No 9 No 10 No 11 No 12 No 13 No 14 No 15 No 16 T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R Extension C continuous Conn Pin 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 34 9 35 10 36 11 37 12 38 13 39 14 40 15 41 16 42 17 43 18 44 19 45 20 46 21 47 22 48 23 49 24 50 25 Cab...

Page 108: ... Telephone T R Working Not working DSS Console D1 D2 APITS without OHCA D1 T R D2 APITS with OHCA KX T123230D KX T123235 and KX T7130 only P1 D1 T R D2 P2 DPITS without XDP D1 D2 DPITS with XDP D1 T R D2 Working pins for the various telephones or DSS consoles are shown below The line of pin no 26 ORN RED The line of pin no 25 WHT BLK orange line red black white line T R ...

Page 109: ... of the Amphenol 57JE series on page 2 C 40 2 Connection of cable pins See page 2 C 36 3 Auxiliary connection Refer to the section 2 C 5 00 Auxiliary Connection for Power Faillure Transfer 1 Connection of the Central Office Line cord twisted cable POWER ON 1 FU SE OFF DIG ITA L SU PE R HY BR ID SY ST EM RU N OF F LIN E AL AR M 25 50 1 26 Connector type 50 pin Amphenol 57JE series or the equivalent...

Page 110: ... of the Amphenol 57JE series on page 2 C 40 2 Connection of cable pins See page 2 C 38 3 Auxiliary connection Refer to the section 2 C 5 00 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer 1 Connection of the Central Office Line cord twisted cable POWER ON 1 FU SE OFF DIG ITA L SU PE R HY BR ID SY ST EM RU N OF F LIN E AL AR M 25 50 1 26 Connector type Connector type 50 pin Amphenol 57JE series or ...

Page 111: ... of the Amphenol 57JE series on page 2 C 40 2 Connection of cable pins See page 2 C 36 3 Auxiliary connection Refer to the section 2 C 5 00 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer 1 Connection of the Central Office Line cord twisted cable POWER ON 1 FU SE OFF DIG ITA L SU PE R HY BR ID SY ST EM RU N OF F LIN E AL AR M 25 50 1 26 Connector type Connector type 50 pin Amphenol 57JE series or ...

Page 112: ... Amphenol 57JE series on page 2 C 40 2 Connection of cable pins See page 2 C 36 3 Auxiliary connection Refer to the section 2 C 5 00 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer 1 Connection of the Central Office Line cord twisted cable POWER ON 1 FU SE OFF DIG ITA L SU PE R HY BR ID SY ST EM RU N OF F LIN E AL AR M 25 50 1 26 Connector type Connector type 50 pin Amphenol 57JE series or the equ...

Page 113: ... L SU PE R HY BR ID SY ST EM RU N OF F LIN E AL AR M 25 50 1 26 Connector type 50 pin Amphenol 57JE series or the equivalent 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 IN OUT IN OUT OUT IN 1 2 3 4 C C continuous There are...

Page 114: ...WHT ORN ORN WHT WHT GRN GRN WHT WHT BRN BRN WHT WHT SLT SLT WHT RED BLU BLU RED RED ORN ORN RED RED GRN GRN RED RED BRN BRN RED RED SLT SLT RED BLK BLU BLU BLK BLK ORN ORN BLK BLK GRN GRN BLK BLK BRN BRN BLK BLK SLT SLT BLK YEL BLU BLU YEL YEL ORN ORN YEL YEL GRN GRN YEL YEL BRN BRN YEL YEL SLT SLT YEL VIO BLU BLU VIO VIO ORN ORN VIO VIO GRN GRN VIO VIO BRN BRN VIO VIO SLT SLT VIO CLIP NO 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 115: ...ntinuous There are 5 kinds of dot for lines You can distinguish a line by the number of dot and the color KX A204 Cable 50 lines Chip no KX A205 Chip Terminal To Terminal Board from the Central Office CO KX A204 Cable LCOT Card KX T96180 2 C 37 This KX A204 cable enables you to connect 8 Central office lines to the KX TD500 System Please connect KX A204 Cable to KX A205 Clip Terminal as follows Re...

Page 116: ... ORN BLK YEL RED YEL BLK GRN RED GRN BLK GRY RED GRY BLK WHT RED WHT BLK ORN RED ORN BLK YEL RED YEL BLK GRN RED GRN BLK GRY RED GRY BLK WHT RED WHT BLK ORN RED ORN BLK YEL RED YEL BLK GRN RED GRN BLK GRY RED GRY BLK WHT RED WHT BLK Clip No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Number of Dot 1 1 ...

Page 117: ...4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 C C C C C C C C C C CO Line NO 1 NO 2 NO 3 NO 4 NO 5 NO 6 NO 7 NO 8 C continuous CONN PIN 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 34 9 35 10 36 11 37 12 38 13 39 14 40 15 41 16 42 17 43 18 44 19 45 20 46 21 47 22 48 23 49 24 50 25 CABLE COLOR WHT BLU BLU WHT WHT ORN ORN WHT WHT GRN GRN WHT WHT BRN BRN WHT WHT SLT SLT WHT RED BLU BLU RED RED ORN ORN RED RED GRN GRN RED RED BRN B...

Page 118: ... the accessory Screw at the upper part and fasten the accessory Wire Tie around the lower hook pin and the Amphenol 57JE type as shown Accessary Screw 57JE type Accessary Wire Tie Accessary Wire Tie Accessary Screw 50 pin connector Accessary Screw Amphenol 57JE tyoe Hook pin Hook pin 50 pin connector Amphenol 57JE type When connecting a connector of the type shown below unscrew the lower hook pin ...

Page 119: ... To Terminal Board or Modular Jacks from the Central Office CO Use 2 conductor wiring cord DID Card KX T96182 3 16 DID Card KX T96182 KX T96182 PUSH DD DD DID is marked Insert this card into a free slot The DID port No 4 is equipped with H and L leads as well as A wire and B wire However please be sure to use 2 conductor wiring cord for connection Make sure to connect the frame of the KX TD500 Sys...

Page 120: ...al Board or Modular Jacks from the Central Office CO Use 2 conductor wiring cord DID 2W Card KX T96182D 3 17 DID 2W Card KX T96182D KX T96182D PUSH DID 2W DID 2W DID 2W is marked Insert this card into a free slot The DID port No 4 is equipped with H and L leads as well as A wire and B wire However please be sure to use 2 conductor wiring cord for connection Make sure to connect the frame of the KX...

Page 121: ...oard or Modular Jacks from the Central Office CO Use 2 conductor wiring cord DID MFC Card KX T96182CE 3 18 DID MFC Card KX T96182CE KX T96182CE PUSH DID MFC DID MFC DID MFC is marked Insert this card into a free slot The DID port No 4 is equipped with H and L leads as well as A wire and B wire However please be sure to use 2 conductor wiring cord for connection Make sure to connect the frame of th...

Page 122: ... on the OPX card 22 AWG Under 6 miles Use 2 conductor wiring cord OPX Card R T R Ring T Tip View of TEL Jack CO OPX Port No 1 OPX Port No 2 OPX Port No 3 OPX Port No 4 R T R Ring T Tip View of TEL Jack CO 2 Connection to public lines Insert the modular plug of the Single Line Telephone Line cord 2 conductor wiring into the modular jack on the OPX card Use 2 conductor wiring cord OPX Card OPX Centr...

Page 123: ...round properly to protect the unit 3 Check the Voltage Selector if it is set to your household AC voltage If not reset the Voltage Selector to the correct position with a screwdriver There is no Voltage Selector for some countries The correct voltage is already set 4 Plug in the AC Power cord from the OPX Power Unit 5 Turn on the Power Switch on the OPX Power Unit The Power indicator will be lit P...

Page 124: ...DISA DISA DISA is marked Insert this card into a free slot KX T96193 PUSH AGC AGC 3 21 AGC Card KX T96193 AGC is marked Insert this card into a free slot 3 22 RMT Card KX T96196 KX T96196 PUSH RMT RMT RMT is marked Insert this card into a free slot ...

Page 125: ...ÒE MÓ is marked 1 Connection of the E M Line cord twisted cable To Terminal Board from the E M Line Connect the ground wire to the ground wire connector GND Insert the 50 pin connector plug of the E M Line cord twisted cable into the 50 pin connector jack on the E M card Refer to the Installation of the Amphenol 57JE series on page 2 C 40 2 Connection of cable pins See pages 2 C 49 and 2 C 50 3 23...

Page 126: ... 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 NO 1 NO 2 NO 3 NO 4 T 2 wire or 4 wire send R T1 4 wire receive R1 E Lead SG Lead SB Lead M1 Lead No connect M Lead only for Type 5 T 2 wire or 4 wire send R T1 4 wire receive R1 E Lead SG Lead SB Lead M1 Lead No connect M Lead only for T...

Page 127: ...2 C 49 Cable Pin Numbers to be connected E M Line E M Line Wiring 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 31 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12 50 pin Connector Block Terminal E M Line 1 Bridging Clips ...

Page 128: ...R E M 48V 48V GROUND GROUND Voice Transmit Voice Receive Voice Transmit Voice Receive Connection to another KX TD500 system KX T96184 12 wire voice path KX T96184 Another KX T96184 KX T96184 Another KX T96184 24 wire voice path Connection to E M Central Office KX T96184 E M Central Office KX T96184 E M Central Office ...

Page 129: ...9 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 IN OUT IN OUT OUT IN 1 2 3 4 C C continuous There are 5 kinds of dots for lines You can distinguish a line by the number of dots and the color KX A204 Cable 50 lines Clip no KX A205 Clip Terminal To Terminal Board from the E M line K...

Page 130: ... 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 NO 1 NO 2 NO 3 NO 4 T 2 wire or 4 wire send R T1 4 wire receive R1 E Lead SG Lead SB Lead M1 Lead No connect M Lead only for Type 5 T 2 wire or 4 wire send R T1 4 wire receive R1 E Lead SG Lead SB Lead M1 Lead No connect M Lead only for T...

Page 131: ...sconnect Wink E Wire M Wire if you select Immediate this signal would not appear Hard switch 1 Continuous E M Wink Immediate 2 Pulsed E M with Answer signal Wink 3 Pulsed E M without Answer signal Wink Reserved 1 Continuous E M O F F 1 2 3 KX T96184 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OF OFF OFF OFF ...

Page 132: ... Wire M Wire Seize Dial Answer Disconnect ACK E Wire M Wire 2 Pulsed E M with Answer signal If you select this sequence you must select Wink as a start type 3 Pulsed E M without Answer signal If you select this sequence you must select Wink as a start type ...

Page 133: ... T96187 T 1 Digital Trunk card KX T96187 Use 4 conductor wiring cord 22AWG Under 10m 24AWG Under 10m To Channel Service Unit CSU or Other KX T96187 The installer must provide a CSU to connect the T 1 line to the KX T96187 Cable Pin Numbers to be connected KX T96187 Channel Service Unit CSU KX T96187 KX T96187 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 R T R1 T1 Transmit lead pair Receive lead pair CSU Receive lead pair R1 T...

Page 134: ...ds 2 coaxial cables into the coaxial jack E 1 port on the KX T96188 E 1 Digital Trunk card KX T96188 Use coaxial cables Under 10m Coaxial Connectors from the Central Office CO Connecting central office line and E 1 card KX T96188 Network Terminal CO KX T96188 KX T96188 Transmit lead Receive lead Receive lead Transmit lead Receive lead Transmit lead Receive lead Transmit lead 8 Pin Modular jack on ...

Page 135: ...T7130 KX T30820 KX T30830 KX T30850 KX T61620 KX T61630 KX T61650 KX T123220 KX T123230 KX T123230D KX T123235 KX T123250 Note The 6 conductor wiring cord and the Modular T Adaptor KX J36 are required when one of the following PITS telephones is used for parallel connection KX T7130 KX T123230D and KX T123235 Not only a Single Line Telephone but an answering machine a facsimile or a modem personal...

Page 136: ... wiring cord 2 conductor wiring cord To DHLC card Single Line Telephone Proprietary Telephone Panasonic KX J66 or USOC RJA2X KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7250 2 Connection with XDP port To EMSS To TEL Panasonic DIG ITA L To DHLC card 2 C 58 4 conductor wiring cord 2 conductor wiring cord 4 conductor wiring cord 2 conductor wiring cord To DHLC card To SLT Proprietary Telephone KX T7220 KX T7230 K...

Page 137: ...he current connection to the Auxiliary connection automatically when the power supply stops While the DC power is available by the backup batteries even if the AC power fails KX TD500 System does not change the current connection to the Auxiliary connection Modular Jack 1 Modular Jack 2 Modular Jack 3 T3T2T1 R1R2R3 Tn Tip Rn Ring Modular plug Extension option card SLC HLC DHLC ESLC MSLC 1 Connecti...

Page 138: ... 43 18 44 19 45 20 46 21 47 22 48 23 49 24 50 25 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 34 9 35 10 36 11 37 12 38 13 39 14 40 15 41 16 42 17 43 18 44 19 45 20 46 21 47 22 48 23 49 24 50 25 Modual Jack 1 Modual Jack 2 Modual Jack 3 2 Connection of Central Office Line and Extensions 50 pin Connector Central Office Line cards Extension cards 50 pin Connector 2 C 60 ...

Page 139: ...LIN E AL AR M 1 Connection of KX A46 2 Connection of KX A46DX 6 00 Connection of the Battery Adaptor KX A46 or KX A46DX 2 C 61 PO WER ON 1 FU SE OFF DIG ITA L SU PE R HY BR ID SY ST EM RU N OF F LIN E AL AR M POWER TELEKOMMUNIKATIONSANLAGE To car batteries To AC outlet ...

Page 140: ...and wires To connect the two batteries use accessory wire POWER ON FUSE OFF 5 Connecting to KX TD500 Backup Battery Connector Power Unit Plug the Battery Adaptor cord to Backup Battery connector on the Basic Shelf 2 C 62 4 Connection of battery of KX A46DX Battery Adaptor A46 Car batteries Red Yellow 12VDC 12VDC Fuse Holder Blue Accessory Wire Battery Adaptor Fuse Holder 1 Fuse Holder 2 Car batter...

Page 141: ... respectively via Battery Adaptor KX A46 2 C 63 6 When one or two Expansion Shelves KX TD500 are installed connect another Battery Adaptor KX A46 or KX A46DX with automobile type batteries 12V DC 2 following the same procedures from 1 to 5 PO WER ON 1 FU SE OF F PO WER ON 1 FU SE OF F PO WER ON 1 FU SE OF F DIG ITA L SUP ER HYB RID SYS TEM RUN OFF LIN E ALA RM Automobile type batteries 24V DC KX A...

Page 142: ... the power to each shelf Basic Expansion 1 2 connected respectively via Battery Adaptor PO WER ON 1 FU SE OF F PO WER ON 1 FU SE OF F PO WER ON 1 FU SE OF F DIG ITA L SUP ER HYB RID SYS TEM RUN OFF LIN E ALA RM POWER TELEKOMMUNIKATIONSANLAGE POWER TELEKOMMUNIKATIONSANLAGE POWER TELEKOMMUNIKATIONSANLAGE Automobile type batteries 24V DC KX A46DX To AC outlet ...

Page 143: ...t Up to two paging equipments customer supplied can be connected to the system as illustrated below Amplifier Amplifier Speaker Speaker Paging equipment 1 Paging equipment 2 EPG1 VOL1 EPG2 VOL2 TSW Card Paging jack 1 Paging jack 2 Use an RCA connector Output impedance 600Ω ...

Page 144: ...US MUS1 MUS2 MUS 2 INT TSW Card EXT MUSIC Jack 1 EXT MUSIC Jack 2 Use a two conductor plug 9 64 inch in diameter Input impedance 8Ω Music Source Selector Switch MUS 2 Set when using the external music source INT MUS Set when using the internal music source For the assignment of external Music Source 1 or 2 and an internal Music Source refer to 10 D 1 01 System Operation 1 3 and 10 F 2 00 Trunk Pag...

Page 145: ...he system and customer supplied devices such as data terminals and line printers RS 232C Port 1 PROG is used for system programming diagnostics and external system database storage Save Load functions and Port 2 SMDR for Station Message Detailed Recording SMDR only DIG ITA L SUP ER HYB RID SYS TEM RU N OFF LIN E ALA RM PROG SMDR ...

Page 146: ... RTS output This lead is held ON whenever DSR is ON Clear To Send CTS input The ON condition of circuit CTS indicates that the printer is ready to receive data from the unit The unit does not attempt to transfer data or receive data when circuit CTS is OFF Data Set Ready DSR input The ON condition of circuit DSR indicates the printer is ready Circuit DSR ON does not indicate that communication has...

Page 147: ...tion Chart DIG ITA L SUP ER HYB RID SYS TEM RU N OFF LIN E ALA RM Circuit Type EIA AA BA BB CC AB CD Single Name FG TXD RXD DSR SG DTR Pin No 1 2 3 6 7 20 Circuit Type EIA AA BB BA CD AB CB CC CF Single Name FG RXD TXD DTR SG CTS DSR DCD Pin No 1 3 2 20 7 5 6 8 RS 232C SMDR port on the Basic Shelf RS 232C port on the printer Serial Interface RS 232C Serial Printer ...

Page 148: ...ter Transmit XON XOFF on the Data Terminal must be set to YES For further details see the Operating Instructions of the Data Terminal DIG ITA L SUP ER HYB RID SYS TEM RU N OFF LIN E ALA RM Circuit Type EIA AA BB BA CB CA CD AB CC Single Name FG RXD TXD CTS RTS DTR SG DSR Pin No 1 3 2 5 4 20 7 6 Circuit Type EIA AA BA BB CA CB CC AB CD Single Name FG TXD RXD RTS CTS DSR SG DTR Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ...

Page 149: ...ation of Attendant Console Base unit Keyboard Option CRT unit AC power cord Reset button Jack for attendant console line cord 1 00 Configuration 1 Front View 2 Rear View Handset Handset cord Keyboard cord To AC outlet ...

Page 150: ...2 E 2 Ringer volume selector Handset Headset volume control knob Local switch Jack for handset cord 3 Left Side View Power Switch 4 Right Side View Jack for handset cord ...

Page 151: ...errite core Keyboard Option Attendant Console Line cord 2 conductor wiring Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Ferrite core CRT unit Brightness adjustment knob CRT unit cord Plug for connection Plug for connecting the CRT unit is connected here Base unit Keyboard Option Power indicator Handset Speaker Handset cord Keyboard cord ...

Page 152: ...ANDSET either right side or left side of the base unit 2 Plug the other end of the coiled cord into the handset and then hang up You can use either of the right and left jacks 3 00 Handset Connection Base unit Jack Plug Plug Handset cord Jack Plug Plug Handset cord ...

Page 153: ...ure to attach the Ferrite core to the CRT unit cord as shown in the figure below Opening the Ferrite core CRT unit Plug Connect so that the arrows face each other Ferrite core Base unit 2 Plug the CRT unit cord into the connector CRT CONNECTOR on the base unit Attaching the Ferrite core to the CRT unit cord Ferrite core Connector ...

Page 154: ...ront surface of the CRT unit to the two female components at the top front surface of the base unit Base unit Ferrite core CRT unit Male component Female component 4 Set rear portion of the CRT unit slowly onto the base unit until the stop fixture holds the CRT unit securely ...

Page 155: ...al Confirm that the AC power cord has been removed 1 Press the stop fixture toward you and hold it pressed then lift up the rear portion of the CRT unit 2 Unplug the CRT unit cord from the base unit connector Stop fixture Press ...

Page 156: ...ug securely with the cord clamper 3 Stand Stands are attached to the bottom of the keyboard so that the keyboard incline can be adjusted Set the stands for maximum ease in key operation Plug Jack Plug Keyboard KX T96145 Cord clamper To disconnect the plug pull the plug while keeping the hook pushed Base unit bottom panel KYEBOARD CONNECTOR Hook ...

Page 157: ...n with KX TD500 System KX TD500 System Insert the modular plug of the attendant console line cord 2 conductor wiring into the modular jack TO ATLC on the base unit For connection on the KX TD500 System side see page 2 C 9 ...

Page 158: ...ug to insert or remove the AC power cord Do not insert or remove the AC power cord with a wet hand Do not forcefully twist or pull on the AC power cord and do not leave it only partially inserted When connecting the AC power cord be sure to always establish ground wiring 2 Power switch Turn on the power switch The power indicator lights and the initial screen appears on the display AC power cord T...

Page 159: ...used to adjust the volume level of the handset and head set Adjust this volume for maximum ease in listening 3 Ringer volume adjustment Brightness adjustment knob The ringer volume selector is used to adjust the ringer volume This selector can be switched among three stages OFF LOW and HIGH Set for the most appropriate volume 8 00 Various Adjustments 1 Display brightness adjustment 2 E 11 MIN MAX ...

Page 160: ......

Page 161: ...ector on the back of the base shelf as shown below 2 Then insert the other end of the AC power cord into the AC outlet 3 Turn on the Main Power Switch on the base shelf 4 Turn on the power switch on the power unit of each expansion shelf The power indicator on the power unit will light 5 Turn on the power switch on the power unit of basic shelf Note Each shelf may be powered down individually with...

Page 162: ...CPU failure LED 2 Battery power down Enters to off line mode without initializing the data Power failure transfer status Special Operation Examination on the finished product Holds the current system programming data Assigns default values automatically and System Installation screen is displayed Installation Initializes the current system programming data and System Installation screen is display...

Page 163: ...r the system programming data will be defaulted When the system detects no errors the system executes the procedure of No 0 No 2 The system enters to on line mode after executing pattern check of RAM which has the system programming data The system programming data won t be defaulted even if RAM errors detected Then the system executes the procedure of No 0 c With System Memory The system has curr...

Page 164: ...Off line Pattern 1 Installation Password Date Time Main Menu Pattern 2 Installation Password Main Menu Pattern 3 Password Date Time Main Menu Pattern 4 Password Main Menu KX TD500 System KX TD500 System KX TD500 System KX TD500 System Patterns of Screen Display Operation Switch and Screen Display 3 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 1 2 1 Note Once you exit the System Installation screen and Date Time Set Up screen ...

Page 165: ...ed switch position if pre programmed System Administration Device is not available due to the hardware troubles or something Pre Programmed device is assigned Reserved for future expansion Functions same as 0 VT220 is assigned as the System Administration Device compulsorily Dumb is assigned as the System Administration Device compulsorily ATT1 is assigned as the System Administration Device compu...

Page 166: ...D Yes RS 232C Yes No No Attendant Console SYSTEM 4 5 4 ATT1 5 ATT2 MODE 2 Dumb mode VT mode Off line mode When system data is destroyed the system enters to off line mode On line mode No error An error is detected MODE 2 MODE 6 MODE 1 When system data is destroyed start up the system with default values MODE Operation Switch SYSTEM System Administration Device Selection Switch Confirm device assig...

Page 167: ... button END To start up the system using Panasonic KX D4930 in Dumb mode set SYSTEM switch to 3 in above sequence MODE Operation Switch SYSTEM System Administration Device Selection Switch Example The following flow chart shows the operation sequence for System Starting Up with default values using Panasonic KX D4930 in VT mode ...

Page 168: ... writing when powered on If no error detected the system continues booting to ON Line or OFF Line procedure When an error detected on CPU RAM the LED1 of CPU card brinks You need repairing of CPU card in this case SYTEM MODE RESET CPU PUSH LED1 Brinks when CPU RAM error is detected ...

Page 169: ...e are regulations requiring the installation of a lightning protector A lightning strike to a telephone cable which is 10 m 33 feet above ground can be as high as 200 000 volts This system should be installed with lightning protectors In addition grounding connection to earth ground is very important for the protection of the system 2 00 Recommended lightning protectors KX A207 TELESPIKE BLOK MODE...

Page 170: ...following precautions are recommended 1 Install the extension wire underground 2 Use a conduit to protect the wire Note The lightning protector for an extension is different from that for CO CO CO CO EXTN EXTN Ground Another Building EXTN EXTN TEL TEL Protectors Ter minal Board Main Unit Lightning Protector SLT PT ...

Page 171: ...on of the earth rod Metal 4 Depth of the earth rod More than 50 cm 20 inches 5 Size of the grounding wire Thickness is more than 16 AWG Notes The above figures are recommendations only The length of earth rod and the required depth depend on the composition of the soil Main Unit CO Lightning Protector Grounding Wire Underground Earth Rod ...

Page 172: ...he protector base and secure it to the earth terminal 3 Remove about 1 5 cm 19 32 inch of insulation from the ends of the external and internal cables then pass the cables through the rubber packing 4 Fold the external and internal cables and connect them to the terminal screws using washers 5 Secure the external and internal cables and the earth wire to the building Then install the arrester and ...

Page 173: ...Section 3 System Features and Operation ...

Page 174: ......

Page 175: ...ight Answer UNA 3 B 16 8 03 Flexible Night Service 3 B 17 8 04 Fixed Night Service 3 B 18 8 05 Switching of Day Night Mode 3 B 19 9 00 Mixed Station Capacities 3 B 20 10 00 Variable Time Out 3 B 21 11 00 Lockout 3 B 22 12 00 Automatic Station Release 3 B 22 13 00 Distinctive Dial Tone 3 B 23 14 00 Distinctive Busy Tone 3 B 24 15 00 Confirmation Tone 3 B 25 16 00 Tone and Ringing Patterns 3 B 26 C ...

Page 176: ...ssignment No Ringing 3 D 30 3 02 Flexible Ringing Assignment Delayed Ringing 3 D 30 4 00 Discriminating Ringing 3 D 31 5 00 Station Hunting 3 D 32 5 01 Station Hunting Circular 3 D 33 5 02 Station Hunting Terminate 3 D 34 5 03 Station Hunting Escape 3 D 35 5 04 Call Coverage Path 3 D 36 E Holding Features 3 E 1 1 00 Music on Hold 3 E 1 2 00 Held Call Reminder 3 E 2 3 00 Transfer Recall 3 E 3 F Oth...

Page 177: ...Timed Reminder with OGM Wake up Call 3 F 68 14 00 Tie Lines 3 F 71 14 01 Calling from Tie to Tie 3 F 76 14 02 Calling from Tie to CO 3 F 80 14 03 Calling from CO to Tie 3 F 83 14 04 Alternate Routing 3 F 86 15 00 T 1 Carrier 3 F 89 16 00 E 1 Carrier 3 F 91 17 00 Charge Management 3 F 94 17 01 Budget Management 3 F 94 17 02 Charge Fee Reference 3 F 95 18 00 Extra Device Port XDP Connection 3 F 96 1...

Page 178: ......

Page 179: ...res which are programmed at system level System features are those that affect the entire operation of the system In this section system features are divided into the following five categories Basic Features Outgoing Call Features Receiving Features Holding Features Other Features 3 A 1 ...

Page 180: ......

Page 181: ...e System Numbering Plan Programming System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Operation 1 3 Numbering Plan System Numbering Plan 11 C 4 00 11 C 11 00 10 D 1 01 10 D 6 01 to 6 11 Conditions The followings are examples of feature number conflicts Examples 2 and 21 32 and 321 etc Conversely the following numbers can be used without conflict Examples 2 and 3 3 and 41 41 and 42 450 and 451 etc and ca...

Page 182: ...ber While busy tone is heard Call back for extensions only 6 Busy Override 1 OHCA 2 BSS 3 While Do Not Disturb tone is heard DND Override 1 When handset is on hook PITS only Time display date display switching Background music on off 1 Day Night mode display While talking to doorphone Open the door 5 While calling with the Voice Calling feature Changing to the ringing mode Others Account code deli...

Page 183: ...ng System Speed Dialing Station Doorphone Call 1 4 External Paging Station Paging External Paging Answer Station Paging Answer Night Answer 1 Night Answer 2 Dial Call Pickup Directed Call Pickup Hold Extension Retrieve Redial External Feature Access Account Code Hold Hold Retrieve Call Park System Call Park Retrieve System Call Park Station Call Park Retrieve Station Call Forwarding All Call Set C...

Page 184: ... Cancel Walking Station Set Walking Station Cancel Message Set Message Cancel Station Program Clear Message Waiting Reply TIE Trunk Access Night Mode Set Night Mode Cancel Night Service Manual Mode Set Night Service Manual Mode Cancel Flexible Night Service Remote Station Lock Set Remote Station Lock Cancel Remote DND Set Remote DND Cancel Remote FWD Cancel Remote FWD Cancel One Time BGM Through E...

Page 185: ... Extension 4 Other PBX Extension 5 Other PBX Extension 6 Other PBX Extension 7 Other PBX Extension 8 Other PBX Extension 9 Other PBX Extension 10 Other PBX Extension 11 Other PBX Extension 12 Other PBX Extension 13 Other PBX Extension 14 Other PBX Extension 15 Other PBX Extension 16 Front Call 1 Front Call 2 Front Call 3 Front Call 4 Transfer Conference Fixed 1 72 73 73 691 692 Fixed 2 36 37 Defau...

Page 186: ... 4 B 3 02 SDN Button If you assign only one digit in System Numbering Plan 1st Hundred Block Extension through 16th Hundred Block Extension you can assign three digit DNs which start with the pre assigned digit in Configuration DN Assignment If you assign leading two digits in System Numbering Plan you can assign four digit DNs which start with the pre assigned two digits in Configuration DN Assig...

Page 187: ... by pressing the TRANSFER button and dialing the FDN FDN can be assigned to the followings 1 Pilot number for UCD groups 01 to 32 2 General Operator Call two FDNs can be programmed 3 Attendant Console number ATT1 ATT2 4 Remote Administration resource Programming System Programming Reference VT Dumb Special Attended UCD 1 2 FDN System Operation 1 3 FDN for General Operator Call System Operation 2 3...

Page 188: ...t 2 Customer 1 Customer 2 To enable Tenant Service set System Operation Tenant Service to Yes System Tenant programming is used to determine how the resources will be divided up between the tenants Programming Conditions The Night Mode can be operated separately for each tenant Calling to extensions in the other tenant can be enabled by setting System Tenant Inter Tenant Calling to Yes However eve...

Page 189: ...ssignment can be done in the system programming System Operation 3 3 Operator 1 and Operator 2 Operator 1 ATT Operator 2 ATT Operator 1 ATT Operator 2 extension ATT or 3 B 9 Special functions available with each operator Feature 1 Change Night Day Mode 2 Change Night Day Switching Mode Auto Man 3 Set Destination in the Night Mode Only for Flexible Night Answer Trunk 4 Pickup Group Station Lock Unl...

Page 190: ...e operator assignment whether tenant service is employed or not Operator Call The extension user can call the operator in the system by dialing the feature number for Operator Call General or Operator Call Specific For further information refer to the following PITS users Section 4 C 10 00 Operator Call SLT users Section 5 A 8 00 Operator Call Transfer The extension user can transfer a call to the...

Page 191: ...sfer a call to an outside party 7 Forced account code operation enable disable 8 BSS OHCA override operation enable disable 9 BSS OHCA deny enable disable 10 Executive Busy Override of called party enable disable 11 Executive Busy Override deny enable disable 12 Electronic Station Lockout enable disable 13 Walking Station enable disable 14 The ability to perform PITS System Programming enable disa...

Page 192: ...tion 3 B 7 02 Uniform Call Distribution UCD Group for details on UCD Groups System Programming Reference VT Dumb Extension Station 1 4 Pickup Group 11 C 24 00 10 G 1 01 7 02 Uniform Call Distribution UCD Group Description It is possible to execute UCD functions in a group composed of one or more Call Pickup Groups Such a group is called a UCD group The Group Call Pickup Group screen determines whi...

Page 193: ...nks in the group perform the same function The items listed below are set in the Group Trunk Group screen a Trunk group type b Trunk group name c Tenant selection d Trunk group direction e Incoming destination Day f Incoming destination Night g Intercept Routing Day h Intercept Routing Night i Toll restriction level j Toll restriction table k Dialing plan selection l Disconnect time selection m Pa...

Page 194: ...change the pre assigned night answer destination Only the system administrator can change the pre assigned night answer destination Call handling in Flexible and Fixed night service is almost the same The difference is Flexible Fixed The Operator 1 Attendant Console or Extension can change the night answer destination A group of extensions Night Answer Group can be assigned as the destination of o...

Page 195: ... Day Ring Night Ring Refer to Section 10 G 1 02 Station 2 4 10 G 1 03 Station 3 4 8 01 Directed Night Answer Description Used to redirect incoming attendant seeking CO calls to the designated extension or a group of extensions Night Answer Group automatically in night mode To activate this feature set Group Trunk Group Incoming Mode Night to FIXED or FLEXIBLE and Trunk CO Line Night Answer Point t...

Page 196: ...swer Group NAG 11 C 15 00 11 C 20 00 11 C 51 00 10 E 1 01 10 F 1 00 8 02 Universal Night Answer UNA Description Allows any extension user in the system to answer incoming attendant seeking CO calls ringing at an external pager by dialing the feature number for Night Answer 1 or 2 To activate this feature set Group Trunk Group Incoming Mode Night to FIXED or FLEXIBLE and Trunk CO Line Night Answer ...

Page 197: ...Universal Night Answer UNA 8 03 Flexible Night Service Description Flexible Night Service allows the Operator 1 Attendant Console or Extension user to change the assigned night answer destination on a CO line basis by dialing the feature number for Flexible Night Service To utilize this feature set Group Trunk Group Incoming Mode Night to FLEXIBLE All CO lines which belong to this trunk group are ...

Page 198: ...To utilize this feature program as follows 1 Assign Group Trunk Group Incoming Mode Night to FIXED 2 Assign Trunk CO Line Night Answer Point to NAG This CO line must belong to the Trunk Group whose Incoming Mode Night is assigned to FIXED 3 Assign the DN of the destination extensions by using NAG command Flexible Fixed The Operator 1 Attendant Console or Extension can change the night answer desti...

Page 199: ...ice is employed night service assignment unique to each tenant Tenant 1 and Tenant 2 can be programmed individually The assignment in System Operation 3 3 is applied to Tenant 1 and the assignment in System Tenant is applied to Tenant 2 Programming System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Operation 3 3 Night Service Auto Start Time System Tenant Night Service Tenant 2 Auto Start Time System Num...

Page 200: ...ystem KX T61620 KX T61630 KX T61650 KX T1232 system KX T123220 KX T123230 KX T123230D KX T123235 KX T123250 KX T7000 series KX T7020 KX T7030 KX T7050 KX T7055 KX T7130 KX T7200 series KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7250 The Configuration Slot Assignment screen defines which card is installed in which slot Programming Conditions None System Programming Reference VT Dumb Configuration Slot Assignme...

Page 201: ...me 14 Tie Interdigit Time Out 15 DISA Interdigit Time Out 16 Delayed Answer DISA 17 Prolonged Time DISA 18 Automatic Redial Retry Interval WS1 19 Answer Decision Timer 20 First Dial Timer WS2 21 First Dial Timer DID WS2 Trunk group timer values 1 CO CO Duration Limit 2 Disconnect Time 3 Pause Time 4 Hook Switch Flash Time CO Line timer values 1 DTMF Duration Time 2 CPC Detection Time Incoming 3 Wi...

Page 202: ...formation 12 00Automatic Station Release Description If an extension user fails to dial any digits within a specified time period after getting a line for making a call he or she will be disconnected from the channel after hearing reorder tone To get a line for making a call again the extension user must once go on hook and then off hook When making an outgoing CO call with either PITS and SLT the...

Page 203: ...equest an account code entry or DISA user code entry or sounds when an extension goes off hook after Timed Reminder Dial tone 3 Sounds if the extension user has set any of the following features Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Absent Message Timed Reminder Walking Station Walking COS Call Coverage Path Electronic Station Lockout Dial tone 4 Sounds if the extension user has set UCD Log Out Programmi...

Page 204: ...e tone is selected by System Operation Busy Tone Programming System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Operation 1 3 Busy Tone 11 C 4 00 10 D 1 01 Conditions If Automatic Callback to Trunk is programmed the function is automatically set when making an outgoing CO call and going on hook when hearing busy tone See Section 4 C 6 01 5 A 4 01 Automatic Callback Trunk for details When the Automatic Ca...

Page 205: ...mation tone 4 The tone is sent when converting conference into a two party call A setting can be made by programming System Operation Beep Tone for Bsy ovr Brg in to determine whether confirmation tone is to be sent or not when two party conversation is successfully converted into a three party conversation Busy Override Conference etc Confirmation tone from external pagers can be selected to be s...

Page 206: ... timeout warning tone Held Call Reminder Call waiting tone 440HZ 440HZ 440HZ 440HZ 480HZ 620HZ 480HZ 620HZ 620HZ 480HZ 620HZ 440HZ 480HZ 350HZ 440HZ 620HZ 620HZ 620HZ 620HZ 620HZ 480HZ 620HZ 350HZ 440HZ 350HZ 440HZ 15 sec 15 sec 1 sec 625 625 750 750 750 1000 3000 1250 500 125 msec 16 00 Tone and Ringing Patterns Description This system offers various tone patterns and ringing patterns as listed b...

Page 207: ...B 27 See Section 3 B 13 00 Distinctive Dial Tone for details of dial tone See Section 3 B 14 00 Distinctive Busy Tone for details of busy tone See Section 3 B 15 00 Confirmation Tone for details of confirmation tone See Section 3 D 4 00 Discriminating Ringing Programming None Conditions None Ringing Patterns 1250 1792 500 500 250 250 msec ...

Page 208: ......

Page 209: ...and Toll Restriction Level Night as follows Toll restriction level of an extension user is referred to as TRLE in the following Toll restriction level consists of 16 levels 01to16 01 02 15 16 higher lower An extension user assigned to TRLE of 01 has the most privileges an extension user assigned to TRLE of 16 has the least When an extension user makes an outgoing CO call TRLE of that extension is ...

Page 210: ...on user assigned to TRLE of 10 makes an outgoing CO call in this case TRLE of 10 is lower than TRLL of 09 TRLE TRLL then the call is checked against 7 Digit Toll Restriction Table The following table shows whether the extension can make CO calls or not 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Blank Not Restricted Restricted TRLL or TRLT TRLE D...

Page 211: ... Access in Class of Service is programmed to No Accs TRLE TRLL Calls Yes Yes No No 3 Is the trunk group type in System Local Access Group Local Access Trunk Group Hunt Sequence 01 assigned to PBX 4 Does the PBX Access Code coincide with the code registered in Group Trunk Group PBX Access Code with Restriction 5 Compares TRLE in Class of Service with the Toll Restriction Level of Local Access TRLL ...

Page 212: ... No Restriction and PBX Access Code Restriction follow the Hunt Sequence 01 setting TRLL is assigned as below System Programming Reference VT Dumb Class of Service 1 3 Toll Restriction Level Day and Night System Local Access Group Toll Restriction Level System Local Access Group OFL PRG LIN DIR Toll Restriction Level 08 Toll Restriction Level of Local Access TRLL Programming 4 If this system works...

Page 213: ...me tenant that the extension belongs to 3 Is the selected trunk group type PBX 4 Does the PBX access code coincide with the code that is registered in Group Trunk Group PBX Access Code with Restriction 5 Compares TRLE in Class of Service with the Trunk Group TRLT Toll Restriction Level Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes Prohibits Sends reorder tone TRLE TRLT Calls TRLE TRLL Not restricted Executes 7 Digit T...

Page 214: ...s Programming 2 11 C 15 00 11 C 24 00 The tenant of the selected trunk group is assigned in Group Trunk Group Tenant All Extension is set by Screen Tenant of Extension Station The tenant must be the same as the tenant set by Group Trunk Group Programming 3 Programming 4 To execute toll restriction the PBX Access Code must be registered in Group Trunk Group PBX Access Code Restriction To access the...

Page 215: ...in the table the call is denied and an extension user receives reorder tone If no match is found the call is made Programming Items Reference VT Dumb Toll Restriction 7 Digit Toll Restriction Table Conditions If no digits were dialed until pre programmed External First Digit Time Out time has expired an extension user hears reorder tone One of the following three characters N 2 to 9 P 0 1 and X 0 ...

Page 216: ...accept both DTMF and PULSE dialing Programming System Programming Reference VT Dumb Trunk CO Line Dial Mode 11 C 20 00 10 F 1 00 Conditions After External Feature Access until the maximum digits are dialed the dialing mode is changed to the mode set in Trunk CO Line Dial Mode With a PITS Tone Though mode is released temporarily during this time With a PITS Tone Through mode is established automati...

Page 217: ... 9 is entered in PBX Access Code Restriction the pause is automatically inserted after dialing 9 and the outgoing restrictions are checked for the 201 3456 phone number The length of the automatically inserted pause depends on the Group Trunk Group Pause Time setting Programming Conditions When the type of the top priority trunk group is PBX with the System Local Access Group Local Access Trunk Gr...

Page 218: ......

Page 219: ...1 is for Attendant Console 1 and Port 2 is for Attendant Console 2 Outline drawings of the basic process are shown below Attendant Console Incoming Mode 1 Single Console Operation 2 Dual Console Operation Attendant seeking incoming CO calls Attendant Console 1 Tenant 1 Attendant seeking incoming CO calls Tenant 2 Attendant seeking incoming CO calls Attendant Console 1 Attendant Console 2 When Tena...

Page 220: ...be done by entering the WS3 command at Dumb programming mode Refer to Attendant Incoming Mode in Section 11 C 45 00 World Select 3 WS3 Programming Conditions 1 The attendant console is not available to receive a call in Night mode Section 3 B 8 00 ATT FWD mode Section 6 A 1 00 2 What if all six LOOP keys on the attendant console are in use Heavy Traffic Overflow Transfer to Station Section 6 G 2 0...

Page 221: ...on Programming Conditions 1 General and Specific Calls Incoming outside calls directed to the attendant console are categorized as General or Specific General Calls Operator Call General Incoming outside calls routed via CO lines which belong to a Trunk Group whose Incoming Mode Day is ATT FDN for General Operator Call Specific Calls Operator Calls Specific Directory Number for ATT1 and 2 2 Call D...

Page 222: ...of ATT1 or 2 is not answered within a specified time Attendant Overflow Time it may be redirected to the extension assigned as the overflow destination Refer to Section 6 G 7 00 Automatic Redirection If No Answer for further information Overflow Extension KX TD500 System ATT 1 ATT 2 Ringing at ATT2 No Answer Time Out Attendant Overflow Time Ringing at Overflow Extension 3 D 4 ...

Page 223: ...ble to receive a call An idle LOOP key is available at both ATT1 and 2 Otherwise a call will ring at either one of two attendant consoles 2 Automatic Redirection If No Answer If an incoming outside call a call routed via a CO line which belongs to a Trunk Group whose Incoming Mode Day is ATT ringing on a LOOP key of two attendant consoles simultaneously is not answered within a specified time Atte...

Page 224: ...nsole when a call ringing at the first console is not answered within a specified time 2 Attendant Overflow Time The timer which applies to the feature is System System Timer Attendant Overflow Time 3 Automatic Redirection If No Answer If an incoming outside call a call routed via a CO line which belongs to a Trunk Group whose Incoming Mode Day is ATT ringing on a LOOP key of ATT2 see illustration...

Page 225: ...e to the DIL 1 1 or DIL 1 N setting and set Group Trunk Group Incoming Mode Night to Day Mode Programming DIL 1 1 DIL 1 N To use the DIL 1 1 and DIL 1 N functions program Group Trunk Group Incoming Outgoing to Both Way or Incoming Only Conditions If CO buttons are assigned an incoming call to a PITS will arrive at one of the CO buttons except PCO button If no CO button is assigned it will arrive a...

Page 226: ...SA card can be programmed by Special Attended DISA Tenant Automatic Gain Control can be used for DISA to maintain the volume of CO CO call via DISA feature by equipping up to four AGC cards If Tenant Service is employed the AGC card can be assigned to a tenant in Trunk AGC Dialing allows the user to call again or disconnect the line It is possible to disable it by setting Special Attended DISA Con...

Page 227: ...s sent during CO CO conversation 15 seconds before time limit programmed in Group Trunk Group CO CO Duration Limit It is possible to prolong the duration by dialing a digit other than and Prolonging the duration is enabled or disabled by system programming It can be selected whether detecting of the CPC signal is done at the end of the CO CO conversation or not in Trunk AGC Tone Detect If Tone Det...

Page 228: ...eter Forced of the system programming Special Attended DISA set to Yes you must dial the four digits account code in step 4 before the telephone number Calling again While talking with an external party or hearing ringback tone busy tone or reorder tone 1 Dial You hear dial tone 1 2 To call an extension follow the procedure for calling an extension from step 2 To call an external party follow the ...

Page 229: ...rd System Programming Reference VT Dumb Group Trunk Group 1 3 Type Group Trunk Group 2 3 DID Digit Modification Table Trunk CO Line Trunk Group DID Start Arrangement Special Attended DID Receive Digit Delete Digit Insert Dial No Multi Frequency Code MFC 10 E 1 01 10 E 1 02 10 F 1 00 10 I 2 00 3 D 11 11 C 15 00 11 C 16 00 11 C 20 00 11 C 36 00 11 C 60 00 KX T96182D you can make an outgoing CO call ...

Page 230: ...rnal pager 1 and TAFAS 2 is associated with external pager 2 Call handling in TAFAS is identical to UNA The difference is that TAFAS is available in day mode and UNA is available in night mode For further information about UNA refer to Section 4 I 1 01 Universal Night Answer UNA Programming System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Operation 1 3 External Paging 1 2 System Numbering Plan 3 11 Nig...

Page 231: ...f one or more pickup groups An extension can be in only one UCD group CO 1 CO 2 CO 3 Switching system DIL 1 1 Extension A Extension B Extension C UCD Group CO 1 CO 2 CO 3 Switching system UCD Extension A Extension B Extension C UP to 32 UCD groups can be set up in the system and they can be categorized into the following two types 1 UCD group with OGM 01 04 Section 3 2 06 1 2 UCD group without OGM...

Page 232: ...n the queue 1st call is in the queue p p p p 2 When the 1st call arrives at extension A the 2nd call arrives at extension B 3 When the 2nd call arrives at extension C the 3rd call will arrive at extension D 4 When the 3rd call arrives at extension D the 4th call will arrive at extension A Note 1 Busy status When Do Not Disturb DND or Call Forwarding has been set to the extension When any one of PD...

Page 233: ...r UCD group 01 04 If all group members are not available to answer a call All Logout A call will be redirected to another destination Overflow destination immediately Programming System Programming Reference VT Dumb Group Trunk Group 1 3 Incoming Mode Day DIL 1 1 Incoming Mode Night Day Mode Group Call Pickup Group UCD Trunk CO Line Direct Termination DN Extension Station 1 4 Pickup Group Special ...

Page 234: ...sferred to another member s extension If No Answer Time Out occurs twice in succession the extension is automatically set to logout status This feature is disabled by the dumb command UCD Auto Logout Operation ULO What if all members are logged out Assuming that a UCD group has three members and two are already logged out and a call rings into the UCD If the member that is logged in does not answe...

Page 235: ...ll extensions in a UCD group are busy calls are handled according to the pre programmed timetable The timetable is assigned to the system by employing UCD Time Table UCD 2 2 in system programming 1 Number of timetables Each UCD group 01 to 04 has own timetable respectively 2 Up to 16 steps can be registered per timetable by selecting a command listed below Command list and functions Note Any comma...

Page 236: ... Example Sorry all lines are busy Please wait a moment If OGM1 is busy or Out of Service this step will be skipped Then the caller hears the ringback tone 2 The caller hears Music on Hold for 90 seconds 4T 2T 3 The caller hears OGM2 Example Sorry all lines are still busy Calling the Operator 4 The caller is transferred to the Overflow destination Operator or covering extension Note During steps 1 ...

Page 237: ...he step 2 5 The caller hears Music on Hold for 15 seconds and go back to the step 1 Example 2 O1S H 4T 2T O2S H TR If H command is used as shown above Music on Hold is always sent to the caller whether OGMs are In Service or not Example 3 O1S 2T O2W OFF 1 2 3 4 UCD Group 1 The caller hears OGM1 Example Sorry all lines are busy Please wait a moment If OGM1 is busy or Out of Service this step will b...

Page 238: ... Ext Ext DIL 1 1 DISA DID Transfer UCD group 05 32 If all group members are not available to answer a call All Logout A call will be redirected to another destination Overflow destination immediately Programming System Programming Reference VT Dumb Group Trunk Group 1 3 Incoming Mode Day DIL 1 1 Incoming Mode Night Day Mode Group Call Pickup Group UCD Trunk CO Line Direct Termination DN Extension ...

Page 239: ...ther extension When the extension is off hook LCD display Extension user only When all extensions within a UCD group are busy the display if provided of the caller s PITS shows 1234 UCD GRP 12 FDN UCD group number 4 Overflow destination One of the following three destinations can be assigned as the overflow destination OFDN per UCD group 05 32 Attendant Console Extension Another UCD Group 05 32 UC...

Page 240: ...nected automatically if not answered within 60 seconds 5 Auto Logout When an extension in a UCD group does not answer more than a set time period the call will be automatically transferred to another member s extension If No Answer Time Out occurs twice in succession the extension is automatically set to logout status This feature is disabled by the dumb command UCD Auto Logout Operation ULO Call ...

Page 241: ...ysical number of the Private CO line Programming System Programming Reference VT Dumb Group Trunk Group 1 3 Type Trunk CO Line Trunk Group Extension Station 2 4 3 4 Type and Number 11 C 15 00 11 C 20 00 11 C 26 00 10 E 1 01 10 F 1 00 10 G 1 02 10 G 1 03 Conditions A Private CO button lights up red at the times below 1 When the Private CO line is not In Service 2 When the Private CO line has been s...

Page 242: ...en 60 wink Green 120 wink Green 240 wink Lights red Red 60 wink Red 120 wink Red 240 wink CO Line Status Idle I use I hold I exclusive hold consultation hold unattended conference Incoming call DIL 1 1 Other use exclusive hold Other hold Privacy release possible Incoming call DIL 1 N Programming Conditions When you press the SCO button which lights in red by using another user the Automatic Callba...

Page 243: ...group and no incoming CO call I use I hold I exclusive hold consultation hold unattended conference CO Line receiving an incoming call except for DIL 1 N No idle CO lines in trunk group and no incoming call in trunk group CO line receiving an incoming call DIL 1 N only Programming Conditions Pressing a Group CO button when it is red serves to set the Automatic Callback to Trunk function See Sectio...

Page 244: ... an extension the call indication appears on SCO 10101 not on GCO 01 However it may appear on GCO 01 if SCO 10101 is in use as follows Example 1 SCO 10101 is in use 2 Indication of the call which comes in on Ext 100 via CO line 10101 appears on GCO 01 TG01 CO line 10101 CO line 10102 CO line 10103 CO line 10104 GCO 01 Case 1 EXT 100 SCO 10104 SCO 10103 SCO 10102 SCO 10101 Case 2 EXT 100 SCO 10101 ...

Page 245: ...SCO 10101 on EXT 101 begins to flash in red as follows EXT 101 can retrieve a call held on GCO 01 by simply pressing the red flashing SCO 10101 Programming GCO 01 EXT 100 GCO 01 is lit in green SCO 10104 SCO 10103 SCO 10102 SCO 10101 EXT 101 SCO 10101 is lit in red TG01 CO line 10101 CO line 10102 CO line 10103 CO line 10104 3 D 27 GCO 01 EXT 100 S S S S EXT 101 SCO 10101 SCO 10102 SCO 10103 SCO 1...

Page 246: ...hat Trunk Group 01 consists of the following CO lines Programming TG01 CO line 10101 CO line 10102 CO line 10103 CO line 10104 GCO 01 GCO 01 Case 1 Ext 100 Ext 101 GCO 01 GCO 01 GCO 01 GCO 01 GCO 01 GCO 01 Case 2 Ext 100 Ext 101 System Programming Reference VT Dumb Extension Station 2 4 3 4 Type and Number 11 C 26 00 10 G 1 02 10 G 1 03 3 D 28 ...

Page 247: ...ext GCO button of the same extension Example 1 GCO 01 is in use at Ext 100 2 Indication of the call which comes in on Ext 100 via a CO line of Trunk Group 01 appears on another GCO of Ext 100 CO Lines Direct Termination Ext 100 Ext 101 CO Line 10101 Trunk Group 01 Incoming Mode Day DIL 1 1 CO Line 10102 CO Line 10103 CO Line 10104 GCO 01 GCO 01 GCO 01 1 GCO 01 GCO 01 GCO 01 2 Ext 100 Ext 100 3 D 2...

Page 248: ...2 4 3 4 Day Ring Night Ring 11 C 26 00 10 G 1 02 10 G 1 03 3 02 Flexible Ringing Assignment Delayed Ringing Description When incoming calls are placed to PITS from extensions CO lines or doorphones the indicators of the PDN SDN SCO and GCO buttons corresponding to the respective incoming calls start 240 winking At the same time ringing is sent to the phone It is possible to delay the ringing and h...

Page 249: ... the above incoming calls in a PITS the calls are prioritized in DN sequence PDN takes top priority 5 Automatic Callback 6 Timed Reminder When a multiple number of incoming calls arrive at a PITS in the on hook status priority as to which calls should be rung is generally on a first come first served basis However when the Prime Line Preference incoming function has been set this line takes preced...

Page 250: ...pplies when the extension is in off hook status and there are no idle PDN buttons b Arriving extension calls Busy status applies when the extension is in off hook status An each extension can be programmed its own one hunting extension These extensions can be formed like a chain The group formed by this programming is called the hunting group There are two types of hunting group Station Hunting Ci...

Page 251: ...ibution UCD Group for details on UCD groups See Section 3 D 2 05 Uniform Call Distribution UCD General 2 06 Uniform Call Distribution UCD with without OGM for details on the UCD function The following calls do not receive the Station Hunting treatment An incoming outside call routed via DIL 1 N or Private CO feature A call on the SDN button When the incoming destination extension is in any of the ...

Page 252: ...ence VT Dumb Extension Station 1 4 Hunt Station Next 10 G 1 01 See Section 3 B 7 02 Uniform Call Distribution UCD Group for details on UCD groups See Section 3 D 2 05 Uniform Call Distribution UCD General 2 06 Uniform Call Distribution UCD with without OGM for details on the UCD function The following calls do not receive the Station Hunting treatment An incoming outside call routed via DIL 1 N or...

Page 253: ...through even after hunting to the last extension in the hunting group and escaped extension a busy tone is sent to the calling party If the escaped destination is an attendant console the transferred incoming call will be queued in ATT QUEUE Programming Conditions A call redirected to another PITS extension by the Station Hunting feature always rings on a PDN button even if a call is originally ro...

Page 254: ...n Call Coverage Path provides automatic call transfer to a preset destination when the called extension is busy or if the extension user cannot answer the call for a determined period defined in System Timer Call Forwarding No Answer Time Out This feature works in the following Call Coverage Conditions None no setting Call Coverage Path All works in any cases Busy works when the called extension i...

Page 255: ... set Default Y49 You will hear a confirmation tone If your PITS has a display it will show CCP SET Canceling CCP 1 Lift the handset or press the SP phone button You hear the dial tone 1 3 or 4 2 Dial the feature number for Call coverage path cancel Default 49 You will hear a confirmation tone If your PITS has a display it will show CCP CANCEL 3 D 37 ...

Page 256: ......

Page 257: ...ld or Hold BGM If you assign BGM to For Use Music on Hold is not provided to the party placed on Hold Using the External Music Device 1 Connect External Music Device such as a radio to the system 2 Set Music Selector Switch on the TSW card to MUS 2 3 Assign System Operation 1 3 External Music Source 1 2 to Yes Yes 4 Assign Trunk Pager Music Source For Use of Music Source 2 to Hold or Hold BGM If y...

Page 258: ...er tone to be sent the feature number for Call Waiting Set must be set Programming System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Operation 1 3 Held Call Reminder System System Timer Held Call Reminder Held Call Reminder ATT System Numbering Plan 5 11 Call Waiting Set 11 C 4 00 11 C 6 00 11 C 11 00 10 D 1 01 10 D 3 00 10 D 6 05 Conditions If more than one call is placed on hold at an extension this f...

Page 259: ...endant console is set by System System Timer Transfer Recall Programming System Programming Reference VT Dumb System System Timer Transfer Recall 11 C 6 00 10 D 3 00 Conditions When there are more than one parties on hold this function is started from the earliest time for the transfer operation In a PITS the CO line and extension Transfer Recall call signals have the same ringing pattern as the C...

Page 260: ......

Page 261: ...stem Operation Traffic to Yes Programming System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Operation 2 3 SMDR Page Length 4 99 Skip Perf 0 95 Outgoing Duration Log Incoming Duration Log Attendant Duration Special Carrier Name Print Secret Dial Error Log Programming Traffic System Communication Interface World Select 3 WS3 Charge Display 11 C 4 00 11 C 11 00 11 C 45 00 10 D 1 02 10 D 7 00 1 01 SMDR Para...

Page 262: ...tination called party EXXX EXXXX extension number A0 DISA OGM UCD A1 A2 Attendant Console number TXXXXX trunk physical number 7 DN directory number XXX XXXX used PDN button Blank not used PDN button SDN CO button or transferred to Trunk 8 Dial Number The dialed number sent to the CO line is printed out at a maximum of 14 digits 9 Duration duration of call 00 01 24 second minute hour 10 Acc code ac...

Page 263: ...EXXX EXXXX extension number A0 DISA OGM UCD A1 A2 Attendant Console number TXXXXX trunk physical number 7 DN directory number XXX XXXX used PDN button Blank not used PDN button SDN CO button or transferred to Trunk 8 Dial Number The dialed number sent to the CO line is printed out at a maximum of 12 digits 9 Duration duration of call 00 01 24 second minute hour 10 Charge charge meter 11 Code accou...

Page 264: ...moved simultaneously Before executing this function assign System Class of Service 1 3 Walking Station to Yes for the extension Programming Conditions It is possible to move a telephone to an extension which is in the pre install status In this case dial the feature number for Walking Station Set only at the extension to be moved and dial the feature number for Walking Station Cancel and the origi...

Page 265: ...s WST E xxxx On Extension number 3 Replace the handset or press the SP PHONE button After the move complete steps 4 to 6 at the move destination extension 4 Lift the handset 5 First dial the feature number for Walking Station Cancel Default 82 and then dial the original extension number Confirmation tone 1 or 2 is heard If your PITS has a display it shows WST E xxxx Off 6 Replace the handset or pr...

Page 266: ...Section 10 I 1 00 Special Attended DISA Programming System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Numbering Plan 9 11 OGM Record OGM Playback Special Attended DISA For Use 11 C 11 00 11 C 33 00 10 D 6 09 10 I 1 00 Conditions 1 Tenant Service If tenant service is employed the affiliation of each DISA card is determined by the system programming Special Attendant DISA tenant The Operator 1 of each ten...

Page 267: ...egin your message 4 As soon as you finish press the MEMORY button The MEMORY indicator lights in red After confirmation tone 3 sounds the recorded message is played back automatically If your PITS has a display it shows xxxxxxxx Play 00 Indicates playback time counts up by second UCD OGM1 or UCD OGM2 or DISA OGM or Wkup OGM When playback is finished the MEMORY indicator goes out You hear confirmat...

Page 268: ...ects card 3 4 selects card 4 The MEMORY indicator lights in red You hear confirmation tone 3 then the message If your PITS has a display it shows Example DISA OGM Play 00 When playback is finished you hear confirmation tone 3 then no tone The MEMORY indicator goes out 3 Replace the handset or press the SP PHONE button Supplement In step 2 if you wish to interrupt and finish playback press the MEMO...

Page 269: ...SA For details about DISA refer to Section 3 D 2 02 Direct Inward System Access DISA Programming Conditions Intercept Routing No Answer works for the following incoming CO calls 1 All incoming CO calls other than calls placed on DIL1 N Private CO Attendant Consoles Remote and UCD 2 Transfer Recall calls except those to Attendant Consoles 3 Held Call Reminder calls except those to Attendant Console...

Page 270: ... is rerouted the call will be sent to the following destinations 1 If Group Trunk Group Intercept Routing Day Night is assigned the call is sent to the assigned destination 2 If it is not assigned the call is sent to Operator 1 in the receiving tenant If the assigned destination is a Voice Mail extension the call is not sent to it Refer to Section 3 F 10 00 Voice Processing System VPS for further ...

Page 271: ...d by the extension user ineffectively To prevent the extension users from such invalid seizure of CO lines it is administrable to make CPC signal detection effect on outgoing CO calls by using CPC command at dumb programming mode This feature is assignable on a CO line basis Refer to Section 11 C 42 00 CPC Signal Detect Timing CPC for further information Programming Conditions Some switching syste...

Page 272: ...6 J 10 00 CO Access Control Programming Conditions None System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Numbering Plan 9 11 Busy Out Trunk Unbusy Trunk Automatic Busy Out Count ABC 11 C 11 00 11 C 46 00 10 D 6 09 Operation Setting CO Busy Out to a CO line from operator 1 1 Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button You hear dial tone 2 Dial the feature number for Busy Out Trunk Default 77 and trunk...

Page 273: ...Parallel connection of DPITS and SLT Programming Conditions Not only a Single Line Telephone but an answering machine a facsimile or a modem personal computer can be connected parallely with certain PITS telephones The parallel connection of a Single Line Telephone and a PITS telephone becomes available under the following conditions Parallely connected PITS telephones are interfaced with HLC and ...

Page 274: ...ward to Voice Mail IRNA to Voice Mail The KX TD500 system can forward callers directly to the called extension s mailbox CO CO Ext Ext Ext Ext Ext CO Ext CO Ext VPS VPS VPS VPS ATT Console DIL 1 N Incoming Mode Day ATT DIL 1 1 DISA DID DIL 1 1 DISA DID FWD With Forward to VM sequence IRNA With Forward to VM sequence FWD With Forward to VM sequence FWD With Forward to VM sequence Hunting Transfer T...

Page 275: ...t This default sequence is for the KX TVP series Voice Processing System If you use another voice mail system you have to adjust this sequence for the VPS which you are using This parameter is programmed by the dumb command VMC Refer to Section 11 C 65 00 Voice Mail Service Command VMC Set to forward to the VPS Ext A calls Ext B The call is transferred to the VPS Answered by the VPS and Ext A reco...

Page 276: ...default sequence is for the KX TVP series Voice Processing System If you use another voice mail system you have to adjust this sequence for the VPS which you are using This parameter is programmed by the dumb command VMC Refer to Section 11 C 65 00 Voice Mail Service Command VMC Ext A is having a conversation with B Ext C can retrieve its own message by simply pressing the MESSAGE button Press the...

Page 277: ...vice and VM service Voice Mail Service for each port These services can be changed by sending a DTMF signal from the PBX If the VPS port services is not a Voice Mail Service an extension user transferred to the VPS can t access the VPS as a voice mail system The KX TD500 solves this problem by sending a signal which makes the VPS port a Voice Mail Service when a call is forwarded to the VPS This s...

Page 278: ...nnects it to the VPS and sends this sequence when the extension MESSAGE button is pressed Example If you program all of the VPS ports to control the extension MESSAGE buttons AA service ports may control the MESSAGE button after recording a message When the Message Button Sequence is programmed as 6YH Dial 6 and Y Mailbox Number the KX TD500 accesses the VPS and sends this sequence to the VPS when...

Page 279: ...ess tones Configuration 1 Configuration 2 CO VPS Ext Ext Ext VPS Ext VPS VPS VPS VPS DIL 1 1 DISA DID Transfer FWD with Forward to VM Sequence Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting Busy CO VPS Ext Ext Ext VPS Ext VPS VPS VPS VPS DIL 1 1 DISA DID Transfer Transfer Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting FWD with Forward to VM Sequence 3 F 19 ...

Page 280: ...ollowing calls Calls transferred by Call Forwarding All Calls Call Forwarding Busy Off hook Call Forwarding No Answer Call Forwarding Busy No Answer including the calls transferred to the extensions on which one of the above mentioned Call Forwarding feature is assigned Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA including the transfer recalled outside call and held reminder outside call Extensions assigned ...

Page 281: ...fficiently we recommend to program a station hunting group among the Voice Mail VM Extensions this would reduce the possibility of the callers encountering the busy status When Station Hunting Group Circular is programmed among the VM Extensions a call transferred to the busy VM Extension including Not INS status by Call Forwarding FWD or Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA feature will be automatica...

Page 282: ... Is it busy or in Not INS status Does it have the next hunt station Is there any idle VM extensions within a Station Hunting Group Callers are forwarded to the VPS of the called extension s mailbox directly The treatment of the call depends on the types of the Call Forwarding feature assigned Refer to 5 Treatment of the call forwarded to the busy extension VPS on page 3 F 51 for further informatio...

Page 283: ...d to the busy VM extension by IRNA feature it will be put on the waiting status whether the IRNA destination has the next station assignment or not Is IRNA destination a VM extension Is it busy or in Not INS status Does it have the next hunt station Is there any idle VM extensions within a Station Hunting Group Caller are transferred to the VPS of the called extension s mailbox directly Refer to 8...

Page 284: ...utomatically Camp on Transfer to a VM extension is only available when Call Forwarding All Calls is assigned to the Ext 102 Transfer Recall If VM 106 is still busy after the transfer recall timer has been elapsed the call arrives at Ext 101 again What if Call Forwarding FWD No Answer is assigned on the extension where a call has been transferred without announcement Unscreened Call Transfer A call...

Page 285: ...e call Example During a call with the Party 1 while putting the Party 2 on consultation hold If an SLT extension not a VM extension presses the switchhook a conference call among three parties is established In case of a VM extension it will be connected to the Party 2 and the Party 1 is disconnected Reference Station Hunting Circular Section 3 D 5 01 Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA Section 3 F 5...

Page 286: ...V key simultaneously when Main Menu screen is displayed at VT programming mode 2 Enter P R G and press Return key when Dumb programming mode initial prompt is displayed Then programming mode initial prompt PRG is displayed on the screen 3 At the programming prompt PRG type PRG WS3 AT 03 The screen displays the Input prompt INPUT as follows PRG WS3 AT 03 3 DTMF Tone Integration N INPUT 4 At the Inp...

Page 287: ...en the called extension answers the call Sent to the VPS if the caller is forwarded to a voice mail port and that voice mail port is available to accept the call Sent to the VPS if the caller is forwarded to a voice mail port and that voice mail port is not available to accept the call Sent to the VPS if the caller is forwarded to another non voice mail extension Sent to the VPS when it successful...

Page 288: ...MF tones sent to the VPS depends on the status of the called extension as follows 1 2 To another VM extension A call from the VPS does not ring another VPS whether it is idle or not Caller VPS 1 VPS 2 Transfer Caller VPS 1 Ext 1 Transfer Code A 1 B 1 B 3 A 2 Conditions The Ext 1 is idle The Ext 1 is busy The Ext 1 is in the DND mode The Ext 1 answers the call Call State Ringback Tone Busy Tone DND...

Page 289: ...e or not Caller Ext 4 VPS 1 Ext 1 Ext 3 Ext 2 Transfer Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting Group Caller VPS 5 VPS 1 VPS 2 VPS 4 VPS 3 Transfer Hunting Group Code A 1 B 1 Conditions At least one extension of a hunting group is idle All members of a hunting group are busy Call State Ringback Tone Busy Tone Code B 2 Conditions The VPS 1 is inadvertently connected to another VPS Call State Busy To...

Page 290: ...tension only This way the VPS 1 typically an Automated Attendant knows it must give the caller an opportunity to leave a message before releasing the call Caller Ext 2 VPS 1 VPS 2 VPS 3 Ext 1 Transfer Hunting Hunting Hunting Group Caller VPS 3 VPS 1 Ext 1 Ext 2 VPS 2 Transfer Hunting Hunting Hunting Group Code A 1 C 2 Conditions The Ext 1 or 2 is idle Both Ext 1 and 2 are busy Call State Ringback ...

Page 291: ...State Ringback Tone Busy Tone Code A 1 C 3 A 1 Conditions The Ext 2 is idle The Ext 2 is busy Call State Ringback Tone The call is arriving at the Ext 1 Call Forwarding No Answer Time has been elapsed Ringback Tone The call is forwarded to the Ext 2 and arriving on it Ringback Tone The call is arriving at the Ext 1 Call Forwarding No Answer Time has been elapsed The call is still arriving at the E...

Page 292: ...rtunity to leave a message before releasing the call Caller VPS1 Ext 1 VPS 2 Transfer FWD mode Forward Code C 1 C 2 Conditions The VPS 2 is idle The VPS 2 is busy Call State Ringback Tone The call is forwarded to the VPS 2 1 Busy Tone 2 Code A 1 C 1 A 1 C 2 Conditions The VPS 2 is idle The VPS 2 is busy Call State Ringback Tone The call is arriving at Ext 1 Call Forwarding No Answer Time has been ...

Page 293: ...roup is idle All members of a hunting group are busy Call State Ringback Tone Busy Tone Code A 1 C 3 A 1 Conditions At least one extension of a hunting group is idle All extensions of a hunting group are busy Call State Ringback Tone The call is arriving at Ext 1 Call Forwarding No Answer Time has been elapsed Ringback Tone The call is forwarded to an idle extension of a hunting group and arriving...

Page 294: ... VPS 1 VPS 4 VPS 3 Transfer FWD mode Forward Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting Group Code C 1 C 2 Conditions At least one VPS extension of a hunting group is idle All members of a hunting group are busy Call State Ringback Tone The call is forwarded to an idle VPS extension and arriving on it 1 Busy Tone 2 Code A 1 C 1 A 1 C 2 Conditions At least one VPS extension of a hunting group is idle ...

Page 295: ...s sent to the VPS 2 2 This way the VPS 1 typically an Automated Attendant knows it must give the caller an opportunity to leave a message before releasing the call Code C 3 C 1 C 3 C 2 Conditions The Ext 2 is idle The Ext 2 is busy but the VPS 2 is idle The Ext 2 and VPS 2 are busy The Ext 3 and the VPS 3 are idle All members of a hunting group are busy Call State Ringback Tone The call is arrivin...

Page 296: ... Ext 2 and VPS 2 are busy The Ext 3 and the VPS 3 are idle All members of a hunting group are busy Call State Ringback Tone The call is arriving at Ext 1 Call Forwarding No Answer Time has been elapsed Ringback Tone The call is forwarded to the Ext 2 and arriving on it Ringback Tone The call is arriving at Ext 1 Call Forwarding No Answer Time has been elapsed Ringback Tone The call is forwarded to...

Page 297: ... Forward Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting Group Code C 1 C 3 C 2 Conditions The VPS 2 is idle The VPS 2 3 and 4 are busy The Ext 2 is idle All members of a hunting group are busy Call State Ringback Tone The call is forwarded to the VPS 2 and arriving on it 1 Ringback Tone The call is arriving at Ext 2 Busy Tone 2 Code A 1 C 1 Conditions The VPS 2 is idle Call State Ringback Tone The call i...

Page 298: ... knows it must give the caller an opportunity to leave a message before releasing the call Code A 1 C 3 A 1 C 2 Conditions The VPS 2 3 and 4 are busy The Ext 2 is idle All members of a hunting group are busy Call State Ringback Tone The call is arriving at Ext 1 Call Forwarding No Answer Time has been elapsed Ringback Tone The call is forwarded to the Ext 2 and arriving on it Ringback Tone The cal...

Page 299: ...ng outside call is not answered by the extension in a specified time period IRNA timer it will be transferred to another destination IRNA Refer to 6 Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA and 7 IRNA and Station Hunting on pages 3 F 52 through 3 F 55 for further information 2 In case of calls via DISA DID If a call via DISA DID is directed to an extension in the DND mode it will be automatically redirect...

Page 300: ...her information 2 2 All members of a hunting group are VPS extensions The KX TD500 system sends the Forward to VM Sequence when the VM extension answers the call Ext 4 Ext CO Ext 1 Ext 3 Ext 2 Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting Group VPS 4 Ext CO VPS 1 VPS 3 VPS 2 Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting Group Conditions At least one extension of a hunting group is idle All members of a huntin...

Page 301: ...t will be transferred to another destination IRNA Refer to 6 Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA and 7 IRNA and Station Hunting on pages 3 F 52 through 3 F 55 for further information 2 The KX TD500 system sends the Forward to VM Sequence when the VM extension answers the call Ext 2 Ext CO VPS 1 VPS 2 Ext 1 Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting Group Conditions At least one extension of a hunting gr...

Page 302: ...er destination IRNA Refer to 6 Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA and 7 IRNA and Station Hunting on pages 3 F 52 through 3 F 55 for further information 2 The KX TD500 system sends the Forward to VM Sequence when the VM extension answers the call Conditions At least one member of a hunting group is idle All members of a hunting group are busy Call State Ringback Tone 1 2 Busy Tone VPS 2 Ext CO Ext 1 ...

Page 303: ...ls differs depending on the types of calls Refer to 5 Treatment of the call forwarded to the busy extension VPS on page 3 F 51 for further information Ext CO Ext 1 Ext 2 FWD mode Forward Conditions The Ext 2 is idle The Ext 2 is busy Call State Ringback Tone 1 Busy Tone 2 Conditions The Ext 2 is idle The Ext 2 is busy Call State Ringback Tone The call is arriving at the Ext 1 Call Forwarding No An...

Page 304: ...or further information Ext CO Ext 1 VPS 1 FWD mode Forward Conditions The VPS 1 is idle The VPS 1 is busy Call State Ringback Tone The call is forwarded to the VPS 1 1 Busy Tone 2 Conditions The VPS 1 is idle The VPS 1 is busy Call State Ringback Tone The call is arriving at Ext 1 Call Forwarding No Answer Time has been elapsed Ringback Tone The call is forwarded to the VPS 1 1 Ringback Tone The c...

Page 305: ... of the call forwarded to the busy extension VPS on page 3 F 51 for further information Ext 5 Ext 2 Ext 1 Ext CO Ext 4 Ext 3 FWD mode Forward Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting Group Conditions At least one extension of a hunting group is idle All members including the Ext 1 of a hunting group are busy Call State Ringback Tone 1 Busy Tone 2 Conditions At least one extension of a hunting group...

Page 306: ...ing Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting Group Conditions At least one VPS extension of a hunting group is busy All members of a hunting group are busy Call State Ringback Tone The call is arriving at Ext 1 Call Forwarding No Answer Time has been elapsed Ringback Tone The call is forwarded to an idle VPS extension and arriving on it 1 Ringback Tone The call is arriving at Ext 1 Call Forwarding No Answe...

Page 307: ...h 3 F 55 for further information 2 The KX TD500 system sends the Forward to VM Sequence when the VM extension answers the call 3 The treatment of calls differs depending on the types of calls Refer to 5 Treatment of the call forwarded to the busy extension VPS on page 3 F 51 for further information VPS 2 Ext 2 Ext 1 Ext CO Ext 3 VPS 1 FWD mode Forward Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting Group ...

Page 308: ...ck Tone The call is forwarded to the Ext 2 and arriving on it 1 Ringback Tone The call is arriving at Ext 1 Call Forwarding No Answer Time has been elapsed Ringback Tone The call is forwarded to the VPS 1 and arriving on it 2 Ringback Tone The call is arriving at Ext 1 Call Forwarding No Answer Time has been elapsed Ringback Tone The call is forwarded to the Ext 3 and arriving on it 1 Ringback Ton...

Page 309: ...orwarded to the VPS 2 and arriving on it 1 Ringback Tone The call is arriving at Ext 2 2 Busy Tone 3 3 F 49 1 In case of outside calls DIL 1 1 DISA DID In an incoming outside call is not answered by the extension in a specified time period IRNA timer it will be transferred to another destination IRNA Refer to 6 Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA and 7 IRNA and Station Hunting on pages 3 F 52 through...

Page 310: ... the types of calls Refer to 5 Treatment of the call forwarded to the busy extension VPS on page 3 F 51 for further information Conditions The VPS 1 is idle The VPS 1 2 and 3 are busy The Ext 2 is idle All members of a hunting group are busy Call State Ringback Tone The call is arriving at Ext 1 Call Forwarding No Answer Time has been elapsed Ringback Tone The call is forwarded to the VPS 1 and ar...

Page 311: ...ll busy after the IRNA timer has been elapsed a call will be transferred to the IRNA destination If the IRNA destination is not programmed The call continues to ring at Ext 1 and it will be transferred to the IRNA destination after a specified time period has been elapsed If the IRNA destination is not programmed The call continues to ring at Ext 1 and it will be transferred to the IRNA destinatio...

Page 312: ...ard to VM Serquence when the VM extension answers the call 2 Refer to 8 Treatment of the call transferred to the busy extension VPS by IRNA feature on page 3 F 56 for further information CO Ext 1 Ext 2 DIL 1 1 DISA DID IRNA CO Ext 1 VPS 1 DIL 1 1 DISA DID IRNA Conditions The Ext 2 is idle The Ext 2 is busy Call State Ringback Tone Busy Tone Conditions The VPS 1 is idle The VPS 1 is busy Call State...

Page 313: ...M extension answers the call 2 Refer to 8 Treatment of the call transferred to the busy extension VPS by IRNA feature on page 3 F 56 for further information Ext 5 Ext 2 Ext 1 CO Ext 4 Ext 3 IRNA Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting Group DIL 1 1 DISA DID VPS 4 VPS 1 Ext 1 CO VPS 3 VPS 2 IRNA Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting Group DIL 1 1 DISA DID Conditions At least one extension in a hu...

Page 314: ... of the call transferred to the busy extension VPS by IRNA feature on page 3 F 56 for further information VPS 2 Ext 2 Ext 1 CO Ext 3 VPS 1 IRNA Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting Group DIL 1 1 DISA DID Conditions The Ext 2 is idle The Ext 2 is busy but the VPS 1 is idle The Ext 2 and VPS 1 are busy The Ext 3 and the VPS 2 are idle All members of a hunting group are busy Call State Ringback To...

Page 315: ...M extension answers the call 2 Refer to 8 Treatment of the call transferred to the busy extension VPS by IRNA feature on page 3 F 56 for further information Conditions The VPS 1 is idle The VPS 1 2 and 3 are busy The Ext 2 is idle All members of a hunting group are busy Call State Ringback Tone The call is forwarded to the VPS 1 1 Ringback Tone The call is arriving at Ext 2 Busy Tone 2 Ext 2 VPS 1...

Page 316: ...S and it will not be transferred to the IRNA destination by the IRNA feature The call is put on the waiting status and it will be connected to the IRNA destination as soon as it becomes idle If the IRNA destination does not become idle A call continues to be on the waiting status until the IRNA destination becomes idle The call will be disconnected if the IRNA destination does not become idle with...

Page 317: ... KX TD500 sends automatically the Message Button Sequence to the VPS before connects you to the VPS Operation 1 Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button You hear a dial tone 2 Dial the feature number for Message Waiting Reply Default 64 or press the MESSAGE button You are connected to the VPS automatically and hear a message from the VPS 3 You can access the VPS listening to messages purging ...

Page 318: ... Operation During a conversation with an extension or an outside party on the DN or CO button 1 Press the VM TRNS key The other party is placed on Consultation Hold You hear confirmation tone 2 and dial tone 1 3 or 4 If your PITS has a display it will show Transfer to 2 Dial the directly number of the user who will receive the message 3 Replace the handset The caller begins to access the VPS Syste...

Page 319: ...n 11 C 50 00 Account Code ACC Account Code Verified ACV Section 11 C 48 00 Account Code Verified Account Code Entry on Long Distance Calls Section 11 C 49 00 Account Code Entry on Long Distance Calls ACL You can use any combination of these three programming items as follows Table 1 The available combinations 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Forced Account Code Mode Yes Forced mode No Option mode Yes Yes No No Yes...

Page 320: ...ed Always checked Not checked Checked if the account code is entered Not checked Not restricted if a system registered account code is entered Restricted Not restricted if an appropriate account code is entered Restricted Not restricted if a system registered account code is entered Restricted Not restricted if an appropriate account code is entered Restricted Table 2 3 F 60 ...

Page 321: ...3 In case of Local Trunk Dial Access 2 Assign TRLE of the extension lower than TRLL as follows TRLE Toll Restriction Level of Extension Section 10 D 4 01 Class of Service 1 3 Section 11 C 7 00 Class of Service 1 CS1 System Class of Service OFL PRG SCR DIR Class of Service COS No 02 1 3 Toll Restriction Level Day 02 Toll Restriction Level Night 02 Level of Extension TRLE 3 F 61 When both ACL and AC...

Page 322: ... 7 00 Class of Service 1 CS1 TRLT Toll Restriction Level of Trunk Group Section 10 E 1 01 Trunk Group 1 3 Section 11 C 15 00 Trunk Group 1 TG1 Group Trunk Group OFL PRG SCR SEL Trunk Group No 02 1 3 Type DDD Name Intercept Routing Night EXT 5002 Type No Toll Restriction Level 01 Level of Trunk Group TRLT System Class of Service OFL PRG SCR DIR Class of Service COS No 02 1 3 Toll Restriction Level ...

Page 323: ...ss of Service No 02 N INPUT Y CR Class of Service No 03 N INPUT EOD CR PRG Section 11 C 48 00 Account Code Verified ACL PRG ACL AT CR Class of Service No 01 N INPUT CR Class of Service No 02 N INPUT Y CR Class of Service No 03 N INPUT EOD CR PRG Section 11 C 49 00 Account Code Entry on Long Distance Calls ACL System Class of Service OFL PRG SCR DIR Class of Service COS No 02 1 3 Toll Restriction L...

Page 324: ... PITS SLT In case of Individual Trunk Group Dial Access and Direct Trunk Access Individual Trunk Group Dial Access 3 F 64 Operation 9 0xxxx 9 FWD DND 3456 0xxxx 9 FWD DND 1234 0xxxx 1 2 3 Result Restricted Call is not completed The outside number dialed is Restricted by 7 Digit Toll Restriction Table The account code entered is Not valid Restriction on number is overridden Call is completed Operat...

Page 325: ...ion on number is overridden Call is completed 3 F 65 Operation 8 1 2 0xxxx 8 1 2 3456 0xxxx 8 1 2 1234 0xxxx 1 2 3 Result Restricted Call is not completed The outside number dialed is Restricted by 7 Digit Toll Restriction Table The account code entered is Not valid Restriction on number is overridden Call is completed Operation CO button 0xxxx CO button FWD DND 3456 0xxxx CO button FWD DND 1234 0...

Page 326: ... if available 1 3 Area code dialed is sent to the Central Office 4 Second CO dial tone is returned in a delayed timing 2 3 4 5 The rest of the telephone number dialed at an extension is sent to the Central Office 2 Memory Dialing 1 One Touch Dialing Speed Dialing LNR SNR 2 CO line specified is seized instantly if available 1 3 Leading one through four digits Area code of the memorized number is se...

Page 327: ...cond dial tone from Central Office 4 Register the required area code and pause time by entering the WSD command Refer to Section 11 C 54 00 Waiting for Second Dial tone WSD for further information Programming Conditions External First Digit Time Out This timer is usually used to set the waiting time allowed between CO dial tone or second dial tone and the Time out first digit dialed However if the...

Page 328: ...nsion users per DISA card can initially hear the wake up message at a time and a maximum of four DISA cards can be installed to the system That is up to 16 extension users can initially hear the wake up message at a time if a maximum of four DISA cards are installed Example Assuming that one DISA card For Use is W UP is installed in the system and six extension users have set the wake up call to r...

Page 329: ...t shows the treatment of the extension user who goes off hook after being alerted by an alarm tone System Programming Reference VT Dumb Special Attended DISA For Use System Operation 1 3 External Music Source 1 2 Trunk Pager Music Source Music Source For use Music Source Tenant 11 C 33 00 11 C 4 00 11 C 22 00 10 I 1 00 10 D 1 01 10 F 2 00 Alarm tone is ringing DISA card INS BGM is assigned OGM res...

Page 330: ...ting Status Refer to Section 15 C 2 00 Definition of Operating Status 4 OGM busy Up to four extensions per DISA card can initially receive a wake up message at a time 5 BGM To utilize BGM set the usage of music source to BGM or Hold BGM Refer to Section 10 F 2 00 Pager and Music Source 6 From BGM to a wake up message The extension who currently hears BGM will hear the wake up message instead of BG...

Page 331: ...ion number only or a location number plus extension number A Network of Tie Lines 3 F 71 Numbering Plan Extension users can make a call over the Tie Line Network to other extension users in a distant location by one of the following two ways 1 Extension Number only See Section 3 F 14 01 Extension Number 2 Location Number PBX Code Extension Number See Section 3 F 14 01 Tie Trunk Access Code PBX Cod...

Page 332: ...runk access code of the dialed number Routing Table Override If a tie call is made by pressing a CO key this table is not referenced by the system and the call is routed over the specified tie trunk directly Programming Example A Network of Tie Lines Tie Line Routing Table 1 3 When 7 Tie Trunk Access Code 951 100 is dialed by an extension user the routing pattern for this call is decided by 951 Th...

Page 333: ... Extension Tie trunk CO Own Ext No Is first 3 disit registered in the table Compares TRLE of extension with TRLT of trunk group according to hunt sequence Calling to Extension Calling to Tie Reorder Tone Calling to CO TRLE TRLT TRLE TRLT No Yes Yes No Note TRLE Toll Restriction Level of Extension TRLT Toll Restriction Level of Trunk Group ...

Page 334: ...ode of your PBX in the received digits Calling to CO Sends reorder tone Is TIE CO Restriction of the selected trunk group set to Yes Sends reorder tone Is it an extension number of other PBX s Is there your PBX s extension number in the received digits Does that extension actually exist Is it idle Calling to the specified extension Sends busy tone Trunk group for making an outgoing tie call is dec...

Page 335: ...00 10 C 2 00 10 C 4 00 10 E 1 01 10 F 1 00 Programming 1 Basic Programming Always required to make use of tie lines regardless of the type of applications 2 Timer programming 3 Application programming Programming items required vary depending on the type of application Refer to Section 3 F 14 01 through 14 04 for further information about each application programming System Programming Reference V...

Page 336: ... Extension 01 2 Special Attended TIE Line Routing Table 10 I 4 00 11 C 57 01 PBX 1 PBX Code None PBX Code None Tie Line Extension numbers 100 199 PBX 2 TG10 Extension numbers 200 299 Ext 100 Ext 200 TG10 3 F 76 No 01 Code 2XX Delete Digit 0 Insert Dial Trunk Group Hunt Sequence 01 10 03 No 01 Code 1XX Delete Digit 0 Insert Dial Trunk Group Hunt Sequence 01 10 02 PBX 2 System Operation 1 3 PBX Code...

Page 337: ...her PBX Extension 01 16 Special Attended TIE Line Routing Table Code Delete Digit Insert Dial Trunk Group Hunt Sequence 01 05 10 D 1 01 10 D 6 00 10 D 6 07 10 D 6 10 10 I 4 00 Call Flow 1 Ext 100 of PBX 1 dials 7 951 100 2 Ext 100 of PBX 1 is connected to Ext 100 of PBX 2 Programming example To make up the Tie Line Network above the following system programming is required at PBX 1 and 2 respectiv...

Page 338: ...mb System Operation 1 3 PBX Code System Numbering Plan TIE Trunk Access Group Trunk Group 3 3 TIE Incoming Delete Digit TIE Incoming Insert Dial Special Attended TIE Line Routing Table Code Delete Digit Insert Dial Trunk Group Hunt Sequence 01 05 TIE Trunk Relay Restriction TRR 10 D 1 01 10 D 6 00 10 D 6 10 10 E 1 03 10 I 4 00 11 C 4 00 11 C 11 00 11 C 17 00 11 C 57 01 11 C 57 03 05 04 03 No 01 02...

Page 339: ...ion number You hear ringback tone B By dialing a PBX code and an extension number 1 Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button You hear dial tone 1 3 or 4 2 Dial the feature number for TIE Trunk Access Default 7 You hear dial tone 1 3 Dial the PBX code of the destination PBX and then the extension number of your destination party You hear ringback tone ...

Page 340: ...elete Digit 0 Insert Dial 01 10 02 Trunk Group Hunt Sequence Call Flow 1 Ext 100 dials 84 951 9 TIE Trunk Access Code PBX Code CO Access Code 2 Ext 100 is required to enter a tie account code 3 Ext 100 hears dial tone from an idle CO line of PBX 2 4 Ext 100 dials xxx xxxx phone number of the outside party Step 2 is required when TIE Forced Account Code Mode is set to Yes at PBX 2 Programming examp...

Page 341: ...ount Code TAC TIE Trunk Relay Restriction TRR 10 E 1 03 10 I 4 00 11 C 17 00 11 C 57 01 11 C 57 02 11 C 57 03 Programming 1 TIE CO Restriction Used to restrict or not extension users from Calling from Tie to CO To restrict set to Yes To allow set to No 2 Tie Account Code Used to allow certain extension users Calling from Tie to CO If Forced Account Mode of the trunk group is set to Yes an extensio...

Page 342: ...e call to a distant location over the CO Line Network References Screened Call Transfer to Trunk Section 4 F 1 03 5 D 1 06 6 G 1 04 Operation 1 Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button You hear dial tone 1 3 or 4 2 Dial the feature number for TIE Trunk Access Default 7 You hear dial tone 1 3 Dial the PBX code and a CO access code of the destination PBX 4 Dial a Tie Account Code if required 5 ...

Page 343: ...fter hearing dial tone Employee 1 dials 951 100 4 Employee 1 at a local branch will be connected to Ext 100 of PBX 2 Programming example To make up the Tie Line Network above the following system programming is required at PBX 1 and 2 respectively PBX 1 System Operation 1 3 10 D 1 01 11 C 4 00 PBX Code 950 Group Trunk Group 3 3 10 E 1 03 11 C 15 00 CO TIE Restriction No This assignment is required...

Page 344: ...ming Insert Dial Special Attended TIE Line Routing Table Code Delete Digit Insert Dial Trunk Group Hunt Sequence 01 05 TIE Trunk Relay Restriction TRR 10 E 1 03 10 I 4 00 11 C 17 00 11 C 57 01 11 C 57 03 Programming Operation 1 Dial the DISA phone number You hear ringback tone 2 You hear the DISA outgoing message 3 Dial the feature number for TIE Trunk Access Default 7 4 Dial the PBX code of other...

Page 345: ... The tie line extension number must be programmed beforehand References Call Forwarding to Trunk Section 4 F 2 05 5 D 2 05 2 Call Transfer to Tie Extension users can transfer a call to a distant location over the Tie Line Network References Screened Call Transfer to Trunk Section 4 F 1 03 5 D 1 06 6 G 1 04 ...

Page 346: ... be switched as required because all the lines on a given route are occupied or unavailable By utilizing this relay function several alternative routes can be set up beforehand in addition to the primary route This permits tie calls to be routed from A to B or A through C to B and so on If the primary route is poor because of equipment failure or congestion KX TD500 bypasses it and selects the sec...

Page 347: ... 10 I 4 00 11 C 57 01 Tie Trunk Relay Restriction TRR PBX 4 System Operation 1 3 10 D 1 01 11 C 4 00 PBX Code 954 Special Attended TIE Line Routing Table 10 I 4 00 11 C 57 01 Tie Trunk Relay Restriction TRR 11 C 57 03 Note If you want to restrict call relay from PBX 1 to PBX 2 via PBX 3 set TG11 to Yes at PBX 3 with TRR command 3 F 87 No 01 02 Code 952 953 Delete Digit 0 Insert Dial 01 10 11 02 11...

Page 348: ... 3 CO TIE Restriction TIE CO Restriction TIE Incoming Delete Digit TIE Incoming Insert Dial Special Attended TIE LineRouting Table Code Delete Digit Insert Dial Trunk Group Hunt Sequence 01 05 TIE Trunk Relay Restriction TRR 10 E 1 03 10 I 4 00 11 C 17 00 11 C 57 01 11 C 57 03 ...

Page 349: ...ment Configuration DN Assignment Configuration Channel Assignment System Clock Mode CLK Master Clock Priority CLP ESF Frame Option EFO System Programming Reference VT Dumb 11 C 2 00 11 C 3 00 11 C 56 01 11 C 56 02 11 C 56 03 11 C 56 04 10 C 2 00 10 C 3 00 10 C 4 00 Conditions 1 Up to eight T 1 cards 192 ports can be installed to the system under the following conditions 512 ports system 192 ports ...

Page 350: ... your system is interfaced by T 1 interface with another exchange Refer to Section 11 C 56 02 System Clock Mode CLK and Section 11 C 56 03 Master Clock Priority CLP 2 The T 1 card needs to be installed to free slot no 1 5 or 9 Physical port number for each T 1 trunk channel is as follows Slot No 1 5 9 Channel 1 16ch 17 24ch 1 16ch 17 24ch 1 16ch 17 24ch Port No X0101 X0116 X0201 X0208 X0501 X0516 ...

Page 351: ...e Trunk Group Types 2 If the destination specifying signal is not sent from a local CO you can choose one of these Trunk Group Types The installer must arrange for the following parameters with the Central Office or E 1 provider Type of Interface DR2 E M C E M P Frame format PCM30 PCM30 CRC Line coding AMI HDB 3 Signaling DP DTMF MFC R2 Trunk Interface DR2 channel DID Direct Inward Dialing Refer t...

Page 352: ...ter Answer Signal Wait Time AWT MFC R2 Option MRO 11 C 15 00 11 C 16 00 11 C 17 00 11 C 20 00 11 C 36 00 11 C 45 00 11 C 60 00 11 C 64 00 11 C 56 07 10 E 1 01 10 E 1 02 10 E 1 03 10 F 1 00 10 I 2 00 Charge Management System Programming Reference VT Dumb E 1 Signaling Option ESO 11 C 56 08 System Programming Reference VT Dumb Pulsed E M PEM 11 C 56 09 Refer to Section 3 F 17 00 Charge Management fo...

Page 353: ...X Shelf No 1 Basic 2 Expansion 1 3 Expansion 2 Note The channels 16 and 32 are used as to the signaling channel therefore these channels are not available for CO line programming 3 F 93 Channel 1 16 ch 17 32 ch 1 16 ch 17 32 ch 1 16 ch 17 32 ch Port No X0101 X0116 X0201 X0216 X0501 X0516 X0601 X0616 X0901 X0916 X1001 X1016 Slot No 1 5 9 ...

Page 354: ...6189 or the E1 DIGITAL TRUNK Card KX T96188 Available with the DR2 channel on E1 DIGITAL TRUNK Card when your Central Office E 1 provider supports Metering Pulse Service 3 F 94 Panasonic 7 4 1 0 8 5 2 9 6 3 Restricted At an extension which has reached the charge limit The extension user cannot make CO calls any more If a user attempts CO calls Restricted is shown on the display of PITS System Prog...

Page 355: ...At a PITS extension Extension 100 Example Programming PITS System Programming Reference Changing Charge Management Password 12 C 10 00 PITS Station Programming Reference Charge Management Checking Clearing the Charge Meter Extensions Checking Clearing the Charge Meter ATT Checking the Charge Meter CO Line Checking the Charge Meter All CO Lines Checking Clearing the Charge Meter Account Code Cleari...

Page 356: ...t the pin number of D1 and D2 Digital Proprietary Telephone KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7250 Single Line Telephone 2 conductor wiring cord Connect the pin number of T and R To DHLC card Digital Proprietary Telephone KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7250 Single Line Telephone 2 conductor wiring cord Connect the pin number of T and R 4 conductor wiring cord Connect the pin number of T R D1 and D2 To DHLC card To mai...

Page 357: ...97 Programming Conditions The DHLC card is required to use the XDP feature Configuration DN Assignment Extension Station 1 4 XDP System Programming Reference VT Dumb 11 C 3 00 11 C 24 00 10 C 3 00 10 G 1 01 ...

Page 358: ...ser with the presentation of calling outside party s phone number 2 Outgoing CO calls only Provides the outside party with the presentation of caller s extension number 3 Both Incoming and Outgoing CO calls A combination 1 and 2 Calling outside party 477 1450 Caller s telephone number E 1 E 1 DR2 channel Central Office KX TD500 Panasonic 7 4 1 0 8 5 2 9 6 3 4771450 Display Ring Ring Called party E...

Page 359: ...FC R2 DIL 1 N If an incoming call comes in on more than two extensions simultaneously outside party s phone number is displayed on all call receiver s extensions display PITS only Call Forwarding If Call Forwarding except Call Forwarding to Trunk is set at the extension caller s phone number will be displayed on the extension where an incoming CO call will be forwarded Display example 4771450 indi...

Page 360: ...n Programming Conditions This feature applies to incoming CO calls only outgoing CO calls only or both of incoming and outgoing CO calls depending on the system programming The call duration time limit is programmable for 01 to 60 minutes The call duration time of any CO calls except a CO to CO call can be limited by this feature The CO to CO Call Duration timer applies to a CO to CO call This fea...

Page 361: ...Section 4 Station Features and Operation Proprietary Integrated Telephone System PITS ...

Page 362: ......

Page 363: ... 4 A 28 4 06 Station Name Display 4 A 29 5 00 DPITS Special Display LCD 4 A 30 5 01 Display Contrast Adjustment 4 A 30 5 02 Volume Control Handset Receiver Headset Ringer Speaker 4 A 30 5 03 Special Display Feature KX T7235 only 4 A 32 B Feature Buttons 4 B 1 1 00 Fixed Feature Buttons 4 B 1 2 00 Assignable Feature Buttons 4 B 3 3 00 Line Access Buttons 4 B 5 3 01 PDN Button 4 B 5 3 02 SDN Button ...

Page 364: ...ecutive Busy Override 4 C 23 8 00 Do Not Disturb DND Override 4 C 24 9 00 Walking COS Class of Service 4 C 25 10 00 Operator Call 4 C 26 11 00 Front Call 4 C 27 D Receiving Features 4 D 1 1 00 Line Selection Answering 4 D 1 1 01 Ringing Line Preference Answering 4 D 1 1 02 Prime Line Preference Answering 4 D 2 1 03 No Line Preference Answering 4 D 3 1 04 Direct Answering Pre selection 4 D 3 2 00 A...

Page 365: ... 4 F 8 2 00 Call Forwarding FWD 4 F 9 2 01 Call Forwarding All Calls 4 F 9 2 02 Call Forwarding Busy Off Hook 4 F 12 2 03 Call Forwarding No Answer 4 F 15 2 04 Call Forwarding Busy Off Hook No Answer 4 F 18 2 05 Call Forwarding to Trunk 4 F 21 G Conversation Features 4 G 1 1 00 Programmable Privacy 4 G 1 2 00 Privacy Release 4 G 2 3 00 Privacy Attach 4 G 3 4 00 Hands Free Conversation 4 G 4 5 00 C...

Page 366: ...Service 4 I 2 1 03 Switching of Day Night Mode 4 I 3 2 00 Account Code Entry 4 I 5 3 00 Timed Reminder Alarm Clock 4 I 7 4 00 Background Music BGM 4 I 9 5 00 Secret Dialing 4 I 10 6 00 Data Line Security 4 I 11 7 00 Absent Message Capability 4 I 12 8 00 Message Waiting 4 I 15 9 00 Electronic Station Lockout 4 I 18 10 00 Assigned Feature Clear 4 I 19 11 00 Remote Station Feature Control 4 I 20 12 0...

Page 367: ...rated Telephone System telephones are provided to utilize the various features of the KX TD500 system in addition to supporting basic telephone service making and answering calls This section describes special features and required operation of PITS telephones 4 A 1 ...

Page 368: ...r 3 FWD DND Button and Indicator 4 PAUSE Button 5 TRANSFER Button 6 AUTO MEMORY Button and Indicator 1 2 4 5 6 7 9 11 10 12 Microphone 3 Refer to the following page Panasonic CONF FWD DND PAUSE TRANSFER AUTO SAVE MEMORY REDIAL FLASH HOLD AUTO ANS MUTE SP PHONE 1 4 7 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PRS TUV WXY OPER 8 Type 20 Common Location of Feature Buttons illustrated below is common to all Ty...

Page 369: ...er Buttons and Indicators ICM Button and Indicator KX T61620 DN Directory Number Buttons and Indicators ICM Button and Indicator CO3 ICM DN3 DN1 CO1 CO2 CO3 CO6 CO5 CO4 DN6 DN5 DN4 DN3 DN2 DN1 ICM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ICM 12 11 10 DN12 DN11 DN10 DN9 DN8 DN7 DN6 DN5 DN4 DN3 DN2 DN1 CO2 CO1 DN2 Location of DN buttons is specific to each model as follows MESSAGE ...

Page 370: ...234 1234 1234 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 4 5 6 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 7 8 9 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 10 11 12 Programmable Feature buttons PF04 PF01 PF07 PF10 PF03 PF06 PF09 PF12 PF02 PF05 PF11 PF08 ...

Page 371: ... Buttons 3 CONF Button and Indicator 4 FWD DND Button and Indicator 5 PAUSE Button 6 TRANSFER Button 7 AUTO MEMORY Button and Indicator 8 AUTO ANS MUTE Button and Indicator 9 SP PHONE Button and Indicator 10 SAVE Button 11 REDIAL Button 12 FLASH Button 13 HOLD Button Panasonic CONF FWD DND PAUSE TRANSFER AUTO SAVE MEMORY REDIAL FLASH HOLD AUTO ANS MUTE SP PHONE 1 4 7 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 ABC DEF GHI JKL ...

Page 372: ...tor KX T30830 DSS Direct Station Selection Buttons and Indicators DN Directory Number Buttons and Indicators ICM Button and Indicator MESSAGE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ICM 12 11 10 DN12 DN11 DN10 DN9 DN8 DN7 DN6 DN5 DN4 DN3 DN2 DN12 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 CO1 CO2 ICM CO3 DSS7 DSS6 DSS5 DSS4 DSS3 DSS2 DSS1 DN3 DN2 DN1 DSS8 CO1 CO2 CO3 CO6 CO5 CO4 DN6 DN5 DN4 DN3 DN2 DN1 ICM Location of DN buttons is speci...

Page 373: ...234 1234 1234 1234 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 4 5 6 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 7 8 9 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 10 11 12 Programmable Feature buttons PF04 PF01 PF07 PF10 PF03 PF06 PF09 PF12 PF02 PF05 PF11 PF08 ...

Page 374: ...to the following page Memory Card 1 2 1 PF Programmable Feature Buttons 2 TRANSFER Button 3 AUTO MEMORY Button 4 PAUSE Button 5 MONITOR Button 6 CONF Button 7 REDIAL Button 8 FLASH Button 9 HOLD Button Panasonic TRANSFER AUTO CONF MEMORY REDIAL FLASH HOLD PAUSE MONITOR 1 4 7 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PRS TUV WXY OPER 4 ...

Page 375: ...er Buttons and Indicators ICM Button and Indicator KX T61650 DN Directory Number Buttons and Indicators ICM Button and Indicator CO3 ICM DN3 DN1 CO1 CO2 CO3 CO6 CO5 CO4 DN6 DN5 DN4 DN3 DN2 DN1 ICM MESSAGE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ICM 12 11 10 DN12 DN11 DN10 DN9 DN8 DN7 DN6 DN5 DN4 DN3 DN2 DN1 CO2 CO1 DN2 Location of DN buttons is specific to each model as follows ...

Page 376: ...4 A 10 Programmable Feature buttons F1 F2 F3 TRANSFER PF01 PF02 PF03 ...

Page 377: ...PRS 4 GHI 1 0 OPER 8 TUV 5 JKL 2 ABC 9 WXY 6 MNO 3 DEF 3 4 12 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 INTERCOM CONF FWD DND MESSAGE TRANSFER PAUSE AUTO DIAL STORE AUTO ANSWER MUTE SP PHONE REDIAL FLASH HOLD 13 14 HYBRID SYSTEM 1 PF Programmable Feature Buttons 2 DN Directory Number Buttons and Indicators 3 INTERCOM Button and Indicator 4 CONF Button and Indicator 5 FWD DND Button and Indicator 6 MESSAGE Button and In...

Page 378: ... SYSTEM 1 LCD Liquid Crystal Display 2 PF Programmable Feature Buttons 3 DN Directory Number Buttons and Indicators 4 INTERCOM Button and Indicator 5 CONF Button and Indicator 6 FWD DND Button and Indicator 7 MESSAGE Button and Indicator 8 TRANSFER Button 9 PAUSE Button 10 AUTO DIAL STORE Button and Indicator 11 AUTO ANSWER MUTE Button and Indicator 12 SP PHONE Button and Indicator 13 REDIAL Butto...

Page 379: ...LASH HOLD 10 11 12 HYBRID SYSTEM KX T7050 4 A 13 1 PF Programmable Feature Buttons 2 DN Directory Number Buttons and Indicators 3 INTERCOM Button and Indicator 4 MESSAGE Button and Indicator 5 TRANSFER Button 6 PAUSE Button 7 AUTO DIAL STORE Button and Indicator 8 CONF Button 9 MONITOR Button and Indicator 10 REDIAL Button 11 FLASH Button 12 HOLD Button ...

Page 380: ...STEM 1 LCD Liquid Crystal Display 2 PF Programmable Feature Buttons 3 DN Directory Number Buttons and Indicators 4 INTERCOM Button and Indicator 5 CONF Button and Indicator 6 FWD DND Button and Indicator 7 SAVE Button 8 MESSAGE Button and Indicator 9 TRANSFER Button 10 PAUSE Button 11 AUTO DIAL STORE Button and Indicator 12 AUTO ANSWER MUTE Button and Indicator 13 SP PHONE Button and Indicator 14 ...

Page 381: ...M Button VOLUME Control Button AUTO DIAL STORE Button AUTO ANSWER MUTE Button REDIAL Button FLASH Button HOLD Button Microphone Back View See diagram below Flexible CO Buttons CO 01 through CO 24 SP PHONE Button MESSAGE Button FWD DND Button CONF Button ICM Button Used for XDP or parallel connections with a Single Line Telephone a Telephone Answering Machine or a FAX Used to connect with the KX TD...

Page 382: ...N 0 KX T7230 SHIFT Button TRANSFER Button PROGRAM Button Flexible CO Buttons CO 01 through CO 24 ICM Button CONF Button FWD DND Button MESSAGE Button PAUSE Button Soft Buttons S1 through S3 Display Liquid Crystal Display with 16 character 2 line readout Shows the date time dialed number or name call duration time etc In Programming mode it shows the Programming messages ...

Page 383: ...INTERCOM CONF FWD DND MSSSAGE PAUSE TRANSFER 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 VOLUME AUTO DIAL STORE AUTO ANSWER MUTE SP PHONE HOLD FLASH REDIAL Used for XDP or parallel connections with a Single Line Telephone a Telephone Answering Machine or a FAX Used to connect with the KX TD500 System XDP eXtra Device Port expands the number of telephones available in the system by allowing an extension port to ...

Page 384: ... 12 Function Buttons F6 through F10 Display Liquid Crystal Display with 24 character 6 line readout Shows the date time dialed number or name call duration time etc In Programming mode it shows the Programming messages Function Buttons F1 through F5 PROGRAM Button Back View ICM Button CONF Button FWD DND Button MESSAGE Button PAUSE Button TRANSFER Button To tilt up or take down the display Press t...

Page 385: ...lel connections with a Single Line Telephone a Telephone Answering Machine or a FAX Used to connect with the KX TD500 System XDP eXtra Device Port expands the number of telephones available in the system by allowing an extension port to contain two telephones Refer to Section 3 F 18 00 Extra Device Port XDP Connection Back View See diagram below REDIAL Button FLASH Button HOLD Button Microphone VO...

Page 386: ...Button MONITOR Button works as a SP PHONE button RINGER Volume Selector Used to adjust the ringer volume PROGRAM Button VOLUME Control Button AUTO DIAL STORE Button TRANSFER Button Flexible CO Buttons CO 01 through CO 06 ICM Button Back View See diagram below Back View Used for XDP or parallel connections with a Single Line Telephone a Telephone Answering Machine or a FAX Used to connect with the ...

Page 387: ... 13 HIGH LOW Sets the desired ringer volume OFF The telephone does not ring NORMAL HIGH Determines the desired handset volume A sliding lever used to control the speaker volume Set to LOW MID or HIGH to choose the best display intensity HANDSET Normal operation HEADSET When using an optional headset KX T7090 OFF Normal operation ON When power failure occurs See Section 15 H 1 00 This is used to se...

Page 388: ...Location Type 20 50 1 VOLUME Control 2 RINGER Volume Selector 3 MEMORY Switch MAX MIN VOLUME RINGER LOW OFF HIGH SET PROGRAM MEMORY 4 A 22 1 2 3 ...

Page 389: ...NTRAST Selector 4 DIALING MODE Selector MAX MIN VOLUME RINGER LOW OFF HIGH CONTRAST M L H TONE PULSE DIALING MODE 5 POWER FAILURE Switch 6 MEMORY Switch 7 HANDSET HEADSET Selector HANDSET HEADSET OFF ON POWER FAILURE SET PROGRAM MEMORY 4 A 23 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ...

Page 390: ...RINGER VOLUME Selector VOLUME Control Left VOLUME RINGER HANDSET VOLUME TO HANDSET VOLUME HIGH OFF LOW NORMAL HIGH MAX MIN HANDSET VOLUME Selector RINGER VOLUME Selector VOLUME Control Left SET PROGRAM MEMORY TO EMSS MEMORY Switch Rear HANDSET HEADSET HIGH LOW MIC SET PROGRAM CONTRAST MEMORY TO EMSS MEMORY Switch HANDSET HEADSET Selector CONTRAST Selector Rear ...

Page 391: ...rriving with 240 winks min and is called 240 wink Pattern 2 Shows holding a call with 60 winks min and is called 60 wink Pattern 3 Shows Unattended Conference and Privacy Release with 120 winks min and is called 120 wink Light on steady shows busy status and light off shows idle status Pattern 1 240 wink Pattern 2 60 wink Pattern 3 120 wink 1 sec 4 A 25 ...

Page 392: ...by Date Time Set Up Screen and Change Date Time Extensions assigned to a Class of Service in which Maintenance Capability is set to Yes can also set the time and date Refer to Section 12 C 2 00 Setting Date and Time Programming Conditions None PITS System Programming Reference Setting Date and Time 12 C 2 00 System Programming Reference VT Dumb Date Time Set Up Screen Change Date Time System Class...

Page 393: ... apply to extension calls An example of the display is shown below DDD02 1 30 25 second minute hour For an incoming call from an outside party the duration starts at the time an extension answers the call For outgoing calls to outside parties the starting time of count is assignable in System System Timer SMDR Duration Time Programming Conditions Holding of an outside party or in conference with o...

Page 394: ...ns None Operation None System Programming Reference VT Dumb Trunk CO Line Trunk Name Extension Station 1 4 Station Name 11 C 20 00 11 C 24 00 10 F 1 00 10 G 1 01 4 05 Station Programmed Data Display Description When a PITS provided with the display is on hook and the SP PHONE button is off pressing the following buttons provides the display of the kind of the pressed button or the content assigned...

Page 395: ...alled party answers on the SDN button the display on the calling station changes as follows When calling extension 1234 1234 Tony After extension 1000 whose SDN is owned by extension 1234 answers the call 1000 Jack System Programming Reference VT Dumb Extension Station 1 4 Station Name 11 C 24 00 10 G 1 01 The example below shows the display on the calling station when calling an extension assigne...

Page 396: ...e Control Handset Receiver Headset Ringer Speaker Description Allows you to adjust the following volumes as desired Handset Receiver volume level 1 through 4 Headset volume level 1 through 4 Ringer volume level 0 through 3 Speaker volume level 1 through 12 If your DPT is provided with the display display DPT the volume level is indicated on the display by the number of asterisks For ringer volume ...

Page 397: ...ing or idle 1 Press the RING S2 button The display shows Example Ringer 2 Press the VOLUME UP Z DOWN X Control button The telephone will stop ringing in about 4 seconds When the volume level is 0 no indication the display shows RINGOFF For KX T7220 and KX T7250 1 Slide the lever of the RINGER Volume Selector as desired OFF LOW HIGH S2 RING VOLUME VOLUME OFF HIGH LOW To adjust the speaker volume 1 ...

Page 398: ...ing All Calls Busy No Answer Busy No Answer to CO Line About the Display and Buttons The display shows the various features Initial display Helpful Information on Display Operation Press CONT S1 to adjust the display contrast Press RING S2 to adjust the ringer volume Press BGM S3 to turn on off the BGM Press CANCEL S3 to return to the previous menu Press MAIN S1 to return to the main menu Press NE...

Page 399: ...all Answer Feature Jan 1 12 00AM CONT RING BGM 9 822 1234 9 823 4567 5449 5550 5431 PREV NEXT CANCEL F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 Station Speed Dialing Allows you to make a one touch call by selecting a name or number maximum 10 entries 1 Press the STA Speed F2 button 2 Press the desired Fx Button Example To select 9 823 4567 press the F2 or F7 button Press the SHIFT butto...

Page 400: ...execute the Paging Group Paging External and Paging All call 1 Press the Page Call F5 button 2 Press the desired Fx button Example To call by selecting Paging Group press the F7 button 3 Press the desired Fx button Example To select Group 1 press the F1 button 4 After pressing Fx the specified group paging call begins Reference 4 H 1 00 Paging F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 ...

Page 401: ...FT S3 S2 S1 MAIN TAFAS Page INT Page EXT Pickup Pickup DN HOLD RET Park SYS Park STA Jan 1 12 00AM F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 CONT RING BGM F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 MAIN TAFAS 1 TAFAS 2 CANCEL Answer TAFAS Answering Menu This menu provides a display of the answering features Available features are as follows 1 Trunk Answer From Any Station TA...

Page 402: ...n the Answering Menu after the paging tone Example Extension 100 is paging 2 Press the Page INT F3 button 3 Start Speaking to extension 100 The display shows Reference 4 H 1 01 Paging All Extensions 4 H 1 02 Group Paging F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 TAFAS Page INT Page EXT Pickup F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 MAIN F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 ...

Page 403: ...tton while the extension belongs to same pickup group is ringing 2 Start speaking to the caller Example When the caller is extension 100 the display shows Reference 4 D 3 01 Dial Call Pickup TAFAS Page INT Page EXT Pickup F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 MAIN Pickup DN HOLD RET Park SYS Park STA TAFAS Page INT Page EXT Pickup F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 ...

Page 404: ... is parked in the system press the Park SYS F9 button 2 Select the call park entry you wish to answer Example When the extension DN121 is parked at the system parking 01 the display shows To answer the parked call press the F1 button The KX TD500 has 20 call parking area The first screen is for parking area 01 to 10 If you select parking area 11 to 20 press the PREV S1 or NEXT S2 button Reference ...

Page 405: ...which is parking a call 3 The talking to the parked party begins Example When the parked party is extension 100 display shows Reference 4 E 5 02 Call Park Station TAFAS Page INT Page EXT Pickup F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 MAIN Pickup DN HOLD RET Park SYS Park STA F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 Call Park STA Retrieve Input the Ext No F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 P...

Page 406: ...Menu is consist of two screens To enter these menu press the Feature F8 button The first display The following display is the first display of the System Feature Access menu By pressing NEXT S2 button the second display appears The second display The following is the second display of the Feature Access menu By pressing PREV S1 button the first display appears F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F1...

Page 407: ... Busy Override allow press the F9 button Reference 4 C 7 00 Executive Busy Override 4 D 5 00 Executive Busy Override Deny F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 Busy Over Voice Call BSS OHCA C Pickup C Waiting Absent MSG STA Lock Timed ALRM Func CLR Operator NEXT CANCEL F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 Busy Over Voice Call BSS OHCA C Pickup C Waiting Absent MSG ...

Page 408: ...r deny Call Pickup 1 Press the C Pickup F4 button 2 To set Call Pickup deny press the F8 button To set Call Pickup allow press the F9 button Reference 4 D 3 01 Dial Call Pickup 4 D 3 02 Directed Call Pickup 4 D 3 03 Call Pickup Deny MAIN Deny Allow CANCEL Call Pickup F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 Busy Over Voice Call BSS OHCA C Pickup C Waiting Absent MSG STA Lock Timed ALR...

Page 409: ...GRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 Busy Over Voice Call BSS OHCA C Pickup C Waiting Absent MSG STA Lock Timed ALRM Func CLR Operator NEXT CANCEL F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 MAIN Setting Cancelling CANCEL Absent Message Service F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 CANCEL Will Return Soon Gone Home In a...

Page 410: ... 0 PM 1 2 Enter the date MO means 1 month digit D means 1 date digit For example if you want to set the date Jan 1 enter 0101 Example To select At Ext 1 Press the NEXT S2 then the F8 button in the message selection menu 2 Enter the extension directory number Conditions You can cancel the message by going off hook and on hook If you did not register the flexible messages Not Stored appears F1 F2 F4...

Page 411: ...SHIFT S3 S2 S1 MAIN Lock Unlock CANCEL Station Lock F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 Busy Over Voice Call BSS OHCA C Pickup C Waiting Absent MSG STA Lock Timed ALRM Func CLR Operator NEXT CANCEL 3 When you press the F9 button following screen appears Dial the lock code which was dialed to lock the extension The extension willl be unlocked Reference 4 I 9 00 Electronic Station ...

Page 412: ... Func CLR Operator NEXT CANCEL F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 MAIN Setting Cancelling Confirmation CANCEL Timed Reminder F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 Timed Reminder Input the Time HH MM AM 0 PM 1 One Time 0 Everyday 1 F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 You can cancel the Timed R...

Page 413: ...N Setting Cancelling CANCEL Call Coverage Path Clearing Station Feature setting Allows you to clear the extension features assigned to it Clearable features are Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Absent Message Timed Reminder Walking Station Walking COS Call Coverage Path 1 Press the Func CLR F9 button 2 If you confirm press the Yes F8 button Reference 4 I 10 00 Assigned Feature Clear F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 P...

Page 414: ...Call Answer Feature Do Not Disturb F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Allows the extension Call Forwarding FWD or Do Not Disturb DND Available features are a Do Not Disturb b Call Forwarding All Calls c Call Forwarding Busy Off Hook d Call Forwarding No Answer e Call Forwarding to Trunk f Call Forwarding Busy Off Hook No Answer g FWD DND cancel Whe...

Page 415: ...ed SYS Speed Extension Page Call Answer Feature FWD BSY Ext116 F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 Call Forwarding All Calls You can redirect all of your calls to another extension 1 Press the FWD ALL F3 button 2 Enter the extension number you wish to forward the call 3 You hear the confirmation tone and then a dial tone Example If you enter directory number 116 the display shows...

Page 416: ... S2 S1 DND FWD ALL FWD BUSY FWD NA FWD CO FWD BSY NA All Cancel Forwarding To Trunk Input the Outward Dial STA Speed SYS Speed Extension Page Call Answer Feature FWD CO 9456712 Call Forwarding No Answer Your calls are forwarded to another extension when you do not answer the telephone within a pre determined time 1 Press the FWD NA F5 button 2 Enter the extension directory number you wish to forwa...

Page 417: ...No Answer You can forward your calls to another extension when your extension is busy or when you do not answer the telephone within a pre determined time 1 Press the FWD BSY NA F8 button 2 Enter the extension number you wish to forward the call 3 You hear the confirmation tone and then a dial tone Example If you enter the phone number 116 the display shows Reference 4 F 2 04 Call Forwarding Busy ...

Page 418: ...e Operator Feature menu appears Remote Feature Access Allows you to set each extensions features Changeable features are 1 Wakeup Timed Reminder 2 DND set or cancel 3 FWD cancel 4 Station lock or unlock When you select the Remote FEAT F6 button on the Operator Feature menu the Remote Feature Access menu appears F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 MAIN CANCEL Wake up DND Set DND C...

Page 419: ...1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 DND set or cancel for remote extension Allows you to set or cancel DND of other extensions 1 Press the DND Set F4 button on the Remote Feature Access menu 2 Enter the extension number Example To set DND of extension 100 dial 100 To cancel DND press the DND Cancel F5 button on the Remote Feature menu then enter the extension number to be canceled...

Page 420: ...Cancel STA Lock STA Unlock Remote Feature F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 Station lock or unlock Allows you to lock or unlock other extensions 1 Press the STA Lock F9 button on the Remote Feature Access menu 2 Enter the extension number 100 Example To lock extension 100 dial 100 To unlock the extension push the STA Unlock ...

Page 421: ... UNA1 2 in Night Mode 1 Press the DEST Night F8 button on Operator Feature menu 2 Enter the trunk physical and the destination extension number To assign incoming call to UNA1 2 enter 1 or 2 instead of the extension directory number Example To assign the trunk 10801 to UNA1 enter 10801 1 Reference 4 I 1 01 Universal Night Answer UNA 4 I 1 02 Flexible Night Service F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F...

Page 422: ...nditions You need to assign the correct OGM type UCD OGM1 2 DISA OGM Wakeup OGM of the DISA card by system programming before using this feature As soon as you finish press the MEMORY button Reference 4 I 13 00 Outgoing Message OGM Recording and Playing Back F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 CANCEL MAIN Remote FEAT Day Night DEST Night OGM BGM E Page F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F...

Page 423: ...ber is programmed by system programming Special Attended DISA Reference 4 I 13 00 Outgoing Message OGM Recording and Playing Back F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 MAIN Recording Playing Special Playing CANCEL OGM Rec and Play F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 MAIN CANCEL Select the Card No Card 1 Card 3 Card 2 Card 4 F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 S...

Page 424: ...pending on whether the BGM is ON or OFF Reference 4 H 2 00 Background Music BGM through External Pager F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 MAIN Setting Cancelling CANCEL BGM External Pager STA Speed SYS Speed Extension Page Call Answer Feature F1 F2 F4 F3 F5 PROGRAM F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SHIFT S3 S2 S1 External BGM On CANCEL MAIN Re...

Page 425: ...E PAUSE REDIAL LNR SAVE SNR ICM INTERCOM AUTO ANS MUTE AUTO ANSWER MUTE HOLD TRANSFER FWD DND CONF FLASH MESSAGE Type 20 30 Type 50 1 7020 7030 7050 1 7130 None None None None None None None 2 3 4 4 3 2 2 Note In the above list Feature Buttons marked have an LED indicator 1 The MONITOR button is provided instead of the SP PHONE button 2 The SAVE button can be assigned to the PF or DN button 3 The ...

Page 426: ...all again by pressing the key AUTO ANS MUTE AUTO ANSWER MUTE Button and Indicator This dual function button is used to automatically answer an intercom call or disable the microphone during handsfree operation HOLD Button This button allows the set user to place any call at the set on hold TRANSFER Button This is used to transfer an outside or an intercom call to another extension FWD DND Button a...

Page 427: ...uttons by type of buttons Features PDN Primary Directory Number SDN Secondary Directory Number PRV CO Private CO SINGLE CO Single CO GROUP CO Group CO OHCA Off Hook Call Announcement MESSAGE Message Waiting LOGIN UCD Log In ALARM Local Alarm CONF Conference DSS DN Direct Station Selection DN VM TRANS Voice Mail Transfer ONETOUCH One Touch Dialing PRV CHG Privacy Change EXT FEAT External Feature Ac...

Page 428: ... Number Extension Station 2 4 3 4 Extension Station 4 4 PF Key Type and Number Extension DSS Console 2 3 Extension DSS Console 3 3 11 C 24 00 11 C 26 00 11 C 27 00 11 C 28 00 10 G 1 01 10 G 1 02 10 G 1 03 10 G 2 02 10 G 2 03 PITS Station Programming Reference DN Directory Number Button Assignment PF Programmable Feature Button Assignment DSS Direct Station Selection Button Assignment 13 C 1 00 13 ...

Page 429: ...ype and Number By default setting PDN button is seized automatically by simply lifting the handset or pressing the SP PHONE button DN 03 DN 02 DN 01 ICM PDN DN buttons PITS type 20 30 50 DN 3 DN 2 DN 1 PDN DN buttons PITS 7000 7200 series Programming Conditions The table below shows the relationship between the DN button and the extension status Indicator Off Lights green Green 60 wink Green 120 w...

Page 430: ... indicators is as follows 1 I use hold exclusive hold consultation hold unattended conference Lights green Green 60 wink Green 120 wink 2 Incoming call Red 240 wink 3 Other hold Red 60 wink 4 Privacy Release Red 120 wink 5 Busy Lights red 6 Idle Off System Programming Reference VT Dumb Extension Station 2 4 3 4 DN Key Type and Number 11 C 26 00 10 G 1 02 10 G 1 03 Indicator Off Lights green Green ...

Page 431: ...mber of the Private CO line Programming System Programming Reference VT Dumb Group Trunk Group 1 3 Type Trunk CO Line Trunk Group Extension Station 2 4 3 4 Type and Number 11 C 15 00 11 C 20 00 11 C 26 00 10 E 1 01 10 F 1 00 10 G 1 02 10 G 1 03 Conditions A Private CO button lights up red at the times below 1 When the Private CO line is not In Service 2 When the Private CO line has been set to Bus...

Page 432: ...s green Green 60 wink Green 120 wink Green 240 wink Lights red Red 60 wink Red 120 wink Red 240 wink CO Line Status Idle I use I hold I exclusive hold consultation hold unattended conference Incoming call DIL 1 1 Other use exclusive hold Other hold Privacy release possible Incoming call DIL 1 N Conditions When you press the SCO button which lights in red by using another user the Automatic Callbac...

Page 433: ...ne in trunk group and no incoming CO call I use I hold I exclusive hold consultation hold unattended conference CO line receiving an incoming call except for DIL 1 N No idle CO lines in trunk group and no incoming call in trunk group CO line receiving an incoming call DIL 1 N only Conditions Pressing a Group CO button when it is red serves to set the Automatic Callback to Trunk function See Sectio...

Page 434: ......

Page 435: ... by simply lifting the handset or pressing the SP PHONE button On Hook Dialing If No Line Preference is selected no line is accessed until the user directly presses the desired button Every PITS telephone is assigned to Prime Line Preference on PDN button by default setting This can be changed on a PITS telephone basis using PITS station programming Refer to Section 13 C 4 00 Automatic Line Huntin...

Page 436: ...e prime line is busy When two or more PDN buttons are assigned on a PITS up to three PDN buttons can be assigned per PITS line selection feature always functions if at least one PDN button is available PITS Station Programming Reference Automatic Line Hunting Calling Selection 13 C 4 00 This feature is available when a PITS telephone has no incoming call or when a PITS telephone does not answer an...

Page 437: ... hook that is Ringing Line Preference Answering overrides Idle Line Preference Calling Refer to Section 4 D 1 01 Ringing Line Preference Answering for further information The user can override the preferred line temporarily to access another line Pre selection To override the line without lifting the handset nor pressing the SP PHONE button press the desired line access button listed below PDN but...

Page 438: ...Calling Selection 13 C 4 00 2 00 On Hook Dialing Description On Hook Dialing enables various hands free dialing operation This permits the PITS telephone users without lifting the handset to access a line and dial telephone numbers and feature numbers or do other dialing performances Programming None Conditions If Prime Line Preference or Idle Line Preference is assigned to a PITS pressing the SP ...

Page 439: ...een You hear dial tone 1 3 or 4 2 Dial the telephone number of the other party By using the Private CO button 1 Press the Private CO button The indicator on the SP PHONE button lights in red The indicator on the Private CO button lights in green You hear dial tone 1 2 Dial the telephone number of the outside party By using the Single CO button 1 Press the Single CO button The indicator on the SP P...

Page 440: ...xtension user hears reorder tone the user is restricted from accessing this feature Refer to Section 3 C 1 01 Toll Restriction for Local Trunk Dial Access for further information If tenant service is employed accessible trunk groups are limited to the trunk groups within the same tenant System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Local Access Group Hunt Sequence System Numbering Plan 2 11 Local CO...

Page 441: ...ne the user is restricted from accessing the specified trunk group Refer to Section 3 C 1 02 Toll Restriction for Individual Trunk Group Dial Access Direct Trunk Access for further information Operation 1 Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button You hear dial tone 1 3 or 4 2 Specifying one trunk group from 01 to 48 1 Dial the feature number for Trunk Group Access Default 8 2 Dial the number f...

Page 442: ...ion about CO button features refer to Section 3 D 2 07 through 2 09 Programming Condition Direct trunk access for making calls can be done by simply pressing the appropriate CO button without lifting the handset or pressing the SP PHONE button Refer to Section 4 C 2 00 On Hook Dialing for related information System Programming Reference VT Dumb Extension Station 2 4 3 4 DN Key Type Number 11 C 26 ...

Page 443: ...ing Reference DN Directory Number Button Assignment PF Programmable Feature Button Assignment DSS Direct Station Selection Button Assignment 13 C 1 00 13 C 2 00 13 C 3 00 Example For calling an outside party automatically Local CO Line Access telephone number The feature numbers for selecting a CO line are Local CO Line Access Trunk Group 01 48 Access Operation Making a call using One Touch Dialin...

Page 444: ...stem Programming Reference Storing Speed Dialing System 12 C 3 00 Operation Calling an outside party using Speed Dialing System 1 Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button The indicator on the SP PHONE button lights in green You hear dial tone 1 3 or 4 2 Press the AUTO button The indicator on the AUTO button lights You hear no tone 3 Dial the speed dialing code The registered number is sent Su...

Page 445: ...0 and 01 to 16 TRLSD 00 receives a treatment different from TRLSDs 01 to 16 In TRLSD 01 to 16 01 is the highest level and 16 is the lowest 1 Toll Restriction Plan for System Speed Dialing Code TRLSD 00 When an outgoing CO call is made by dialing a System Speed Dialing Code TRLSD 00 extension users receive standard toll restriction treatment If selected speed dialing code includes Local Trunk Dial ...

Page 446: ...all is made Transmit the registered number to CO line Checks a call against System Toll Restriction feature The call is prohibited sends reorder tone When an outgoing CO call is made by dialing a System Speed Dialing Code TRLSD 00 TRLE TRLSD not restricted restricted TRLE TRLSD In this case Local Trunk Dial Access restriction and Individual Trunk Group Dial Access restriction assigned in Class of ...

Page 447: ...even one digit is sent to CO line Dialing a feature number for selecting a CO line only does not renew the memorized number Operation Calling an outside party by LNR on the DN button or the CO button 1 Press the DN button or the CO button The indicator on the pressed button lights in green You hear dial tone 1 3 or 4 2 Press the REDIAL LNR button If the last call was made on the CO button calling ...

Page 448: ...ther party answers Conversation Programming Conditions Besides the number this function memorizes the button DN or CO used for the last call and executes automatic redial on that button Pressing the REDIAL LNR button while the last used button is in use causes the system to wait until the button becomes idle As soon as the button becomes idle this function is executed If the last used button was t...

Page 449: ...ress the AUTO button 2 Press the SAVE SNR button System saves the dialed telephone number 3 Replace the handset or press the SP PHONE button Calling an outside party by SNR on the DN button or the CO button 1 Press the DN button or the CO button The indicator on the pressed button lights in green You hear dial tone 1 3 or 4 2 Press the SAVE SNR button If the saved call was on the CO button calling...

Page 450: ...er information You can also make an inter office calling with the ICM button In this case the called party cannot transfer the call to an outside party Operation Calling an extension with the handset 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the directory number of the other extension You hear ringback tone 3 When the other party answers start conversation 4 After concluding conversation replace the handset Calli...

Page 451: ... hear dial tone 1 3 or 4 2 Dial the feature number for Voice Calling Mode Set Default 57 You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2 If your PITS has a display it shows Voice Alerting System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Numbering Plan 6 11 Voice Calling Mode Set Voice Calling Mode Cancel 11 C 11 00 10 D 6 06 Canceling the Voice Calling mode 1 Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button The indicat...

Page 452: ... Reference VT Dumb System Class of Service 1 3 BSS OHCA 11 C 7 00 10 D 4 01 3 Dial 3 With DPITS only KX T7235 7230 press the BSS S1 button You hear ringback tone The indicator on the DN button of the other station flashes in 240 wink Supplement If the all DN button of the other station is occupied the caller hears busy tone Answering the call The indicator on the DN button flashes in 240 wink When...

Page 453: ...LC card allows one APITS telephone can be called with the OHCA feature at the same time In the system programming assign System Class of Service 1 3 BSS OHCA to Yes at calling extension assign Extension Station 1 3 OHCA Circuit to Yes at the called extension and assign OHCA Button at the called extension Programming Conditions OHCA does not work if the called extension is under one of the followin...

Page 454: ... is available or not If there is no idle line you will hear a busy tone As soon as a CO line becomes idle it will be seized Once the extension is off hook the last number dialed is sent and you will hear the CO line ring Type 1 is the default Each type can be set to a trunk group by the dumb command CAI This function can activate extensions that are set to Yes in the Automatic callback Trunk of St...

Page 455: ...en a CO line becomes idle you will hear the callback ring 6 Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button The last number dialed is dialed automatically CAI Yes Default 1 Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button You hear dial tone 1 2 or 4 The indicator on the PDN button lights green 2 Dial the specified CO line or press the CO button PCO SCO GCO When a CO line is not available you will hear ...

Page 456: ...after hearing busy tone you hear reorder tone and cannot execute this feature Even if an extension user sets Call Forwarding No Answer or Do Not Disturb Automatic Callback Station is effective to that extension Automatic Callback Station cannot be set by the extension which has a call on consultation hold Operation 1 Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button You hear dial tone 1 The indicator ...

Page 457: ... Busy Override does not function when the other party is any one of the following status Three party conversation OHCA conversation Private CO conversation Setting Do Not Disturb Executive Busy Override does not function if either of two parties in conversation has set the followings Executive Busy Override Deny Refer to Section 4 D 5 00 Data Line Security Refer to Section 4 I 6 00 System Programm...

Page 458: ...is case it is possible to assign Automatic Callback Station etc For Automatic Callback Station refer to Section 4 C 6 02 Automatic Callback Station If System Class of Service Do Not Disturb Override is set to No the caller hears reorder tone after dialing 1 and cannot call the other party System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Class of Service 1 3 Do Not Disturb Override 11 C 7 00 10 D 4 01 O...

Page 459: ...e SP PHONE button 2 Dial the feature number for Walking COS Set Default 81 System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Operation 3 3 Walking COS Password System Tenant Walking COS Password Tenant 2 System Numbering Plan 7 11 Walking COS Set Walking COS Cancel 11 C 5 00 11 C 5 00 11 C 11 00 10 D 1 03 10 D 2 00 10 D 6 07 3 Dial the four digit Walking COS Password 4 Dial the extension number of your ...

Page 460: ...or each tenant that makes four operators available for a system If two operators are assigned in the system or in the tenant if tenant Service is employed extension users can specify the operator in the same tenant by dialing the feature number for Operator Call Specific Programming Conditions When calling an operator by dialing the feature number for Operator Call General the operator is selected...

Page 461: ...st be assigned each front extensions The extension user also can call the extension which is assigned to the front extension Voice Call is not available for the extension which is assigned to the front extension System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Operation 3 3 Front Extension 1 2 3 4 System Numbering Plan 11 11 Front Call 1 2 3 4 11 C 5 00 11 C 11 00 10 D 1 03 10 D 6 11 Operation 1 Lift t...

Page 462: ......

Page 463: ... can be selected by this feature include PDN SDN PCO SCO and GCO buttons Programming Conditions If two or more line on a PITS are ringing simultaneously a PITS telephone user is connected to the first line to start ringing If a PITS telephone user wishes to answer a line other than the first ringing line the desired line access button must be pressed prior to going off hook Refer to Section 4 D 1 ...

Page 464: ...e SP PHONE button is considered as a calling operation If you wish to answer the call at the time press the desired line access button Refer to Section 4 C 1 01 Prime Line Preference Calling for related information It is possible to answer desired incoming call by pressing the appropriate DN or CO button directly without lifting the handset or pressing the SP PHONE button Direct Answering Refer to...

Page 465: ... is regarded as calling operation Operation A call arrives and your telephone is ringing The indicator on the button which the call is reaching flashes in 240 wink 1 Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button then press the button on which the call is coming The indicator on the call receiving button lights in green Talk to the caller PITS Station Programming Reference Automatic Answering Selec...

Page 466: ... extension hears a beep tone This feature applies to extension calls only Programming None Conditions Type 50 and KX T7050 KX T7250 PITS telephones cannot use this function Operation Setting Hands Free Answerback Be sure the handset is on hook and the SP PHONE is off 1 Press the AUTO ANS button The indicator on the AUTO ANS button lights Canceling Hands Free Answerback Be sure the handset is on ho...

Page 467: ...on System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Numbering Plan 6 11 Voice Calling Deny Set Voice Calling Deny Cancel 11 C 11 00 10 D 6 06 Operation To deny Answer Voice Calling 1 Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button 2 Dial the feature number for Voice Calling Deny Set Default 58 You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2 and then dial tone 1 3 or 4 If your PITS has a display it shows V Alerting Den...

Page 468: ...tension user basis Programming Conditions Use the PDN button to assign and cancel this function System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Class of Service 1 3 BSS OHCA Deny System Numbering Plan 5 11 BSS OHCA Deny Set BSS OHCA Deny Cancel 11 C 7 00 11 C 11 00 10 D 4 01 10 D 6 05 Operation To deny BSS OHCA 1 Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button 2 Dial the feature number for BSS OHCA Deny...

Page 469: ...wer the following calls 1 A call ringing at an extension outside of the same call pickup group 2 A call ringing at an extension on which Dial Call Pickup Deny is set Refer to Section 4 D 3 03 Call Pickup Deny for further information 3 A call ringing on PCO button If extension users attempt to pick up the above mentioned calls reorder tone sounds after dialing the feature number for Dial Call Picku...

Page 470: ...ging at an extension on which Dial Call Pickup Deny is set Refer to Section 4 D 3 03 Call Pickup Deny for further information 2 A call ringing on PCO button For the above calls reorder tone sounds after dialing the feature number for Directed Call Pickup and the following message appears on the display if provided No Incoming Call System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Numbering Plan 3 11 Dir...

Page 471: ... other extensions System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Numbering Plan 5 11 Dial Call Pickup Deny Set Dial Call Pickup Deny Cancel 11 C 11 00 10 D 6 05 Operation Assigning Call Pickup Deny 1 Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button 2 Dial the feature number for Dial Call Pickup Deny Set Default 51 You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2 and then dial tone 1 3 or 4 If your PITS has a display i...

Page 472: ...her information about UNA refer to Section 4 I 1 01 Universal Night Answer UNA Programming System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Operation 1 3 External Paging 1 2 System Numbering Plan 9 11 Night Answer 1 Night Answer 2 Group Trunk Group 1 3 Incoming Mode Day Trunk CO Line Trunk Group Trunk Pager Music Source External Pager Tenant 11 C 4 00 11 C 11 00 11 C 15 00 11 C 20 00 11 C 21 00 10 D 1 ...

Page 473: ...System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Class of Service 1 3 Executive Busy Override Deny System Numbering Plan 5 11 Busy Override Deny Set Busy Override Deny Cancel 11 C 7 00 11 C 11 00 10 D 4 01 10 D 6 05 Operation Assigning Executive Busy Override Deny 1 Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button 2 Dial the feature number for Busy Override Deny Set Default 54 You hear confirmation tone 1...

Page 474: ... information To answer a call ringing at another extension by Call Pickup feature Refer to Section 4 D 3 00 Call Pickup for further information System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Class of Service 1 3 Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb System Numbering Plan 5 9 Do Not Disturb Set Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Cancel 11 C 7 00 11 C 11 00 10 D 4 01 10 D 6 05 4 FWD DND Setting DND feature cancel...

Page 475: ...Dial the feature number for Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Cancel Derfault 0 You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2 and then dial tone 1 3 or 4 If your PITS has a display it shows FWD DND Cancel 3 Replace the handset or press the SP PHONE button The FWD DND indicator remains off Canceling Do Not Disturb 2 1 Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button The indicator light on the FWD DND button goes out...

Page 476: ...IL 1 N call to Group CO Single CO DIL 1 1 call to Single CO Other calls Other extension which has SDN assigned or not No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Extension which has DND assigned PDN Indicator off No ring 1 Green 240 wink No ring Indicator off No ring 1 Green 240 wink No ring Green 240 wink No ring Green 240 wink Ring Green 240 wink No ring Indicator off No ring Indicator off No ring...

Page 477: ...tions Use the PDN button to assign and cancel Call Waiting While Call Waiting is active the waiting tone and the display if provided are executed by the following timing Reference VT Dumb System Programming System Numbering Plan 5 11 Call Waiting Set Call Waiting Cancel 10 D 6 05 11 C 11 00 15 0 sec Call waiting tone LCD display The new caller is The current other The new caller shown flashed part...

Page 478: ...l Waiting A call from an extension or an outside party arrives while having a conversation The indicator on the DN or the CO button flashes in 240 wink You hear call waiting tone Talking to the new caller by concluding the current call 1 Press the flashing DN or CO button The current call is disconnected Talk to the new caller on the pressed DN or CO button Talking to the new caller by holding the...

Page 479: ... shows UCD Logout 3 Replace the handset or press the SP PHONE button 8 00 Uniform Call Distribution UCD Log Out Description UCD group members may leave the group temporarily by dialing the feature number for UCD Log Out or using the programmable UCD Log In button to prevent UCD calls being sent to their extensions Refer to Section 3 D 2 06 Uniform Call Distribution UCD with without OGM Programming...

Page 480: ...og In button goes out If your PITS has a display it shows UCD Login 3 Replace the handset or press the SP PHONE button Canceling UCD Log Out 1 1 Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button You hear dial tone 1 3 or 4 2 Dial the feature number for UCD Log In Default 0 You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2 If your PITS has a display it shows UCD Login 3 Replace the handset or press the SP PHONE button...

Page 481: ... be disconnected automatically Music on Hold will be sent to the held party if available For sending Music on Hold prior assignment is necessary Refer to Section 3 E 1 00 Music on Hold for further information Operation Placing a Call on Hold In conversation on the DN SCO GCO or PCO button 1 Press the HOLD button If the call is on the DN or SCO or GCO button the indicator on the button flashes in g...

Page 482: ...f a held call has not been answered within the pre assigned time a warning tone may sound at extension which placed a call on hold Refer to Section 3 E 2 00 Held Call Reminder for further information If a held call is not answered within 30 minutes it will be disconnected automatically Music on Hold will be sent to the held party if available For sending Music on Hold prior assignment is necessary...

Page 483: ...ld Call Reminder If a held call is not answered within 30 minutes it will be disconnected automatically Music on Hold will be sent to the held party if available For sending Music on Hold prior assignment is necessary Refer to Section 3 E 1 00 Music on Hold for further information Operation Placing a call on Consultation Hold on one DN button 1 Press the TRANSFER or CONF button The DN button in us...

Page 484: ...ved You can talk to the party The DN button changes from flashing in 120 wink to being lit in green or Retrieving a call on Consultation Hold 2 You have placed a call on Consultation Hold and are talking on another DN or CO button 1 Press the TRANSFER button A call on Consultation Hold is retrieved and you can talk to the retrieved party The DN or CO button changes from flashing in green 120 wink ...

Page 485: ...a call the other extension holds no call reorder tone is returned and the following message appears on the display if provided No Hold Call The following calls cannot be retrieved from other extensions A call held on PCO button A call placed on Exclusive Hold A call place on Consultation Hold System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Numbering Plan 3 11 Hold Extension Retrieve 11 C 11 00 10 D 6 ...

Page 486: ...ype 11 C 5 00 11 C 11 00 11 C 26 00 11 C 27 00 10 D 2 00 10 D 6 04 10 G 1 02 10 G 1 03 10 G 1 04 PITS Station Programming DN Directory Number Button Assignment PF Programmable Feature Button Assignment DSS Direct Station Selection Button Assignment Reference 13 C 1 00 13 C 2 00 13 C 3 00 Conditions If Tenant Service is employed 20 parking areas can be split between two tenants in System Tenant Cal...

Page 487: ...case dialing another parking area number 01 to 20 allows you to try a new call park destination To talk to the party placed on Consultation Hold again while hearing busy tone 1 or 2 follow the same procedure as retrieving Consultation Hold Refer to Section 4 E 3 00 Consultation Hold 4 Replace the handset or press SP PHONE button Supplement In step 1 when you are talking on the CO button pressing t...

Page 488: ... Key Type Extension Station 4 4 PF Key Type 11 C 11 00 11 C 26 00 11 C 27 00 10 D 6 04 10 G 1 02 10 G 1 03 10 G 1 04 PITS Station Programming DN Directory Number Button Assignment PF Programmable Feature Button Assignment DSS Direct Station Selection Button Assignment Reference 13 C 1 00 13 C 2 00 13 C 3 00 Conditions A parked call will be disconnected automatically by the system if it is not answ...

Page 489: ...ing the Call Park Station button is ignored If your PITS has a display it shows Call Prked at ST If you fail in Call Park Station another call is already parked you hear busy tone 1 or 2 If your PITS has a display it shows Park at ST N A To talk to the other party placed on Consultation Hold while hearing busy tone 1 or 2 follow the procedure identical to retrieving Consultation Hold Refer to Sect...

Page 490: ...onversation with the retrieved party is possible After the circular call splitting chain is constructed every pressing of the SPLIT button provides Exclusive Hold on the current party again and establishes a conversation with the next oldest party Programming Conditions Pressing the SPLIT button during a doorphone conversation paging conversation etc is ignored it is impossible to hold those conve...

Page 491: ...ive Hold and chained to the call splitting chain Start conversation with the new caller 3 During a conversation press the SPLIT button every time a new call arrives Then press the SPLIT button again while no call is arriving The current party is joined to the call splitting chain that completes a circular chain Start conversation with the first held party 4 Press the SPLIT button Every pressing of...

Page 492: ......

Page 493: ...cified period starts calling back the originator of transfer 1 For detail refer to Section 3 E 3 00 Transfer Recall Unscreened Call Transfer to extension is ineffective Transferred party is treated simply as a party placed on Consultation Hold Hanging up causes the Consultation Hold Recall to the originator of transfer If Music on Hold is available from the start of the transferring operation unti...

Page 494: ... Press the TRANSFER button The other party is placed on Consultation Hold You hear confirmation tone 2 and then dial tone 1 3 or 4 If your PITS has a display it shows Transfer to 2 Dial the directory number of the destination three or four digits You hear ringback tone 3 After the destination answers make the announcement 4 Replace the handset or press the SP PHONE button The transferred party and...

Page 495: ...ers the system sends Music on Hold to the transferred party For further detail refer to Section 3 E 1 00 Music on Hold System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Class of Service 1 3 CO Transfer Mode Group Trunk Group 1 3 CO CO Duration Limit 11 C 7 00 11 C 15 00 10 D 4 01 10 E 1 01 Operation 1 During a conversation with an outside party or an extension on the DN button 1 Press the TRANSFER butto...

Page 496: ...s a display it shows Transfer to The CO key becomes flashing in green 120 winks The INTERCOM button lights in green 2 Press the PDN button The INTERCOM button becomes idle The PDN button lights in green 3 Call another outside party You hear the ringback tone through the CO line 4 When the destination answers you can make the announcement 5 Replace the handset or press the SP PHONE button The held ...

Page 497: ...on Button Assignment 13 C 1 00 13 C 2 00 13 C 3 00 Operation Executing screened Ringing Transfer During a conversation with an outside party or an extension on the SDN button The indicator on the SDN button is lit in green 1 Press the Ringing Transfer button You hear ringback tone When the owner extension is PITS the indicator on the owner s PDN button changes from red light to green 240 wink 2 Wh...

Page 498: ...erring operation For further detail refer to Section 3 E 1 00 Music on Hold If the maintenance device On Site or Remote is in use busy tone is returned to the holding party System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Operation 2 3 Remote Directory Number 11 C 4 00 10 D 1 02 Operation During a conversation with an extension or an outside party on the DN or CO button 1 Press the TRANSFER button The ...

Page 499: ...TT FWD mode This feature does not function A call is simply put on Consultation Hold that is a call will ring back at the extension who tries to transfer the call as soon as he or she goes on hook 5 Music on Hold If Music on Hold is available the system sends Music on Hold to the transferred party from the start of the transferring operation till the destination party answers Operation During a co...

Page 500: ...conds See page 3 D 13 for further information Operation During a conversation with an outside party 1 Press the TRANSFER button The other party is put on Consultation Hold You hear confirmation tone 2 and then dial tone 1 3 or 4 If your PITS has a display it shows Transfer to 2 Dial the FDN for UCD group 01 to 04 You hear confirmation tone 3 and then dial tone 1 3 or 4 3 Replace the handset or pre...

Page 501: ... 11 Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Cancel 11 C 7 00 11 C 11 00 11 C 11 00 10 D 4 01 10 D 6 04 10 D 6 05 Conditions To set or cancel this function use the PDN button An extension user may have only one type of Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb feature in effect at any time If a second type is assigned the previously assigned type is canceled Call Forwarding All Calls feature functions even if the exte...

Page 502: ...n Service Result Call is forwarded to destination Busy tone is sent from destination DND tone is sent from destination Busy tone is sent from destination Call is placed on setting extension Call is forwarded to destination Call is forwarded and kept waiting at destination Same as call reaching DND See Section 4 D 6 00 Do Not Disturb DND Call is forwarded and kept waiting at destination Call is pla...

Page 503: ...our digits When setting operators as the destination If an operator is Attendant Console FWD All ATT If an operator is extension FWD All Ext xxxx Directory number three or four digits 4 Replace the handset or press the SP PHONE button The indicator on the FWD DND button starts flashing Canceling Call Forwarding All Calls 1 Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button The indicator light flashing ...

Page 504: ...n 4 11 Call Forwarding Busy Set System Numbering Plan 5 11 Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Cancel 11 C 7 00 11 C 11 00 11 C 11 00 10 D 4 01 10 D 6 04 11 D 6 05 Conditions To set or cancel this function use the PDN button An extension user may have only one type of Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb feature in effect at any time If a second type is assigned the previously assigned type is canceled If th...

Page 505: ...onditions except In Service Idle status Busy status Assigned to DND PITS programming mode Conditions except In Service Idle status Busy status Assigned to DND PITS programming mode Conditions except In Service Result Call is forwarded to destination Call is placed on setting extension Call is forwarded to destination Call is placed on setting extension Call is forwarded to destination Call is plac...

Page 506: ...ur digits When setting operators as the destination If an operator is Attendant Console FWD BSY ATT If an operator is extension FWD BSY Ext xxxx Directory number three or four digits 4 Replace the handset or press the SP PHONE button The indicator on the FWD DND button starts flashing Canceling Call Forwarding Busy Off Hook 1 Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button The indicator light flashi...

Page 507: ... Cancel Programming Conditions An extension user may have only one type of Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb feature in effect at any time If a second type is assigned the previously assigned type is canceled If the extension to which calls are to be forwarded itself is in a call forward mode a call is not forwarded furthermore The call rings at the first forwarded extension In case of an outside cal...

Page 508: ...onditions except In Service Idle status Busy status Assigned to DND PITS programming mode Conditions except In Service Idle status Busy status Assigned to DND PITS programming mode Conditions except In Service Result Call is forwarded to destination Call is placed on setting extension Call is forwarded to destination Call is placed on setting extension Call is forwarded to destination Call is plac...

Page 509: ...four digits When setting operators as the destination If an operator is Attendant Console FWD NA ATT If an operator is extension FWD NA Ext xxxx Directory number three or four digits 4 Replace the handset or press the SP PHONE button The indicator on the FWD DND button starts flashing Canceling Call Forwarding No Answer 1 Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button The indicator light flashing o...

Page 510: ...ture number for Call Forwarding Busy No Answer and Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Cancel Programming Conditions An extension user may have only one type of Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb feature in effect at any time If a second type is assigned the previously assigned type is canceled If the extension to which calls are to be forwarded itself is in a call forward mode a call is not forwarded furt...

Page 511: ...onditions except In Service Idle status Busy status Assigned to DND PITS programming mode Conditions except In Service Idle status Busy status Assigned to DND PITS programming mode Conditions except In Service Result Call is forwarded to destination Call is placed on setting extension Call is forwarded to destination Call is placed on setting extension Call is forwarded to destination Call is plac...

Page 512: ...four digits When setting operators as the destination If an operator is Attendant Console FWD B N ATT If an operator is extension FWD B N Ext xxxx Directory number three or four digits 4 Replace the handset or press the SP PHONE button The indicator on the FWD DND button starts flashing Canceling Call Forwarding Busy Off Hook No Answer 1 Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button The indicator ...

Page 513: ...unction two methods are available 1 By pressing the FWD DND button 2 By dialing the feature number for Call Forwarding to Trunk and Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Cancel Programming Conditions To set or cancel this function use the PDN button An extension user may have only one type of Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb feature in effect at any time If a second type is assigned the previously assigned...

Page 514: ... Idle status Busy status Conditions except In Service Idle status Busy status Conditions except In Service Idle status Busy status Conditions except In Service Result Call is forwarded to external destination Call is placed on setting extension Call is forwarded to external destination Call is placed on setting extension Call is placed on setting extension Forwarding possible Forwarding impossible...

Page 515: ...y capacity FWD CO 9201123 4 Replace the handset or press the SP PHONE button The indicator on the FWD DND button starts flashing Supplement The system does not check the dialed number toll restriction level and the feature number for selecting a CO line when the extension user is setting this function Canceling Call Forwarding to Trunk 1 Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button 2 Press the FW...

Page 516: ......

Page 517: ... call on PDN button which is owner including SLT of this SDN A call on the pressed Single CO button Pressing PDN or SDN Ignored Pressing SCO or GCO Cause Automatic Callback Trunk 2 In non privacy system When you are making outside calls with PDN button another party cannot barge in your call by pressing SCO button It will cause Automatic Callback Trunk Operation Intruding on a busy line in non pri...

Page 518: ...0 13 C 3 00 Button employed by the talking extension SDN PDN SCO The other extension to be allowed to override The PITS having the PDN that is the owner of the SDN All PITS s having the SDN s owned by the PDN All PITS s having the same Single CO Conditions Privacy Release feature overrides Data Line Security feature assigned to the extension Operation The following example shows the procedure for ...

Page 519: ... red again regardless of the status of extensions such as on hook If either or both of the two extensions in conversation in a non privacy system sets Privacy Attach no other extension is able to override the conversation by pressing the PDN SDN or Single CO button System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Operation 1 3 Privacy on DN Key Extension Station 2 4 3 4 DN Key Type Extension Station 4 ...

Page 520: ...is on hook and the SP PHONE button is off 1 Press the SP PHONE button The microphone and the speaker for the speakerphone are activated and hands free operation and conversation is available Changing the handset conversation mode to the hands free conversation mode 1 Press the SP PHONE button The microphone and the speaker for the speakerphone are activated and the handset sends no tone 2 Replace ...

Page 521: ...234 E5678 Directory numbers of the extensions When one is an extension and the other is an outside party E1234 Panas Leading five digits of the CO line s name When both of the other members are outside parties Matsu Panas Programming Conditions Pressing the HOLD button during a conference is ignored Pressing the CONF button after calling the second party offers conference status If no conference t...

Page 522: ...ble instead of pressing the CONF button in step 1 In this case the indicator on the CONF button is off in step 1 then in step 3 it lights in red by pressing the CONF button To change the conference member after step 2 press the FLASH button and execute step 2 again Concluding a Conference One Appearance 1 Replace the handset or press the SP PHONE button If both B and C are outside parties both par...

Page 523: ...o members When both of the other members are extensions E1234 E5678 Directory numbers of the extensions When one is an extension and the other is an outside party E1234 Panas Leading five digits of the CO line s name When both of the other members are outside parties Matsu Panas Programming Conditions Pressing the CONF button after calling the second party establishes conference If no conference t...

Page 524: ...red in step 4 by pressing the CONF button To change the conference member after step 3 press the FLASH button and execute step 3 again Concluding a Conference Two Appearances 1 Replace the handset or press the SP PHONE button If both B and C are outside parties both parties are disconnected If both B and C are extension users or either of them is an extension users a conference between B and C is ...

Page 525: ...ons If the extension is not allowed to execute this function in Class of Service or either or both of the other parties are not outside ones pressing the CONF button during the conference is ignored When the two occupied CO lines belong to different trunk groups the following time limits apply to each case In the case one party is an outgoing CO call the other is an incoming CO call The duration l...

Page 526: ...s in green The indicator on the CONF button lights in red Answering Unattended Conference Recall If on hook Unattended Conference Recall starts If off hook call waiting tone sounds 1 Press the green DN button that is flashing in 120 wink You return to the conference The indicator on the DN button lights in green Supplement If no conference trunks are available at the time returning to the conferen...

Page 527: ...C 15 00 10 D 4 01 10 E 1 01 Conditions If the extension is not allowed to execute this function in Class of Service or either or both of the other parties are not outside ones pressing the CONF button is ignored When the two occupied CO lines belong to different trunk groups the following time limits apply to each case If one party is an outgoing CO call and the other is an incoming CO call The du...

Page 528: ...n green The indicator on the CONF button lights in red Answering Unattended Conference Recall If on hook Unattended Conference Recall starts If off hook call waiting tone sounds 1 Press either of the two buttons flashing in green 120 wink You join the conference again Both the indicators on the buttons light in green The indicator on the CONF button lights in red Supplement If no conference trunks...

Page 529: ... System Numbering Plan 3 11 Doorphone Call 1 4 Extension Doorphone 11 C 11 00 11 C 29 00 10 D 6 03 10 G 3 00 Conditions Only conversations are available for the door phone call The other functions such as Hold Transfer are all ineffective When a visitor presses the button on the door phone ping pong tone sounds twice then doorphone call ringing starts No answer of the call in 15 seconds cancels th...

Page 530: ...n again without hanging up The FLASH button can be used for this procedure While still on the CO or DN line press the FLASH button and dial tone will be returned While or after talking on a CO line the system releases the CO DC loop after the FLASH button is pressed for the specified period assigned in Group Trunk Group Disconnect Time Programming Conditions While or after talking on a CO line pre...

Page 531: ...3 11 External Feature Access Group Trunk Group 1 3 Hook Switch Flash Time Group Trunk Group 2 3 Max Dial No after EFA Signal Extension Station 2 4 3 4 DN Key Type Extension Station 4 4 PF Key Type 11 C 11 00 11 C 15 00 11 C 16 00 11 C 26 00 11 C 27 00 10 D 6 03 10 E 1 01 10 E 1 02 10 G 1 02 10 G 1 03 10 G 1 04 PITS Station Programming Reference DN Directory Number Button Assignment PF Programmable...

Page 532: ...Access button With DPITS only KX T7235 7230 press the EFA S2 button The first party is held Start conversation with the second party Finishing conversation with the second party and starting conversation with the first party again 1 Press the External Feature Access button again in case of DPITS only KX T7235 7230 press the EFA S2 button Start conversation with the first party 4 G 16 EFA S2 EFA S2...

Page 533: ...hones in the handsets Setting and canceling this function is available only when the SP PHONE is on Pressing the AUTO ANS MUTE button when the SP PHONE is off sets Hands Free Answerback Refer to Section 4 D 2 01 Hands Free Answerback While Microphone Mute is set the indicator on the AUTO ANS MUTE button flashes in 60 wink Operation Setting Microphone Mute During a hands free conversation 1 Press t...

Page 534: ... Slot Assignment Extension Station 1 4 OHCA Circuit Extension Station 2 4 3 4 DN Key Type 11 C 2 00 11 C 24 00 11 C 26 00 10 C 2 00 10 G 1 01 10 G 1 02 10 G 1 03 Conditions OHCA can be received only with the PITS KX T7235 KX T7130 KX T123235 and KX T123230D telephones OHCA does not work if the called extension is under one of the following conditions The OHCA button is not idle Talking in the spea...

Page 535: ...etermines the time limit between dialing digits System System Timer External First Digit Time Out System System Timer External Inter Digit Time Out System System Timer Toll Restriction Guard Time Out System Programming Reference VT Dumb Extension Station 2 4 3 4 DN Key Type Extension Station 4 4 PF Key Type 11 C 26 00 11 C 27 00 10 G 1 02 10 G 1 03 10 G 1 04 PITS Station Programming Reference DN D...

Page 536: ......

Page 537: ...for Station Paging Answer Programming System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Class of Service 3 3 Station Paging Access System Numbering Plan 3 11 Station Paging Station Paging Answer 11 C 9 00 11 C 11 00 10 D 4 03 10 D 6 03 Conditions Single Line Telephones cannot be paged If all of the extensions assigned to be paged are being paged by another page busy tone is returned to the new paging pe...

Page 538: ...button 2 Dial the feature number for Station Paging Answer Default 42 After hearing confirmation tone 3 talk to the paging performer Transferring a call using Paging All Extensions During a conversation with an extension or outside party 1 Press the TRANSFER button The other party is placed on hold You hear dial tone 1 3 or 4 2 Dial the feature number for Station Paging Default Y42 and dial 0 You ...

Page 539: ...VT Dumb System Class of Service 3 3 Station Paging Access System Numbering Plan 3 11 Station Paging Station Paging Answer 11 C 9 00 11 C 11 00 10 D 4 03 10 D 6 03 Conditions Single Line Telephones cannot be paged If the designated paging group is being paged by another pager busy tone is returned to the new paging performer However he can do page within the range not overlap the previous paging ra...

Page 540: ...al the feature number for Station Paging Answer Default 42 After hearing confirmation tone 3 talk to the paging performer Transferring a call using Group Paging During a conversation with an extension or an outside party 1 Press the TRANSFER button The other party is placed on hold You hear dial tone 1 3 or 4 2 Dial the feature number for Station Paging Default 42 and paging group number 1 to 8 Yo...

Page 541: ...al Paging System Numbering Plan 3 11 External Paging External Paging Answer Trunk Pager Music Source External Pager Tenant External Pager Tone 11 C 4 00 11 C 9 00 11 C 11 00 11 C 21 00 10 D 1 01 10 D 4 03 10 D 6 03 10 F 2 00 Conditions If the designated pager is being used busy tone is returned to the paging performer If either or both of the pagers in a tenant are being used it is not possible to...

Page 542: ...ent 1 Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button 2 Dial the feature number for External Paging Answer Default 41 3 Dial the number of the external pager 1 or 2 After you hear confirmation tone 3 talk to the caller who made the page Transferring a call using Paging External Pagers During a conversation with an extension or an outside party 1 Press the TRANSFER button The other party is placed on...

Page 543: ...ogramming Conditions Refer to Section 4 H 1 01 Paging All Extensions and Section 4 H 1 03 Paging External Pagers System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Class of Service 3 3 Station Paging Access External Paging 1 2 System Numbering Plan 3 11 External Paging Station Paging External Paging Answer Station Paging Answer 11 C 9 00 11 C 11 00 10 D 4 03 10 D 6 03 Operation Performing Paging All Exte...

Page 544: ...l Extensions and External Pagers During a conversation with an extension or an outside party 1 Press the TRANSFER button The other party is placed on hold You hear dial tone 1 3 or 4 2 Dial the feature number for Station Paging Default Y42 or the feature number for External Paging Default Y41 then dial Y You hear confirmation tone 3 If your PITS has a display it shows All Call Page 3 Start paging ...

Page 545: ...xternal music equipment and external pager to a tenant is possible by using Trunk Pager Music Source External Pager Tenant and Music Source Tenant Assign Trunk Pager Music Source External Pager BGM to Yes to use this function This assignment can be done to each external pager Also assign Trunk Pager Music Source Music Source For Use to either BGM or Hold BGM This assignment can be done to each ext...

Page 546: ...If your PITS has a display it shows External BGM On 3 Replace the handset or press the SP PHONE button Turning BGM off when BGM is on 1 Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button 2 Dial the feature number for BGM Through External Pager Default 66 After you hear confirmation tone 2 BGM from the external pager s stops If your PITS has a display it shows External BGM Off 3 Replace the handset or p...

Page 547: ...n the system to answer the incoming CO calls ringing at an external pager by dialing the feature number for Night Answer 1 or 2 To activate this feature set Group Trunk Group Incoming Mode Night to FIXED or FLEXIBLE and Trunk CO Line Night Answer Point to UNA 1 or UNA 2 UNA 1 is associated with External Pager 1 and UNA 2 is associated with External Pager 2 All CO lines that belong to this trunk gr...

Page 548: ... for Flexible Night Service To utilize this feature set Group Trunk Group Incoming Mode Night to FLEXIBLE All CO lines that belong to this trunk group are covered by this assignment If FIXED is selected for the above setting the assigned night answer destination cannot be changed by the Operator 1 Call handling in Flexible and Fixed night service is almost the same The difference is Programming Co...

Page 549: ...ize Auto Switching mode set System Operation 3 3 Night Service to Auto and assign desired mode switching time to Auto Start Time on a per day of the week basis To utilize Manual Switching mode set System Operation 3 3 Night Service to Manual The Operator 1 however can override the Auto Mode setting that is Manual Mode is established by dialing the feature number for Night Service Manual Mode Set T...

Page 550: ...andset or press the SP PHONE button Switching Night mode to Day mode 1 Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button 2 Dial the feature number for Night Mode Cancel Default 83 You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2 If your PITS has a display it shows Day Mode 3 Replace the handset or press the SP PHONE button Switching Auto mode to Manual mode 1 Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button 2 Dial the ...

Page 551: ...urposes The code entry is appended to the SMDR call record and can be used later An account code can include up to 10 digits of numeric characters It is able to select the entering of account code Forced or Optional In the forced mode the account code must be entered before making an outgoing CO call In the optional mode enter the account code if necessary You can override the toll restriction by ...

Page 552: ...ND button goes out Entering an account code after calling an outside party or after receiving a call from an outside party in the Option mode 1 Press the FWD DND button during a conversation with the outside party With DPITS only KX T7230 press the ACCT S3 button The indicator on the FWD DND button lights If your PITS has a display it shows Enter ACCNT Code 2 Dial the account code Maximum digits f...

Page 553: ...ll By going off hook the extension user can hear the wake up message if it has been recorded beforehand The extension user may hear BGM or intermittent tone dial tone 2 instead of the wake up message See Section 3 F 13 00 Timed Reminder with OGM wake up call This feature can be set to operate only once or everyday at a specified time Programming Conditions 1 What if the extension is busy or off ho...

Page 554: ...very day at 9 00 a m is preset Example Alarm 9 00 AM 3 Replace the handset or press the SP PHONE button Supplement When a user executes step 2 by a PITS set without display reorder tone is heard To stop the ringing of alarm tone When the preset time comes alarm tone sounds If your PITS has a display it shows Example Alarm 5 00 PM 1 Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button Alarm tone stops and...

Page 555: ...porarily Going back on hook restarts BGM To set and cancel this function use the same feature number 1 While BGM is set dialing 1 cancels BGM reversely it sets BGM when BGM is not set To execute this function connect an external music source then set System Operation External Music Source 1 2 to Yes and set Trunk Pager Music Source Music Source For Use to either BGM or Hold BGM This setting BGM or...

Page 556: ...he display The telephone numbers are registered by System Speed Dial System or stored into Programmable Feature buttons on PITS and DSS consoles When storing a number bracket the secret part that you want to hide with Then the part does not appear on the display when the number is sent It is assignable to print out the secret part onto SMDR Station Message Detail Recording or not by System Operati...

Page 557: ...at the extension in data communication mode It also prohibits other extensions from executing overriding functions such as Busy Override To assign Data Line Security assign Extension Station Data Line Security to Yes Setting or canceling this function is executed using the feature number for Data Line Security Set or Data Line Security Cancel Programming Conditions Use the PDN button to set and ca...

Page 558: ...all Forwarding No Answer feature Call Forwarding No Answer is activated when the extension is called Refer to Section 4 F 2 03 Call Forwarding No Answer for further information 4 I 12 7 00 Absent Message Capability Description Provides an absent message on the display of a calling extension if the called extension has assigned an absent message An absent message appears only on the PITS telephones...

Page 559: ...ess the SP PHONE button 2 Dial the feature number for Absent Message Set Default 6 3 Dial 04 for fixed message 4 dial 05 for fixed message 5 or dial 06 for fixed message 6 4 Dial TIME for fixed message 4 or dial DATE for the fixed message 5 or dial directory number for fixed message 6 as follows Input format for TIME HH MM AM PM 01 to 12 hour 00 to 59 minute 0 for a m 1 for p m Input format for DA...

Page 560: ... parameters You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2 then dial tone 1 3 or 4 If your PITS has a display it shows the entered message 4 Replace the handset or press the SP PHONE button Canceling the assigned message 1 Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button 2 Dial the feature number for Absent Message Cancel Default 6 You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2 then dial tone 1 3 or 4 3 Replace the handset or...

Page 561: ... waiting indications sent by other extensions 2 All message waiting indications are canceled at once 4 I 15 8 00 Message Waiting Description Allows an extension user to indicate to another extension that a message is waiting for him or her by turning on the MESSAGE indicator button on the called extension The extension user who received the message waiting indication can call back the message send...

Page 562: ...r 4 If the other extension received only one message the MESSAGE indicator of the other extension goes out 3 Replace the handset or press the SP PHONE button Operation by Receiver At message receiver s extension Calling back the message sender 1 Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button 2 Press the MESSAGE button that is lit You hear ringback tone When the message sender answers start conversa...

Page 563: ...ender is displayed The calling order of the first message sender becomes the last and the second message sender becomes the first Note Repeating step 2 displays the message sender on the display of PITS type 30 one by one in receiving order The calling order also changes at the same time The illustration below shows the change at every pressing of the MESSAGE button in the illustration means press...

Page 564: ...c Station Lockout Description Electronic Station Lockout allows an extension user to prohibit other extension users from making outgoing CO calls from his or her extension Any three digit number 000 to 999 can be used as a lock code To execute this function assign System Class of Service Station Lock to Yes Programming Conditions Both Operator 1 and 2 extension user or Attendant Console can also s...

Page 565: ...f your PITS has a display it shows Ext Data Clear 3 Replace the handset 4 I 19 10 00 Assigned Feature Clear Description Allows an extension user to clear the following features assigned on it by dialing the feature number for Station Program Clear a Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb b Absent Message c Timed Reminder d Walking Station e Walking COS f Call Coverage Path Programming System Programming R...

Page 566: ...00 Remote Station Feature Control Description Allows the Operator 1 and 2 extension user or Attendant Console to cancel or set the following features assigned to each extension Features to be canceled DND Do Not Disturb Electronic Station Lock Out FWD Call Forwarding It is also possible to cancel FWD temporarily Features to be set DND Do Not Disturb Electronic Station Lock Out Programming Conditio...

Page 567: ...he handset or press the SP PHONE button Canceling Call Forwarding from an extension 1 Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button 2 Dial the feature number for Remote FWD Cancel Default Y76 3 Dial the directory number of the extension You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2 If your PITS has a display it shows FWD cancel E xxxx Extension number 4 Replace the handset or press the SP PHONE button Canceli...

Page 568: ...DSS Console provides a convenient way to transfer an incoming CO call to an extension user by simply pressing the associated DN DSS button instead of pressing the TRANSFER button and dialing the extension number See 4 I 12 01 Automatic Transfer The DSS Console can also be used to make an outgoing CO call and to access certain programmable feature e g Call Park System Up to 16 DSS Consoles one per ...

Page 569: ...PF buttons The assignment for the DSS buttons and PF buttons are programmed and changed either by the system programming or PITS station programming Programming Conditions None System Programming Reference VT Dumb Extension DSS Console 11 C 25 00 11 C 27 00 11 C 28 00 10 G 2 00 PITS Station Programming PF Programmable Feature Button Assignment DSS Direct Station Selection Button Assignment Referen...

Page 570: ... is impossible to place the current call on Consultation Hold the system ignores the pressing of the DN DSS button 2 If there is no idle PDN button the current call is placed on Consultation Hold and no tone sounds 3 If there is no idle PDN button the current call is disconnected and no tone sounds Music on Hold will be sent to the held party if available For sending Music on Hold prior assignment...

Page 571: ...tion 10 I 1 00 Special Attended DISA Programming System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Numbering Plan 9 11 OGM Record OGM Playback Special Attended DISA For Use 11 C 11 00 11 C 33 00 10 D 6 09 10 I 1 00 Conditions 1 Tenant Service If tenant service is employed the affiliation of each DISA card is determined by the system programming Special Attendant DISA tenant The Operator 1 of each tenant...

Page 572: ...gin your message 4 As soon as you finish press the MEMORY button The MEMORY indicator lights in red After confirmation tone 3 sounds the recorded message is played back automatically If your PITS has a display it shows xxxxxxxx Play 00 Indicates playback time counts up by second UCD OGM1 UCD OGM2 DISA OGM or Wkup OGM When playback is finished the MEMORY indicator goes out You hear confirmation ton...

Page 573: ...cts card 3 4 selects card 4 The MEMORY indicator lights in red You hear confirmation tone 3 then the message If your PITS has a display it shows Example DISA OGM Play 00 When playback is finished you hear confirmation tone 3 then no tone The MEMORY indicator goes out 3 Replace the handset or press the SP PHONE button Supplement In step 2 if you wish to interrupt and finish playback press the MEMOR...

Page 574: ... Reminder feature to any extension Refer to Section 4 I 3 00 5 G 3 00 Timed Reminder If Timed Reminder with OGM is programmed beforehand the extension user on which Remote Timed Reminder is set hears a wake up message Refer to Section 3 F 13 00 Timed Reminder with OGM Wake up Call Programming Conditions 1 The difference between Timed Reminder and Remote Timed Reminder is 2 At a single extension on...

Page 575: ... press the SP PHONE button Confirming the alarm time programmed to another extension PITS with display only 1 Lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button 2 Dial the feature number for Remote Timed Reminder Confirm Default 72 and the extension number to be confirmed the setting in succession The display on your PITS shows When no time is set Alarm Not Stored If executing at 9 00 a m is preset at ...

Page 576: ......

Page 577: ...Section 5 Station Features and Operation Single Line Telephone SLT ...

Page 578: ......

Page 579: ...back 5 A 14 4 01 Automatic Callback Trunk 5 A 14 4 02 Automatic Callback Station 5 A 16 5 00 Executive Busy Override 5 A 17 6 00 Do Not Disturb DND Override 5 A 18 7 00 Walking COS Class of Service 5 A 19 8 00 Operator Call 5 A 20 9 00 Front Call 5 A 21 B Receiving Features 5 B 1 1 00 Call Pickup 5 B 1 1 01 Dial Call Pickup 5 B 1 1 02 Directed Call Pickup 5 B 2 1 03 Call Pickup Deny 5 B 3 2 00 Tru...

Page 580: ... D 21 E Conversation Features 5 E 1 1 00 Conference 5 E 1 2 00 Doorphone 5 E 3 3 00 External Feature Access 5 E 4 F Paging Features 5 F 1 1 00 Paging 5 F 1 1 01 Paging All Extensions 5 F 1 1 02 Group Paging 5 F 3 1 03 Paging External Pagers 5 F 5 1 04 Paging All Extensions and External Pagers 5 F 7 2 00 Background Music BGM through External Pager 5 F 8 G Other Features 5 G 1 1 00 Night Service 5 G...

Page 581: ...xtension user hears reorder tone the EXTENSION is restricted from accessing this feature Refer to Section 3 C 1 01 Toll Restriction for Local Trunk Dial Access for further information If tenant service is activated accessible trunk group is limited to the trunk groups within the same tenant System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Local Access Group Hunt Sequence System Numbering Plan 2 11 Loca...

Page 582: ...ON is restricted from accessing the specified trunk group Refer to Section 3 C 1 02 Toll Restriction for Individual Trunk Group Dial Access Direct Trunk Access for further information System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Class of Service 2 3 Trunk Group Access System Numbering Plan 2 11 Trunk Group 01 48 Access 11 C 8 00 11 C 11 00 10 D 4 02 10 D 6 02 Operation 1 Lift the handset You hear d...

Page 583: ...e number for Local CO Line Access When calling an outside party by specifying the trunk group 811 411 3209 Feature number for Trunk Group 01 48 Access Each stored number can have up to 16 digits including CO line access code Numbers from 0 to 9 and can be registered System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Numbering Plan 2 11 Speed Dialing Station System Numbering Plan 7 11 Speed Dialing Statio...

Page 584: ...you want to store 5 Dial You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2 6 Replace the handset Supplement When using a rotary telephone pulse type wait until you hear confirmation tone in step 5 without dialing Executing Speed Dialing Station 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the feature number for Speed Dialing Station Default 2 No tone is heard 3 Dial the speed dialing code 0 to 9 Registered telephone number is sent ...

Page 585: ...ing CO line access code 0 9 PAUSE FLASH and SECRET can be registered Speed Dialing and manual dialing can be used in combination In this case execute Speed Dialing before manual dialing A feature number for selecting a CO line must be stored as leading digits The feature numbers for selecting a CO line are Local CO Line Access Trunk Group 01 48 Access System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Te...

Page 586: ... to as TRLSD in the following to each code as follows TRLSD consists of 17 levels 00 and 01 to 16 TRLSD 00 receives a treatment different from TRLSDs 01 to 16 In TRLSD 01 to 16 01 is the highest level and 16 is the lowest 1 Toll Restriction Plan for System Speed Dialing Code TRLSD 00 When an outgoing CO call is made by dialing a System Speed Dialing Code TRLSD 00 extension users receive standard t...

Page 587: ...all is made Transmit the registered number to CO line Checks a call against System Toll Restriction feature The call is prohibited sends reorder tone When an outgoing CO call is made by dialing a System Speed Dialing Code TRLSD 00 TRLE TRLSD not restricted restricted TRLE TRLSD In this case Local Trunk Dial Access restriction and Individual Trunk Group Dial Access restriction assigned in Class of ...

Page 588: ...ng allows SLT telephone users to make calls automatically by simply lifting the handset To program the desired number for this feature dial the feature number for Pickup Dialing Programming To activate this feature dial the feature number for Pickup Dialing Set To cancel this feature dial the feature number for Pickup Dialing Cancel This feature works only when an extension user goes off hook from...

Page 589: ... Canceling Dial the feature number for Pickup Dialing Cancel Default 56 You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2 then dial tone 1 3 or 4 3 Replace the handset Executing Pickup Dialing 1 Lift the handset You hear dial tone 1 3 or 4 2 Wait until the time preprogrammed in System System Timer Pickup Dial Waiting is over The system sends the stored telephone number automatically Canceling Pickup Dialing tempo...

Page 590: ...e is employed Inter Office Calling to the extension users in the other tenant inter tenant calling can be enabled by programming Refer to Section 3 B 4 00 Tenant Service for further information Operation 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the directory number of the other extension You hear ringback tone A directory number consists of three or four digits from 0 to 9 3 When the other extension answers star...

Page 591: ...cel this feature Operation Setting the Voice Calling mode 1 Lift the handset You hear dial tone 1 3 or 4 2 Dial the feature number for Voice Calling Mode Set Default Y57 You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2 System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Numbering Plan 6 11 Voice Calling Mode Set Voice Calling Mode Cancel 11 C 11 00 10 D 6 06 Canceling the Voice Calling mode 1 Lift the handset You hear d...

Page 592: ... Programming Conditions Busy Station Signaling is ineffective if the called extension is preset to either of the following functions System Class of Service BSS OHCA Deny is set to Yes System Class of Service Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb is set to Yes Operation Calling an extension 1 Lift the handset You hear dial tone 1 3 or 4 2 Dial the directory number of the other extension You hear busy ton...

Page 593: ...CA feature at the same time DHLC card with APITS A DHLC card allows one APITS telephone can be called with the OHCA feature at the same time In the system programming assign System Class of Service 1 3 BSS OHCA to Yes at calling extension assign Extension Station 1 3 OHCA Circuit to Yes at the called extension and assign OHCA Button at the called extension Programming Conditions OHCA does not work...

Page 594: ... CO line is available or not If there is no idle line you will hear a busy tone As soon as a CO line becomes idle it will be seized Once the extension is off hook the last number dialed is sent and you will hear the CO line ring Type 1 is the default Each type can be set to a trunk group by the dumb command CAI This function can activate extensions that are set to Yes in the Automatic callback Tru...

Page 595: ... 4 Replace the handset 5 When a CO line becomes idle you will hear the callback ring 6 Lift the handset The last number dialed is dialed automatically CAI Yes Default 1 Lift the handset You hear dial tone 1 3 or 4 2 Dial the specified CO line When an idle line is not available you will hear busy tone 3 3 Replace the handset 4 When a CO line becomes idle you will hear the callback ring 5 Lift the h...

Page 596: ...ction is rejected by reorder tone If you do not dial 6 within 10 seconds after hearing busy tone you hear reorder tone and cannot execute this feature Even if Call Forwarding No Answer or Do Not Disturb is assigned to the extension the extension user can set Automatic Callback Station callback starts on the extension Automatic Callback Station cannot be set by the extension which has a call on con...

Page 597: ... following status Three party conversation status OHCA conversation status ICM conversation status Private CO conversation status Executive Busy Override does not function if any of two parties in conversation has set the followings Executive Busy Override Deny Refer to Section 4 D 5 00 Data Line Security Refer to Section 4 I 6 00 If you do not dial 1 within 10 seconds after hearing busy tone you ...

Page 598: ...rride When dialing 1 if the other extension is busy the caller hears busy tone In this case it is possible to assign Automatic Callback Station For Automatic Callback Station refer to Section 5 A 4 02 Automatic Callback Station If System Class of Service Do Not Disturb Override is set to No the caller hears reorder tone after dialing 1 and cannot call the other party System Programming Reference V...

Page 599: ... number for Walking COS Set Default 81 3 Dial the four digit Walking COS Password System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Operation 3 3 Walking COS Password System Tenant Walking COS Password Tenant 2 System Numbering Plan 7 11 Walking COS Set Walking COS Cancel 11 C 5 00 11 C 5 00 11 C 11 00 10 D 1 03 10 D 2 00 10 D 6 07 4 Dial the extension number of your own station You hear confirmation to...

Page 600: ... tenant if tenant Service is employed extension users can specify the operator in the same tenant by dialing the feature number for Operator Call Specific Programming Conditions When calling an operator by dialing the feature number for Operator Call General the operator is selected according to the type of the operator s stations as shown below When no operators are assigned a user hears reorder ...

Page 601: ... assigned each front extensions The extension user also can call the extension which is assigned to the front extension Voice Call is not available for the extension which is assigned to the front extension Operation Calling a front extension 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the feature number for Front Call 1 Front Call 2 Front Call 3 or Front Call 4 5 A 21 System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Op...

Page 602: ......

Page 603: ...available to answer the following calls 1 A call ringing at an extension outside of the same call pickup group 2 A call ringing at an extension on which Dial Call Pickup Deny is set Refer to Section 5 B 1 03 Call Pickup Deny for further information 3 A call ringing on PCO button of PITS telephone If extension users attempt to pick up the those calls reorder tone sounds after dialing the feature nu...

Page 604: ...wing calls 1 A call ringing at an extension on which Dial Call Pickup Deny is set Refer to Section 5 B 1 03 Call Pickup Deny for further information 2 A call ringing on PCO button of PITS telephone If the extension users attempt to pick up the above mentioned call reorder tone sounds after dialing the feature number for Directed Call Pickup System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Numbering Pla...

Page 605: ... or she can execute Dial Call Pickup or Directed Call Pickup feature for calls ringing at other extensions System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Numbering Plan 5 11 Dial Call Pickup Deny Set Dial Call Pickup Deny Cancel 11 C 11 00 10 D 6 05 Operation Setting Call Pickup Deny 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the feature number for Dial Call Pickup Deny Set Default 51 You hear confirmation tone 1 or ...

Page 606: ...ode For further information about UNA refer to Section 5 G 1 01 Universal Night Answer UNA Programming System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Operation 1 3 External Paging 1 2 System Numbering Plan 3 11 Night Answer 1 Night Answer 2 Group Trunk Group 1 3 Incoming Mode Day Trunk CO Line Trunk Group Trunk Pager Music Source External Pager Tenant 11 C 4 00 11 C 11 00 11 C 15 00 11 C 20 00 11 C 2...

Page 607: ...feature Assign System Class of Service Executive Busy Override Deny to Yes Programming Conditions None System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Class of Service 1 3 Executive Busy Override Deny System Numbering Plan 5 11 Busy Override Deny Set Busy Override Deny Cancel 11 C 7 00 11 C 11 00 10 D 4 01 10 D 6 05 Operation Assigning Executive Busy Override Deny 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the feature...

Page 608: ...r extension by Call Pickup feature Refer to Section 5 B 1 00 Call Pickup for further information 4 FWD DND Setting DND feature cancels any Call Forwarding feature pre assigned on the extension and vice versa Refer to Section 5 D 2 00 Call Forwarding FWD for further information System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Class of Service 1 3 Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb System Numbering Plan 5 11...

Page 609: ... extension Extension call Attendant Console call DIL 1 N call DIL 1 1 call DID call DISA call Other calls Other extensions has SDN assigned or not No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Extension which has DND assigned PDN No ring 1 No ring No ring 1 No ring No ring Ring No ring No ring No ring No ring 1 Extension which has SDN assigned SDN Red 240 wink Ring Red 240 wink Ring Green 240 wink Rin...

Page 610: ...g tone is sent in the following mode System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Numbering Plan 5 11 Call Waiting Set Call Waiting Cancel 11 C 11 00 10 D 6 05 15 secs Operation Setting Call Waiting 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the feature number for Call Waiting Set Default Y52 You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2 and then dial tone 1 3 or 4 3 Replace the handset Canceling Call Waiting 1 Lift the handse...

Page 611: ...r To conclude the new conversation and return to the held party again replace the handset and lift the handset again then dial the feature number for Hold Retrieve Default 46 Supplement See Section 5 C 1 00 Hold for further information about Hold 5 B 9 Operation Answering Call Waiting A call from another extension or outside party arrives during a conversation You hear call waiting tone Talking to...

Page 612: ...UCD group set for Log Out goes off hook dial tone 4 below can be heard second 0 1 2 3 4 5 System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Numbering Plan 9 11 UCD Log In UCD Log Out 11 C 10 00 10 D 6 09 Operation Setting UCD Log Out Leaving a UCD group 1 Lift the handset You hear dial tone 4 2 Dial the feature number for UCD Log Out Default 0 You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2 3 Replace the handset Canc...

Page 613: ... a call on hold Refer to Section 3 E 2 00 Held Call Reminder for further information If a held call is not answered more than 30 minutes it will be disconnected automatically Music on Hold will be sent to the held party if available For sending Music on Hold prior assignment is necessary Refer to Section 3 E 1 00 Music on Hold for further information System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Num...

Page 614: ...tely one half second and releasing it enables you to have conference if a conference trunk is available If there is no conference trunk available the party in conversation is placed on Consultation Hold and you can talk to the retrieved party For further information about conference refer to Section 5 E 1 00 Conference Music on Hold will be sent to the held party if available For sending Music on ...

Page 615: ...or retrieving calls In case of a failure to retrieve a call the other extension holds no call reorder tone is returned The following calls cannot be retrieved from other extensions A call held on PCO button A call placed on Exclusive Hold A call place on Consultation Hold System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Numbering Plan 3 11 Hold Extension Retrieve 11 C 11 00 10 D 6 03 Operation 1 Lift t...

Page 616: ...on Hold will be sent to the held party if available For sending Music on Hold prior assignment is necessary Refer to Section 3 E 1 00 Music on Hold System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Tenant Call Park Boundary System Numbering Plan 4 11 Call Park System Call Park Retrieve System 11 C 5 00 11 C 11 00 10 D 2 00 10 D 6 04 Operation Parking a call to the system parking area 1 Press the switchh...

Page 617: ...ature can be used whenever an extension user engaged on a call needs to go elsewhere and wishes to complete the call from another extension Call Park feature is also convenient to be used in combination with paging feature since any extension user can retrieve a parked call after being paged Any extension user can park only one call to the parking area dedicated to each extension Programming Condi...

Page 618: ...arked you hear busy tone 1 or 2 To talk to the party placed on Consultation Hold again while hearing busy tone 1 or 2 follow the same procedures as retrieving Consultation Hold Refer to Section 5 C 2 00 Consultation Hold 3 Replace the handset Retrieving Call Park Station 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the feature number for Call Park Retrieve Station Default 48 3 Dial the directory number of the parkin...

Page 619: ...pecified period starts calling back the originator of transfer 1 For detail refer to Section 3 E 3 00 Transfer Recall Unscreened Call Transfer to extension is ineffective Transferred party is treated simply as a party placed on Consultation Hold Hanging up causes the Consultation Hold Recall to the originator of transfer 1 01 Unscreened Call Transfer to Station Descripton Allows an extension user ...

Page 620: ... 3 Replace the handset Supplement If you want to return to the held party press the switchhook for approximately one half second and release before the destunation extension answers Operation 2 Mode 2 While having a conversation 1 Press the switchhook for approximately one half second and release it The other party is placed on Consultation Hold You hear confirmation tone 2 and then dial tone 1 3 ...

Page 621: ... announce 4 Replace the handset The call is transferred to the destination Supplement If you want to return to the held party press the swithhook for approximately one half second and release before the destination extention answers Operation 2 Mode 2 While having a conversation 1 Press the switchhook for approximately one half second and release it The other party is placed on Consultation Hold Y...

Page 622: ...ving a conversation 1 Press the switchhook for approximately one half second and release it The other party is placed on Consultation Hold You hear confirmation tone 2 then dial tone 1 3 or 4 System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Operation 2 3 Remote Directory Number System Numbering Plan 11 11 Transfer World Select 3 WS3 SLT Transfer Operation 11 C 4 00 11 C 11 00 11 C 45 00 10 D 1 02 10 D ...

Page 623: ...ransferred party from the start of the transferring operation till the destination party answers Operation 1 Mode 1 or 3 While having a conversation 1 Press the switchhook for approximately one half second and release it The other party is put on Consultation Hold You hear confirmation tone 2 and then dial tone 1 3 or 4 2 Make a call to an Attendant Console You hear ringback tone Calling an Attend...

Page 624: ...tion tone 2 and then dial tone 1 3 or 4 2 Dial the FDN for UCD group 01 to 04 You hear confirmation tone 3 and then dial tone 1 3 or 4 3 Replace the handset System Programming Reference VT Dumb Special Attended UCD 1 2 World Select 3 WS3 SLT Transfer Operation 11 C 37 00 11 C 45 00 10 I 3 01 Operation 2 Mode 2 While having a conversation 1 Press the switchhook for approximately one half second and...

Page 625: ...r the following calls A call with Attendant Console A call with Doorphone If Music on Hold is avvailable from the start of the transferring operation until the destination party answers the system sends Music on Hold to the transferred party For further detail refer to Section 3 E 1 00 Music on Hold Operation 1 Mode 2 While having a conversation 1 Press the switchhook for approximately one half se...

Page 626: ...of the outside party You hear ringback tone 4 After the destination answers make an announcement 5 Replace the handset The call is transferred to the destination Supplement If an extension that cannot execute this function by the restriction of COS attempts to do this procedure the system sends consultation hold recall to the extension after step 5 and the transfer is rejected If you want to retur...

Page 627: ...stem Numbering Plan 5 11 Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Cancel 11 C 7 00 11 C 11 00 11 C 11 00 10 D 4 01 10 D 6 04 10 D 6 05 Conditions An extension user may have only one type of Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb feature in effect at any time If a second type is assigned the previously assigned type is canceled If the extension to which calls are to be forwarded itself is in a call forward mode a ca...

Page 628: ...n Service Result Call is forwarded to destination Busy tone is sent from destination DND tone is sent from destination Busy tone is sent from destination Call is placed on setting extension Call is forwarded to destination Call is forwarded and kept waiting at destination Same as call reaching DND See Section 5 B 4 00 Do Not Disturb DND Call is forwarded and kept waiting at destination Call is pla...

Page 629: ...ice Mail port or the FDN for General Operator Call to be set as the destination You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2 and then dial tone 1 3 or 4 4 Replace the handset Canceling Call Forwarding All Calls 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the feature number for Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Cancel Default 0 You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2 and then dial tone 1 3 or 4 3 Replace the handset 5 D 11 ...

Page 630: ...Disturb Cancel 11 C 7 00 11 C 11 00 11 C 11 00 10 D 4 01 10 D 6 04 10 D 6 05 Conditions An extension user may have only one type of Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb feature in effect at any time If a second type is assigned the previously assigned type is canceled If the extension to which calls are to be forwarded itself is in a call forward mode a call is not forwarded furthermore The call rings a...

Page 631: ...onditions except In Service Idle status Busy status Assigned to DND PITS programming mode Conditions except In Service Idle status Busy status Assigned to DND PITS programming mode Conditions except In Service Result Call is forwarded to destination Call is placed on setting extension Call is forwarded to destination Call is placed on setting extension Call is forwarded to destination Call is plac...

Page 632: ...e Mail ports or the FDN for General Operator Call to be set as the destination You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2 and then dial tone 1 3 or 4 4 Replace the handset Canceling Call Forwarding Busy Off Hook 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the feature number for Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Cancel Default 0 You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2 and then dial tone 1 3 or 4 3 Replace the handset 5 D 14 ...

Page 633: ... Service 1 3 Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb System Numbering Plan 4 11 Call Forwarding No Answer Set System Numbering Plan 5 11 Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Cancel 11 C 6 00 11 C 7 00 11 C 11 00 11 C 11 00 10 D 3 00 10 D 4 01 10 D 6 04 10 D 6 05 Conditions An extension user may have only one type of Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb feature in effect at any time If a second type is assigned the pre...

Page 634: ...onditions except In Service Idle status Busy status Assigned to DND PITS programming mode Conditions except In Service Idle status Busy status Assigned to DND PITS programming mode Conditions except In Service Result Call is forwarded to destination Call is placed on setting extension Call is forwarded to destination Call is placed on setting extension Call is forwarded to destination Call is plac...

Page 635: ...the Voice Mail port or the FDN for General Operator Call of the destination You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2 and then dial tone 1 3 or 4 4 Replace the handset Canceling Call Forwarding No Answer 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the feature number for Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Cancel Default 0 You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2 and then dial tone 1 3 or 4 3 Replace the handset 5 D 17 ...

Page 636: ...ng No Answer Time Out System Class of Service 1 3 Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb System Numbering Plan 4 11 Call Forwarding Busy No Answer System Numbering Plan 5 11 Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Cancel 11 C 6 00 11 C 7 00 11 C 11 00 11 C 11 00 10 D 3 00 10 D 4 01 10 D 6 04 10 D 6 05 Conditions An extension user may have only one type of Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb feature in effect at any tim...

Page 637: ...onditions except In Service Idle status Busy status Assigned to DND PITS programming mode Conditions except In Service Idle status Busy status Assigned to DND PITS programming mode Conditions except In Service Result Call is forwarded to destination Call is placed on setting extension Call is forwarded to destination Call is placed on setting extension Call is forwarded to destination Call is plac...

Page 638: ...oice Mail port or the FDN for General Operator Call to be set as the destination You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2 and then dial tone 1 3 or 4 4 Replace the handset Canceling Call Forwarding Busy Off Hook No Answer 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the feature number for Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Cancel Default 0 You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2 and then dial tone 1 3 or 4 3 Replace the handset 5 D ...

Page 639: ...d Mode to Yes To set and cancel this function dial the feature number for Call Forwarding To Trunk and Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Cancel Programming System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Class of Service 1 3 Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb CO Forward Mode System Numbering Plan 4 11 Call Forwarding Trunk System Numbering Plan 5 11 Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Cancel Group Trunk Group 1 3...

Page 640: ... Idle status Busy status Conditions except In Service Idle status Busy status Conditions except In Service Idle status Busy status Conditions except In Service Result Call is forwarded to external destination Call is placed on setting extension Call is forwarded to external destination Call is placed on setting extension Call is placed on setting extension Forwarding possible Forwarding impossible...

Page 641: ...irmation tone 1 or 2 and then dial tone 1 3 or 4 4 Replace the handset Supplement The system does not check the dialed number toll restriction level and the feature number for selecting a CO line at the time of setting this function Canceling Call Forwarding to Trunk 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the feature number for Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Cancel Default 0 You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2 a...

Page 642: ......

Page 643: ...ration for each mode in case of the third party is a CO line or an extension Programming Conditions These operation modes influence the SLT transfer operation Refer to Section 5 D 1 00 Call Transfer Pressing the switchhook by the conference originator during the conference restores a conversation with the first party This places the second party on Consultation Hold Pressing the switchhook again e...

Page 644: ... 1 3 or 4 2 Dial the feature number for Conference Default 692 You hear confirmation tone 1 and then dial tone 3 Dial the phone number of the third party When the third party answers conversation begins 5 E 2 4 Press the switchhook for approximately one half second and release it after the third party answers You hear confirmation tone 3 A three party conference is now established Supplement If th...

Page 645: ...t the designated extension No answer of the call in 15 seconds cancels the doorphone call When you assign the destination of a doorphone call to attendant consoles and have two attendant consoles the call arrives alternately to each attendant console System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Numbering Plan 3 11 Doorphone Call 1 4 Extension Doorphone 11 C 11 00 11 C 29 00 10 D 6 03 10 G 3 00 Oper...

Page 646: ...ime Out System System Timer Toll Restriction Guard Time Out System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Numbering Plan 3 11 External Feature Access Group Trunk Group 1 3 Hook Switch Flash Time Group Trunk Group 2 3 Max Dial No after EFA Signal 11 C 11 00 11 C 15 00 11 C 16 00 10 D 6 03 10 E 1 01 10 E 1 02 Operation Gaining access to a feature in this case Call Waiting When a call arrives from anot...

Page 647: ...System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Class of Service 3 3 Station Paging Access System Numbering Plan 3 11 Station Paging Station Paging Answer 11 C 9 00 11 C 11 00 10 D 4 03 10 D 6 03 Conditions Single Line Telephone cannot be paged If all of the extensions assigned to be paged are being paged by another page busy tone is returned to the new paging performer If any of the extensions is not...

Page 648: ...efault 42 After hearing confirmation tone 3 talk to the paging performer Transferring a call using Paging All Extensions During a conversation with an extension or an outside party 1 Press the switchhook for approximately one half second and release it The other party is placed on hold You hear dial tone 1 3 or 4 2 Dial the feature number for Station Paging Default 42 and dial 0 You hear confirmat...

Page 649: ...rvice 3 3 Station Paging Access System Numbering Plan 3 11 Station Paging Station Paging Answer 11 C 9 00 11 C 11 00 10 D 4 03 10 D 6 03 Conditions Single Line Telephones cannot be paged If the designated paging group is being paged by another pager busy tone is returned to the new paging performer However he can page within the range not overlapping the preset paging range For instance when pagin...

Page 650: ...fault 42 After hearing confirmation tone 3 talk to the paging performer Transferring a call using Group Paging During a conversation with an extension or an outside party 1 Press the switchhook for approximately one half second and release it The other party is placed on hold You hear dial tone 1 3 or 4 2 Dial the feature number for Station Paging Default 42 and paging group number 1 to 8 You hear...

Page 651: ...ing Plan 3 11 External Paging External Paging Answer Trunk Pager Music Source External Pager Tenant External Pager Tone 11 C 4 00 11 C 9 00 11 C 11 00 11 C 21 00 10 D 1 01 10 D 4 03 10 D 6 03 10 F 2 00 Conditions If the designated pager is being used busy tone is returned to the paging performer If either or both of the pagers in a tenant are being used it is not possible to page using two pagers ...

Page 652: ...3 Dial the number of the external pager 1 or 2 After you hear confirmation tone 3 talk to the caller who made the page Transferring a call using Paging External Pagers During a conversation with an extension or an outside party 1 Press the switchhook for approximately one half second and release it The other party is placed on hold You hear dial tone 1 3 or 4 2 Dial the feature number for External...

Page 653: ... After paging replace the handset System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Class of Service 3 3 Station Paging Access External Paging 1 2 System Numbering Plan 3 11 External Paging Station Paging External Paging Answer Station Paging Answer 11 C 9 00 11 C 11 00 10 D 4 03 10 D 6 03 Answering Paging All Extensions and External Pagers 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the feature number for Station Paging...

Page 654: ...external music equipment and external pager to a tenant by using Trunk Pager Music Source External Pager Tenant and Music Source Tenant Trunk Pager Music Source External Pager BGM should be assigned to Yes to use this function This assignment can be done to each external pager Also assign Trunk Pager Music Source Music Source For Use to either BGM or Hold BGM This assignment can be done to each ex...

Page 655: ...efault 66 After you hear confirmation tone 2 BGM sounds from the external pager s 3 Replace the handset Turning BGM off when BGM is on 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the feature number for BGM Through External Pager Default 66 After you hear confirmation tone 2 BGM from the external pager s stops 3 Replace the handset 5 F 9 ...

Page 656: ......

Page 657: ... to answer the incoming CO calls ringing at an external pager by dialing the feature number for Night Answer 1 or 2 To activate this feature set Group Trunk Group Incoming Mode Night to FIXED or FLEXIBLE and Trunk CO Line Night Answer Point to UNA 1 or UNA 2 UNA 1 is associated with External Pager 1 and UNA 2 is associated with External Pager 2 All CO lines belong to this trunk group are covered b...

Page 658: ...Service To utilize this feature set Group Trunk Group Incoming Mode Night to FLEXIBLE All CO lines belong to this trunk group are covered by this assignment If FIXED is selected for above setting the assigned night answer destination cannot be changed by the Operator 1 Call handling in Flexible and Fixed night service is almost the same The difference is Programming Conditions If tenant service is...

Page 659: ...Auto and assign desired mode switching time to Auto Start Time on a per day of the week basis To utilize Manual Switching mode set System Operation 3 3 Night Service to Manual The Operator 1 however can override the Auto Mode setting that is Manual Mode is established by dialing the feature number for Night Service Manual Mode Set To restore the Auto mode the Operator 1 must dial the feature numbe...

Page 660: ...ht mode 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the feature number for Night Mode Set Default Y83 You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2 3 Replace the handset Changing Night mode to Day mode 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the feature number for Night Mode Cancel Default 83 You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2 3 Replace the handset Changing from Auto mode to Manual mode 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the feature number for Night ...

Page 661: ... code Forced or Optional In the forced mode the account code must be entered before making an outgoing CO call In the option mode enter the account code if necessary You can override the toll restriction by entering the pre assigned account code when you make CO calls Refer the Section 3 F 11 00 Call Accounting Summary for further information Programming Conditions In the option mode it is possibl...

Page 662: ...tart conversation again Correcting an error after dialing a wrong account code not available with rotary type SLT telephones 1 Dial You hear dial tone 2 2 Dial the correct account code 3 Dial 5 G 6 Entering an account code when receiving a call from an outside party in the Forced mode 1 Lift the handset Talk to the other party 2 Press the switchhook for approximately one half second and release it...

Page 663: ...recorded beforehand The extension user may hear BGM or intermittent tone dial tone 2 instead of the wake up message See Section 3 F 13 00 Timed Reminder with OGM wake up call This feature can be set to operate only once or everyday at a specified time Programming Conditions 1 What if the extension is busy or off hook at the programmed time Alarm tone will ring after the extension goes on hook 2 Wh...

Page 664: ...ramming Refer to Section 3 F 13 00 Timed Reminder with OGM Wake up Call Supplement Dial tone 2 in step 1 sounds in the following timing 1 0 sec W fW f 7Hf7Hf f f f f 3Lf3Lf V X eV X e V Xe V Xe N1fN1e f e f e J5fJ5e Yf Ye Canceling the Timed Reminder Assignment 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the feature number for Timed Reminder Cancel Default 71 You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2 and then dial tone 1 3...

Page 665: ...ions from executing overriding functions such as Busy Override To assign Data Line Security assign Extension Station Data Line Security to Yes You can set and cancel this function by dialing the feature numbers for Data Line Security Set and Data Line Security Cancel Programming Conditions Assigning this function always offers the extension user Privacy mode unless Privacy Release is executed If t...

Page 666: ...ation tone 1 or 2 and then dial tone 1 3 or 4 4 Replace the handset 5 G 10 5 00 Absent Message Capability Description Provides an absent message on the display of a calling extension if the called party has assigned an absent message An absent message appears only on the display of PITS if provided There are six fixed and 10 programmable absent messages The followings are the six fixed messages x ...

Page 667: ...01 to 31 day Input format for directory number three or four digits You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2 and then dial tone 1 3 or 4 5 Replace the handset Setting a flexible message 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the feature number for Absent Message Set Default 6 3 Dial the two digit message number 07 to 16 If the message requires any parameters enter all the parameters You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2 ...

Page 668: ...ator may not be turned off if there are other message waiting indications sent by other extensions 2 All message waiting indications are canceled at once 5 G 12 6 00 Message Waiting Description Allows an extension user to indicate to another extension that a message is waiting for him or her by turning on the MESSAGE indicator button on the called extension This feature is useful when the called e...

Page 669: ...ssage the MESSAGE indicator on the message receiver s extension goes out 3 Replace the handset Operation by Receiver At message receiver s extension SLT with MESSAGE lamp only Calling back the message sender 1 Lift the handset You hear dial tone 1 3 or 4 2 Dial the feature number for Message Waiting Reply Default 64 You hear ringback tone When the message sender answers start conversation If you r...

Page 670: ...or Message Cancel Default 9 and your own extension number in succession You hear confirmation tone 2 and then dial tone 1 3 or 4 The MESSAGE lamp on your extension goes out 3 Replace the handset 5 G 14 Supplement Light pattern of the MESSAGE lamp for an SLT with MESSAGE lamp LAMP ON LAMP OFF 1 28sec 3 72sec ...

Page 671: ... to prohibit other extension users from making outgoing CO calls from his or her extension The user can select any three digit lock code from 000 to 999 To execute this function assign System Class of Service Station Lock to Yes Programming Conditions Both Operator 1 and 2 Attendant Console or extension user can also set and cancel this function for each extension Once the operator locks an extens...

Page 672: ...ssigned Feature Clear Description Allows an extension user to clear the following feature assigned on it by dialing the feature number for Station Program Clear a Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb b Absent Message c Timed Reminder d Walking Station e Walking COS f Call Coverage Path Programming System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Numbering Plan 7 11 Station Program Clear 11 C 11 00 10 D 6 07 ...

Page 673: ...ng features assigned to each extension Features that can be canceled DND Do Not Disturb Electronic Station Lockout FWD Call Forwarding It is also possible to cancel FWD temporarily Features that can be set DND Do Not Disturb Electronic Station Lockout Programming Conditions When an extension is locked by the operator unlocking by the locked extension itself is impossible Operation Setting cancelin...

Page 674: ... number of the extension You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2 4 Replace the handset Canceling Call Forwarding temporarily from an extension 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the feature number for Remote FWD Cancel One Time Default 76 3 Dial the directory number of the extension Call Forwarding is canceled temporarily Calling the extension starts 5 G 18 ...

Page 675: ...Section 6 Station Features and Operation Attendant Console ATT ...

Page 676: ......

Page 677: ...nagement Screen 6 C 31 11 00 Help Screen 6 C 35 D Outgoing Call Features 6 D 1 1 00 Making Outside Calls 6 D 1 1 01 Local Trunk Dial Access 6 D 1 1 02 Individual Trunk Group Dial Access 6 D 2 2 00 Automatic Dialing 6 D 3 2 01 Speed Dialing System 6 D 3 2 02 Last Number Redial LNR 6 D 7 3 00 Making Internal Calls 6 D 8 3 01 Inter Office Calling Manual Dialing 6 D 8 3 02 Inter Office Calling by Exte...

Page 678: ...o Remote 6 G 5 1 06 Unscreened Call Transfer to a UCD Group with OGM 6 G 6 2 00 Heavy Traffic Overflow Transfer to Station 6 G 7 3 00 Serial Call 6 G 8 4 00 Interposition Call Transfer 6 G 9 5 00 Call Transfer via Attendant Console 6 G 10 6 00 Released Link Operation 6 G 11 7 00 Automatic Redirection If No Answer 6 G 12 8 00 Voice Mail Transfer 6 G 13 H Conversation Features 6 H 1 1 00 Conference ...

Page 679: ...de Entry 6 J 6 3 00 Secret Dialing 6 J 8 4 00 Message Waiting 6 J 9 5 00 Remote Station Feature Control 6 J 11 6 00 Dial Tone Transfer 6 J 17 7 00 Search by Name Department 6 J 18 8 00 Outgoing Message OGM Recording and Playing Back 6 J 20 9 00 Trunk Verify 6 J 22 10 00 CO Access Control 6 J 23 11 00 Power Failure Operation 6 J 26 12 00 Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA 6 J 27 13 00 Remote Timed Re...

Page 680: ......

Page 681: ...ard Option Handset Headset Switch Function Local Switch Sets the attendant console to LOCAL mode Ringer Volume Selector Selects the ringing tone level Off Low High Volume Control Adjusts the volume level of the handset or headset Reset Switch Resets the attendant console Volume Control Ringer Volume Selector Function Keyboard Power Switch ...

Page 682: ... F8 DES DES DES DES DES DES SRC SRC SRC SRC SRC SRC ATT FWD PRG MODE OFF ON OFF ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 RELEASE Key CANCEL Key Dial Pad LOOP Keys and Indicators Programmable Keys ALARM NIGHT CANCEL RELEASE Full keyboard Option NIGHT Key and Indicator ALARM Key and Indicator P 01 P 02 P 03 P 04 P 05 P 06 P 07 P 08 P 09 P 10 P 11 P 12 LOOP1 LOOP2 LOOP3 LOOP4 LOOP5 LOOP6 HOLD MSG SPLIT PAGE ANSWER F1 ...

Page 683: ...nswer DIAL PAD Used to dial the telephone number and the feature number 0 to 9 Programmable There are 12 programmable keys on the keyboard which can be assigned to be any keys of 11 function keys listed below AUTO TRG CALL PARK TOLL CHG ACCOUNT SERIAL OHCA CONF REDIAL E E and One Touch direct input Refer to 6 C 10 00 Attendant Management Screen for further information about Programmable key The at...

Page 684: ...amming Extension Attendant Con sole Busy Out Extension in advance It is available to make calls in this mode CO calls arrived at the attendant console before this switch is set to ON and remained in the queue are transferred to another attendant console if it belongs to the same tenant If there is no other attendant console belonging to the same tenant the calls are trans ferred to the above menti...

Page 685: ...t Indicates the system is in normal operation Pressing the ALARM key while ALARM indicator lights or flashes displays the detail of the trouble on the message line of the CRT screen and the ALARM indicator light goes out Pressing the ALARM key again causes the trouble message disappear NIGHT Indicator Not lit indicates Day mode and lit indicates Night mode POWER Indicator Not lit indicates POWER s...

Page 686: ......

Page 687: ... mode This mode is for diagnosis itself Refer to Section 14 Station Programming Attendant Console for further information about LOCAL mode operation ATT1 or ATT2 OFF ON ON ATT1 or ATT2 Setting positions of the switches executing the preceding operations are shown below For the assignment of system administration device refer to Section 10 D 1 02 Operation 2 3 In the case of a power failure the att...

Page 688: ......

Page 689: ...ple 1 When incoming call is from inside party LOOP key number Extension number calling Extension name Type of call blinking display Example 2 When incoming call is from outside party LOOP key number Trunk group number Trunk group name Type of call blinking display LOOP 1 Ext 100 Betty Incoming LOOP 2 TRG 10 Panasonic Incoming 6 Function field Displays the functions of the F1 through F8 keys 1 2 4 ...

Page 690: ...en Extension Directory screen Call Park System screen Extension Management screen Pickup Group Management screen CO Management screen Attendant Management screen Help screen Help screen F2 Extension manage F3 Pickup G manage F4 CO Manage F5 Attendant Manage F7 Help F2 Busy Lamp Type F3 Speed Dial F4 Extension Directory F5 Call Park F7 Help F8 Function Select ...

Page 691: ... calls on individual LOOP key by displaying SRC source and DES destination The status of the individual LOOP key is displayed with four items as illustrated in the following examples Ext 2001 Tony C 01 T 02 O Calling Ext 2001 Tony C 01 T 02 O Calling Extension number Extension name Class Status of the extension The followings are example displays of the LOOP key field about extension trunk and pag...

Page 692: ...rrently in use is displayed in reverse video Example 3 4 Trunk Group area Trunk group number trunk group name Up to 10 alphanumeric characters and trunk group status are displayed in the trunk group area Display for trunk group status is as follows An idle trunk is available in the displayed trunk group All trunks are busy in the displayed trunk group The trunk is not used 5 When the ATT FWD switc...

Page 693: ...en Selection of function fields Function field display changes by every pressing of the F8 key function select Type 1 1 LOOP TRG 2 Next Page 3 Previous Page 4 5 6 7 8 Function Select Extension Directory Help Type 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Function Select Extension Manage Help Pickup G Manage Attendant Manage CO Manage Busy Lamp Type Speed Dial Call Park ...

Page 694: ...pe screen Speed Dial screen Extension Directory screen Call Park screen Help screen F2 Extension Manage F3 Pickup G Manage F4 CO manage F5 Attendant Manage F7 Help F8 Function Select Type 1 Help screen Extension Management screen Pickup Group Management screen CO Management screen Attendant Management screen Busy Lamp Type Speed Dial Extension Directory F5 Call Park F7 Help Function Select F3 F2 F...

Page 695: ... The symbols below are used to indicate the current extension status Idle Busy Conditions For monitoring the extension status or placing Inter Office Calling by this screen the extension numbers must have been registered in this screen beforehand For registration of extension numbers refer to Function Type 4 described succeedingly Extension names do not appear when they are not assigned by the sys...

Page 696: ...n Select LOOP TRG Next Page Previous Page No Name Change PGM Mode Entry 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Function Select Call LOOP TRG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Function Select LOOP TRG Memory Clear 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LOOP TRG Extension Directory Help Speed Dial 8 Function Select Function Select PGM Mode Exit Previous Page Next Page LOOP TRG Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5 Call Park ...

Page 697: ...rogram Mode Exit F8 Function Select Type 5 F8 Function Select BLF Monitor Mode BLF Program Mode Type 1 F8 Function Select Type 2 F8 Function Select Type 3 F8 Function Select BLF Monitor Mode Monitoring the status of extension or making an extension call Press the F8 key for field switching BLF Program mode Programming of BLF screen ...

Page 698: ...sing the F7 key F1 Changing to Ext Number column Example Type 1 LOOP TRG F2 Next Page F3 Previous Page F6 No Name Change F7 PGM Mode Entry F8 Function Select LOOP TRG screen Advancing to next screen Returning to previous screen F6 Type 2 Type 4 1001 1002 Changing to Ext Name column Example Betty Frank BLF Program mode Program Mode Entry function F7 appears only when the extension number column is ...

Page 699: ...cted function key F1 Type 2 F3 F4 F5 LOOP TRG F2 F7 Call LOOP TRG screen Move the cursor onto the desired extension for Inter Office Calling Calling the extension selected by the cursor Type 3 F1 Type 3 Type 1 Extension Directory screen LOOP TRG screen Speed Dial screen Call Park screen Help screen LOOP TRG F3 F4 F5 F7 F8 Function Select F8 Function Select Call Park Extension Directory Help Speed ...

Page 700: ...r onto the extension to be as signed or changed Clearing the extension number at the cursor position Type 4 F8 F7 Storing extension number at the cursor position LOOP TRG F2 Next Page F3 Previous Page F7 PGM Mode Exit F8 Function Select F1 Type 4 Type 5 Type 1 Advancing to the next BLF Screen LOOP TRG Screen Returning to previous BLF Screen Exiting BLF Program mode returning to Type 1 screen Progr...

Page 701: ... the F8 key Function Select Function Type 5 appears on the screen 4 Move the cursor onto the extension to be stored changed 5 Enter the extension number to be stored changed through the numeric keypad on the function keyboard For correcting errors or changing current data reenter data after pressing the F6 key clear Type 1 Type 4 Type 4 Type 5 2 3 F7 Next Page Previous Page F8 2 3 4 5 F3 F5 F2 F4 ...

Page 702: ...F7 key memory stores entered data 7 Repeat steps 2 to 6 to store or change other extensions if necessary 8 After storing or changing press the F8 key function select Function Type 5 appears on the screen 9 Press the F7 key PGM mode exit Exiting BLF PGM mode changes to BLF Monitor mode F8 F7 ...

Page 703: ...0 D 8 00 Speed Dialing System Example Next Page Previous Page No Speed Dial code No 100 001 No Speed Dial Name Speed Dial Name Matsushita Panasonic Type 1 Type 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Function Select LOOP TRG Next Page Previous Page Call 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Function Select LOOP TRG Busy Lamp Type Help Call Park Extension Directory 7 Call Function field Types of function fields Two types of function fields T...

Page 704: ... position LOOP TRG screen F5 Type 2 Type 1 Loop TRG F2 Busy Lamp Type F4 Extension Directory F5 Call Park F7 Help F8 Function Select Type 1 This function field is available for making a call through Speed Dial screen If there are multiple speed dial screens it is used to advance to the next screen or to return to the previous screen F1 LOOP TRG F2 Next Page F3 Previous Page F4 F7 Call F8 Function ...

Page 705: ... Section 10 G 1 01 Extension Station 1 4 The extension names are listed in alphabetical order No BLF 2000 1000 Extension Name Betty Jack Department Account Sales 1 7 7 Call Type 1 Type 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Previous Page 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Function Select LOOP TRG Busy Lamp Type Speed Dial Call Park Help Next Page LOOP TRG 8 Function Select Call For calling refer to Section 6 D 3 02 Inter Office Calling by...

Page 706: ...ange if only one screen For extension call move cursor to the extension to be called Call the extension at the cursor position F1 LOOP TRG screen F6 F5 Type 2 Type 1 LOOP TRG F2 Next Page F3 Previous Page F4 F7 Call F8 Function Select Type 2 This function field is available for concluding this screen and moving to the screens depending on the function key pressed F1 Type 2 LOOP TRG screen BLF scre...

Page 707: ...ensions and CO calls parked in the call park area in the system as well as retrieving the parked calls Conditions For retrieving a parked call refer to Section 6 F 3 00 Call Park System Call Park System No 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 1 LOOP TRG 2 3 4 5 6 7 Park Retrieve 8 Function Select Parking Ext 2000 Parked Ext 1000 Jack No 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Parking ATT 1 Parked TRG 01 DDD01 Jan ...

Page 708: ...screen Type 1 LOOP TRG Speed Dial Extension Directory Help Function Select LOOP TRG Type 1 F1 LOOP TRG screen F4 F5 F6 Move the cursor to retrieve a parked call Park Retrieve Retrieve a parked extension or CO call at the cursor position F7 Function Select Type 2 F8 Type 2 This function field is available for concluding this screen and moving to other screens depending on the function key pressed ...

Page 709: ...ange 8 Function Select 1 LOOP TRG Legend FWD set X DND set Station lock set Description Enables the attendant to monitor the status of extensions about following three features Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Electronic Station Lock The attendant can assign or cancel those features to from the extension user refer to Section 6 J 5 00 Remote Station Feature Control and make Inter Office call refer t...

Page 710: ...For switching between the four function fields press the F8 Function Select key 1 LOOP TRG 2 Next Page 3 Previous Page 4 5 6 7 8 Function Select 1 LOOP TRG 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Function Select No Name Change 1 LOOP TRG 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Function Select 1 LOOP TRG 2 3 Pickup G Manage 4 5 6 7 Help Attendant Manage Memory Select Call CO Manage 8 Function Select Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 ...

Page 711: ...Extension Management screen No change if only one screen LOOP TRG screen Type 1 This function field is available for advancing to the next screen or returning to the previous screen when there are multiple extension management screens and changing the display from extension number to extension name F7 Changing to Extension Name Example Name Betty Frank FWD DND X F8 Type 2 Function Select FWD DND X...

Page 712: ... to be set or reset Select F6 Memory F7 Function Select Type 3 F8 F5 Select Setting Canceling Storing the data LOOP TRG Type 3 F1 LOOP TRG screen F2 F3 F4 Move the cursor to desired exten sion for Inter Office Calling Call F7 Function Select F8 F5 Type 4 Execute Inter Office Calling for the selected extension Type 3 This function field is available for making Inter Office Call through the Extensio...

Page 713: ...t screen and moving to other screens as selected by the function keys Type 4 F1 F3 Pickup G Manage F4 F5 F7 F8 LOOP TRG screen CO Management screen LOOP TRG CO Manage Attendant Manage Help Function Select Pickup Group Management screen Attendant Management screen Help screen Type 1 ...

Page 714: ...hown below are available to operate Pickup Group Management Screen Switching of function Types To switch the two function fields press the F8 key function select Description This screen is used for monitoring whether the pickup groups are group locked or not Also used for setting canceling group station lock for individual pickup group Refer to Section 6 J 5 00 Remote Station Feature Control for f...

Page 715: ... F8 F5 Select setting canceling group lock Store setting canceling group lock data Type 2 This function field is available for concluding Pickup Group Management screen and moving to other screens as selected by function keys Type 2 F1 F2 Extension Manage F4 F5 F7 F8 LOOP TRG screen CO Management screen Attendant Management screen Help screen Type 1 LOOP TRG CO Manage Attendant Manage Help Functio...

Page 716: ...CO busy out and CO access control refer to Section 6 J 10 00 CO Access Control For details about Night Answer refer to Section 6 J 1 01 Flexible Night Service Description This screen is available for setting canceling the following functions CO busy out CO access control Night answer point This screen also allows the attendant to confirm the current CO line status Legend CO ID Physical number of C...

Page 717: ...e for operation in CO Manage ment screen Switching of function fields For switching between three function fields shown below press the F8 Function Select key 1 LOOP TRG 2 Next Page 3 Previous Page 4 5 6 7 8 Function Select 1 LOOP TRG 4 5 6 7 8 Function Select 1 LOOP TRG 4 5 6 7 8 Function Select Select Memory Attendant Manage Help Type 1 This function field is available for advancing screen to th...

Page 718: ...ry F7 Function Select Type 3 F8 Select options for CO Status Night Answer Store the selected data Type 3 This function field is available for concluding CO Management screen and moving to other screens as selected by function keys Type 3 F1 F2 Extension Manage F3 F8 LOOP TRG Pickup G Manage Attendant Manage Help Function Select LOOP TRG screen Extension Management scren Help screen Attendant Manag...

Page 719: ...us functions of the attendant console itself Conditions For details of the three functions in Operation Data on this page refer to the followings respec tively Section 6 G 6 00 Released Link Operation Section 6 G 2 00 Heavy Traffic Overflow Transfer to Station Section 6 F 2 00 Automatic Hold Concerning Tone Ring data Dial key click tone Determines whether key click tone is heard or not when pressi...

Page 720: ...its Feature Number Extension directory number Operator Call Specific Local CO Line Access Trunk Group 01 48 Access Doorphone Call 1 4 External Paging Station Paging External Paging Answer Station Paging Answer Message Cancel Night Service Manual Mode Set Night Service Manual Mode Cancel Flexible Night Service Remote Station Lock Set Remote Station Lock Cancel Other Number Needed None Operator spec...

Page 721: ...runk port physical number Resource number 1 to 3 Resource number 1 to 3 1 to 4 Continued Other Number Needed Function field Types of function fields Following two types of function fields are available for operation in Attendant Manage ment screen Switching of function fields For switching between the function fields shown below press the F8 Function Select key Type 1 Type 2 1 LOOP TRG 2 3 4 5 6 7...

Page 722: ...e options Stores selected value at the cursor position Type 2 This function field is available for concluding Attendant Management screen and moving to other screens as selected by function keys Type 2 F1 Extension Manage F8 Help screen Type 1 LOOP TRG Pickup G Manage CO Manage Help Function Select Extension Management screen Pickup Group Management screen CO Management screen LOOP TRG screen F3 F...

Page 723: ...SE Release a call functions as a hook switch SPLIT Switch between the source and destination parties Input SRC DES Message 1 LOOP TRG 2 Next Page 3 Previous Page 4 5 6 7 8 Function Select Programmable keys 1 Key Feature ACCOUNT Enter an account number max 10 digits into the SMDR call record AUTO Make a system speed dial call Press AUTO key and dial s 3 digit code 001 200 CALL PARK Place and retrie...

Page 724: ...trunk group No 01 48 EFA Sending a flash signal through the CO line VMTRNS When operator is talking Press the VMTRNS key and Dial of transfer extention number Input L 1 SRC DES Message Help May 27 99 FRI 11 53 AM Command with Full Keyboard 4 4 1 LOOP TRG 2 Next Page 3 Previous Page 4 5 6 7 8 Function Select Input L 1 SRC DES Message Command Format Feature CALL CALL NAME DEPT Call by Name and or De...

Page 725: ...nction Select 4 5 6 7 8 Function Select 1 LOOP TRG 4 5 6 7 8 Function Select Busy Lamp Type Extension Directory Extension Manage Pickup G Manage Attendant Manage Switching of function fields For switching between the function fields shown above press the F8 key Function Select F8 Function Select F8 Function Select F8 Function Select Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Speed Dial 1 LOOP TRG 2 3 2 3 Call Park CO M...

Page 726: ... available for switching Help screen to next or previous page Type 2 This function field is available for concluding this screen and switching to another screen as selected by the corresponding function key Type 2 F1 F2 Busy Lamp Type F3 F4 F5 F8 LOOP TRG screen Speed Dial screen Extension Directory screen Call Park screen Type 1 LOOP TRG Speed Dial Extension Directory Call Park Function Select BL...

Page 727: ... to another screen as selected by a function key Type 3 F1 F2 Extension Manage F3 F4 F5 F8 LOOP TRG screen CO Management screen Type 1 LOOP TRG Pickup G Manage CO Manage Attendant Manage Function Select Extension Management screen Pickup Group Management screen Attendant Management screen ...

Page 728: ......

Page 729: ... If tenant service is employed accessible trunk group is limited to the trunk groups within the same tenant System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Operation 1 3 Automatic Route Selection System Local Access Group Hunt Sequence System Numbering Plan 2 11 Local CO Line Access 11 C 4 00 11 C 10 00 11 C 11 00 10 D 1 01 10 D 5 00 10 D 6 02 Operation Dial tone sounds For instance an idle LOOP key i...

Page 730: ... Group 01 48 Access 11 C 11 00 10 D 6 02 Operation Dial tone sounds For instance an idle LOOP key is pressed SRC indicator is lit and dial tone sounds 1 Press the TRG Key Program mable key then dial the trunk group number 01 to 48 Another dial tone sounds and an idle line in specified trunk group is selected automatically 2 Dial the telephone number of the outside party Supplement The following pr...

Page 731: ...ng a CO line must be stored as leading digits System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Tenant Speed Dialing System Boundary System Speed Dialing System 11 C 5 00 11 C 13 00 10 D 2 00 10 D 8 00 Attendant Management Reference AUTO key 6 C 10 00 The feature numbers for selecting a CO line are Local CO Line Access Trunk Group 01 48 Access Operation Speed Dialing manual 1 Press an idle LOOP key The ...

Page 732: ...M O2 Y W2 6X O2 0Y W 1 O2 M W 0Y O 5 0M W2 Y W2 M 7 Y O H J Y W2 O H W W2 5 W O Y O W2 0Y O2 O M O2 O2 Y W2 L W2 Y O X O 0Y W2 0Me X O2 0M W M f 3 X O2 M 7 Yg V X 0Y J Y hN 1 J 0M W Yhe L O M W Y hfI4 1 W2 0Y 7 Y L W J H 1 O 5 7 5 O2 0Y Y O2 Y 5 W2 J H H W 0M 7 5 O M H J O2 Y W hfO2 0Y J W M heW2 0M 7 W Yhe O O Y h O2 3 Hh W2 0M N J hO 0M W f O2 M hf W f O2 0Y 3 hfO eO2 M V 6KgO2 Y V 0Y V M V4 0Y ...

Page 733: ...and 01 to 16 TRLSD 00 receives a treatment different from TRLSDs 01 to 16 In TRLSD 01 to 16 01 is the highest level and 16 is the lowest 1 Toll Restriction Plan for System Speed Dialing Code TRLSD 00 When an outgoing CO call is made by dialing a System Speed Dialing Code TRLSD 00 the attendant receive standard toll restriction treatment If selected speed dialing code includes Local Trunk Dial Acce...

Page 734: ...a System Speed Dialing Code TRLSD 01 to 16 Compares TRLSD with TRLA The call is made Transmit the registered number to CO line Checks a call against System Toll Restriction feature The call is prohibited sends reorder tone When an outgoing CO call is made by dialing a System Speed Dialing Code TRLSD 00 TRLA TRLSD not restricted restricted TRLA TRLSD 6 D 6 ...

Page 735: ... last dialed number PAUSE or SECRET are counted as one digit respectively Last number redialing memory is renewed automatically every time a new outgoing CO call is made including when ringback tone DND tone or busy tone is returned and even one digit is sent to CO line Dialing a feature number for selecting a CO line only does not renew the memorized number Attendant Management Reference REDIAL k...

Page 736: ...sounds If called party answers begin speaking Supplement After dialing the directory number the tone returned indicates the followings Ringback tone Calling the extension Busy tone The called extension is busy DND tone The called extension has DND assigned Reorder tone Incorrect number is dialed To make a call again press the CANCEL key and after hearing dial tone dial the directory number DN 6 D ...

Page 737: ... F2 next page F3 previous page then move the cursor by pressing F4 through F6 keys 3 Press the F7 key call to call the extension at the cursor position Ringback tone sounds When the called party answers begin speaking Supplement The attendant can monitor the busy idle status of the extension users at Extension Directory screen Idle Busy Extension Name Department No BLF Betty Project 1000 Jack Acco...

Page 738: ... F2 key busy lamp field One of four BLF screens appears Search the screen to find the desired extension by pressing the F2 key next page or the F3 key previous page 2 After searching the desired page press the F8 key function select The following function field appears on the screen 3 Move the cursor to the desired extension by pressing the F2 to F5 keys F2 F3 F4 F5 4 Press the F7 key call Ringbac...

Page 739: ...reen to find the desired extension by pressing the F2 key next page or the F3 key previous page 2 After searching the desired page press the F8 key function select The following function field appears on the screen 3 Move the cursor to the desired extension by pressing the F2 to F5 keys F2 F3 F4 F5 4 Press the F7 key call Ringback tone sounds When called party answers begin speaking Supplement For...

Page 740: ...rty answers start conversation Supplement If designated extension name or department name are not listed in the Extension Directory the call is not placed and the following message appears on the message line Message The Name Department does not exist If there are two or more same extension names all of them will be displayed Move the cursor to the desired extension and press the F7 key to place a...

Page 741: ...he SRC indicator lights and dial tone sounds 2 Dial the feature number for Voice Calling Mode Set Default 57 You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2 If your PITS has a display it shows Voice Alerting System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Numbering Plan 6 11 Voice Calling Mode Set Voice Calling Mode Cancel 11 C 11 00 10 D 6 06 Canceling the Voice Calling mode 1 Press an idle LOOP key The SRC indica...

Page 742: ...f Service BSS OHCA to Yes Programming Conditions Intercom Busy Station Signaling is effective if the called extension is preset to either of the following functions System Class of Service BSS OHCA Deny is set to Yes System Class of Service Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb is set to Yes Operation Calling an extension 1 Press an idle LOOP key The SRC indicator lights and dial tone sounds 2 Dial the d...

Page 743: ...ension Programming System Programming Reference VT Dumb Configuration System Assignment Extension Station 1 4 OHCA circuit 11 C 1 00 11 C 24 00 10 C 1 00 10 G 1 01 Attendant Management Reference OHCA key 6 C 10 00 Conditions OHCA does not work if System Class of Service 1 3 BSS OHCA Deny is set to Yes at called extension Operation 1 Dial the extension number Busy tone sounds 2 Press the OHCA key p...

Page 744: ...r to Section 4 I 6 00 System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Operation 1 3 Beep Tone for Bsy ovr Brg in 11 C 4 00 10 D 1 01 Operation 1 Dial the extension number Busy tone sounds 2 Dial 1 Overriding tone sounds at the three parties Start a three person conversation In case overriding is impossible busy tone continues Supplement To complete a three person conversation after overriding on the S...

Page 745: ...ride can be done by dialing 1 again Operation 1 Dial the extension number If DND feature is assigned to the called extension DND tone sounds 2 Dial 1 Ringback tone sounds and calling starts Supplement To transfer a call to extension which has DND assigned Example After answering an incoming CO call to transfer the call to an extension dial the extension number the incoming call on SRC side is held...

Page 746: ......

Page 747: ... extension call first then changes to show the CO call as soon as it reaches Programming Conditions If another call arrives during a conversation the attendant can answer it by simply pressing the ANSWER key In this case the previous call will be placed on hold or disconnected depending on the attendant console programming For further information refer to Section 6 F 2 00 Automatic Hold System Pro...

Page 748: ...g a LOOP key associated with it In this case the previous call will be placed on hold or disconnected depending on the attendant console programming For further information refer to Section 6 F 2 00 Automatic Hold Operation 1 Multiple incoming calls are arriving at LOOP keys Multiple SRC indicators start to flash in 240 winks 2 Press the desired LOOP key The SRC indicator of the pressed LOOP key l...

Page 749: ... call arriving at an extension but not ringing Refer to Section 3 D 3 02 Flexible Ringing Assignment Delayed Ringing for further information For the above calls reorder tone sounds after dialing the feature number for Directed Call Pickup and the directory number of the ringing extension and the following message appears on the Message line Message No Incoming Call System Programming Reference VT ...

Page 750: ......

Page 751: ...n 60 wink The DES indicator of that LOOP key lights and dial tone sounds Retrieving a held call The SRC indicator is flashing and the DES indicator is lit 1 Press the LOOP key in holding status Conversation with the SRC side party is established The SRC indicator of the corresponding LOOP key is lit the DES indicator light goes out HOLD O2 6X W2 X 7 1 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 40M I M I4 0M I4 0M hf I4 M I H ...

Page 752: ...ey Only during a conversation with a CO call Pressing the TOLL CHG key programmable key Only during a conversation with an extension Pressing the AUTO key programmable key Pressing the PAGE key Pressing the TRG key programmable key Pressing the One Touch key programmable key LOOP 2 00 Automatic Hold Description Making a call during a conversation with an outside or extension party causes holding t...

Page 753: ...r s parking place If music source is connected to the system Music on Hold such as radio is sent to the parked party For sending Music on Hold prior assignment is necessary by programming Refer to Section 3 E 1 00 Music on Hold CALL PARK 10 D 2 00 11 C 5 00 Operation Parking a call During a conversation with an extension or outside party 1 Press the CALL PARK key programmable key The call is held ...

Page 754: ...en Message Call park retrieve from xx xx call park area number 01 to 20 Supplement If no call is parked in a specified parking area reorder tone sounds and the following message appears on the message line Message Call park retrieve deny Retrieving a parked call employing Call Park System screen 1 Press the F5 key call park Call Park System screen appears on the screen 2 Move the cursor to the des...

Page 755: ...ecall Refer to Section 3 E 3 00 Transfer Recall for further information System Programming Reference VT Dumb System System Timer Transfer Recall 11 C 6 00 10 D 3 00 Operation During a conversation with an extension or outside party 1 Dial the extension number of the destination Ringback tone sounds 2 Press the RELEASE key Both SRC DES indicator lights go out and the attendant console becomes silen...

Page 756: ...s set by System System Timer Transfer Recall System Programming Reference VT Dumb System System Timer Transfer Recall 11 C 6 00 10 D 3 00 Operation During a conversation with an outside party or extension The SRC indicator is lit 1 Press the HOLD key The SRC indicator starts to flash in 60 wink and the DES indicator lights 2 Dial the extension number of the destination Busy tone sounds on DES side...

Page 757: ...y Both SRC DES indicator lights go out and attendant console becomes silent The following message appears on the message line Example If transferring a call routed via trunk group 01 to extension 100 Message TRG 01 is connected with Ext 100 RELEASE Changing the transfer destination before pressing the RELEASE key 1 Press the CANCEL key 2 Dial the extension number of the new destination Supplement ...

Page 758: ...outside party Ringback tone sounds from the CO line When the called party answers make the announce ment 3 Press the RELEASE key Held call is connected with the outside destination party and the attendant console becomes silent The following message appears on the message line on the screen Example If transferring extension 100 via CO line in the trunk group 01 Message Ext 100 is connected with TR...

Page 759: ...ned to the system Programming Conditions If Music on Hold is assigned the system sends Music on Hold to the transferred party during the transferring operation For further detail refer to Section 3 E 1 00 Music on Hold If Remote Maintenance Resource is in use busy tone is returned to the holding party Automatic Callback does not function in this case so the party should call Remote again when it b...

Page 760: ... Overflow destination In this case the call will be disconnected if not answered by the Overflow destination within 60 seconds See page 3 D 13 for further information Operation During a conversation with an outside party 1 Dial the FDN for UCD group 01 to 04 The LOOP key is released automatically Feature References Uniform Call Distribution UCD with without OGM Section 3 D 2 06 System Programming ...

Page 761: ... transfer those outside calls set Overflow transfer to Yes in the Attendant Management screen Programming System Programming Reference VT Dumb System System Timer Attendant Overflow Time Extension Attendant Console 1 3 Overflow 11 C 6 00 11 C 30 00 10 D 3 00 10 G 4 01 Attendant Management Reference Overflow transfer 6 C 10 00 Conditions If a call in the queue cannot be transferred to the preassign...

Page 762: ...the called extensions answer serial call is concluded If any of the called extensions is busy or does not answer calling the attendant console starts again automatically Attendant Management Reference SERIAL key 6 C 10 00 Operation CO call arrives at attendant console 1 Answer the call by pressing the ANSWER key SRC indicator lights Start conversation 2 Press the SERIAL key programmable key Outsid...

Page 763: ...tendant console 1 receives a call from extension 100 and transfer it to attendant console 2 I O Type of Attendant Console 1 1 Attendant console 1 answers the incoming call from extension 100 and holds it SRC Ext 100 Hold DES 2 Attendant console 1 calls attendant console 2 SRC Ext 100 Hold DES ATT2 Outgoing 3 Attendant console 2 answers SRC DES ATT2 Talk 4 Attendant console 1 presses the RELEASE ke...

Page 764: ... indicator starts flashing in 240 wink 1 Press the ANSWER key The DES indicator lights Start conversation with the DES side party The SRC indicator remains flashing in 60 wink 2 Press the CANCEL key Dial tone sounds from DES side and calling starts The SRC indicator is flashing in 60 wink 3 Dial the telephone number of the destination Ringback tone sounds 4 Press the RELEASE key The held call is t...

Page 765: ...Yes in Attendant Management screen beforehand Programming Conditions If the destination is busy or has DND assigned transferring is ineffective In the former case pressing the RELEASE key provides Camp on Transfer Attendant Management Reference Released link operation 6 C 10 00 Operation During a conversation with an outside or inside party 1 Dial the extension number of the destination party The ...

Page 766: ...ndant console assigned as the Operator 1 3 Overflow extension assignment If the extension assigned as the overflow extension is busy or not assigned this feature does not work The call continues to ring at an LOOP key 4 Attendant Overflow Time The timer which applies to the feature is System System Timer Attendant Overflow Time 5 Single and Dual Console mode This feature works in both Single and D...

Page 767: ...e SRC indicator lights start conversation with an another party 2 Press the VM TRNS Key The dial tone sounds The DES indicator lights the SRC indicator flash 60 wink 3 Dial the telephone number Input the extension number which receives a message The call is transferred to the Voice Mail and the caller begins to access the Voice Mail Attendant Management Reference VM TRNS Key 6 C 10 00 ANSWER VM TR...

Page 768: ......

Page 769: ...including another attendant console is unavailable Attendant Management Reference CONF key 6 C 10 00 System Programming Reference VT Dumb Configuration System Assignment TSW Additional CONF 11 C 1 00 10 C 1 00 Operation During a conversation with an outside or inside party 1 Place a new call while holding the current party If the called party answers begin speaking 2 Press the CONF key programmabl...

Page 770: ...ent Reference CONF key 6 C 10 00 System Programming Reference VT Dumb Group Trunk Group CO CO Duration Limit 11 C 15 00 10 E 1 00 Operation Setting up an unattended conference call During a three person conference including two outside parties 1 Press the CONF key programmable key A three party conference changes to a CO CO call and both SRC DES indicators start flashing in 120 wink Returning to a...

Page 771: ...arty is placed on hold The SRC indicator is lit and the DES indicator flashes in 60 wink 3 Press the SPLIT key again Conversation with the DES side party starts and the SRC side party is placed on hold The DES indicator is lit the SRC indicator flashes in 60 wink 4 The attendant can speak with the SRC side party and the DES side party alternately by every pressing of the SPLIT key SPLIT SPLIT SPLI...

Page 772: ...ice then doorphone call ringing starts No answer of the call in 15 seconds cancels the doorphone call Dialing 5 again while the door is open enables the attendant to prolong the opening duration to the specified duration assigned in Extension Doorphone Open Duration When you assign the destination of a doorphone call to attendant consoles and have two attendant consoles the call arrives alternatel...

Page 773: ...y programmable key End to End DTMF Signaling is used to access network services or voice mail access which requires touch tone signals The E E key should be assigned in Attendant Management screen Programming Conditions None Attendant Management Reference E E key 6 C 10 00 Operation During a call extension outside or doorphone 1 Press the E E key programmable key 2 Dial the telephone number DTMF s...

Page 774: ...all and during a conversation with the SRC side party with holding the DES side party Cancel Key Function does not work while talking on DES side without holding a call on SRC side When a call is made after pressing the CANCEL key it is checked against the system toll restriction procedure and a call duration time count is renewed System Programming Reference VT Dumb Group Trunk Group 1 3 Disconne...

Page 775: ...er to Section 6 I 1 05 Call Park and Paging System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Numbering Plan 3 11 Station Paging 11 C 11 00 10 D 6 03 Operation 1 Press an idle LOOP key and dial the feature number for Station Paging and 0 in succession After confirmation tone sounds all extension paging through built in speakers is possible 2 Perform paging 3 An extension answers the page 4 Press the REL...

Page 776: ...elephones can be carried out by pressing the PAGE key during a conversation For further details refer to Section 6 I 1 05 Call Park and Paging Operation 1 Press an idle LOOP key and dial the feature number for Station Paging Defaule 42 and paging group number 1 to 8 in succession Confirmation tone sounds The specified paging group gets ready to be paged System Programming Reference VT Dumb System ...

Page 777: ...1 00 10 D 1 01 10 D 6 03 10 F 2 00 6 I 3 Conditions If Tenant Service is employed paging is available only in the same tenant External paging originated by the attendant can override external paging from an extension The extension will hear reorder tone The followings show the paging priorities 1 Paging External Pager from an Attendant Console 2 TAFAS Trunk Answer From Any Station Refer to Section...

Page 778: ...EASE key The call is released from the console LOOP RELEASE Transferring a call using Paging External Pagers During a conversation 1 Selecting external pager 1 Dial the feature number for External Paging Default 41 and 1 in succession Selecting external pager 2 Dial the feature number for External Paging and 2 in succession Selecting external pagers 1 and 2 Dial the feature number for External Pag...

Page 779: ...attendant overrides TAFAS call and BGM through External Pager which are interrupted and start again when the paging is finished For further information about TAFAS refer to Section 3 D 2 04 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS Day Service System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Operation 1 3 External Paging 1 2 System Numbering Plan 3 11 External Paging Station Paging Trunk Pager Music Source E...

Page 780: ...gers 1 and 2 Paging All Extensions and External Pagers Programming Conditions This function is available only during a conversation System Programming Reference VT Dumb Extension Attendant Console 1 3 ATT 1 PAG ATT 2 PAG 11 C 30 00 10 G 4 01 6 I 6 Operation During a conversation 1 Press the PAGE key The other party is parked and paging is possible The following display appears on the message line ...

Page 781: ... Programming System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Operation 1 3 External Paging 1 2 External Music Source 1 2 System Numbering Plan 8 11 BGM Through External Paging Trunk Pager Music Source External Pager Tenant External Pager BGM Music Source Tenant Music Source For Use 11 C 4 00 11 C 11 00 11 C 21 00 11 C 22 00 10 D 1 01 10 D 6 08 10 F 2 00 6 I 7 Conditions If Tenant Service is employed t...

Page 782: ......

Page 783: ...same tenant by the Operator 1 System Programming Reference VT Dumb Group Trunk Group 1 3 Incoming Mode Night Trunk CO Line Night Answer Point System Numbering Plan 8 11 Flexible Night Service 11 C 15 00 11 C 20 00 11 C 11 00 10 E 1 01 10 F 1 00 10 D 6 08 Flexible Fixed The Operator 1 Attendant Console or Extension can change the night answer destination A group of extensions Night Answer Group can...

Page 784: ...tically The following display appears on the message line Example Message Flexible Night Service Set Ext 1000 3 4 Setting night answer point to Remote Dial Remote Directory Number Confirmation tone sounds the LOOP key is released automatically The display below appears on the message line Example Message Flexible Night Service Set Remote 6 J 2 ...

Page 785: ...nction Select F8 4 F4 Operation Changing Night Answer point by employing CO Management screen 1 Press the F4 key CO manage CO Management screen appears on the display CO ID TRG No CO Name CO Status Night Answer 10101 16 DDD01 10102 01 DDD02 UNA 1 2 Press the F2 key next page or the F3 key previous page Obtain the desired screen 3 Press the F8 key function select The following function field appear...

Page 786: ...ct UNA1 UNA2 Ext or Remote by pressing the F6 key select UNA 1 External Pager 1 UNA 2 External Pager 2 Ext Extension Remote Remote maintenance port If EXT is selected the extension directory number must be entered successively 7 Press the F7 key memory 2 3 F2 or F3 6 F6 Select 7 F7 Memory ...

Page 787: ... Programming Reference VT Dumb System Operation 3 3 Night Service Auto Start Time System Tenant Night Service Tenant 2 Auto Start Time System Numbering Plan 8 11 Night Mode Set Night Mode Cancel Night Service Manual Mode Set Night Service Manual Mode Cancel 11 C 4 00 11 C 5 00 11 C 11 00 10 D 1 03 10 D 2 00 10 D 6 08 6 J 5 Operation Changing DAY mode to NIGHT mode While the NIGHT key indicator is ...

Page 788: ...ter to conclude an account code Attendant Management Reference ACCOUNT key 6 C 10 00 6 J 6 Operation Entering an account code when calling an outside party 1 Press an idle LOOP key The SRC indicator lights dial tone sounds 2 Dial the feature number for Local CO Line Access Default 9 Dial tone 2 sounds 3 Press the ACCOUNT key programmable key Dial tone sounds The following message appears on the me...

Page 789: ...programmable key Dial tone sounds and the following message appears Message Enter Account Code 2 Dial an account code 0 through 9 up to 10 digits The account code appears on the message line in I O field 3 Dial The account code is stored and the messages on the message line disappear Reorder tone sounds again ACCOUNT ACCOUNT Correcting an input error While entering an account code before entering ...

Page 790: ...at you want to hide with Then the part does not appear on the CRT screen It is assignable to print out the secret part onto SMDR Station Message Detail Recording by assigning System Operation Print Secret Dial to Yes Programming System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Operation Print Secret Dial System Speed Dialing System 11 C 4 00 11 C 13 00 10 D 1 00 10 D 8 00 6 J 8 Conditions When storing ...

Page 791: ...e Line Telephone without MESSAGE lamp 2 The maximum number of message waiting indications available for the system or tenant 1 2 has been assigned In this case the following message is shown on the message line of Attendant Console screen Message MW Message Waiting isn t accepted 3 Tenant Service The maximum number of message waiting indications available for Tenant 1 and 2 is determined by System...

Page 792: ...SG key After confirmation tone sounds the following message is shown on the message line Example Message MW Message Waiting at EXT 100 Canceling the Message Waiting Indication left on the extension 1 Press an idle LOOP key 2 Dial the feature number for Message Cancel 9 default and the extension number of the message receiver in succession MSG LOOP 6 J 10 ...

Page 793: ...on Management Screen 2 By dialing the associated feature number The attendant can also set or cancel the electronic station lock on each pickup group by employing Pickup Group Management Screen of the attendant console For further information refer to Section 6 C 8 00 Pickup Group Management Screen Programming Conditions When an extension is locked by the operator unlocking by the locked extension...

Page 794: ... 5 6 7 8 Select 123456789012 123456789012 No Name Change Function Select 4 5 F4 or F5 No FWD DND Lock LOOP TRG 1 Press the F2 key extension manage Extension Management screen appears on the display No FWD DND Lock 100 101 2 By pressing the F2 key next page or the F3 key previous page obtain the desired screen 3 Press the F8 key function select The following function field appears 4 Move the cursor...

Page 795: ...to be set canceled DND or canceled FWD Note Assigning FWD is unavailable by this operation 6 Select setting item by pressing the F6 key select For canceling the function select mark 7 Press the F7 key memory to store the selected data 2 3 F2 or F3 6 F6 Select 7 F7 Memory 1234567 1234567 1234567 ...

Page 796: ... 2 3 F2 or F3 6 F6 Select 7 F7 Memory 1234567 1234567 1234567 4 Move the cursor to Lock field by pressing the F4 key or the F5 key 5 Move the cursor to the target extension number to be set canceled Electronic Station Lock by pressing the F2 key or the F3 key 6 Select the setting item by pressing the F6 key select For canceling Electronic Station Lock select mark 7 Press the F7 key memory to store...

Page 797: ...ickup Group Management Jun 15 91 THU 12 00 PM Group Station Lock 2 Move the cursor to the pickup group number to be set canceled Electronic Station Lock by pressing the F2 key through the F5 keys 3 Select for locking for canceling locking by pressing the F6 key select 4 Press the F7 key memory to store the selected data Group 01 08 01 02 03 04 05 06 Group 09 16 09 10 Select Memory 2 3 4 5 F2 F5 6 ...

Page 798: ...SRC indicator of the LOOP key lights and dial tone sounds 2 1 For setting DND Dial the feature number for Remote DND Set Default 75 and the extension number to be set DND in succession 2 2 For canceling DND Dial the feature number for Remote DND Cancel Default 75 and the extension number to be canceled DND in succession LOOP Confirmation tone sounds and the LOOP key is released automatically Using...

Page 799: ...ering the toll restriction level of the extension user for only one call There comes an incoming extension call 1 Press the ANSWER key The SRC indicator lights Start conversation with the extension The extension asks the attendant to change the toll restriction level 2 Press the TOLL CHG key programmable key The extension is placed on hold The SRC indicator flashes in 60 wink and the DES indicator...

Page 800: ...e and department Conditions The attendant can make an extension call after searching Y can be entered as a wild card for searching extension names and departments For displaying all contents of Extension Direc tory SEARCH Y CR SEARCH Y CR SEARCH Y Y CR This procedure assumes the following exten sions are in the Extension Directory 1000 Jack Account 1001 James Project 1002 Betty Sales Execute SEARC...

Page 801: ...the department name account The following message appears on the Input line Input SEARCH Jack account 4 Press the RETURN key The corresponding extensions will be searched and displayed on the Extension Directory screen Extension Name Department No BLF Jack Account 1000 Jack Account 2000 Supplement In case several extensions match the search criteria all subjects appear In case no extension match t...

Page 802: ...tion 10 I 1 00 Special Attended DISA Programming System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Numbering Plan 9 11 OGM Record OGM Playback Special Attended DISA For Use 11 C 11 00 11 C 33 00 10 D 6 09 10 I 1 00 Conditions 1 Tenant Service If tenant service is employed the affiliation of each DISA card is determined by the system programming Special Attendant DISA tenant The Operator 1 of each tenant...

Page 803: ...utomatically Accordingly it is not necessary to execute step 4 afterward In step 3 if you wish to change the message during recording you can start recording again by dialing In Step 4 if you wish to interrupt and finish playback dial LOOP Playing back OGM 1 Press an idle LOOP key The SRC indicator lights and dial tone sounds 2 Dial the feature number for OGM Playback Default 68 and a number below...

Page 804: ... 4 00 Testing the Ports for details about trunk port physical number LOOP TRG Conditions The attendant can place a call by specifying a trunk but cannot hold or transfer it When specified trunk is busy busy tone sounds Verifying a trunk can be done only when a call is placed from SRC side System Operation PITS Programming Password System Programming Reference VT Dumb Attendant Management Reference...

Page 805: ...cession 10 00 CO Access Control Description The attendant can control CO lines to prevent them from being accessed from extensions by employing CO Management screen If CO busy out is assigned to a CO line both extensions and attendant consoles cannot access the line Refer to Section 3 F 8 00 CO Busy Out for further information If CO access control is assigned to a CO line extensions cannot access ...

Page 806: ...een appears on the display CO ID BLF TRG No CO Name CO Status Night Answer 11101 01 DDD02 UNA 1 11102 02 EEE03 2 By pressing the F2 key next page or the F3 key previous page obtain the desired screen 3 Press the F8 key function select The following function field appears 4 By pressing the F4 key move the cursor to the CO status field Operation CO access control by employing CO Management screen CO...

Page 807: ...ing the F2 key or the F3 key 6 Select CO busy out or CO access ctrl by pressing the F6 key select If mark is selected the CO is returned to normal status 7 Press the F7 key memory Entered data is stored 2 3 F2 or F3 6 F6 Select 7 F7 Memory 1234567 1234567 ...

Page 808: ...re the attendant console can execute any other operations than the operations below Operation using CRT display Operation using function keys F1 through F8 Operation using full keyboard Programming None Conditions When the backup battery is not provided the attendant console is not operable Call processing is not interrupted when power is failed and when power is restored ...

Page 809: ...RNA Description If an incoming CO call is not answered in a specified period or if a held incoming CO call is not answered in a programmed period after Held Call Reminder or Unscreened Call Transfer Recall or Unattended Conference Recall the calls can be transferred to an Attendant Console programmed The destination of Intercept Routing during day and night are assigned in Group Trunk Group Interc...

Page 810: ... Reminder feature to any extension Refer to Section 4 I 3 00 5 G 3 00 Timed Reminder If Timed Reminder with OGM is programmed beforehand the extension user can hear the wake up message Refer to Section 3 F 13 00 Timed Reminder with OGM Wake up Call Programming Conditions 1 The difference between Timed Reminder and Remote Timed Reminder is 2 At a single extension only the latest setting is valid wh...

Page 811: ...ing message appears on the Message line Message Alarm Cancelled Ext 100 Confirming the assigned alarm time 1 Press an idle LOOP key The SRC indicator lights and dial tone sounds 2 Dial the feature number for Remote Timed Reminder Confirm default 72 and the extension number to be confirmed the setting in succession The LOOP key is released automatically and the following message appears on the Mess...

Page 812: ...Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA 1 TRG 02 1 T20803 2 T 01 3 R 100 4 Item No 1 2 3 4 Display TRG 02 T20803 T 01 R 100 Description The call is forwarded redirected by IRNA to an Attendant Console via a CO line of Trunk Group TRG 02 Name of a CO line mentioned in Item 1 Toll Restriction Level of TRG 02 is 01 The call is forwarded redirected by IRNA to an Attendant Console from Ext 100 CO DIL 1 1 DID ...

Page 813: ...KX TD500 SYSTEM System Reference Manual Vol 2 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co Ltd Central P O Box 288 Osaka 530 91 Japan Printed in Japan PSQX1220ZA K0396MT0 C Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co Ltd 1997 ...

Page 814: ......

Page 815: ... Maintenance VT220 and Compatibles Section 9 Preparation for Programming and Maintenance Dumb Type Terminal Section 10 System Programming VT220 and Compatibles Section 11 System Programming Dumb Type Terminal Section 12 System Programming Proprietary Integrated Telephone System PITS Section 13 Station Programming Proprietary Integrated Telephone System PITS Section 14 Station Programming Attendant...

Page 816: ......

Page 817: ...Section 7 Manual Vol 2 Overview ...

Page 818: ......

Page 819: ...m Administration Device Connection Access 7 B 4 3 01 On Site Terminal RS 232C Direct Communication 7 B 4 3 02 Attendant Console 7 B 5 3 03 Remote Terminal with Modem Auto Dialing 7 B 6 3 04 Remote Terminal with Modem Manual Dialing 7 B 7 3 05 Remote Terminal with Modem Call Auto Answer 7 B 8 4 00 Programming 7 B 9 5 00 Test 7 B 9 6 00 Monitor 7 B 10 7 00 Backup Utility 7 B 10 ...

Page 820: ......

Page 821: ...tion 12 System Programming PITS This section provides information for a certain programming of the system database using PITS telephone Section 13 Station Programming PITS This section provides information for the programming of various features specific to each PITS telephone and DSS console using PITS telephone Section 14 Station Programming ATT This section provides information for the diagnosi...

Page 822: ......

Page 823: ...erminal can perform system administration at any one time Starting up the system administration from a remote location is available For details about Remote Operation refer to Section 15 B 2 00 System Administration from a Remote Location System Configurations Three methods are available for system administration as shown below System administration device is determined by selecting the desired po...

Page 824: ... and Station Message Detailed Recording SMDR SIO 2 is used for SMDR only SIO 1 is for programming and diagnostics and external system programming data storage functions Typical devices would include VT220 compatibles personal computers and line printers Refer to Section 10 D 7 00 Communication Interface for further information RS 232C Connector Pin Configuration When you use the IBM PC you will so...

Page 825: ...n case connector is female pin order is completely reversed 1 13 14 25 View from the top of the connector 2 In the case of connecting terminal is 9 pin IBM PC type Circuit Type EIA AA BB BA CB CA CD AB CC Signal Name FG RXD TXD CTS RTS DTR SG DSR Pin No 1 3 2 5 4 20 7 6 Circuit Type EIA BA BB CA CB CC AB CD Signal Name TXD RXD RTS CTS DSR SG DTR Pin No 3 2 7 8 6 5 4 KX TD500 RS 232C Port 25 pin Te...

Page 826: ...othing is displayed after connection check the cable connection communication parameters or press the CR Enter key several times If your communication software terminal software has the the DEC VT100 or VT220 Emulation you can execute the programming either in the VT mode or the Dumb mode If it doesn t have the display of the VT mode gets confused In this case change the programming mode to the Du...

Page 827: ...llation of Attendant Console 2 Set the PRG switch on the attendant console to ON then the initial screen of the VT mode will appear Note Please confirm that the keyboard KX T96145 is connected before executing the administration Main Unit Extension Extension Attendant console 1 Attendant console 2 A T L C ...

Page 828: ...ASCII File Receive Send Protocol ASCII Text Modem Initialize Command ATB1V1E0X1 Dial Prefix ATDT for DTMF Type Trunk ATDP for Pulse Type Trunk 4 Dial the number The number differs depending on the remote access mode of the KX TD500 as follows A Using DIL 1 1 to RMT XXXXX Telephone number to call that CO line B Using DISA XXXXX T XXXX RMT FDN Default 599 Tone dial mode Pause More than one pause may...

Page 829: ...dem Initialize Command ATB1V1E0X1 Dial Prefix ATDT for DTMF Type Trunk ATDP for Pulse Type Trunk 4 Dial the number The number differs depending on the remote access mode of the KX TD500 as follows A Using DIL 1 1 to RMT XXXXX Telephone number to call that CO line B Using DISA XXXXX wait for DISA message XXXX RMT FDN Default 599 Telephone number to call that CO line C Using Operator Transfer XXXXX ...

Page 830: ...ength 8 bits Parity None Stop Bits 1 bit Data Flow Control XON XOFF Auto Wrap OFF Terminal Emulation DEC VT100 or VT220 Capturing Data RAWASCII File Receive Send Protocol ASCII Text Modem Initialize Command ATB1V1E0X1 Dial Prefix ATDT for DTMF Type Trunk ATDP for Pulse Type Trunk Modem Auto Answer Set Up ATV1S0 1 4 Wait for the RMT ALARM Note To execute this procedure the communication software mu...

Page 831: ... s built in maintenance capabilities and the basic diagnostics in fault diagnosis and corrective maintenance are described in Section 15 Maintenance VT220 and Compatibles and Section 16 Maintenance Dumb Self Test System Detected Troubles The KX TD500 system has the capability of the diagnostic self test which is automatically executed at the desired time everyday It takes a long time to perform th...

Page 832: ... individually Station Trunk Group Attendant Console DISA OGM1 OGM2 AGC Refer to Section 15 G Monitor for further information about monitor 7 00 Backup Utility Making backups of the system programming data and keeping it is extremely important in the unlikely event that system programming data are lost in a system failure Backup Utility consists of save and load Save is to transmit a file of data f...

Page 833: ...Section 8 Preparation for Programming and Maintenance VT220 and Compatibles ...

Page 834: ......

Page 835: ...00 Date and Time Set Up Screen 8 B 5 5 00 Main Menu Screen 8 B 6 6 00 Operating Flow Chart 8 B 7 C Menu Screen 8 C 1 1 00 Introduction 8 C 1 2 00 Operation of Switching Screens 8 C 2 3 00 Returning to Previous Screen 8 C 3 4 00 Programming Main Menu 8 C 4 5 00 Test Main Menu 8 C 6 6 00 Monitor Main Menu 8 C 6 7 00 Print Out 8 C 7 8 00 Change Password 8 C 7 9 00 Change Date and Time 8 C 7 10 00 Bac...

Page 836: ...0 Concluding Function Mode by CTRL C 8 H 7 10 00 Key Operation Table for Various Terminals 8 H 8 I Operation of Function Keys 8 I 1 1 00 Relation between Function Keys and Screens 8 I 1 2 00 Features Assigned to Function Keys 8 I 1 3 00 Function Mode 8 I 2 J Execution of Function Modes 8 J 1 1 00 COMMON F1 and EXIT F7 8 J 1 2 00 SHOW LV Show Level 8 J 2 3 00 CHG LV Change Level 8 J 3 4 00 INS In S...

Page 837: ...u enter the correct password the terminal displays the Main Menu screen from which you can select administration functions By selecting an item from the Main Menu you enter a system programming area and can access specific system parameters and features 8 A 1 A Introduction 1 00 On Site Administration Description You can administer system programming and system maintenance by using the RS 232C ter...

Page 838: ...on you can operate the system in the same way as if you were on site Only one system administration terminal can be connected to the system at a time 8 A 2 2 00 System Administration from a Remote Location Description From a remote location you can execute system programming diagnosis and traffic measurements using a VT220 100 Compatible Terminal and Modem For details about communication parameter...

Page 839: ...nitor Main Menu Print Out Menu Allows you to print out the system programming parameters and traffic information For further details refer to Section 8 C 7 00 Print Out Change Password Enables you to change the password for On Site and Remote For further details refer to Section 8 C 8 00 Change Password Change Date Time Enables you to change the date and time For further details refer to Section 8...

Page 840: ...itor Print Out Change Password Change Date Time Backup Utility 3 Displays whether the cursor is in the Screen Editing Field or in the Command Line Location Screen Editing Field Command Line Display SCR LIN 4 Displays the entry method select or direct Entry Method Select value by space key Enter value directly Display SEL DIR OFL PRG SCR SEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Command Line Message Line Screen Editing ...

Page 841: ...Editing Field Used for displaying or entering data Command Line When pressing the menu number or function key displays the messages to execute the function Message Line Displays messages such as error messages in programming Function Field Displays each function key ...

Page 842: ...or DPITS No OHCA TSW card not installed Reference 1 E 2 00 4 G 5 01 4 G 5 02 5 E 1 00 6 H 1 00 1 A 5 00 1 E 1 00 to 2 00 1 E 7 00 to 21 00 1 3 The relationship between the screen and the explanation table is shown by the arrows above 1 Shows the assigning items which depend on the screen items 2 Shows the optional and default values 3 Shows the reference for the assigning items For example interpr...

Page 843: ...ering Mode 1 00 Initial Screen Summary This screen is displayed first when administration is activated To conclude this screen and advance to the next screen press the RETURN key Panasonic Digital PBX KX TD500 System ...

Page 844: ...rs Name Programmers Name Up to 32 letters numbers or marks Up to 64 letters numbers or marks Up to 16 letters numbers or marks Up to 16 letters numbers or marks Up to 32 letters numbers or marks Up to 16 letters numbers or marks Up to 8 letters numbers or marks Up to 32 letters numbers or marks Up to 32 letters numbers or marks Continued Summary A screen for setting various data relating to the in...

Page 845: ...ion of Value System Password Protection Level 1 Protection Level 2 Protection Level 3 Protection Level 4 Comments Four digits consisting of letters numbers or marks Up to 70 letters numbers or marks LVL 1 LVL 2 LVL 3 LVL 4 blank Continued ...

Page 846: ...ord characters are not displayed when they are entered Displays ON LINE PROCESS screen in on line mode and OFF LINE PROCESS screen in off line mode The above screen appears when the system is in on line mode If no characters are entered within 30 seconds after this screen is displayed the display returns to the initial screen When you enter the correct password and press the RETURN key the termina...

Page 847: ... directly and select Month Day of the Week AM PM by pressing the space key To advance to the next screen without entering the data press the PF2 key To store the entered data press the PF2 or PF4 key For the storing operation refer to Section 8 H Key Functions Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Year 99 Last two digits of the year Month JAN JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC Da...

Page 848: ...Main Menu you enter a system programming area and can access specific system parameters and features To select an item from the Main Menu just type the number of the item you want followed by the return key Menu Number Reference Programming 1 8 C 4 00 Test 2 8 C 5 00 Monitor 3 8 C 6 00 Print Out 4 8 C 7 00 Change Password 5 8 C 8 00 Change Date Time 6 8 C 9 00 Backup Utility 7 8 C 10 00 Restart 8 ...

Page 849: ...BX System Administration ON LINE PROCESS PASSWORD Welcome to the Panasonic Digital PBX System Administration OFF LINE PROCESS PASSWORD Initial Screen Press the RETURN key System Installation Screen ON OFF line select Press the RETURN key Password Entry Screen Enter the password Press the RETURN key Enter year month day day of the week hour minute a m p m Press the RETURN key Main Menu Screen Setti...

Page 850: ......

Page 851: ...duction Enables you to assign or change system programming data by selecting the required screen This section explains the procedures for starting from the menu screen through the programming main menu screen to the sub menu screen ...

Page 852: ...bmenu Configuration System Assignment Programming Main Menu Example 1 01 01 Configuration 1 System Assignment Configuration Submenu screen Setting screen Programming Main Menu screen Main Menu screen RETURN RETURN RETURN The screen advances to the Programming Main Menu screen The screen advances to the Configuration Submenu screen The screen advances to the Setting screen Type the item number then...

Page 853: ...n Configuration System Assignment PF2 PF2 PF2 Main Menu screen Programming Submenu screen Pressing the PF2 key returns the screen to the Sub Menu screen Programming Main Menu screen Example 1 System Assignment 01 Configuration Pressing the PF2 key returns the screen to the Programming Main Menu screen Pressing the PF2 key returns the screen to the Main Menu screen Pressing the PF2 key while the Ma...

Page 854: ...l Attended Miscellaneous 1 RETURN Programming Main Menu Main Menu Not available Not available System Assignment Slot Assignment DN Assignment Channel Assignment Operation Tenant System Timer Class of Service Local Access Group Numbering Plan Communication Interface Speed Dialing System Absent Message Trunk Group UCD Paging Group Call Pickup Group CO Line Pager Music Source AGC Station DSS Console ...

Page 855: ...ic sources or tenant number for AGC Automatic Gain Control Refer to Section 10 F Trunk Screen Extension Assigns the parameters for each extension DSS consoles Doorphones and Attendant consoles Refer to Section 10 G Extension Screen Toll Restriction Assigns parameters for Toll Restriction Refer to Section 10 H Toll Restriction Screen Special Attended Assigns parameters for DISA Direct Inward System...

Page 856: ...ndition is good For further details of testing refer to Section 15 F Functional Test by Entering Commands 6 00 Monitor Main Menu Type 3 and press the RETURN key in the Main Menu screen then the Monitor Main Menu is displayed on the screen The illustration below shows the submenu screen and the setting screens Main Menu 3 RETURN Monitor Main Menu Error Log Device Status Traffic Station Trunk Group ...

Page 857: ...RETURN key in the Main Menu screen then the Change Password screen is displayed on the screen Allows you to change passwords for On Site operation and Remote operation respectively For further details refer to Section 8 E Changing Password Programming Monitor Print Stop Main Menu 4 RETURN Print Out Menu Main Menu Change Password 5 RETURN 9 00 Change Date and Time Type 6 and press the RETURN key in...

Page 858: ...Utility refer to Section 17 Backup Utility On Site 11 00 Restart Type 8 and press the RETURN key in the Main Menu screen initializes the system and the initial screen is displayed the result is the same as if you press the RESET button For further details refer to Section 8 G 2 00 Restart Main Menu 8 RETURN Restart 12 00 Exit Type 9 and press the RETURN key in the Main Menu screen then the initial...

Page 859: ...reen of the VT mode is displayed Main Menu Select the mode Programming mode PRG Operation mode OPE displays command information HLP Pre entering mode This operation is available only in the VT mode or Dumb mode Switching from the Dumb mode to the VT mode is impossible when the CPU SYSTEM SW is 3 Dumb mode or the system administration device in Operation 2 3 screen is set to the Dumb terminal For f...

Page 860: ......

Page 861: ... SMDR Connect your printer to SIO 2 port on the main unit of the system Refer to Section 10 D 7 00 Communication Interface for information about communication parameters Operation 1 When the following Print Out Menu screen appears type 1 for Programming submenu screens Type 2 for Monitor submenu screens and 3 for stop printing When you want to stop printing return to this screen and type 3 8 D 1 ...

Page 862: ...lowing Print Out Menu screen appears 2 1 When you want to print all programming press the F8 ALL PRT key 2 2 When you want to print each of the screen press the key of the desired screen and the RETURN key The submenu screen appears 8 D 2 ...

Page 863: ...ens specify ing the screen number is available Class of Service Class of Service No 01 32 Trunk Group Trunk Group No 01 48 CO Line Trunk Equipment No Physical No Station Station Equipment No Physical No DNxxxx DSS Console Station Equipment No Physical No ...

Page 864: ......

Page 865: ...r each password if you want to change the factory setting default value Default values are as follows Items On Site Protection Level 1 Protection Level 2 Protection Level 3 Protection Level 4 Default LVL1 LVL2 LVL3 LVL4 Items Remote Protection Level 1 Protection Level 2 Protection Level 3 Protection Level 4 Default LVL1 LVL2 LVL3 LVL4 8 E 1 ...

Page 866: ......

Page 867: ...Y JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC 1 to 31 day SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT 1 to 12 hour 00 to 59 minute AM morning PM afternoon evening Assigning items Year Month Day Day of the week Hour Minute Morning Afternoon Operation Enter Year Day Hour and Minute directly and select Month Day of the Week AM PM by pressing the space key For the input value refer to the table below 8 F 1 ...

Page 868: ......

Page 869: ...Restart Description Allows you to initialize the system Operation When you execute Restart the following message appears at the bottom of the screen Are you sure Y yes N no Type Y and press the RETURN key to restart If you do not want to restart the system type N and press the RETURN key 8 G 1 Panasonic Digital PBX KX TD500 System ...

Page 870: ......

Page 871: ...ows Moves the cursor to the previous line Moves the cursor to the next line Moves the cursor to left Moves the cursor to right Moves the cursor to the beginning of the next field or to the beginning of the field Moves the cursor to left while deleting the displayed character TAB B S 2 00 Command Execution by RETURN or ENTER To store the entered data in the line mode or in the function mode press t...

Page 872: ...he RETURN key The screen returns to the previous screen 2 To cancel the entered data enter C then press the RETURN key The screen does not change Main Menu Screen Programming Main Menu Screen Sub Menu Screen Setting Screen PF2 PF2 PF2 The screen returns to the previous menu screen Press the PF2 key or or Example N Y C Parameter Save OK Y yes N no C cancel The screen returns to the previous menu sc...

Page 873: ... Dumb ATT1 ATT2 1 SEL Select Input by SPACE key In System Operation 2 3 screen the first item is System Administration Device To select the desired device from the four options VT220 Dumb ATT1 ATT2 press the SPACE key One of the four options is displayed in the following order To reverse the selection order press the CTRL U keys simultaneously One of the four options is displayed in the following ...

Page 874: ...oring the entered data Press N key when not storing the entered data Press C key to cancel the entered data 3 Press the RETURN key System Operation Operation 1 3 Tenant Service Automatic Route Selection Parameter Save OK Y yes N no C cancel Y N C Press or or Press the PF4 key The following message appears at the bottom of the screen PF4 RETURN RETURN Press Y or N or C key Press the RETURN key Exam...

Page 875: ...ed data enter N then press the RETURN key The screen advances to the next screen 2 To cancel the entered parameters press C key then press the RETURN key The screen does not change Example or or N Y C System Operation Tenant Service Automatic Route Selection Operation 1 3 Press RETURN System Operation System Administration Device SMDR Operation 2 3 Press NEXT key Parameter Save OK Y yes N no C can...

Page 876: ...enter N Pressing the RETURN key causes the screen to return to the previous page 2 To cancel the entered parameters press C key then the RETURN key The screen does not change Example or or N Y C Parameter Save OK Y yes N no C cancel System Operation System Administration Device SMDR Operation 2 3 PREV System Operation Tenant Service Automatic Route Selection Operation 1 3 Press PREV key The screen...

Page 877: ... as follows Canceling DIR data becomes blank Canceling SEL data default value appears on that position To change the entered values move the cursor on that value then enter the new value 9 00 Concluding Function Mode by CTRL C For concluding the function mode press CTRL C keys simultaneously For details about the function mode refer to Section 8 I 3 00 Function Mode ...

Page 878: ...E 9 Output Start 10 Function key 11 Mode change 12 Reverse selection order FUNCTIONS PREV PF1 VT220 VT100 PF1 PF2 PF3 C CTRL PF4 ENTER RETURN S CTRL Q CTRL V CTRL U CTRL PF1 1 PF1 8 PF2 PF3 EMU EMU C CTRL PF4 EMU RETURN V CTRL U CTRL PF1 1 PF1 8 PF2 PF3 C CTRL PF4 RETURN Q CTRL V CTRL U CTRL S CTRL PF1 1 PF1 8 PF1 PF8 or PF1 PF8 or NEXT PF1 EMU PF1 EMU PF1 EMU PF1 EMU Attendant Console ...

Page 879: ...on Usable function keys may change depending on the selected screen For unavailable function keys space appears in the function field Example In the System Numbering Plan screen the following display appears in the function field Function display line 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Features assigned to the function keys F 2 INDEX Index F 3 COPY Copy F 4 READ Read F 6 HRD CPY Hard Copy F 7 AUTO CONF Automatic Con...

Page 880: ...nction keys the prompts below are displayed Function key Prompt F1 COMMON CMD F2 INDEX INDEX F3 COPY COPY F4 READ READ F7 AUTO CNF AUTOCNF F8 SET SET In function mode the following keys are not available NEXT PREV PF2 and PF4 To conclude function mode press the EXIT F7 key Pressing CTRL and C keys simultaneously also concludes function mode or other modes such as SHOW LV CHG LV and so on ...

Page 881: ...blished The cursor is flashing and you can choose a desired function from functions displayed on the function field as follows CMD J Execution of Function Modes F1 Operation Chart Press the COMMON key F1 Concluding the function mode 1 Press the F7 key The function mode is concluded Condition Available for all the setting screens and all the menu screens F7 Concluding function mode Press the EXIT k...

Page 882: ...Current Level 4 Conditions Press the EXIT F7 key to return to COMMON mode When back in COMMON mode executing other COMMON mode functions is possible SHOW LV is available for all the menu screens and the setting screens Function mode Press the COMMON key F1 Press the SHOW LV key F1 Concluding function mode Showing password level Press the EXIT key F 7 Concluding show level mode and returning to fun...

Page 883: ...3 00 CHG LV Change Level 1 COMMON 2 CHG LV 3 4 INS 5 OUS 6 REMOVE 7 EXIT 8 CMD Enter Password Current Level 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 CMD Enter Password Current Level 4 F2 RETURN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 CMD Enter Password Current Level 3 OK Conditions Password level can be raised one by one as follows 4 3 2 1 To lower the current password level simply press the RETURN key when CMD E...

Page 884: ... F1 Concluding function mode Changing password level Press the CHG LV key F2 Changing password in succession Finishing change level mode and returning to function mode Function mode Press the EXIT key F7 Enter password then press RETURN key Press the EXIT key F7 ...

Page 885: ...IT 8 CMD In Service No 21408 RETURN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 CMD In Service No 21408 OK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 If it is impossible to execute the In Service operation one of the following error messages appears on the screen The error message types depend on the situation ERROR Illegal parameter ERROR Not installed ERROR Diagnostic failure ERROR Invalid status For details about the error messages refer ...

Page 886: ...ations etc to In Service Press the EXIT key F7 Enter physical number etc then press key RETURN Press the INS key F4 In Service mode To repeat the In Service operation return to the previous step Press the EXIT key F7 Finishing INS mode and returning to function mode Operation Chart ...

Page 887: ...bout the error messages refer to Section 10 K Error Message Tables To repeat the Out of Service operation repeat from STEP 2 To return to COMMON mode press the EXIT F7 key 1 SHOW LV 2 CHG LV 3 4 INS 5 OUS 6 REMOVE 7 EXIT 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 F5 CMD Out of Service No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 COMMON Out of Service No 21408 RETURN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 CMD Out of Service No 21408 1 4 0 8 2 Description A...

Page 888: ...OUS key F5 Press the EXIT key F7 Changing sta tions cards etc to Out of Service Concluding function mode Finishing Out of Service mode and returning to function mode Press the EXIT key F7 Enter physical number etc then press key RETURN To repeat the OUS operation return to the previous step ...

Page 889: ...ns The system should be in On line communication mode The specified terminal should be Out of Service or Fault When it is impossible to execute REMOVE operation one of the following error messages appears on the screen The error message type depends on the situation ERROR Illegal parameter ERROR Parameter is not consecutive set ERROR Not installed ERROR Invalid status ERROR Parameter is empty For ...

Page 890: ...ter physical number or DN or Attendant Console num ber Then press Concluding function mode To repeat the REMOVE operation return to the previous stage Press the EXIT key F7 RETURN Press the COMMON key F1 Press the REMOVE key F6 ...

Page 891: ... finished automatically RETURN Operation Chart Press INDEX key F 2 Function mode Enter the number of the setting screen and press RETURN key After showing the desired screen function mode ends automatically Condition If INDEX operation cannot be executed one of the following error messages appears on the screen A type of error message depends on the situation Error Illegal parameter Error Not inst...

Page 892: ... COS No 30 32 OK Class of Service COS No 01 1 3 RETURN 1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 COPY 4 READ 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 COPY COS No 01 32 01 COS No 02 02 1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 COPY 4 READ 5 6 HRDCPY 7 8 System Class of Service Class of Service COS No 01 1 3 COPY COS No 01 32 COS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 COPY COS No 01 32 01 COS No 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 COPY COS No 01 32 01 COS No 30 4 Move the curs...

Page 893: ...5 6 7 EXIT 8 In the Toll Restriction Area Office Code Table TABLE and ENTRY appear in the function display line as below after pressing the COPY F3 key For copying the whole table press the TABLE F1 key and for copying entries in the same table press the ENTRY F2 key 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 COPY Table No 1 8 Table No F1 COPY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 Copying the whole Table Depress the F1 key Copying Entr...

Page 894: ...Y key F 3 Function mode To repeat the COPY operation set the cursor to the entry position then return to the previous stage Concluding function mode Press the EXIT key F7 After entering the COPY source and destination numbers press RETURN ...

Page 895: ...ollowing error messages appears on the screen Error message types depend on the situation Error Illegal parameter Error Not installed For details about the error messages refer to Section 10 K Error Message Tables To store the copied data press PF4 or PF2 To conclude this mode press the EXIT F7 key Reference The READ function is available in the screens listed below For the input values refer to S...

Page 896: ...6 Press the READ key F 4 Function mode Operation Chart Concluding function mode Press the EXIT key F7 To repeat the READ opera tion return to the previous step After entering number to be copied press RETURN ...

Page 897: ...PY on the function field Operation 1 Press the F6 key All data displayed on the screen is printed out Condition When HRD CPY operation is unsuccessful one of the following error messages appears on the screen An error message type depends on the situation ERROR Printer is not ready ERROR Service Violation For details about the error contents refer to Section 10 K Error Message Tables Reference The...

Page 898: ...omatic Configuration OK Y yes N no 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 Y N F7 RETURN Extension Station Station Equipment No 10301 Telephone Type SLT Model Telephone Type changes to SLT automatically Function mode ends automatically Press Y to execute Automatic Configu ration Press N not to execute Automatic Configuration Then press Operation Chart Conditions When Automatic Configuration operation fails one of th...

Page 899: ...Section 9 Preparation for Programming and Maintenance Dumb Type Terminal ...

Page 900: ......

Page 901: ...hing a Mode 9 B 1 1 00 Entering a Mode 9 B 1 1 01 Initial Mode 9 B 1 1 02 Pre entering Mode 9 B 2 1 03 Programming Mode 9 B 2 1 04 Operation Mode 9 B 3 1 05 Changing the Current Mode 9 B 4 2 00 Finishing a Mode 9 B 5 2 01 EXIT 9 B 5 2 02 Restart 9 B 5 3 00 Flow Chart for Changing Modes 9 B 6 C Fixed Key Operation 9 C 1 D Input Format General 9 D 1 1 00 Programming Mode 9 D 1 2 00 Operation Mode 9 ...

Page 902: ...evel CHL 9 F 1 2 00 Show Level SHL 9 F 1 3 00 In Service INS 9 F 2 4 00 Out of Service OUS 9 F 3 5 00 Remove REM 9 F 3 6 00 Print Out PRT 9 F 4 7 00 Set Date and Time SDT 9 F 4 G Help Function 9 G 1 1 00 Programming Mode 9 G 1 2 00 Operation Mode 9 G 1 ...

Page 903: ...numeric characters must be entered To be recognized by the system the password must be entered exactly as stored in memory Factory programmed eight passwords are provided from the first to fourth levels for on site operation and the first to fourth levels for operation from a remote location The followings are the functions available to each password level The 1st Level To access to all levels The...

Page 904: ...nstructions of the data terminal and modem Operation Starting up system administration from a remote location can be done in the following ways Dial Remote Directory Number using Direct Inward System Access DISA feature For further information about DISA feature refer to 3 D 2 02 Direct Inward System Access DISA Program DID feature so that the incoming telephone number is converted to the Remote D...

Page 905: ...tion mode Programming mode Pre entering mode Administration employing a dumb terminal When entering a mode except Initial mode the prompt depending on the mode appears on the display That is the displayed prompt shows the current mode The table below shows the mode and the prompt displayed on the screen Mode Pre entering mode Programming mode Operation mode Prompt PRG OPE 9 A 3 ...

Page 906: ...bout SH AT and BT Enter the index number as explained in the table Input Value for Item Enter the item number depending on the assigning items When the assigning item appears enter the value explained in Input Value of the table For example if you assign DN of Port 1 enter Item Number 1 and when Port 1 appears enter three or four digit number Index Number X X X slot 01 to 14 shelf 1 to 3 Explanati...

Page 907: ...or advancing the mode from Initial mode to Pre entering mode Press the RETURN key Note To prevent an unauthorized person from learning the password the password characters are not displayed when they are entered Initial mode Pre entering mode PASSWORD Press RETURN after entering the forced password Select the mode Programming mode PRG Operation mode OPE displays command information HLP Pre enterin...

Page 908: ...data The flow chart below illustrates the procedures for advancing the mode from Pre entering mode to Programming mode Select the mode Programming mode PRG Operation mode OPE displays command information HLP Pre entering mode PRG Programming mode Programming mode prompt For details about operation in the Programming mode refer to Section 9 D Input Format General and Section 11 System Programming D...

Page 909: ...ing flow chart illustrates the procedures for advancing the mode from Pre entering mode to Operation mode Select the mode Programming mode PRG Operation mode OPE displays command information HLP Pre entering mode OPE Operation mode Operation mode prompt For details about operation in the Operation mode refer to Section 9 D 2 00 Operation Mode After entering OPE press RETURN ...

Page 910: ...o Operation mode Changing Operation mode to Programming mode Programming mode PRG Operation mode Operation mode OPE Programming mode PRG OPE After entering OPE press RETURN After entering PRG press RETURN The system prompt changes from PRG to OPE The current mode now is the Operation Mode The system prompt changes from OPE to PRG The current mode now is the Programming Mode ...

Page 911: ...d return to the Initial mode 2 02 Restart Description Restart the system Same condition as the RESET button is pressed Password level One Input Format OPE RST Programming mode Operation mode After entering EXIT press RETURN Pre entering mode After entering EXIT press RETURN Initial mode Panasonic Digital PBX KX TD500 System or ...

Page 912: ...n HLP Programming mode PRG Execution of operation in Programming mode Operation mode OPE Execution of operation in Operation mode To conclude Programming mode or Operation mode To enter Programming mode To enter Operation mode To change the mode After entering EXIT press RETURN Panasonic Digital PBX KX TD500 System Press RETURN After entering EXIT press RETURN After entering OPE press RETURN After...

Page 913: ...mode entered between indexes as a delimiter In BT mode entered between items as a delimiter When entering characters such as names and locations etc used for identifying them Cancels an operation during programming Stops scrolling information on the screen to let you view it Resumes screen scrolling Changes the mode to VT mode Repeats the execution of the last entered command Cancels the command l...

Page 914: ......

Page 915: ...ection Waiting for Second Dial Tone World Select 4 TIE Account Code Clock Mode Clock Priority TIE Trunk Relay Restriction MFC Sequence Parameter Charge Management Password Rate Charge Limitation E M Selection Tone Detect Mode DISA AGC Line Hunting Sequence ESF Frame Option Voice Mail Transfer DSP Detect Level Set DR2 Max Receive Digit UCD Auto Log out Operation MFC R2 Option E 1 E 1 Signaling Opti...

Page 916: ...the data of item 1 enter EOD Concludes AT mode PRG To change N to Y enter Y 2 Auto Type AT Enables you to show or edit the data in an interactive format Showing the data Each item appears one by one by every pressing of the RETURN key Editing the data If you do not want to change the data press the RETURN key when INPUT is displayed If you want to change the data enter the appropriate values after...

Page 917: ...n omit the index numbers entry of index number is not necessary Refer to the list below When the index number is omitted Item number should be also omitted Commands without indexes SYA TIM LAG NBP ABS ATT TR3 INF WS1 WS2 WS3 Commands possible to omit the Index number SLA COM CPG PAG MUS DPH DIC DIP DID UC1 UC2 PFT 4 Item Number Enter when you want to specify an item number Possible to be omitted i...

Page 918: ...T SYM INS OUS REM ERR TFD PRT SDT LOD SAV CHL SHL RST 3 2 1 Traffic Information Station 1 2 Feb 22 1990 Start Time Incoming Calls Answer Calls Outgoing Calls Completed Calls CCS Start Time Incoming Calls Answer Calls Outgoing Calls Completed Calls CCS 9 00AM 498 360 405 241 723 3 00PM 632 531 600 442 800 10 00AM 637 503 602 430 811 4 00PM 721 603 654 488 830 11 00AM 590 476 555 411 780 5 00PM 611 ...

Page 919: ...F 1 00 SYM command System Maintenance Monitor Section 16 D 1 02 Error Log Section 16 F 2 00 TFD command Traffic Display Section 17 B 4 01 Saving Procedure Section 18 B 2 01 Saving Procedure Section 17 B 4 02 Loading Procedure Section 18 B 2 02 Loading Procedure Section 9 B 2 02 Restart TST SYM ERR TFD SAV LOD RST ...

Page 920: ......

Page 921: ...n com mands are used for ending the modes copying data and so on For details about types of modes refer to Section 9 D 1 00 Programming Mode 1 00 In AT mode After storing data concludes AT mode Enter this command after INPUT is displayed In BT mode Concludes BT mode in the middle of entry Be sure to enter this command after comma or slash J E O D INDEX 1 01 Tenant Service Y INPUT Enter J17 Display...

Page 922: ...to 10 1 3 1 2 1 to 4 All items All items All items 1 All items All items Item number Command OPR Index 2 TNN LAG NBP SPD ABS TG1 TG2 TG3 COL EXT DNK PFK DSK DIP DID INF TIE PFT CHG ACC NAG VMD WSD TAC CLP INDEX 2 13 Start Time of Traffic Measurement 09 00A INPUT 14 Start Time of Test INPUT Displays Enter CLR Enter EOD The value 09 00A is cleared from 13 Start Time of Traffic Measurement and conclu...

Page 923: ... BT01 CS1 CS2 CS3 Index number Command 01 to 32 01 to 32 01 to 32 Input Format CPY XXX XXX XXX 1 Enter the index number of copy source data 2 3 Enter the fisrt and last index numbers Note Enter the index numbers in ascending order If you want to copy the source data to one destination enter the same index numbers into 2 and 3 In AT mode enter CPY when the first item is displayed Copying is unavail...

Page 924: ...onsoles automatically Example When the telephone type of DN 103 is set to 2 PITS and actually connected telephone type is 1 SLT Enter PRG EXT AT DN 103 C N F Displays 01 Telephone Type 2 INPUT Enter CNF Telephone Type changes to 1 automatically and displays 01 Telephone Type 1 INPUT ...

Page 925: ...r higher Input Format F Maintenance Command 1 00 Change Level CHL Description Allows you to change the password level Password level Four or higher Input Format After pressing the RETURN key and appears enter the password However the password characters are not displayed when they are entered OPE CHL OPE SHL ...

Page 926: ...31416 DNXXXX or 10101 to 31416 A1 or A2 10101 to 31416 Rxxxy CFBxx 01 to 08 CFOyy 01 to 64 Explanation Physical number 1 Basic Shelf 2 Expansion Shelf 1 3 Expansion Shelf 2 Physical number 101 to 112 Service Cards in the Basic Shelf 201 to 214 Service Cards in the Expansion Shelf 1 301 to 314 Service Cards in the Expansion Shelf 2 Physical number 10101 to 11216 Port number assigned to Service Card...

Page 927: ...ervice INS on the previous page OPE OUS Item Number 5 00 Remove REM Description Enables you to delete the stored system programming data by specifying stations Attendant Consoles and so on The system should be in on line communication mode Specified terminal must be in Out of Service Password level one Before you detach the installed devices remove the system programming data of associated device ...

Page 928: ... programming mode 2 Printing out the system programming data by specifying a command name Example 3 Printing out the data by specifying the index number OPE SDT Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Assigning Item Year Month Day Week Hour Minute AM PM Input Value XX last two digits of the year 01 to 12 Jan through Dec 01 to 31 1 Sunday 2 Monday 3 Tuesday 4 Wednesday 5 Thursday 6 Friday 7 Saturday 01 to 12 00 to 59 1...

Page 929: ...ld Select 4 CLK Clock Mode TRR TIE Trunk Relay Restriction CPD Charge Management Password CLT Charge Limitation TDM Tone Detect Mode DISA AGC EFO ESF Frame Option DLS DSP Detection Level ULO UCD Auto Log out Operation ESO E 1 Signaling Option PEM Pulsed E M AWT Answer Signal Wait Time Type are SLA Slot Assignment CHA Cannel Assignment TNN Tenant CS1 Class of Service 1 3 CS3 Class of Service 3 3 NB...

Page 930: ......

Page 931: ...Section 10 System Programming VT220 and Compatibles ...

Page 932: ......

Page 933: ... 10 D 24 4 01 Class of Service 1 3 10 D 24 4 02 Class of Service 2 3 10 D 29 4 03 Class of Service 3 3 10 D 31 5 00 Local Access Group 10 D 33 5 01 Local Access Group 1 2 10 D 33 5 02 Local Access Group 2 2 10 D 35 6 00 Numbering Plan 10 D 37 6 01 Numbering Plan 1 11 10 D 37 6 02 Numbering Plan 2 11 10 D 40 6 03 Numbering Plan 3 11 10 D 43 6 04 Numbering Plan 4 11 10 D 46 6 05 Numbering Plan 5 11 ...

Page 934: ...tation 2 4 10 G 8 1 03 Station 3 4 10 G 13 1 04 Station 4 4 10 G 16 2 00 DSS Console 10 G 18 2 01 DSS Console 1 3 10 G 18 2 02 DSS Console 2 3 10 G 22 2 03 DSS Console 3 3 10 G 25 3 00 Doorphone 10 G 28 4 00 Attendant Console 10 G 31 4 01 Attendant Console 1 3 10 G 31 4 02 Attendant Console 2 3 10 G 34 4 03 Attendant Console 3 3 10 G 36 H Toll Restriction Screen 10 H 1 1 00 7 Digit Toll Restrictio...

Page 935: ...10 J 1 2 00 Power Failure Transfer Assignment 10 J 3 K Error Message Tables 10 K 1 1 00 Error Messages Related to the Assigning Items in the Same Screen 10 K 1 2 00 Error Messages Related to the Assigning Items in the Other Screens 10 K 2 3 00 Other Error Messages 10 K 7 ...

Page 936: ......

Page 937: ...assign or change various parameters concerning the system administration such as Tenant Class of Service Numbering Plan and so on The setting screens should be programmed in order of First Set Second Set and Third Set which is illustrated in Construction of Programming Mode on the following page If you program a screen in the second set before setting the first set screens an error message will ap...

Page 938: ......

Page 939: ...lass of Service 2 5 Local Access Group 2 6 Numbering Plan 2 7 Communication Interface 2 8 Speed Dialing System 3 9 Absent Message 3 1 Trunk Group 2 2 UCD Paging Group 2 3 Call Pickup Group 2 1 CO Line 3 2 Pager Music Source 3 3 AGC 3 1 Station 3 2 DSS Console 3 3 Doorphone 3 4 Attendant Console 2 1 7 Digit Toll Restriction Table 2 1 DISA 2 2 DID 2 3 UCD 2 4 TIE Line Routing Table 2 1 Installation ...

Page 940: ......

Page 941: ...TD50104 must be installed To execute the OHCA function with DPITS TSW OHCA Card KX TD50105 must be installed Password level One Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Expansion Shelf Automatic set No expansion shelf not installed 1 Shelf expansion shelf 1 available 2 Shelves both expansion shelves 1 and 2 available TSW Additional CONF Automatic set Yes conference expansion card installed No co...

Page 942: ...SW card These conference trunks are occupied when an extension user uses a conference feature The number of trunks occupied by conference feature depends on conference type and installation of AGC card The following tables shows the number of trunks occupied by a conference feature The number of conference trunk occupied by conference feature Conference Type AGC card Installed Not installed Ext CO...

Page 943: ...7 00 to 30 00 Basic Shelf FS 01 to 12 Blank Not assigned PLC Analog Proprietary Integrated Telephone System A PITS Line Circuit card HLC Analog PITS SLT Hybrid Line Circuit card SLC Single Line Telephone Circuit card MSLC SLC card with Message Waiting Lamp ESLC Enhanced Single Line Telephone Circuit card with Message Waiting Lamp DLC Digital Proprietary Integrated Telephone System D PITS Line Circ...

Page 944: ...T96191 KX T96185 KX T96141 KX T96161 KX T96196 Value PLC HLC SLC MSLC ESLC DLC DHLC LCOT RCOT PCOT GCOT DID E M T 1 E 1 AGC DISA OPX ATLC DPH RMT Ports or Resources 8 ports 8 ports 8 ports 8 ports 16 ports 16 ports 8 ports with XDP total 16 ports 8 ports 8 ports 4 ports 8 ports 4 ports 4 ports 24 ports 32 ports 4 resources 4 resources 4 ports 2 ports 4 ports 1 resource 1 A 5 00 1 E 1 00 to 2 00 1 ...

Page 945: ...C MSLC ESLC DLC DHLC OPX PLC HLC DLC DHLC T 1 E 1 DSS Console Maximum number 512 ports 192 ports 1 card 4 ports 4 cards 16 resources 4 cards 16 resources 1 card 1 resource 1 card 2 ports 192 ports 224 ports 192 ports 448 ports 24 cards 384 ports 8 cards 128 ports 8 cards 192 ports 4 cards 96 ports 6 cards 192 ports 4 cards 128 ports 16 consoles See Section 1 A 5 00 Service Cards Description for ca...

Page 946: ...ing Mode Day is set to ATT Intercept Routing Day is set to ATT Extension Doorphone Doorphone Call Assignment is set to ATT Deleting the DISA card will be an error if there is one of the following assignments Group Trunk Group Incoming Mode Day is set to DISA Incoming Mode Night is set to DISA Deleting the HLC SLC MSLC DHLC ESLC LCOT RCOT or GCOT card will be an error if there is the following assi...

Page 947: ...6 HRD CPY 7 8 Summary Assigns a DN directory number to each exten sion port Password level One Description of Assigning Item DN Assigns a default directory number to every port of installed extension cards and acts as Remove function 8 J 6 00 by saving the blank on the stored DN as well Refer to 10 G 2 00 DSS Console Assigning Items Default Selection of Value DN 100 to 547 in physical number order...

Page 948: ...e is Yes If Yes is selected for the Parallel Connect mode in the Extension Station 1 4 screen see 10 G 1 00 DN cannot be assigned for the XDP ports Configuration DN Assignment OFL PRG SCR DIR DN Assignment 1 2 Slot PLC HLC SLC DLC DHLC No 101 102 103 104 105 Port DN DN DN DN DN 1 9 100 108 116 124 132 140 2 10 101 109 117 125 133 141 3 11 102 110 118 126 134 142 4 12 103 111 119 127 135 143 5 13 1...

Page 949: ...ers 25 through 32 are not available hyphen is displayed on these columns If you assign OPX to a channel DN Assignment is also required The Option field shows whether the T 1 DTMF card is installed on the T 1 card See also 11 C 56 00 T 1 E 1 Related Commands Configuration Channel Assignment ONL PRG SCR SEL Slot 101 Option 1 DSP 2 DSP Slot 105 Option 1 DSP 2 DSP Frame Sequence ESF Frame Sequence ESF...

Page 950: ...layed at these columns The Option field shows whether the E 1 DSP card is installed on the E 1 card See also 11 C 56 00 T 1 E 1Related Commands Reference 3 F 15 00 3 F 16 00 Configuration Channel Assignment ONL PRG SCR SEL Slot 101 Option 1 DSP 2 DSP Slot 105 Option 1 DSP 2 DSP Frame Sequence PCM30 CRC Frame Sequence PCM30 CRC Line Cording HDB3 Line Cording HDB3 01 DR2 09 DR2 17 DR2 25 E M C 01 DR...

Page 951: ... Operation 1 01 Operation 1 3 Tenant Service Automatic Route Selection Numbering Plan Privacy on DN Key Restriction Level Operator Restriction Level International Summary Assigns elemental data common to the whole system This is the first of three screens Password level Two or higher Reference No Tenant Service is unavailable Yes Tenant Service enabled Not available Flex feature numbers can be cha...

Page 952: ...D 2 02 3 D 2 03 3 D 2 05 3 D 2 06 3 F 14 00 Continued Not available With Transfer hold and transfer Without Transfer disconnect and call Tone 1 busy tone 1 Tone 2 busy tone 2 Yes Held Call Reminder is enabled No Held Call Reminder is not enabled Yes overriding with beep tone No overriding without beep tone Yes using external pager 1 2 No not using external pager 1 2 If the music source selector sw...

Page 953: ...minder tone given to the user In either case the call will be disconnected after 30 minutes if it is not retreived Beep Tone for Bsy ovr If Yes is selected a beep tone will be heard when executing Busy Brg in Override or Barge in If No is selected there will not be any tone heard when Busy Override or Barge in is executed External Paging 1 2 Assigns external pagers 1 and 2 External Music Source 1 ...

Page 954: ...s of the System Operation 1 3 screen allows you to enable or disable each music source HOLD music and BGM of each music source are programed by the Trunk Pager Music Source screen An outline of the music sources is shown below H H H H H H I I I TSW INT S1 MUS2 MUS1 S2 S3 BGM HOLD External Music Source 1 Yes No External Music Source 2 Yes No I Music source selector switch INT MUS MUS2 Trunk Pager M...

Page 955: ...Source 1 Operation 1 3 Music Source For Use 1 Trunk Pager Music Source Music Source For Use 2 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes No No Yes No Yes No No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No Hold Hold BGM Hold BGM BGM BGM Hold BGM BGM Hold Refer to 2 D 2 00 External Music Source for the configuration of the External Internal Music source on a TSW card ...

Page 956: ...er External Paging 1 2 If set to No Paging through External Pagers does not function However it is possible to program the items below System Class of Service External Paging 1 2 System Numbering Plan External Paging External Paging Answer If either or both of the External Paging 1 2 are assigned to No the following item cannot be programmed appears on the item Trunk Pager Music Source External Pa...

Page 957: ... appear on the function line of this setting screen COMMON SHOW LV CHG LV INS OUS REMOVE EXIT and HRD CPY keys are available in this setting screen For operation refer to Section 8 I Operation of Function Keys 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 ...

Page 958: ...irectory Number 599 Remote Alarm Yes Destination Address 222 593 1138 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 Summary Assigns elemental data common to the whole system such as System Administration Device SMDR Station Message Detail Recording parameters for SMDR etc through the second System Operation screen Password level Two or higher Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference VT220 VT100 VT220...

Page 959: ... the secret dial numbers Error Log Programming blank No do not print out these items Traffic Yes print each item Start Time of Traffic blank 1 to12 hour Measurement 00 to 59 minute AM PM a m p m Start Time of Test blank 1 to12 hour 00 to 59 minute AM PM a m p m Remote Directory Number 599 for Three or four numeric digits Floating Directory with RMT Number for the blank for remote mainte without RM...

Page 960: ... of outgoing calls will be printed if any Incoming Duration Log Determines if incoming calls will be printed or not Attendant Duration Determines whether the attendant or the destination will be charged with the time for an attendant handled call If Separate is selected there will be two lines of SMDR for every attendant handled and transferred call Print Secret Dial Determines if secret dial numb...

Page 961: ...ssignment Destination Address screen these items cannot be programmed appears on the items If Remote Alarm is set to Yes Destination Address can be programmed If Remote Alarm is set to No Destination Address displays and cannot be programmed To select this screen press the NEXT key in the System Operation 1 3 screen Function The following functions appear on the function line of this setting scree...

Page 962: ...ommon to the whole system such as setting terminal type for opera tors parameters for Night Service etc through the third System Operation screen Password level Two or higher Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Operator 1 ATT1 for with None EXT ATT terminal type ATLC None no operator EXT100 for EXT setting an extension to Operator 1 without ATLC ATT setting Attendant Console to Operator 1 N...

Page 963: ...minute WED Day Night AM PM a m p m THU Day Night blank if blank is assigned for a day or FRI Day Night days the previously assigned values SAT Day Night are maintained for the days until SUN Day Night other values are set for another day Password PP PITS Programming 1234 Four numeric digits password Password Password WC Walking COS Password blank Four numeric digits password Front Extension 1 2 3 ...

Page 964: ...tem programming This password is Password used when a PITS allowed to program by COS wishes to change PITS system programming or an Attendant Console wishes to perform CO verify Walking COS Password Assigns the password for Walking COS Walking COS allows a user to temporarily change the COS of another extension to that of the user s extension This is generally used for making toll calls from a tol...

Page 965: ...s appear on the function line of this setting screen 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 COMMON SHOW LV CHG LV INS OUS REMOVE EXIT and HRD CPY keys are available in this setting screen For operation refer to Section 8 I Operation of Function Keys ...

Page 966: ...r tenant 2 such as terminal type for operators method of changing Night Service password for PITS programming etc Also assigns boundaries for functions such as Speed Dialing Call Park etc which are split between tenant 1 and tenant 2 Password level Two or higher Assigning Items Default Selection of Value None EXT ATT terminal type None no operator EXT setting an extension to Operator 1 ATT setting...

Page 967: ...r values are set for another day Four numeric digits of numbers password Four numeric digits of numbers password Three or four digits DN Yes Inter Tenant Calling is available No Inter Tenant Calling is unavailable 000 to 200 boundary number 000 tenant 2 only can use all the codes 200 tenant 1 only can use all the codes 00 to 20 boundary number 00 tenant 2 only can use all call park areas 20 tenant...

Page 968: ... COS wishes to change system programming or an attendant console wishes to perform CO verify Walking COS Password Assigns the password for Walking COS Walking COS allows a user to Tenant 2 temporarily change the COS of another station to that of the user s station This is generally used for making toll calls from a toll restricted telephone Front Extension Assigns the DN of the extension which is ...

Page 969: ...nant 1 can use must be assigned in each boundary for the functions below Speed Dialing System Call Park System Message Waiting Absent Message Example Up to 200 speed dialing codes can be programmed for the system If you wish to assign 150 codes to tenant 1 and 50 codes to tenant 2 enter 150 in Speed Dialing System Boundary Speed dialing codes Only tenant 1 can use the codes Only tenant 2 can use t...

Page 970: ... Out System 60 second s 5 240 Intercept Routing Time Out DISA 30 second s 5 240 Attendant Overflow Time 60 second s 5 240 SMDR Duration Time 5 second s 0 15 TIE Interdigit Time Out 5 second s 3 30 DISA Interdigit Time Out 10 second s 1 10 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Held Call Reminder Held Call Reminder ATT Transfer Recall Pickup Dial Waiting 60 60 30 ...

Page 971: ...ntercept Routing Time Out System Intercept Routing Time Out DISA Attendant Overflow Time SMDR Duration Time TIE Interdigit Time Out DISA Interdigit Time Out Assigning Items Default Selection of Value 10 5 5 10 15 60 30 60 5 5 10 Continued 10 D 21 Reference 3 B 10 00 3 B 12 00 3 F 12 00 3 B 10 00 3 B 12 00 3 B 10 00 3 B 12 00 3 B 10 00 3 F 5 00 6 J 12 00 3 B 10 00 3 D 2 02 3 F 5 00 3 B 10 00 3 D 1 ...

Page 972: ...Restriction Guard Sets the time limit between dialing digits for CO operator calls This Time Out prevents a user from attempting to defeat toll restriction Call Forwarding No Sets the Call Forwarding No Answer timer Answer Time Out Intercept Routing Time Sets the time limit for Intercept Routing System This timer is used out System when an incoming CO call DIL 1 1 DID TAFAS or night answer and so ...

Page 973: ...US REMOVE EXIT and HRD CPY keys are available in this setting screen For operation refer to Section 8 I Operation of Function Keys Held Call Reminder Held Call Reminder ATT If these items are programmed however System Operation Held Call Reminder is not set to Yes Held Call Reminder does not function 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 ...

Page 974: ...arameters for toll restriction level maxi mum dialing digits Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb Override etc in the first System Class of Service screen which consists of 32 groups each of which has three screens Password level Two or higher 3 B 6 00 3 C 1 00 3 B 6 00 3 C 1 00 3 B 6 00 3 B 6 00 4 D 6 00 4 F 2 00 5 B 4 00 5 D 2 00 Assigning Items Default Selection of Value 01 to16 toll r...

Page 975: ... 3 B 6 00 4 I 9 00 5 G 7 00 3 B 6 00 3 F 3 00 3 B 6 00 12 A 12 C 3 B 6 00 3 C 1 01 Reference Yes DND Override is available No DND Override is unavailable Yes Call Forwarding to CO is available No Call Forwarding to CO is unavailable Yes Call Transfer to CO is available No Call Transfer to CO is unavailable No Account codes not required for outgoing CO calls Yes User must enter an account code for ...

Page 976: ...s No Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb Yes No No No Override CO Forward Mode Yes No No No CO Transfer Mode Yes No No No Forced Account No No No No Code Mode BSS OHCA Yes Yes Yes No BSS OHCA Deny No No No No Executive Busy Yes No No No Override Executive Busy No No No No Override Deny Station Lock No No No No Walking Station No No No No Maintenance Yes No No No Capability Local Access W RSTR W RSTR W R...

Page 977: ... and OHCA Off Hook Call Announcement are possible or not BSS OHCA Deny Assigns whether BSS OHCA Deny is possible or not Executive Busy Override Assigns whether Executive Busy Override is possible or not Executive Busy Override Assigns whether Executive Busy Override Deny is available or not Deny Station Lock Assigns whether Electronic Station Lock is possible or not Walking Station Assigns whether...

Page 978: ... LV INS OUS REMOVE EXIT and HRD CPY keys are available in all setting screens Other function keys such as INDEX COPY and READ are also available in this setting screen The operation of function keys are described in Section 8 I Operation of Funciton Keys Only messages are provided here 1 COMMON 2 NDEX 3 COPY 4 READ 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 ...

Page 979: ...p 41 Y Trunk Group 10 Y Trunk Group 26 Y Trunk Group 42 Y Trunk Group 11 Y Trunk Group 27 Y Trunk Group 43 Y Trunk Group 12 Y Trunk Group 28 Y Trunk Group 44 Y Trunk Group 13 Y Trunk Group 29 Y Trunk Group 45 Y Trunk Group 14 Y Trunk Group 30 Y Trunk Group 46 Y Trunk Group 15 Y Trunk Group 31 Y Trunk Group 47 Y Trunk Group 16 Y Trunk Group 32 Y Trunk Group 48 Y 1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 COPY 4 READ 5 6 H...

Page 980: ...8 F2 INDEX Class of Service No 01 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 F3 COPY COS No 01 32 COS No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 F4 READ COS No 01 32 Function The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen 1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 COPY 4 READ 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 COMMON SHOW LV CHG LV INS OUS REMOVE EXIT and HRD CPY keys are available in all setting screens Other function keys such as INDEX COPY and RE...

Page 981: ...ing group available for access External Paging 1 and 2 Yes N not available to access external pager Y available to access external pager System Class of Service OFL PRG SCR SEL Class of Service COS No 01 3 3 Special Carrier EQA 1 EQA 3 OCC 1 OCC 3 Access EQA 2 EQA 4 OCC 2 OCC 4 Station Paging PAG 1 Y PAG 3 Y PAG 5 Y PAG 7 Y Access PAG 2 Y PAG 4 Y PAG 6 Y PAG 8 Y External Paging External Paging 1 Y...

Page 982: ...tenant of the External Paging 1 or 2 assigned to Y the extension cannot access the external pager To select this screen press the NEXT key in the System Class of Service 2 3 screen 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 F2 INDEX Class of Service No 01 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 F3 COPY COS No 01 32 COS No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 F4 READ COS No 01 32 Function The following functions appear on the function line of this set...

Page 983: ...ence Toll Restriction Level 16 01 to 16 restriction level Toll Restriction Table Not available 3 C 1 01 4 C 3 01 5 A 1 01 6 D 1 01 System Local Access OFL PRG SCR DIR Local Access Group 1 2 Toll Restriction Level 16 Toll Restriction Table Local Access Hunt Sequence 01 01 Hunt Sequence 09 Trunk Group 02 02 10 Hunt Sequence 03 16 11 04 12 Enter Trunk 05 03 13 Group Number 06 05 14 01 48 07 04 15 08 ...

Page 984: ...s equal to or greater than local access toll restriction level or whether they must pass through toll restriction checking Conditions None Function The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen COMMON SHOW LV CHG LV INS OUS REMOVE EXIT and HRD CPY keys are available in this setting screen For operation refer to Section 8 I Operation of Function Keys 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 ...

Page 985: ... Local Access Trunk Group Hunt Sequence Hunt Sequence 01 01 01 to 48 trunk group number blank not assigned Hunt Sequence 02 to 48 blank Same as Hunt Sequence 01 3 C 1 01 4 C 3 01 5 A 1 01 6 D 1 01 System Local Access OFL PRG SCR DIR Local Access Group 2 2 Local Access Hunt Sequence 17 Hunt Sequence 33 Trunk Group 18 34 Hunt Sequence 19 35 20 36 Enter Trunk 21 37 Group Number 22 38 01 48 23 39 24 4...

Page 986: ...roups will be skipped if they do not belong to the same tenant as the caller Conditions To select this screen press the NEXT key in the System Local Access Group 1 2 screen Function The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen COMMON SHOW LV CHG LV INS OUS REMOVE EXIT and HRD CPY keys are available in this setting screen For operation refer to Section 8 I Operation of...

Page 987: ... set both DG1 and DG2 when the extension numbers are to be composed of four digits 1 2 3 4 5 Reference 3 B 1 00 3 B 2 00 3 B 3 00 Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Fixed 1 Fixed 2 11 12 13 14 15 blank System Numbering Plan OFL PRG SCR DIR Numbering Plan 01 11 No Feature DG1 DG2 DG3 DG4 1 1st Hundred Block Extension 1 2 2nd Hundred Block Extension 2 3 3rd Hundred Block Extension 3 4 4th Hu...

Page 988: ...al check is also performed according to the following logic Extension numbers and other PBX extension numbers are three or four digits and the leading one or two digits are assigned in Numbering Plan screens Feature numbers may be one two three or four digits Those numbers assigned in Numbering Plan screens cannot include the same number assigned to other feature number as the part or whole of it ...

Page 989: ...OUS REMOVE EXIT and HRD CPY keys are available in all setting screens INDEX key is also available in this screen The operation of function keys are described in Section 8 I Operation of Function Keys Only a message is provided here F2 INDEX Numbering Plan 01 11 1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 ...

Page 990: ...lan screen sets the numbers for 13th through 16th Hundred Block Extension groups and functions 17 to 24 Password level Two or higher 13th Hundred Block Extension 14th Hundred Block Extension 15th Hundred Block Extension 16th Hundred Block Extension Operator Call General Operator Call Specific Local CO Line Access Reference blank 0 blank 9 Continued 3 B 1 00 3 B 5 00 4 C 10 00 5 A 8 00 3 B 1 00 3 B...

Page 991: ...Station Reference Enter from one to four digits composed of numbers and the and symbols Enter from one to four digits composed of numbers and 3 B 1 00 4 C 3 02 5 A 1 02 6 D 1 02 3 B 1 00 3 D 5 04 3 B 1 00 5 A 2 02 3 B 1 00 5 A 2 01 Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Fixed 1 Fixed 2 49 49 49 49 1 2 8 Continued ...

Page 992: ...e Access Assigns the feature number for local access Trunk Group 01 48 Access Assigns the feature number for Individual Trunk Group Dial Access 01 to 48 Call Coverage Path Set Assigns the feature number for setting Call Coverage Path This allows an extension user to transfer an incoming call automatically to a maximum of four destinations Call Coverage Path Cancel Assigns the feature number for ca...

Page 993: ...3 B 1 00 4 G 7 00 5 E 2 00 6 H 4 00 3 B 1 00 4 H 1 03 4 H 1 04 5 F 1 03 5 F 1 04 6 I 1 03 6 I 1 04 40 40 41 41 System Numbering Plan OFL PRG SCR DIR Numbering Plan 03 11 No Feature DG1 DG2 DG3 DG4 25 Doorphone Call 1 4 4 0 26 External Paging 4 1 27 Station Paging 4 2 28 External Paging Answer 4 1 29 Station Paging Answer 4 2 30 Night Answer 1 6 0 1 31 Night Answer 2 6 0 2 32 Dial Call Pickup 4 3 3...

Page 994: ... 04 5 F 1 01 5 F 1 02 5 F 1 04 6 I 1 01 6 I 1 02 6 I 1 04 3 B 1 00 4 H 1 03 4 H 1 04 5 F 1 03 5 F 1 04 3 B 1 00 4 H 1 01 4 H 1 02 4 H 1 04 5 F 1 01 5 F 1 02 5 F 1 04 3 B 1 00 3 B 8 02 3 D 2 04 4 D 4 00 4 I 1 01 5 B 2 00 5 G 1 01 3 B 1 00 4 D 3 01 5 B 1 01 3 B 1 00 4 D 3 02 5 B 1 02 3 B 1 00 4 E 4 00 5 C 3 00 3 B 1 00 5 A 2 03 3 B 1 00 4 G 9 00 5 E 3 00 Reference Assigning Items Default Selection o...

Page 995: ...wer Night Answer 1 Assigns the feature number for Night Answer 1 This feature number is used to answer calls assigned to UNA 1 in night service or TAFAS 1 in day service Night Answer 2 Assigns the feature number for Night Answer 2 This feature number is used to answer calls assigned to UNA 2 in night service or TAFAS 2 in day service Dial Call Pickup Assigns the feature number for Dial Call Pickup...

Page 996: ...tion 4 8 44 Call Forwarding All Call Set 2 45 Call Forwarding Busy Set 3 46 Call Forwarding No Answer Set 4 47 Call Forwarding Trunk 5 48 Call Forwarding Busy No Answer 6 1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 Reference 3 B 1 00 4 E 5 02 5 C 4 02 Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Fixed 1 Fixed 2 46 46 47 47 48 48 Account Code Hold Hold Retrieve Call Park System Call Park Retrieve System Cal...

Page 997: ...Forwarding to Trunk Call Forwarding Busy No Answer Enter one to four digits consisting of numbers and Enter from one to four digits consisting of numbers and Enter from one to four digits consisting of numbers and 3 B 1 00 4 F 2 01 5 D 2 01 3 B 1 00 4 F 2 02 5 D 2 02 3 B 1 00 4 F 2 03 5 D 2 03 3 B 1 00 4 F 2 05 5 D 2 05 3 B 1 00 4 F 2 04 5 D 2 04 Reference 2 3 4 5 6 ...

Page 998: ...s is used by any extension user to park a call in that extension s call park zone Call Park Retrieve Station Assigns the feature number for retrieving a call parked by Call Park Station Call Forwarding All Call Set Assigns the feature number for Call Forwarding of all calls Call Forwarding Busy Set Assigns the feature number for Call Forwarding of calls to busy extensions Call Forwarding No Answer...

Page 999: ... to 2 05 5 B 4 00 5 D 2 01 to 2 05 3 B 1 00 4 D 3 03 5 B 1 03 Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Fixed 1 Fixed 2 1 0 Reference 51 51 61 61 System Numbering Plan OFL PRG SCR DIR Numbering Plan 05 11 No Feature DG1 DG2 DG3 DG4 49 Do Not Disturb Set 1 50 Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Cancel 0 51 Dial Call Pickup Deny Set 5 1 52 Dial Call Pickup Deny Cancel 5 1 53 Call Waiting Set 5 2 54 Call...

Page 1000: ...ancel Data Line Security Set Data Line Security Cancel Continued Enter one to four digits composed of numbers and 3 B 1 00 4 D 2 03 3 B 1 00 4 D 7 00 5 B 5 00 3 B 1 00 4 D 5 00 5 B 3 00 3 B 1 00 4 I 6 00 5 G 4 00 Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Fixed 1 Fixed 2 52 52 53 53 54 54 55 55 Reference 62 62 63 63 64 64 65 65 ...

Page 1001: ... Cancel Assigns the feature number for Call Waiting Cancel BSS OHCA Deny Set Assigns the feature number for BSS OHCA Deny Set BSS OHCA Deny Assigns the feature number for BSS OHCA Deny Cancel BSS OHCA Cancel Deny Cancel is used when the called extension is off hook Busy Override Deny Set Assigns the feature number for Busy Override Deny Set Enabling this feature prevents other extensions from usin...

Page 1002: ...Cancel 5 8 1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 Summary Password level Two or higher The sixth screen of the System Numbering Plan sets the feature numbers for executing or cancel ing various functions 660 66 66 4 4 50 51 Pickup Dialing Programming Pickup Dialing Set Pickup Dialing Cancel Absent Message Set Absent Message Cancel Timed Reminder Confirm Timed Reminder Set Continued 3 B 1 00 4 I 7 00...

Page 1003: ... Voice Calling Deny Set Voice Calling Deny Cancel Continued Enter one to four digits consisting of numbers and 3 B 1 00 4 C 5 02 5 A 3 02 3 B 1 00 4 D 2 02 3 B 1 00 4 I 3 00 5 G 3 00 Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Fixed 1 Fixed 2 Reference 5 67 67 68 68 71 57 57 58 58 ...

Page 1004: ...t by Timed Reminder This feature is available only for PITS equipped with display Timed Reminder Set Assigns the feature number for setting Timed Reminder Timed Reminder Cancel Assigns the feature number for canceling Timed Reminder Voice Calling Mode Set Assigns the feature number for setting Voice Calling Mode This is set at the calling extension Voice calling uses the PDN button to make an anno...

Page 1005: ...ng Reply 6 4 84 TIE Trunk Access 7 1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 Summary Password level Two or higher The seventh screen of the System Numbering Plan sets feature numbers for executing or canceling various functions Enter one to four digits consisting of numbers and Speed Dialing Station Programming Station Lock Set Station Lock Cancel Walking COS Set Walking COS Cancel Walking Station Set ...

Page 1006: ...m Clear Message Waiting Reply TIE Trunk Access 82 8 3 B 1 00 3 F 3 00 5 G 6 00 3 B 1 00 4 I 8 00 5 G 6 00 Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Fixed 1 Fixed 2 Reference Enter one to four digits consisting of numbers and 7 9 9 64 57 3 B 1 00 4 I 10 00 5 G 8 00 5 G 6 00 3 F 14 00 ...

Page 1007: ...re number for starting to move a telephone set to another location Walking Station Cancel Assigns the feature number for canceling the moved extension Message Set Assigns the feature number for setting Message Waiting indication This feature number is available only for SLT s not for PITS s Message Cancel Assigns the feature number for canceling Message Waiting indication Station Program Clear Ass...

Page 1008: ...Cancel One Time 7 6 96 BGM through External Pager 6 6 1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 Summary Password level Two or higher The eighth screen of the System Numbering Plan sets feature numbers for executing or canceling various functions 83 20 83 20 84 21 84 21 65 22 Enter one to four digits consisting of numbers and 3 B 8 05 4 I 1 03 5 G 1 03 Continued 3 B 1 00 4 I 1 03 5 G 1 03 6 J 1 02 3 B 1...

Page 1009: ...ncel Remote FWD Set Remote FWD Cancel One Time BGM Through External Pager Enter one to four digits consisting of numbers and 3 B 1 00 4 I 11 00 6 J 5 00 3 B 1 00 4 H 2 00 5 F 2 00 6 I 2 00 Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Fixed 1 Fixed 2 74 30 74 30 75 31 75 31 76 32 76 33 66 23 Reference ...

Page 1010: ... feature number for setting Electronic Station Lock to extensions for operators 1 and 2 only Remote Station Lock Assigns the feature number for unlocking extensions for operators 1 Cancel and 2 only Remote DND Set Assigns the feature number for setting Do Not Disturb to extensions for operators 1 and 2 only Remote DND Cancel Assigns the feature number for canceling Do Not Disturb for extensions fo...

Page 1011: ... 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 Summary The ninth screeen of the System Numbering Plan sets feature numbers for executing or canceling various functions Password level Two or higher 77 24 77 24 67 25 68 26 0 0 72 34 73 35 73 35 3 B 1 00 3 F 8 00 6 J 10 00 Reference Busy Out Trunk Unbusy Trunk OGM Record OGM Playback UCD Log In UCD Log Out Remote Timed Reminder Confirm Remote Timed Reminder Set Remote Timed Rem...

Page 1012: ...Log Out Assigns the feature number for removing extensions from UCD service Remote Timed Reminder Assigns the feature number for confirming the time set by Remote Timed Confirm Reminder This feature is available for the Operator 1 and 2 at the Attendant Con soles only Remote Times Reminder Assigns the feature number for setting Remote Timed Reminder Set This feature is available for the Operator 1...

Page 1013: ...PBX Extension 11 120 Other PBX Extension 12 1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 Default Fixed 1 Fixed 2 Other PBX Extension 01 through 12 blank Assigning Items Reference Selection of Value 0 to 9 set DG1 and leave DG2 blank when the other PBX exten sion numbers are to be composed of three digits and set both DG1 and DG2 when the other PBX extension numbers are to be composed of four digits Descri...

Page 1014: ...22 Other PBX Extension 14 123 Other PBX Extension 15 124 Other PBX Extension 16 125 Front Call 1 126 Front Call 2 127 Front Call 3 128 Front Call 4 129 Transfer 6 9 1 130 Conference 6 9 2 131 Reserved 132 Reserved 1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 COPY 4 READ 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 Front Call 1 to 4 Transfer Conference Reference Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Fixed 1 Fixed 2 blank 691 692 36 37 3 B 1 00 4 C...

Page 1015: ...Transfer Conferernce Assigns the feature number for Front Call Assigns the feature number for SLT Transfer Operation Assigns the feature number for SLT Conference Operation Conditions Same as the Numbering Plan 01 11 Function Same as the Numbering Plan 01 11 ...

Page 1016: ...r Remote Remote Word Length 8 bits for 7 bits 8 bits number of bits for SIO SIO 1 2 6 bits 7 bits 8 bits number of bits for Remote 8 bits for Remote Reference Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Continued 2 D 3 00 3 F 1 00 7 B 2 00 15 B 2 00 16 B 2 00 17 18 System Communication Interface OFL PRG SCR SEL Item SIO 1 SIO 2 Remote Terminal SMDR Modem NL Code CR LF CR LF CR LF Baud Rate 9600 bau...

Page 1017: ...ne for None Mark Space Even Odd Parity for SIO SIO 1 2 None for None Even Odd Parity for Remote Remote Stop Bit 1 bit 1 bit 2 bits Stop bit for SIO 1 bit 1 5 bits 2 bits Stop bit for Remote Continued Reference 2 D 3 00 7 B 2 00 3 F 1 00 15 B 2 00 16 B 2 00 17 18 ...

Page 1018: ...is odd 2 4 6 8 etc is even Stop Bit Assigns the number of Stop bit for SIO 1 SIO 2 and Remote Stop bits are used to signal the end of a character and that the next bit received is the start bit of the next character Conditions It is possible to change assigning items in System Communication Interface while On site administration or Remote administration is performed or SMDR is being printed out Ne...

Page 1019: ...s appear on the function line of this setting screen COMMON SHOW LV CHG LV INS OUS REMOVE EXIT and HRD CPY keys are available in this setting screen For operation refer to Section 8 I Operation of Function Keys 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 ...

Page 1020: ...blank Assigns toll restriction levels and speed dialing codes for Speed Dialing There are 15 screens provided for Speed Dialing System Password level Three or higher 4 C 4 02 5 A 2 02 6 D 2 01 4 C 4 02 4 I 5 00 5 A 2 02 6 D 2 01 6 J 3 00 System Speed Dialing System OFL PRG SCR DIR System Speed Dial No 001 No Type Dial Name 001 00 0041 1 295 284 1857 ABC_COMPANY 002 00 001 0 297 398 2099 XXX_OFFICE...

Page 1021: ...lay and ATT console The first character must be A to Z or a to z Conditions If System Operation Tenant Service is set to Yes 200 speed dialing codes can be split between tenant 1 and tenant 2 To split them System Tenant Speed Dialing System Boundary must be executed Function The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen COMMON SHOW LV CHG LV INS OUS REMOVE EXIT and HRD...

Page 1022: ...3 14 15 16 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 9 00 Absent Message Summary Sets absent messages Password level Three or higher Fixed messages which cannot be changed enter these at extensions Flexible message Maximum 16 ASCII characters and up to five enter these at extensions Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Fixed Message 1 to 6 all displayed Flexible Message 7 to 16 blank Reference 4 I 7 00...

Page 1023: ...should be entered by the extension user Conditions If System Operation Tenant Service is assigned to Yes 10 flexible messages 7 to 16 can be split between tenants 1 and 2 To split them System Tenant Absent Message Boundary is used Six fixed messages cannnot be split between tenants They are used by both tenants in common A flexible message in use by an extension user cannot be changed or deleted I...

Page 1024: ......

Page 1025: ... This screen is the first screen used to assign various data for trunk groups Password level Two or higher Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference 3 B 7 04 3 C 1 01 3 C 1 03 3 C 3 00 3 D 2 03 3 D 2 07 3 F 14 00 3 B 7 04 3 B 4 00 3 B 7 04 3 B 7 04 Group Trunk Group OFL PRG SCR DIR Trunk Group No 01 1 3 Type PBX Name CO Tenant 1 Incoming Outgoing Both Way Incoming Mode Day DIL 1 N Incom...

Page 1026: ...rd System Access Intercept Routing Day None Type None not intercepting ATT transferring to Attendant Console EXT transferring to an extension No setting is unnecessary if None is selected for type Directory number if EXT is selected for type Intercept Routing Night None Type None not intercepting EXT transferring to an extension No if None is selected for type setting is unnecessary Directory numb...

Page 1027: ...ond s Hook Switch Flash Time None None no Flash Service 80 300 600 900 1200 Flash Service hooking time milliseconds Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Continued Reference 3 B 7 04 3 B 10 00 3 D 2 02 4 F 1 03 4 F 2 05 4 G 6 01 4 G 6 02 5 D 2 05 6 G 1 04 6 H 2 00 3 B 7 04 3 B 10 00 4 G 8 00 6 H 6 00 3 B 7 04 3 B 10 00 3 C 3 00 3 B 7 04 3 B 10 00 4 G 9 00 5 E 3 00 ...

Page 1028: ...aced outgoing from the PBX Pause Time Sets the pause time used in speed dialing and hook switch below Hook Switch Flash Time Assigns whether Flash Service is available or not If available set the hooking time pause length Conditions Tenant Incoming Mode Day Incoming Mode Night If is displayed here System Operation Tenant Service is set to No If ATT DISA TAFAS 1 or TAFAS 2 is selected the following...

Page 1029: ...e Line from any other modes cancels Single CO or Group CO assigned to a DN button of an extension belonging to this trunk group in Extension Station Type It is impossible to change from DID or TIE to any other modes and vice versa if any CO line in Trunk CO Line belongs to the Group Trunk Group When changing the setting Incoming Mode Day If Incoming Mode Day is changed from DIL 1 1 to another mode...

Page 1030: ...described in Reference Guide for KX T96182D Other Conditions The following tabular listings of items by trunk group type shows the items that cannot be assigned is displayed when Incoming Outgoing mode of the trunk group is set to Both Way default Trunk Group 1 3 Trunk Group 2 3 3 3 Type Incoming Outgoing Incoming Mode Day Incoming Mode Night Intercept Routing Day Intercept Routing Night DDD FEX W...

Page 1031: ...re selected for Incoming Mode Day the item below cannot be assigned DIL 1 N Destination screen 2 3 Type and Number If System Operaion External Paging 1 2 is set to No TAFAS 1 TAFAS 2 cannot be assigned to Incoming Mode Day When pressing the NEXT key this screen changes as follows Trunk Group No 01 1 3 Trunk Group No 01 2 3 Trunk Group No 02 1 3 Trunk Group No 48 3 3 Pressing the PREV key changes t...

Page 1032: ... are available in all setting screens INDEX READ keys are also available in this screen The operation of function keys are described in Section 8 I Operation of Function Keys Only messages are provided here 1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 READ 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 F2 INDEX Trunk Group No 01 48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 F4 READ Trunk Group No 01 48 ...

Page 1033: ...mber blank when blank is selected for type 01 to 32 pickup group number three or four digits extension number DID Digit Modification Table blank 1 to 8 table number Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference 3 B 7 04 3 D 2 01 3 B 7 04 3 D 2 03 10 I 2 00 Continued Group Trunk Group OFL PRG SCR DIR Trunk Group No 01 2 3 Destination DIL 1 N Only PCKUP 01 E X T 101 Type and Number DID Digit ...

Page 1034: ...its composed of numbers Up to eight codes can be assigned blank not assigning 0 dialing is not acceptable 1 to 32 maximum dialing digit s PBX Access Code No Restriction PBX Access Code Restriction Max Dial No after EFA Signal blank blank 0 Continued Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference 3 B 7 04 3 C 1 01 3 C 3 00 3 B 7 04 3 C 1 01 3 C 3 00 3 B 7 04 4 G 9 00 5 E 3 00 ...

Page 1035: ...ows the DID incoming digits to be modified to match the numbering plan PBX Access Code No In behind PBX or Centrex operation it is necessary for the system to Restriction send an access code to the host PBX or Centrex followed by a pause This feature assigns the access code to be sent PBX Access Code This is the same as PBX Access Code with Pause except that the digits Restriction following the ac...

Page 1036: ... Value CO TIE Restriction TIE CO Restriction TIE Forced Account Code Mode TIE Incoming Delete Digit TIE Incoming Insert Digit Yes CO TIE connection is not allowed No CO TIE connection is allowed Yes Yes TIE CO connection is not allowed No TIE CO connection is allowed Yes TIE callers are required to enter account code when making CO calls No Entering Account Code is not required 0 no deleting digit...

Page 1037: ...e before Calling from Tie to CO TIE Incoming Used to set the number of digit to be deleted from the digits received from Delete Digit other PBXs via tie lines TIE Incoming Used to set one through four digits number to be added to the digits Insert Dial received from other PBXs via tie lines Description of Assigning Items Required when there is a need to modify the digits from other PBXs Conditions...

Page 1038: ...erence 1 or 2 tenant number 1 1 or 2 tenant number 1 3 B 4 00 3 B 7 02 3 B 4 00 3 B 7 03 4 H 1 02 5 F 1 02 6 I 1 02 Group UCD Paging Group OFL PRG SCR DIR UCD Group Tenant UCD Group Tenant PAG Group Tenant 1 1 17 1 1 1 2 1 18 1 3 1 19 1 2 1 4 1 20 1 5 1 21 1 3 1 6 1 22 1 7 1 23 1 4 1 8 1 24 1 9 1 25 1 5 1 10 1 26 1 11 1 27 1 6 1 12 1 28 1 13 1 29 1 7 1 14 1 30 1 15 1 31 1 8 1 16 1 32 1 1 COMMON 2 ...

Page 1039: ...possible to change This restriction is only for On line programming not for Off line programming Description of Assigning Items UCD Group 1 to 32 Tenant Assigns UCD groups from 01 to 32 to tenant 1 or 2 PAG Group 1 to 8 Tenant Assigns paging groups from 1 to 8 to tenant 1 or 2 Function The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen COMMON SHOW LV CHG LV INS OUS REMOVE E...

Page 1040: ...up does not belong to any UCD group PAG blank 1 to 8 paging group number blank the call pickup group does not belong to any paging group Reference 3 B 7 02 3 D 2 05 3 D 2 06 3 B 7 03 4 H 1 02 5 F 1 02 6 I 1 02 Group Call Pickup Group OFL PRG SCR DIR PICK UCD PAG PICK UCD PAG PICK UCD PAG 01 01 1 12 03 23 02 01 2 13 24 03 01 3 14 25 04 01 4 15 26 05 02 5 16 27 06 02 6 17 28 07 02 7 18 29 08 02 8 19...

Page 1041: ...ple pickup groups When changing UCD group or paging group All of the extensions which belong to the current and newly entered UCD groups cannot be used If any line is used Waiting is displayed In this case wait until all of the extensions are not in use or cancel the waiting mode by pressing the CTRL C keys simultaneously Then try again during a slower period This restriction is only for On line p...

Page 1042: ...g to a pickup group if required 10 G 1 01 Station 1 4 The UCD group or paging group which each extension belongs to is determined by the pickup group 10 E 3 00 Call Pickup Group Each extension can determine its own tenant individually 10 G 1 01 Station 1 4 The UCD group and paging group can also determine their tenant 10 E 2 00 UCD Paging Group When assigning a pickup group to an UCD and or paging...

Page 1043: ... maximum of ten digits composed of letters Physical number numbers and symbols blank no trunk name programmed Direct Termination blank for with ATLC DN and directory number three or four digits Directory number for call destination Extension Remote FDN without ATLC in UCD FDN physical number order None no direct termination of extensions paired with CO lines Assigning Items Default Selection of Va...

Page 1044: ...tion NAG Night Answer Group No 1 or 2 for UNA three or four digits extension number for EXT Dial Mode Pulse DTMF DTMF mode Pulse Pulse mode MFC R2 MFC R2 mode DTMF Duration Time blank 80 msec 160 msec duration time Pulse Speed Low Speed Low Speed High Speed pulse speed Break 60 60 67 break CPC Detection 50 00 unavailable for CPC detection 400ms 01 6 5 mseconds detection 02 to 75 8 N mseconds detec...

Page 1045: ...the duration of the DTMF tones sent It is possible to assign this option only when the Dial Mode is set to DTMF When the dial mode is set to Pulse this field is blank Assigns the pulse speed It is possible to assign this option only when the Dial Mode is set to Pulse When the dial mode is set to DTMF this field is blank Assigns the break for pulse digits This is the ratio between on and off hook s...

Page 1046: ...pears the smallest one appears Pressing the PREV key changes the screen in reverse order Conditions Before setting this screen Group Trunk Group screen must be programmed This screen cannot be selected from Trunk submenu screen if no CO trunk card LCOT RCOT GCOT or DID is programmed in System Configuration Slot Assign ment If any one of the CO trunk cards is programmed this screen can be selected ...

Page 1047: ... LV INS OUS REMOVE EXIT and HRD CPY keys are available in all setting screens INDEX and READ keys are also available in this screen The operation of function keys are described in Section 8 I Operation of Function Keys Only messages are provided here 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 F2 INDEX Trunk Equipment No Physical No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 F4 READ Physical No ...

Page 1048: ...en does not appear when all the assign ing items of External Paging 1 2 and External Music Source 1 2 are set to No in the Sys tem Operation 1 3 screen Password level Three or higher Continued Reference 3 B 4 00 Trunk Pager Music Source OFL PRG SCR DIR Tenant Tone BGM 1 1 No No External Pager 2 1 No No Tenant For use 1 1 Hold BGM Music Source 2 1 Hold BGM 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 ...

Page 1049: ...one No not sending confirmation tone BGM No Yes sending BGM No not sending BGM Music Source 1 2 Tenant 1 1 tenant 1 2 tenant 2 For Use Hold BGM Hold using for source of Music on Hold BGM using for source of BGM Hold BGM using for source of Music on Hold or BGM 3 B 15 00 4 H 1 03 4 H 1 04 4 H 2 00 5 F 1 03 5 F 1 04 5 F 2 00 6 I 1 03 6 I 1 04 4 H 2 00 5 F 2 00 6 I 2 00 ...

Page 1050: ...e selected if System Operation External Paging 1 2 External Music Source 1 2 are all set to No will be displayed here if System Operation Tenant Service is set to No will be displayed here if System Operation External Paging 1 2 is set to No will be displayed here if System Operation Tenant Service is set to No will be displayed here if System Operation External Music Source 1 2 is set to No Exter...

Page 1051: ...election of Value AGC card 1 to 4 Tenant 1 1 tenant 1 2 tenant 2 Tone Detect Yes Yes tone detection is available No tone detection is unavailable Reference Password level Three or higher 3 D 2 02 4 G 5 00 4 G 6 00 5 E 1 00 6 H 1 00 6 H 2 00 Trunk AGC OFL PRG SCR DIR AGC card Shelf No Slot No Tenant 1 1 12 1 2 3 4 Tone Detect Yes 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 ...

Page 1052: ...ns This screen cannot be selected if System Configuration Slot Assignment has no AGC card programmed Function The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen COMMON SHOW LV CHG LV INS OUS REMOVE EXIT and HRD CPY keys are available in this setting screen For operation refer to Section 8 I Operation of Function Keys AGC card Tenant will be displayed here if System Operatio...

Page 1053: ... System SLT Single Line Telephone OPX Off Premise Extension KX T123250 KX T123220 KX T123230 KX T123235 7130 KX T61650 KX T61620 Continued 4 A 2 00 Extension Station OFL PRG SCR DIR Station Equipment No 10101 1 4 Telephone Type APITS Model KX T123230 OHCA Circuit No XDP Primary Directory Number 100 Station Name Department Tony H Pickup Group PCKUP 24 Hunt station Next EXT 101 Escape ATT Call Cover...

Page 1054: ...haracters except for and Type select input None when not in a pickup group Pickup when in a pickup group No 01 to 32 pickup group number when Pickup is selected Type select input None no setting Next Hunt Station EXT Next Hunt Station No Three or four digits extension directory number when setting Next Hunt Station No Off in case of DPITS port no 09 to 16 of DHLC card Other extension ports 100 for...

Page 1055: ...selected None no setting Call Coverage Path All Busy No Answer Busy No Answer Three or four digit extension number four max blank no call coverage path number 1 or 2 tenant number 01 to 32 COS number Yes Data Line Security mode is available No Data Line Security mode is unavailable normal mode only Yes Automatic Callback Trunk is available No Automatic Callback Trunk is unavailable Yes Parallel Co...

Page 1056: ...tion in the hunting sequence Hunt Station Escape Assigns the destination an attendant console or an extension to which the call is transferred when hunting group is all busy Call Coverage Condition Assigns the condition of Call Coverage Path Call Coverage Path Assigns a maximum of four destinations which the call is automatically transferred to when the extension is in various conditions Tenant As...

Page 1057: ... Station screen And exit the Station screen with saving The XDP port becomes OUS status 4 Enter an INS command to change the port status to In Service To change the XDP port to a Parallel Connect port follow the procedure below 1 Enter an OUS command to change the XDP port to Out of Service 2 Remove the XDP port by entering REMOVE command Off is selected automatically for the XDP mode in the Stati...

Page 1058: ...S telephone interfaced with HLC or DHLC card is selected If PITS telephone interfaced with PLC card is selected will appear in Parallel Connect field and parallel connect assignment is not available The setting of Lamp is valid only when the extension is an SLT with MESSAGE lamp which is interfaced with the KX T96175 MSLC or KX TD50175 ESLC If an extension card other than the KX T96175 and KX TD96...

Page 1059: ...T 8 COMMON SHOW LV CHG LV INS OUS REMOVE EXIT and HRD CPY keys are available in all setting screens INDEX READ and AUTO CNF keys are also available in this screen The operation of function keys are described in Section 8 I Operation of Function Keys Only messages are provided here 1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 READ 5 6 HRD CPY 7 AUTO CNF 8 Function The following functions appear on the function line of thi...

Page 1060: ...s screen Password level Three or higher Assigning Items Default Selection of Value DN 01 to 12 PDN for PDN Primary Directory Number button Type DN 01 SDN Secondary Directory Number button blank for the PRV CO Private CO button others OHCA Off Hook Call Announcement button MW Message Waiting button LOGIN UCD Log In button ALARM Local Alarm button SINGLE CO Single CO button GROUP CO Group CO button ...

Page 1061: ... to 48 trunk group number for Group CO Maximum 16 digits destination number for ONETOUCH SDN COS blank Station using COS of own extension DN using COS of PDN Day Ring blank No ring with lamp only not ringing Instantly instantly ringing Delayed 1 delayed 1 ring Delayed 3 delayed 3 rings Delayed 6 delayed 6 rings Night Ring blank Same as Day Ring Continued Assigning Items Default Selection of Value ...

Page 1062: ... of the extension PDN Primary Directory Number or the COS of the SDN Secondary Directory Number extension Day Ring Assigns whether incoming calls have immediate or delayed ringing on PDN SDN SCO or GCO buttons in Day mode The ringing assignment of the first PDN can also be changed with this option Night Ring Assign similarly as the above item except this applied in Night mode Example Conditions Th...

Page 1063: ...ine Trunk Group The trunk group where the CO line belongs must have Group Trunk Group Type assigned to PVL Private Line For Single CO button setting If Single CO is selected a physical number of the selected CO line must be programmed in Number The CO line of the physical number belongs to a Trunk CO Line Trunk Group The trunk group of the CO line must have Group Trunk Group Type assigned to DDD o...

Page 1064: ...l setting screens INDEX and READ keys are also available in this screen The operation of function keys are described in Section 8 I Operation of Function Keys Only messages are provided here F2 INDEX Station Equipment No Physical No DNxxxx F4 READ Station Equipment No Physical No DNxxxx 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 READ 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 ...

Page 1065: ...to 24 are assigned in this screen Password level Three or higher Continued Assigning Items Default Selection of Value DN 13 to 24 blank Type SDN Secondary Directory Number button PRV CO Private CO button OHCA Off Hook Call Announcement button MW Message Waiting button LOGIN UCD Log In button ALARM Local Alarm button SINGLE CO Single CO button GROUP CO Group CO button CONF Conference button DSS DN ...

Page 1066: ...1 to 48 trunk group number for Group CO Maximum 16 digits destination number for ONETOUCH SDN COS blank Station using COS of own extension DN using COS of PDN Day Ring blank No ring with lamp only not ringing Instantly instantly ringing Delayed 1 delayed 1 ring Delayed 3 delayed 3 rings Delayed 6 delayed 6 rings Night Ring blank Same as Day Ring Continued Assigning Items Default Selection of Value...

Page 1067: ...e SDN Secondary Directory Number extension Day Ring Assigns whether incoming calls have immediate or delayed ringing on PDN SDN SCO or GCO buttons in Day mode The ringing assignment of the first PDN can also be changed with this option Night Ring Assign similarly as the above item except this applied in Night mode Conditions This screen cannot does not appear if Extension Station 1 4 Telephone Typ...

Page 1068: ...r button SPLIT Call Split button FWD DND FWD DND button TONE BRK Tone Through Break button SNR Saved Number Redial button Number blank Maximum 16 numeric characters P pause hyphen and destination number for ONETOUCH Name blank Maximum 10 ASCII charaters destination name for ONETOUCH Summary Assigns PF Programmable Feature buttons when Telephone Type is preset to PITS in the Extension Station 1 4 s...

Page 1069: ...NEXT key in the Extension Station 3 4 screen Function The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen F2 INDEX Station Equipment No Physical No DNxxxx F4 READ Station Equipment No Physical No DNxxxx COMMON SHOW LV CHG LV INS OUS REMOVE EXIT and HRD CPY keys are available in all setting screens INDEX and READ keys are also available in this screen The operation of functio...

Page 1070: ...n blank Three or four digits directory number PF Key 01 to 16 Type blank ONETOUCH One Touch button EXT FEAT External Feature Access button CALL PAR Call Park System button CALL STA Call Park Station button RNG TRN Ringing Transfer button SPLIT Call Split button TONE BRK Tone Through Break button blank not assigned Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Summary This is the first screen of Exten...

Page 1071: ...10 G 19 Continued Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference PF key 01 to 16 cont blank Maximum 16 numeric characters P pause Number hyphen and destination number for ONETOUCH 4 C 4 01 ...

Page 1072: ... if the port status is Fault or already in the OUS mode 3 Remove the port by entering a REMOVE command 4 Assign the Pair Extension in the DSS Console screen first If other assignments are required continue programming 5 Connect the DSS Console 6 Enter an INS command to change the port status to In Service You must remove the port first to set the DSS Console The default of all the extension ports ...

Page 1073: ...on line of this setting screen 1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 READ 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 COMMON SHOW LV CHG LV INS OUS REMOVE EXIT and HRD CPY keys are available in all setting screens INDEX READ and AUTO CNF keys are also available in this screen The operation of function keys are described in Section 8 I Operation of Function Keys Only messages are provided here F2 INDEX Station Equipment No Physical No DNxxxx ...

Page 1074: ...Local Alarm button DSS DN Direct Station Selection DN button ONETOUCH One Touch button PRV CHG Privacy Change button EXT FEAT External Feature Access button CALL PAR Call Park System button CALL STA Call Park Station button RNG TRAN Ringing Transfer button SPLIT Call Split button TONE BRK Tone Through Break button blank not assigned This is the second screen of Extension DSS Console used to assign...

Page 1075: ...ng Items Default Selection of Value DSS Key 01 to 16 blank Three or four numeric characters directory number Number for DSS DN Maximum 16 numeric characters P pause hyphen and destination number for ONETOUCH Reference 4 C 4 01 ...

Page 1076: ...g functions appear on the function line of this setting screen F2 INDEX Station Equipment No Physical No DNxxxx F4 READ Station Equipment No Physical No DNxxxx COMMON SHOW LV CHG LV INS OUS REMOVE EXIT and HRD CPY keys are available in all setting screens INDEX and READ keys are also available in this screen The operation of function keys are described in Section 8 I Operation of Function Keys Onl...

Page 1077: ...SS Console Summary Assigning Items Default Selection of Value DSS Key 17 to 32 blank LOGIN UCD Log In button Type ALARM Local Alarm button DSS DN Direct Station Selection DN button ONETOUCH One Touch button PRVT CHG Privacy Change button EXT FEAT External Feature Access button CALL PAR Call Park System button CALL STA Call Park Station button RNG TRN Ringing Transfer button SPLIT Call Split button...

Page 1078: ... Items Default Selection of Value Reference 4 C 4 01 DSS Key 17 to 32 cont blank Three or four numeric characters directory number Number for DSS DN Maximum 16 numeric characters P pause hyphen and destination number for ONETOUCH ...

Page 1079: ...sion DSS Console 2 3 screen Function The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen COMMON SHOW LV CHG LV INS OUS REMOVE EXIT and HRD CPY keys are available in all setting screens INDEX and READ keys are also available in this screen The operation of function keys are described in Section 8 I Operation of Function Keys Only messages are provided here F2 INDEX Station Eq...

Page 1080: ...ssigns parameters for each doorphone Password level Three or higher Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Doorphone No 1 to 4 Tenant 1 1 tenant 1 2 tenant 2 Open Duration 0 1 to 10 door opening duration in second 0 Door cannot be opened Doorphone Call Assignment Type ATT for Call destination with ATLC PICKUP pickup group without ATLC ATT Attendant Console EXT extension blank not assigned Refe...

Page 1081: ...10 G 29 Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Doorphone Call Assignment cont No 01 to 32 pickup group number for PICKUP Three or four digits directory number for EXT Continued Reference ...

Page 1082: ...es and have two attendant consoles the call arrives alternately to each attendant console When you assign the destination of a doorphone call to attendant consoles and have two attendant consoles the call arrives alternately to each attendant console This screen cannot be selected if System Configuration Slot Assignment has no DPH card programmed Function The following functions appear on the func...

Page 1083: ...onsole is used to assign parameters for the Attendant Consoles The screen consists of three subscreens Password level Two or higher Assigning Items Default Selection of Value ATT 1 ATT 2 DN blank Three or four digits of numbers Floating DN blank not assigned TRS LV 01 01 to 16 toll restriction level PAG E1 E2 INT Paging All Extensions E 1 Paging External Pager 1 E 2 Paging External Pager 2 E 1 E 2...

Page 1084: ...ion of Value Alt Position Tenant 1 Tenant 2 blank Three or four digit numbers extension directory Overflow number blank no destination Night blank Three or four digit numbers extension directory number blank no destination Reference 6 G 2 00 3 B 8 00 ...

Page 1085: ...e calls are queued at the overflow destination as well as the console Night Assigns the destination of the attendant seeking calls DPH DID DISA Extension in the Night mode Conditions This screen cannot be selected if System Configuration Slot Assignment has no ATLC card programmed Tenant The tenant number which is settled by assigning the items Operator 1 2 of the System Operation 3 3 or System Te...

Page 1086: ... 108 TG 31 159 TG 43 TG 08 TG 20 108 TG 32 TG 44 TG 09 TG 21 TG 33 TG 45 TG 10 TG 22 TG 34 TG 46 TG 11 TG 23 TG 35 TG 47 TG 12 TG 24 TG 36 TG 48 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 Summary The second screen of Extension Attendant Console is used to assign parameters for the Attendant Consoles The screen consists of three subscreens Password level Two or higher Assigning Items Default Selection of Value...

Page 1087: ...nditions This screen cannot be selected if System Configuration Slot Assignment has no ATLC card programmed Tenant will be displayed if System Operation Tenant Service is set to No Function The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen COMMON SHOW LV CHG LV INS OUS REMOVE EXIT and HRD CPY keys are available in this setting screen The operation of function keys are desc...

Page 1088: ...1 TG05 01 TG13 01 TG21 01 TG29 01 TG37 01 TG45 01 TG06 01 TG14 19 TG22 15 TG30 01 TG38 01 TG46 01 TG07 01 TG15 01 TG23 01 TG31 01 TG39 01 TG47 01 TG08 01 TG16 01 TG24 01 TG32 01 TG40 01 TG48 01 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 Summary screen of Extension Attendant Console Password level Two or higher Assigns the priority to incoming calls when the ANSWER key is used at the Attendant Console Assignme...

Page 1089: ...ing Held Call Reminder External Calling TG 01 to TG 48 Conditions This screen cannot be selected if System Configuration Slot Assignment has no ATLC card programmed Held Call Reminder Regardless of this program Held Call Reminder will not function if System Operation Held Call Reminder is not programmed to Yes Function The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen COMM...

Page 1090: ......

Page 1091: ...o 7 digits of number and the characters X P and N blank not assigned Toll Restriction 7 Digit Toll Restriction Table ONL PRG SCR DIR ENT Number ENT Number ENT Number ENT Number ENT Number 01 001 16 02XP123 31 46 61 02 0023400 17 01N123 32 47 62 03 18 33 48 63 04 19 34 49 64 05 0120X0 20 XXX999 35 50 06 21 36 51 07 22 37 52 08 7064 23 38 53 09 24 39 54 10 25 40 55 11 26 41 56 12 0041 27 42 57 13 04...

Page 1092: ...to 9 can be specified as a wild card character Example Toll restriction level 02 checking limit Toll restriction level 03 checking limit Toll restriction level 04 checking limit Toll restriction level 01 checking limit In this case level 01 is not checked For further details refer to Section 3 C 1 00 Toll Restriction Function The following functions appear on the function line of this setting scre...

Page 1093: ... tenant 2 DISA Code 1 to 8 User Code blank Four digit numbers DISA user code blank not assigning ARS Override Not available Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Summary Assigns parameters for effectuating DISA Direct Inward System Access function Password level Two or higher 3 D 2 02 3 D 2 06 3 F 4 00 3 F 13 00 4 I 13 00 6 J 8 00 3 B 4 00 3 D 2 02 Reference Continued ...

Page 1094: ...ant 1 1 tenant 1 2 tenant 2 Delayed Answer After 2 rings Immediately immediately After 1 ring 1 ringing After 2 rings 2 ringings After 3 rings 3 ringings Prolong Time 5 0 to 7 minute Control Code Yes Yes Control Code is available No Control Code is unavailable Tone Detect Yes Yes executing tone detection No not detecting tone Reference 3 D 2 02 3 D 2 02 3 D 2 02 3 B 4 00 3 B 10 00 3 D 2 02 3 B 10 ...

Page 1095: ...de input mode in making outgoing calls Prolong Assigns admitting the prolonged duration of conversation between two outside parties Tenant Assigns the tenant number which is able to use the User Codes Delayed Answer Assigns the delayed answer time from detection of DISA arriving to answer Prolong Time Assigns allowable prolonged time limit for conversation between two outside parties Control Code ...

Page 1096: ... Operation Tenant Service is set to No Pressing the TAB key moves the cursor as follows cursor Function The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen COMMON SHOW LV CHG LV INS OUS REMOVE EXIT and HRD CPY keys are available in this setting screen For operation refer to Section 8 I Operation of Function Keys 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 ...

Page 1097: ...igit s Delete Digit 0 1 to 6 number of deleting digit s 0 deleting no digit Insert Dial No blank Maximum three digit numbers dialing number to be added blank inserting no digit 2 00 DID Reference 3 D 2 03 Special Attended DID OFL PRG SCR DIR Item Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Receive Digit 3 3 5 3 Delete Digit 1 0 3 0 Insert Dial No 2 2 Item Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Receive Digit 3 3 3 3 ...

Page 1098: ... programmed Pressing the TAB key moves the cursor as follows Special Attended DID OFL PRG SCR DIR Item Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Receive Digit 3 3 5 3 Delete Digit 1 0 3 0 Insert Dial No 2 2 Item Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Receive Digit 3 3 3 3 Delete Digit 0 0 0 0 Insert Dial No 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 Function The following functions appear on the function line of this setting ...

Page 1099: ...ree or four digits Overflow DN blank without OFDN UCD 05 to 32 OT blank 1 to 10 minute s Overflow timer blank without Overflow timer Assigns the parameters on each UCD Uniform Call Distribution group This is the first screen of two screens Password level Two or higher 3 00 UCD 3 01 UCD 1 2 3 B 3 00 3 D 2 05 to 2 06 Reference 3 D 2 05 to 2 06 3 D 2 05 to 2 06 ...

Page 1100: ...arts at the beginning of calls entering into the UCD queue Function The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen COMMON SHOW LV CHG LV INS OUS REMOVE EXIT and HRD CPY keys are available in this setting screen For operation refer to Section 8 I Operation of Function Keys Conditions Pressing the NEXT key changes this screen as follows UCD 1 2 UCD 1 2 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 ...

Page 1101: ...nk stopper 1T timer 15 seconds 2T timer 30 seconds 3T timer 45 seconds 4T timer 60 seconds 01W sending OGM Outgoing Message 1 If busy waiting until idle status 02W sending OGM 2 If busy waiting until idle status 01S sending OGM 1 if busy skipping 02S sending OGM 2 if busy skipping H sending Music on Hold TR transferring to overflow destination OFF disconnecting the line RET timer 15 seconds and re...

Page 1102: ...en press the NEXT key in the System Attended UCD 1 2 screen Pressing the TAB key moves the cursor as follows Function The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen COMMON SHOW LV CHG LV INS OUS REMOVE EXIT and HRD CPY keys are available in this setting screen For operation refer to Section 8 I Operation of Function Keys cursor 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 ...

Page 1103: ...f deleting digit s Up to four digits dialing number to be added 01 to 48 trunk group number Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference 3 F 14 00 Special Attended TIE Line Routing Table OFL PRG SCR DIR TIE Line Routing Table 1 3 Trunk Group Hunt Sequence No Code Delete Insert Digit Dial 01 02 03 04 05 01 2XX 2 32 02 03 02 31X 0 01 03 03 950 3 3 01 04 954 3 3 02 01 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0...

Page 1104: ...e number of digits to be deleted from the dialed digits Insert Dial Assigns dialing number to be added to the dialed digits Trunk Group Hunt Sequence 01 to 05 Determines the trunk group hunt sequence to be used when placing a TIE call The sequence is used by both tenants but trunk group will be skipped if it does not belong to the same tenant as the caller Conditions Pressing the NEXT key changes ...

Page 1105: ...No blank Maximum 16 ASCII characters Customer Contact blank Maximum 32 ASCII characters Date of Installation blank Maximum 16 ASCII characters Unit ID blank Maximum 8 ASCII characters Assigning Items Default Selection of Value None Continued Summary Assigns the customer s name address tele phone number etc of the installation point Password level Two or higher Reference Customer data is set defaul...

Page 1106: ...ters Comments Maximum 70 ASCII characters Continued Conditions None Function The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen COMMON SHOW LV CHG LV INS OUS REMOVE EXIT and HRD CPY keys are available in this setting screen For operation refer to Section 8 I Operation of Function Keys Reference 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 None Customer data is set default ...

Page 1107: ...ection of Value Trunk No 1 to 18 blank 1 for Basic shelf Shelf 2 for Expansion shelf 1 3 for Expansion shelf 2 blank not assigning Slot blank 01 to 12 for Basic shelf 01 to 14 for Expansion shelves 1 and 2 blank not assigning Extension No 1 to 18 blank 1 for Basic shelf Shelf 2 for Expansion shelf 1 3 for Expansion shelf 2 blank not assigning Slot blank 01 to 12 for Basic shelf 01 to 14 for Expans...

Page 1108: ... Assigns slot number of extensions SLC HLC ESLC MSLC DHLC Conditions The Power Failure Transfer feature is not effective for the SLT which is connected with a parallel connection COMMON SHOW LV CHG LV INS OUS REMOVE EXIT and HRD CPY keys are available in this setting screen For operation refer to Section 8 I Operation of Function Keys 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 Function The following functions...

Page 1109: ...own extension number Check the date setting Cancel either of the mode Probable Cause page length skip length 6 receive digit delete digit is not established in Special Attended DID screen Restriction Level Operator Restriction Level International is not established in Operation 1 3 screen Day night combination in the incoming mode is not correct Combination of the terminals of operators 1 2 is inc...

Page 1110: ... As assigned to the destination of paging from attendant console impossible to change Tenant As assigned to call placing mode of Trunk group impossible to change Tenant As assigned to night answer point for CO line impossible to change Tenant Attempting to change the tenant of Trunk group without removing the CO lines which belong to the trunk group Attempting to change the tenant of Trunk group w...

Page 1111: ...l Pager is not existing Attempting to delete the extension which is registered as an operator of the tenant Attempting to delete the extension which is registered as the destination of intercept routing for the Trunk group Attempting to delete the extension which is registered as an ATT busy out extension of Trunk group Countermeasure Assign another extension or clear the previous assignment Make ...

Page 1112: ...O line Attempting to delete the extension which is registered as a night answer point of CO line Attempting to delete the extension which is registered as a walking station Attempting to delete the PITS paired with DSS console Attempting to delete the extension which is registered as a night answer point for tenant Attempting to delete the extension which is set to SDN Attempting to delete the ATT...

Page 1113: ...ting to assign NAG as Night Answer Point of a CO line belonging to a Trunk Group whose Incoming Mode Night is not FIXED Changing Tenant Service from Yes to No is impossible as all ATT s are not assigned to tenant 1 Changing Tenant Service from Yes to No is impossible as all music sources are not assigned to tenant 1 Changing Tenant Service from Yes to No is impossible as all external pagers are no...

Page 1114: ...n the Fixed mode in the Hundred Block Impossible to change UCD Paging group for the pickup group belonging to the UCD Paging group contains extensions When the XDP port status is in OUS or in INS changing the XDP mode from On to Off is impossible Countermeasure Cancel the assignment of the corresponding card and then delete the port Clear DN s which should be blank Change after deleting all the ex...

Page 1115: ...ted Error Message Illegal parameter Parameter is not consecutive This parameter cannot assign Duplicate parameter definition internal Duplicate parameter definition external Not installed Invalid status Diagnostic failure Insufficient privilege Failure Service violation Already accessed by another device Printer is not ready Cannot print out in remote Waiting Calendar IC trouble Device error Versi...

Page 1116: ...ve or backup data is destroyed Execute during on line Impossible None Delete or modify the absent message after the extension cancels the message Probable Cause Improper data is received Execution is impossible during off line Impossible change such as INS INS OUS OUS is attempted Too many equipment assigned Attempting to delete or modify the absent message which is used by extensions ...

Page 1117: ...Section 11 System Programming Dumb Type Terminal ...

Page 1118: ......

Page 1119: ...8 14 00 Absent Message ABS 11 C 29 15 00 Trunk Group 1 TG1 11 C 30 16 00 Trunk Group 2 TG2 11 C 33 17 00 Trunk Group 3 TG3 11 C 34 18 00 UCD Paging Group UPG 11 C 35 19 00 Call Pickup Group CPG 11 C 36 20 00 CO Line COL 11 C 37 21 00 Pager PAG 11 C 40 22 00 Music Source MUS 11 C 41 23 00 Automatic Gain Control AGC 11 C 42 24 00 Extension EXT 11 C 43 25 00 DSS Console DSS 11 C 47 26 00 DN Button As...

Page 1120: ...11 C 74 8 Pay Tone Frequency 11 C 74 9 Pay Tone Gain 11 C 74 45 00 World Select 3 WS3 11 C 76 1 DIL 1 N CO Key Only PITS only 11 C 76 2 EXT Off hook BLF PITS only 11 C 76 3 DTMF Tone Integration 11 C 76 4 SLT On hook Operation Mode 11 C 77 5 Mode Selection of Calls Arriving at ATT 11 C 78 6 Centrex ARS 11 C 78 7 Waiting for Second Dial Tone Mode 11 C 78 8 Polarity Reversal Mode 11 C 78 9 Allow Mod...

Page 1121: ...56 09 Pulsed E M PEM 11 C 115 57 00 TIE Line Related Commands 11 C 116 57 01 TIE Routing Table TIE 11 C 116 57 02 TIE Accounting TAC 11 C 117 57 03 TIE Trunk Relay Restriction TRR 11 C 118 57 04 Line Hunting Sequence LHS 11 C 119 57 05 E M Selection EMS 11 C 120 57 06 Tie Caller ID Integration TCI 11 C 122 58 00 Charge Management Related Commands 11 C 123 58 01 Charge Management Password CPD 11 C ...

Page 1122: ......

Page 1123: ...nance Dumb Type Terminal must be read This section describes the basic operations for programming Programming mode consists of 74 commands which enable users to assign or change various parameters concerning the system administration such as Tenant Class of Service Numbering Plan and so on A list of all programming commands is provided on the following page 11 A 1 ...

Page 1124: ......

Page 1125: ... Button Assignment PFK PF Button Assignment DSK DSS Button Assignment DPH Doorphone ATT Attendant Console AQP Attendant Queue Priority TR3 TRS 7 Digit Table DIS Direct Inward System Access DIC DISA Code DIP DISA Password DID Direct Inward Dialing UC1 UCD 1 2 UC2 UCD 2 2 INF Installation Information TIE TIE Line Routing Table PFT Power Failure Transfer CHG Change Password CPC CPC Detect Timing Outg...

Page 1126: ...K Clock Mode CLP Clock Priority TRR TIE Trunk Relay Restriction MFC MFC Sequence Parameter CPD Charge Management Password RAT Rate CLT Charge Limitation EMS E M Selection TDM Tone Detect Mode DISA AGC LHS Line Hunting Sequence EFO ESF Frame Option VMT Voice Mail Transfer DLS DSP Detect Level Set DRD DR2 Max Receive Digit ULO UCD Auto Log out Operation MRO MFC R2 Option E 1 ESO E 1 Signaling Option...

Page 1127: ...word level One Input Format Item Number Input Values C Programming Commands Mode A Y S Item Number CR Input Value 1 expansion shelf not installed 2 expansion shelf 1 available 3 both expansion shelves 1 and 2 available Y conference expansion card installed N conference expansion card not installed Y TSW OHCA card installed N TSW OHCA card not installed Item Number Assigning Items 1 2 3 Expansion S...

Page 1128: ... Items Item Number Input Values 1 Card Type XX 00 to 20 00 none 01 PLC Analog Proprietary Integrated Telephone System Line Circuit card 02 HLC Analog PITS SLT Hybrid Line Circuit card 03 SLC Single Line Telephone Circuit card 04 DLC Digital Proprietary Integrated Telephone System Line Circuit card 05 DHLC Digital PITS Analog PITS SLT Super Hybrid Line Circuit card 06 MSLC SLC with Message Waiting ...

Page 1129: ...INS or OUS refer to Section 16 F 1 02 Card Status Screen T 1 and E 1 cards can only be assigned to the odd slot number in each shelf When T 1 or E 1 card is assigned is displayed on the next slot number and any assignment is impossible Relations between this assignment and the other assignments If no CO trunk card is assigned it is not possible to program CO Line COL If AGC card is not assigned Au...

Page 1130: ...e DPH Doorphone Call Assignment is set to A ATT Deleting the DISA card will be an error if there is one of the following assign ments Trunk Group TG1 Incoming Mode Day is set to 4 DISA Incoming Mode Night is set to 4 DISA Deleting the HLC SLC MSLC DHLC ESLC LCOT RCOT PCOT or GCOT card will be an error if there is the following assignment to the slot to be deleted Power Failure Tansfer PFT ...

Page 1131: ...ning Items 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Three or four numeric digits directory number Port 01 Port 02 Port 03 Port 04 Port 05 Port 06 Port 07 Port 08 Port 09 Port 10 Port 11 Port 12 Port 13 Port 14 Port 15 Port 16 Conditions If OPX card is assigned ports 5 to 16 cannot be programmed If PLC HSL SLC or MSLC card is assigned ports 9 to 16 cannot be programmed If DHLC card is assign...

Page 1132: ...7 4 00 Operation OPR Description To assign data common to the whole system by using indexes 1 and 2 Password level Two or higher R Index Number Explanation The first Operation block 1 Item Number Input Values P O Mode Index Number CR Item Number Y Tenant Service is available N Tenant Service is unavailable Not available 1 set manually 2 Fixed 1 3 Fixed 2 1 privacy enabled 2 privacy disabled Not av...

Page 1133: ...xternal music source 1 Y using external music source 2 N not using external music source 2 1 off hook selects an idle DN button 2 off hook selects an idle CO button 0 no FDN DN XXXX XXXX three or four numeric digits FDN for general operator call 1 0 no FDN DN XXXX XXXX three or four numeric digits FDN for general operator call 2 0 no PBX code Up to three numeric digits can be entered DSS Operation...

Page 1134: ...nt Queue Priority AQP Held Call Reminder If both are set to N Paging through External Pagers does not function and Pager PAG does not appear However it is possible to program the items below Class of Service 2 CS2 External Paging 1 2 Numbering Plan NBP External Paging External Paging Answer If either is set to N it is not possible to program its Pager PAG Tone BGM If both are set to N Music Source...

Page 1135: ...sabled 04 to 99 page length number of lines 00 to 95 skip perforation Note if printing out system data page length skip perforation 23 if printing out call processing information page length skip perforation 6 if printing out error log data page length skip perforation 4 0 do not print outgoing calls 1 print all outgoing calls Y print incoming calls N do not print incoming calls 1 Attendant Consol...

Page 1136: ...mber of the destination for Remote Alarm CLR Conditions Item Number 02 15 16 17 SMDR Remote Directory Number Remote Alarm Destination Address If set to N the following items cannot be programmed Operation OPR Index Number 2 Page Length Skip Perf Outgoing Duration Log Incoming Duration Log Attendant Duration Special Carrier Name Print Secret Dial Print Error Log Print Programming Print Traffic To a...

Page 1137: ...ght Auto Start Time FRI Day Auto Start Time FRI Night Auto Start Time SAT Day Auto Start Time SAT Night Auto Start Time SUN Day Auto Start Time SUN Night 1 manual change 2 automatic change XX XX X A or P a m p m 00 to 59 minute 01 to 12 hour Continued Type of Terminal 0 no operator A1 Attendant Console 1 A2 Attendant Console 2 DN XXXX XXXX three or four numeric digits extension directory number Sa...

Page 1138: ...d Front Extension 1 DN Front Extension 2 DN Front Extension 3 DN Front Extension 4 DN Inter Tenant Calling Speed Dialing System Boundary Call Park Boundary Message Waiting Boundary Absent Message Boundary 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 clearing function is effective for the item Conditions Index Number 2 does not appear if Operation OPR Tenant Service is set to N Item Number 01 02 Operator 1 2 T...

Page 1139: ...o 200 speed dialing codes can be programmed for the system If you wish to assign 150 codes to tenant 1 and 50 codes to tenant 2 enter 150 in Speed Dialing System Boundary Speed dialing codes Only tenant 1 can use the codes Only tenant 2 can use the codes 001 002 150 151 200 If tenant 1 uses no code and tenant 2 uses 200 codes enter 000 Speed Dialing System Boundary Call Park Boundary Message Waiti...

Page 1140: ...tendant Overflow Time SMDR Duration Time TIE Interdigit Time Out DISA Interdigit Time Out 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 15 to 240 seconds 15 to 240 seconds 15 to 240 seconds 1 to 5 second s 5 to 120 seconds 3 to 15 seconds 3 to 10 seconds 0 to 25 second s 5 to 60 seconds 5 to 240 seconds 5 to 240 seconds 5 to 240 seconds 0 to 15 second s 3 to 30 second s 1 to 10 second s M T I Mode ...

Page 1141: ...gits dialed 001 cannot dial Y Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb is available N Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb is unavailable Y Do Not Disturb Override is available N Do Not Disturb Override is unavailable Y Call Forwarding to CO is available N Call Forwarding to CO is unavailable Y Call Transfer to CO is available N Call Transfer to CO is unavailable Y account codes are required for outgoing CO calls...

Page 1142: ...vailable Y Station Lock is available N Station Lock is unavailable Y Walking Station is possible N Walking Station is impossible Y PITS system programming is possible N PITS system programming is impossible 1 With restriction 2 No restriction 3 No access Conditions CPY function is available Copying is executed per Class of Service number For example if you copy the data of Class of Service No 1 to...

Page 1143: ... Group 01 Trunk Group 02 Trunk Group 03 Trunk Group 04 Trunk Group 05 Trunk Group 06 Trunk Group 07 Trunk Group 08 Trunk Group 09 Trunk Group 10 Trunk Group 48 Y trunk group available for access N trunk group unavailable for access Conditions CPY function is available Copying is executed per Class of Service number For example if you copy the data of Class of Service No 1 to Class of Service No 2 ...

Page 1144: ...em Number Input Value Assigning Items 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 EQA 1 EQA 2 EQA 3 EQA 4 OCC 1 OCC 2 OCC 3 OCC 4 PAG 1 PAG 2 PAG 3 PAG 4 PAG 5 PAG 6 PAG 7 PAG 8 External Paging 1 External Paging 2 01 to 32 Class of Service number 3 Mode Index Number CR Item Number S Not available Y paging group available for access N paging group unavailable for access Y external paging ...

Page 1145: ...gs to the other tenant than that of the External Paging 1 or 2 assigned to Y the extension cannot access the external paging group PAG 1 to 8 External Paging 1 2 CPY function is available Copying is executed per Class of Service number For example if you copy the data of Class of Service No 1 to Class of Service No 2 all the data of COS No 1 in CS1 to CS3 screen is copied to that of No 2 For CPY f...

Page 1146: ...01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 50 A G L Mode CR Item Number Item Number Input Value Assigning Items CLR Toll Restriction Level Toll Restriction Table Hunt Sequence 01 Hunt Sequence 02 Hunt Sequence 03 Hunt Sequence 04 Hunt Sequence 05 Hunt Sequence 06 Hunt Sequence 07 Hunt Sequence 08 Hunt Sequence 09 Hunt Sequence 10 Hunt Sequence 48 clearing function is effective for the item Conditions For...

Page 1147: ...tems 1st Hundred Block Extension 2nd Hundred Block Extension 3rd Hundred Block Extension 4th Hundred Block Extension 5th Hundred Block Extension 6th Hundred Block Extension 7th Hundred Block Extension 8th Hundred Block Extension 9th Hundred Block Extension 10th Hundred Block Extension 11th Hundred Block Extension 12th Hundred Block Extension 13th Hundred Block Extension 14th Hundred Block Extensio...

Page 1148: ...um four digits consisting of numbers CLR Continued 11 C 22 Continued Speed Dialing System Speed Dialing Station Doorphone Call 1 4 External Paging Station Paging External Paging Answer Station Paging Answer Night Answer 1 Night Answer 2 Dial Call Pickup Directed Call Pickup Hold Extension Retrieve Redial External Feature Access Account Code Hold Hold Retrieve Call Park System Call Park Retrieve Sy...

Page 1149: ...verride Deny Set Busy Override Deny Cancel Data Line Security Set Data Line Security Cancel Pickup Dialing Programming Pickup Dialing Set Pickup Dialing Cancel Absent Message Set Absent Message Cancel Timed Reminder Confirm Timed Reminder Set Timed Reminder Cancel Voice Calling Mode Set Voice Calling Mode Cancel Voice Calling Deny Set Voice Calling Deny Cancel Speed Dialing Station Programming Sta...

Page 1150: ...ar Message Waiting Reply TIE Trunk Access Night Mode Set Night Mode Cancel Night Service Manual Mode Set Night Service Manual Mode Cancel Flexible Night Service Remote Station Lock Set Remote Station Lock Cancel Remote DND Set Remote DND Cancel Remote FWD Cancel Remote FWD Cancel One Time BGM Through External Pager Busy Out Trunk Unbusy Trunk OGM Record OGM Playback UCD Log In UCD Log Out Input Va...

Page 1151: ...5 Other PBX Extension 06 Other PBX Extension 07 Other PBX Extension 08 Other PBX Extension 09 Other PBX Extension 10 Other PBX Extension 11 Other PBX Extension 12 Other PBX Extension 13 Other PBX Extension 14 Other PBX Extension 15 Other PBX Extension 16 Front Call 1 Front Call 2 Front Call 3 Front Call 4 Transfer Conference Input Value Maximum four digits consisting of numbers One or two numeric ...

Page 1152: ...e number as the part or whole of it For example the digit 2 is assigned to the feature number for Trunk Group 01 48 Access and another digits 21 is assigned for Call Coverage Path Set it is checked at the time of data storage Similarly 35 and 351 cannot be present at the same time It is possible to store 0 through 9 as the feature numbers However if or is included in the feature numbers those feat...

Page 1153: ...e on site administration or remote administration is performed or SMDR is being printed out New setting becomes effective when those operation modes are finished For further description of assigning items refer to Section 10 D 7 00 Communication Interface 1 2 3 4 5 Item Number Input Value Assigning Items 1 CR LF 2 CR 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 for SIO 300 1200 for Remote 6 6 bits for Remo...

Page 1154: ...imum 32 numeric characters and marks below P pause F flash start of secret number end of secret number hyphen Enter in a pair Maximum 16 ASCII characters except for characters and Be sure to enter before and after the codes The first character must be A to Z or a to z 1 2 3 Restriction Level Dial Name CLR D S Mode Index Number CR Item Number clearing function is effective for the item Conditions I...

Page 1155: ...re and after the message Mode Item Number CR clearing function is effective for the item B A Item Number Conditions If Operation OPR Tenant Service is assigned to Y Yes 10 flexible messages can be split between tenants 1 and 2 To split them Tenant TNN Absent Message Boundary is used Six fixed messages cannot be split between tenants They are used in common A flexible message in use by an extension...

Page 1156: ...ct Inward Dialing 7 TIE TIE Lines Trunk group name Maximum 3 ASCII characters Enclose the name with double quotes 1 2 tenant number not assignable when Tenant Service is set to N 1 incoming only 2 outgoing only 3 both way 1 ATT Attendant Console 2 DIL 1 1 Direct In Line 1 1 3 DIL 1 N Direct In Line 1 N 4 DISA Direct Inward System Access 5 TAFAS 1 Trunk Answer From Any Station 1 6 TAFAS 2 Trunk Ans...

Page 1157: ...outgoing only 0 none A transfer to the Attendant Console DN XXXX XXXX directory number transfer to an extension Not assignable when the Trunk Group type is TIE 0 none DN XXXX XXXX directory number transfer to an extension Not assignable when the Trunk Group type is TIE 01 to 16 Not assignable when CO line access is incoming only Not assignable Not assignable 01 to 64 minute 1 1 5 seconds 2 4 0 sec...

Page 1158: ...n the trunk group with DID the following items are assignable but they do not work at all in Incoming Only mode Disconnect Time Pause Time Hook Switch Flash Time Max Dial No after EFA Signal For further information refer to 3 Other Conditions on page 10 E 7 Refer to Section 10 E 1 01 Trunk Group 1 3 If 2 Fixed or 3 Flexible is changed to another option it cancels all the settings of CO lines in CO...

Page 1159: ... DID or PVL or Incoming Mode Day is set to any mode except DIL 1 N 1 to 4 table number Assignable when the Trunk Group type is DID Maximum three digit numbers Assignable when the Trunk Group type is PBX and CO line access is both way Maximum three digits of numbers Assignable when the Trunk Group type is PBX and CO line access is both way 01 to 32 maximum dialing digits 00 cannot dial after extern...

Page 1160: ... Incoming Delete Digit TIE Incoming Insert Dial Y CO TIE connection is not allowed N CO TIE connection is allowed Y TIE CO connection is not allowed N TIE CO connection is allowed Y TIE callers are required to enter account code when making CO calls N Entering account code is not required 0 deleting no digits 1 to 4 number of deleting digit s blank Inserting no digit A maximum of four digits numbe...

Page 1161: ...em Number Input Value Assigning Items 01 02 03 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 UCD Group 01 UCD Group 02 UCD Group 03 UCD Group 32 PAG Group 1 PAG Group 2 PAG Group 3 PAG Group 4 PAG Group 5 PAG Group 6 PAG Group 7 PAG Group 8 1 tenant 1 2 tenant 2 1 tenant 1 2 tenant 2 Index 1 Index 2 Conditions This screen does not appear if Operation OPR Tenant Service is set to N No This must be programmed before programmi...

Page 1162: ...to 32 Pickup group number Item Number Input Values Item Number Input Value Assigning Items G Mode P C CR Item Number UCD Group Number Paging Group Number 01 to 32 UCD Group 1 to 32 00 none 1 to 8 Paging Group 1 to 8 0 none 1 2 Conditions If Operation OPR Tenant Service is set to Y Yes UCD Paging Group UPG setting must be done before setting this screen Refer to Section 10 E 3 00 Call Pickup Group ...

Page 1163: ...nk group number Maximum 10 ASCII characters Enclose the name with double quotes DN XXXX XXXX three or four digits extension number 0 none Not assignable when the Trunk Group type is DID PVL or TIE or Incoming Mode Day is set to any mode except DIL 1 1 DN XXXX XXXX three or four digits extension number U1 universal night answer 1 U2 universal night answer 2 0 none R Remote Administration N Night An...

Page 1164: ...ype is DID or the Start Arrangement is set to immediate start 08 09 10 11 Conditions Before using this command Trunk Group TG1 TG2 TG3 must be programmed This command is not available to use if no CO trunk card is assigned in Slot Assignment SLA If the Trunk Group TG1 containing the CO line has Type assigned to 6 DID the following items cannot be entered is displayed CLR clearing function is effec...

Page 1165: ...Trunk Group TG1 containing the CO line has Incoming Mode Night assigned to 2 Fixed or 3 Flexible Otherwise is displayed and setting is impossible N NAG can be selected only when Trunk Group Incoming Mode Night is assigned to 2 Fixed If Pulse mode is selected refer to Section 11 C 45 00 World Select 1 WS1 about the following items Interdigit Pause Pulse Type Break Detect Direct Termination Night An...

Page 1166: ... Values Item Number Input Value Assigning Items Conditions This cannot be programmed if Operation OPR External Paging 1 2 are set to N No Item number 1 Tenant cannot be assigned if Operation OPR Tenant Service is set to N No G Mode A P Index Number CR Item Number 1 2 3 1 tenant 1 2 tenant 2 Y sending confirmation tone when accessing the external pager N no confirmation tone Y BGM heard over extern...

Page 1167: ...use 1 tenant 1 2 tenant 2 1 used when a call is put on hold 2 used for BGM 3 used for hold BGM 1 2 Index Number Explanation Music source number 1 or 2 Item Number Input Values Conditions This cannot be programmed if Operation OPR External Music Source 1 2 are set to N No Item number 1 Tenant cannot be assigned if Operation OPR Tenant Service is set to N No S Mode U M Index Number CR Item Number ...

Page 1168: ...ion N without tone detection Physical number Conditions This cannot be programmed if Slot Assignment SLA has no AGC card programmed Slot No XXX To assign Tone Detect only enter 000 as the index number 23 00 Automatic Gain Control AGC Description To assign the tenant number for the AGC Automatic Gain Control card and to determine if the tone detection is executed Password level Three or higher Inpu...

Page 1169: ...ndex Number Item Number Input Values Item Number Input Value Assigning Items CLR Telephone Type PITS Model 1 SLT Single Line Telephone 2 PITS Proprietary Integrated Telephone System 3 DPITS Digital Proprietary Integrated Telephone System 4 OPX Off Premise Extension 01 KX T123250 02 KX T123220 03 KX T123230 04 KX T123235 7130 05 KX T61650 06 KX T61620 07 KX T61630 08 KX T30850 7055 09 KX T30820 10 ...

Page 1170: ...sy No Answer 0 none DN XXXX XXXX three or four digits extension directory number 0 none A Attendant Console DN XXXX XXXX three or four digits extension directory number DN XXXX XXXX three or four digits extension directory number 1 or 2 tenant number 01 to 32 COS number Y Data Line Security is available N Data Line Security is disabled Y Automatic Callback Trunk is available N Automatic Callback T...

Page 1171: ... does not have any of PLC SLC HLC MSLC DLC DHLC ESLC or OPX cards programmed or if DN Assignment DNA does not have the extension number programmed Telephone Type Assignable telephone types differ depending on the card types connected to the extensions as follows Index Number 01 Card Type PLC SLC HLC OPX MSLC DLC DHLC ESLC Telephone Type Assignable APITS SLT APITS or SLT OPX SLT with MESSAGE lamp D...

Page 1172: ... of 2 Lamp is valid only when the extension is an Indication SLT with MESSAGE lamp which is interfaced with the KX T96175 MSLC or KX TD50175 ESLC If an extension card other than KX T96175 and KX TD50175 is installed appears and this item cannot be assigned Note Be sure to select 1 None for this setting if an SLT without MESSAGE lamp is interfaced with the KX T96175 or KX TD50175 For further descri...

Page 1173: ...e S D S Index Number CR Item Number 1 2 1 KX T123240 7040 7240 2 KX T61640 DN XXXX XXXX three or four digits extension directory number 0 none Conditions If HLC Analog Hybrid Line Circuit PLC Analog Proprietary Line Circuit DLC Digital Proprietary Line Circuit or DHLC Digital Hybrid Line Circuit is not assigned in the Slot Assignment SLA program DATA ERROR appears on the screen For further descrip...

Page 1174: ...ately 3 delayed 1 ring 4 delayed 3 rings 5 delayed 6 rings 00 none 01 DSS DN button 03 One Touch button 04 Privacy Change button 05 External Feature Access button 06 Call Park System button 07 Call Park Station button 08 Ringing Transfer button 09 Call Split button 10 FWD DND button 11 Tone Through Break button 12 SNR button 13 VM Transfer button 14 PDN button 15 SDN button 16 Private CO button 17...

Page 1175: ...k group number for Group CO Maximum 16 numeric characters P pause hyphen and destination number for One Touch Five digit number physical location for Private CO and Single CO 01 to 48 trunk group number for Group CO 1 use the COS of the station 2 use the COS of the PDN Same as the items 001 and 002 Same as the items from 003 to 007 004 005 006 007 008 012 013 017 018 022 023 027 028 032 033 037 03...

Page 1176: ...S 7000 series DN 1 DN 2 DN 3 PDN SDN PDN DN buttons on PITS type 20 30 and 50 If PRV CO Private CO is selected a physical number of the selected CO line must be programmed in Number The CO line of the physical number belongs to a CO Line COL Trunk Group The trunk group where the CO line belongs must have Trunk Group 1 TG1 Type assigned to 4 PVL Private Line If Single CO is selected a physical numb...

Page 1177: ...09 10 12 13 15 16 18 Continued Item Number Input Values Item Number Input Value Assigning Items CLR PF 01 Type PF 01 Number PF 01 Name PF 02 PF 03 PF 04 PF 05 PF 06 00 not assigned 03 One Touch button 04 Privacy Change button 05 External Feature Access button 06 Call Park System button 07 Call Park Station button 08 Ringing Transfer button 09 Call Split button 10 FWD DND button 11 Tone Through Bre...

Page 1178: ...27 28 29 31 33 34 36 37 39 40 42 43 45 46 48 Same as the items 01 02 and 03 clearing function is effective for the item Conditions If Extension EXT Telephone Type is not assigned to 2 PITS DATA ERROR appears on the screen In case of a PITS telephone Item Nos 37 through 48 cannot be selected For further description of assigning items refer to Section 10 G 1 04 Station 4 4 and 10 G 2 01 DSS Console ...

Page 1179: ...09 10 DSS 01 Type DSS 01 Number DSS 02 DSS 03 DSS 04 DSS 05 Item Number Input Value Assigning Items 00 or blank not assigned 01 DSS DN button 03 One Touch button 04 Privacy Change button 05 External Feature Access button 06 Call Park System button 07 Call Park Station button 08 Ringing Transfer button 09 Call Split button 11 Tone Through Break button 19 UCD Login button 20 Local Alarm button Three...

Page 1180: ...SS 09 DSS 10 DSS 11 DSS 12 DSS 13 DSS 14 DSS 15 DSS 16 DSS 17 DSS console only DSS console only DSS 32 DSS console only Same as the items 01 and 02 CLR clearing function is effective for the item Conditions In case of PITS KX T30830 Item No 17 through 64 cannot be selected For further description of assigning items refer to Section 10 G 2 02 DSS Console 2 3 ...

Page 1181: ...one Assignment Item Number Input Value Assigning Items 1 tenant number1 2 tenant number2 not assignable when Tenant Service is assigned N 01 to 10 door opening duration seconds 00 door opening disabled Doorphone call destination 0 none P XX pickup group number XX 01 to 32 A Attendant Consoles DN XXXX extension directory number XXXX three or four digits Conditions If DPH Doorphone card is not assig...

Page 1182: ...ions 2 External Pager 1 3 External Pager 2 4 External Pager 1 2 5 Paging All Extensions and External Pagers Not assignable It is set automatically DN XXXX XXXX three or four digit number FDN 0 none 01 to 16 toll restriction level Same as the item 04 DN XXXX XXXX three or four digit number extension directory number 0 none DN XXXX XXXX three or four digit number extension directory number 0 none DN...

Page 1183: ...ee or four digit number extension directory number 0 none Not assignable when Tenant Service is assigned to N DN XXXX XXXX three or four digit number extension directory number 0 none Item Number Input Values Index 2 Conditions If ATLC Attendant Console Line Circuit card is not assigned in the Slot Assignment SLA program DATA ERROR appears on the screen For further description of assigning items r...

Page 1184: ...k Recall Intercept Routing Held Call Reminder External Calling TG 01 External Calling TG 02 External Calling TG 03 External Calling TG 04 External Calling TG 05 External Calling TG 06 External Calling TG 07 External Calling TG 08 External Calling TG 09 External Calling TG 10 External Calling TG 48 01 to 24 call priority Conditions If ATLC card is not assigned in the Slot Assignment SLA program DAT...

Page 1185: ...ber Input Values Assigning Items Input Value Number 01 to 64 3 to 7 digits of number and the characters X P and N 3 Mode R T CR Item Number Item Number Conditions The charater X can be used as a wild card character of numbers 0 to 9 The character P can be used as a wild card character of numbers 0 or 1 The character N can be used as a wild card character of numbers 2 to 9 Description ...

Page 1186: ...ely 0 to 7 minute s Y control code entry is possible N control code entry is not allowed Y executing tone detection N no tone detection 1 DISA 2 OGM1 3 OGM2 4 W UP 1 Tenant 1 2 Tenant 2 Assigning Items Input Value 1 2 3 4 1 2 Delayed Answer Prolong Time Control Code Tone Detect For Use Tenant Item Number Conditions If a DISA card is not assigned in the Slot Assignment SLA program DATA ERROR appear...

Page 1187: ...olong Tenant Conditions If a DISA card is not assigned in the Slot Assignment SLA program DATA ERROR appears on the screen C Mode I D Index Number CR Item Number Item Number Input Values Assigning Items Input Value Not available 01 to 16 Y forced N optional Y prolonging is available N prolonging is not available 1 tenant 1 2 tenant 2 not assignable if Tenant Service is preset to N For further desc...

Page 1188: ...e DISA Password Four digit number 1 to 8 clearing function is effective for the item Item Number Input Values Conditions If the DISA card is not assigned in the Slot Assignment SLA program DATA ERROR appears on the screen The DISA Password is the same as DISA User Code which is described in Section 3 D 2 02 Direct Inward System Access DISA and 10 I 1 00 DISA For further description of assigning it...

Page 1189: ...eived digit s 1 to 6 number of digits to be deleted to a maximum of six 0 no digits to be deleted The digits to be inserted to a maximum of three 1 2 3 Receive Digit Delete Digit Insert Dial No D Mode I D Index Number CR Item Number Item Number Input Values clearing function is effective for the item Item Number Conditions This is impossible to program if Slot Assignment SLA has no DID card progra...

Page 1190: ... Floating DN Overflow DN Overflow Time DN XXXX XXXX three or four digit number Floating DN 0 no Floating DN DN XXXX XXXX three or four digit number Overflow DN 0 no Overflow DN 01 to 10 minute s Overflow timer 00 no Overflow timer Not assignable for UCD groups 01 to 04 Conditions For further description of assigning items refer to Section 10 I 3 01 UCD 1 2 1 Mode C U Index Number CR Item Number It...

Page 1191: ...me Table 13 Time Table 14 Time Table 15 Time Table 16 00 stopper 01 timer 15 secs 02 timer 30 secs 03 timer 45 secs 04 timer 60 secs 05 sending OGM 1 if busy waiting until idle status 06 sending OGM 2 if busy waiting until idle status 07 sending OGM 1 if busy skipping 08 sending OGM 2 if busy skipping 09 sending Music on Hold 10 transferring to the overflow destination 11 disconnecting the line 12...

Page 1192: ...Unit ID Installers Name Programmers Name Comments Conditions None Maximum 32 ASCII characters Maximum 64 ASCII characters Maximum 16 ASCII characters Maximum 16 ASCII characters Maximum 32 ASCII characters Maximum 16 ASCII characters Maximum 8 ASCII characters Maximum 32 ASCII characters Maximum 32 ASCII characters Maximum 70 ASCII characters Input Value CLR F Mode N I CR Item Number Be sure to en...

Page 1193: ...ber CR Item Number Item Number Input Values Index Number Explanation Power Failure Transfer number 01 to 18 Assigning Items Input Value 1 2 Trunk Slot No Extension Slot No Physical slot number three digit number 101 to 314 Physical slot number three digit number 101 to 314 CLR clearing function is effective for the item Conditions The Power Failure Transfer feature is not effective for the SLT whi...

Page 1194: ...tection Level 2 Password Protection Level 3 Password Protection Level 4 Password Conditions None G Mode H C Index Number CR Item Number Item Number Input Values Enclose all entries in quotation marks Item Number clearing function is effective for the item CLR Four digits consisting of letters or numbers Four digits consisting of letters or numbers Four digits consisting of letters or numbers Four ...

Page 1195: ...x Number 10101 to 31416 Explanation Physical Number of the Trunk Port Item Number None None Assigning Items CPC signal detect timing for outgoing CO calls CPC signal detect timing for incoming outgoing CO calls Input Value 00 CPC signal is not detected 01 6 5 ms 02 16 ms 8 N ms N 2 to 75 75 600 ms Default 00 Assignable when the card type is RCOT PCOT LCOT GCOT or T 1 LCO or GCO channel type 00 CPC...

Page 1196: ...e terminated If your switching system does not send CPC like signal in dialing sequence we recommend to make CPC signal detection work on outgoing CO calls CPC signal detection can be assigned to incoming CO calls only or both on incoming and outgoing CO calls If CPC signal detection is assigned to outgoing CO calls only it does not function ...

Page 1197: ...mpts Refer to Section 4 C 4 04 Automatic Redial for further information 5 Break Detect SLT Dialed digits from dial pulse type Single Line Telephone SLT is transmitted to the system by making and breaking a loop current dc path thereby interrupting loop current Duration time required to detect the number of breaks depends on the SLT connected and can be administered to 16 to 96 ms or 16 to 136 ms b...

Page 1198: ...ak Detect Input Value x 1 to 3 1 630 ms 2 830 ms 3 1030 ms Default 2 x 1 to 3 1 Normal 2 New Zealand 3 Sweden Default 1 xx 01 to 32 01 1 time 32 32 times Default 10 xx 01 to 32 10 to 320 sec 01 10 seconds 32 320 seconds Default 06 x 1 to 2 1 16 to 96 msec 2 16 to 136 msec Default 1 11 C 72 Input Format Index Number None W S 1 Mode Item Number CR Continued ...

Page 1199: ...or TIE Answer Decision Timer Input Value x 0 to 2 0 No Flash signal detection 1 208 1016 msec 2 80 1016 msec Default 1 x 0 to 4 0 none 1 208 to 1016 msec 2 80 to 1016 msec 3 208 to 1544 msec 4 80 to 1544 msec Default 1 xxx 001 to 255 001 1 msec 225 225 msec Default 001 Continued ...

Page 1200: ...ss Not available 4 OCC Access Not available 5 Outgoing CO Back Tone On outgoing CO calls dialed number is toned out which informs the extension users that dialed number has been dialed CO Dialing Tone is usually toned out by default setting select N to turn off the CO dialing tone 6 L COT Busy Out Looprelay When CO line is busied out either manually by the operator or automatically by the system t...

Page 1201: ...requency Pay Tone Gain Input Value xx 01 to 16 0 5 to 8 0 sec 01 0 5 sec 02 1 o sec Default 16 8 0 sec Described in Reference Guide for KX T96182D Not available Not available Y or N Y Dialed digits is toned out Default N Dialed digits is not toned out Y or N ON or OFF Y Loop Relay ON N Loop Relay OFF Default Not available x 1 or 2 1 16 KHz Default 2 12 KHz x 01 to 32 01 0dB 02 1dB 10 9dB Default 3...

Page 1202: ... DIL 1 N feature arrives at CO button SCO GCO or PDN button If no CO button is available on a PITS an incoming CO call will arrive at PDN button available default 2 EXT Off hook BLF PITS only Not available 3 DTMF Tone Integration On extensions with the Voice Mail Port parameter enabled the KX TD500 system can send codes DTMF tones to indicate the state of the call busy answered ringing disconnect ...

Page 1203: ... When setting 2 is selected a call put consultation hold will be disconnected if you replace the handset on the switchhook without dialing any digits When 1 is selected default When 2 is selected Note To hang up and make another call right away an SLT user should be sure to hold down the switchhook for more than two seconds Parameters 1 Hang up causes ringing of consultation hold recall tone defau...

Page 1204: ...y the extension user must ensure the reception of the second dial tone from the Central Office before continuing to dial the telephone number Parameters Y The system waits for the second CO dial tone N The system does not wait for the second CO dial tone default 8 Polarity Reversal Mode With an RCOT card KX T96183 the system determines the start and completion of calls by detecting a reversal of C...

Page 1205: ...e Message Waiting lamp 11 µ A law E 1 only Used to select the appropriate PCM Pulse Code Modulation conversion mode This setting is valid only when E 1 trunk card is installed to the system Parameters 1 µ law 2 A law default 12 SLT Transfer Operation Used to select the SLT transfer operation mode Parameters 1 Transfer operation mode 1 default SLT cannot transfer a call to CO 2 Transfer operation m...

Page 1206: ...s displayed on the LCD of PITS This assignment is valid only when Change Management feature is utilized Parameters 1 Duration Display Default 2 Meter Display 3 Charge Display 15 Tone Except Idle Status MFC R2 Used to change the tone type which is sent to an extension when making a call through the MFC R2 sequence from DID card This is not valid when the MFC backward code is idle 16 T96 Cards Codec...

Page 1207: ...ton only N Arrives at CO button or PDN button Default N Not available Y or N Y The KX TD500 system sends codes DTMF tones to the VPS N The KX TD500 system does not send codes DTMF tones to the VPS Default N X 1 or 2 1 Hang up causes ringing of consultation hold recall tone default 2 Hang up disconnects a call on consultation hold Default 1 X 1 to 3 1 Load sharing 2 Simultaneous Ringing 3 Intercons...

Page 1208: ...Default N X 1 or 2 1 Normal Mode 2 Voice Mail Mode Default 1 X 1 or 2 1 µ law 2 A law Default 1 X 1 to 3 1 SLT Transferring operation Mode 1 2 SLT Transferring operation Mode 2 3 SLT Transferring operation Mode 3 Default 1 Y or N Y The system sends the ringback tone while the call is transferred N The system does not send the ringback tone while the call is transferred Default N X 1 to 3 1 Duratio...

Page 1209: ...signed times 001 to 240 consecutively busy tone is sent to the caller Then the system busies out the corresponding CO line automatically 3 N 241 On CO calls the system does not monitor the loop current sent through the CO line therefore CO line is always seized by extension users whether loop current is running or not Refer to Section 11 C 44 00 WS 2 L COT G COT Busy Out Looprelay Input Format Ind...

Page 1210: ...er can send dial signal to the central office after receiving CO dial tone This feature is programmable on a trunk group basis In case of Local Trunk Dial Access system decides the mode by the top trunk group of Local Trunk Hunt Sequence 1 Assigning CO Access Instantly on a Trunk Group This feature can be assigned on a trunk group basis by entering CAI command at dumb programming mode as follows T...

Page 1211: ... to set System System Timer External First Digit Time Out timer longer than length of CO dial tone delay This setting can be ranged from 5 to 120 seconds Refer to Section 10 D 3 00 System Timer or Section 11 C 6 00 System Timer TIM 11 C 85 Item Number None Assigning Items CO Access Instantly Input Value Y Enabled N Disabled Default Y ...

Page 1212: ...Codes for this feature can be registered by the ACC command This feature is applied to the extension user whose Class of Service No is assigned to Y by ACV command at dumb programming mode When Account Code Verified feature is assigned Yes to COS No 2 the account code entered is checked against the System Account Code List If match is found on the table a call is completed if not found a call is s...

Page 1213: ...s helpful to use this feature together with ACL feature Refer to Section 3 F 11 00 Call Accounting Summary for further information Item Number None Assigning Items Account Code Verified Mode Input Value Y Enabled N Disabled Default N 11 C 87 ...

Page 1214: ...ccount code before making an outside call The validity of the account code entered however is not checked by the system To check the validity assign Account Code Verified ACV feature Input Format Index Number Index Number Input Values Assigning Account Code Entry on Long Distance Calls ACL To activate this feature enter ACL command and then Y Yes as follows Example PRG ACL AT CR Class of Service N...

Page 1215: ...Call Accounting Summary Section 4 I 2 00 Account Code Entry Section 5 G 2 00 Account Code Entry Section 11 C 48 00 Account Code Verified It is helpful to use this feature together with ACV feature Refer to Section 3 F 11 00 Call Accounting Summary for further information 11 C 89 ...

Page 1216: ...Code Entry Section 11 C 50 00 Account Code Verified Section 11 C 51 00 Account Code Entry on Long Distance Calls It is helpful to use this feature together with ACV feature Refer to Section 3 F 11 00 Call Accounting Summary for further information A C C Mode Item Number CR Index Number 1 or 2 Explanation Tenant Number Assigning Items Account Code Input Value Up to 10 digits of numeric characters 0...

Page 1217: ...ions for an incoming CO call are determined by the tenant number of the CO line Programming Example To assign the Night Answer Group Extensions 1 At the programming prompt PRG type PRG NAG AT The screen displays the Input prompt INPUT as follows PRG NAG AT 01 Night Answer EXT 0 INPUT 2 At Input prompt INPUT type PRG NAG AT 01 Night Answer EXT 0 INPUT DN109 Item Number 01 to 32 Assigning Items Dest...

Page 1218: ... EXT 0 INPUT EOD This assigns the Night Answer Group Extensions to the system and the programming prompt PRG appears again To confirm the assignments At the programming prompt PRG type PRG NAG SH The screen displays the current assignments as follows PRG NAG SH 01 Night Answer EXT DN109 02 Night Answer EXT DN110 03 Night Answer EXT DN111 04 Night Answer EXT DN112 05 Night Answer EXT 0 06 Night Ans...

Page 1219: ...ght Answer EXT DN109 INPUT CLR 02 Night Answer EXT DN110 INPUT CLR 03 Night Answer EXT DN111 INPUT CLR 04 Night Answer EXT DN112 INPUT CLR 05 Night Answer EXT 0 INPUT EOD This assigns the changed data to the system and the programming prompt PRG appears again To finish the programming At the programming prompt PRG type PRG EXIT The screen displays the initial prompt of the Dumb programming mode as...

Page 1220: ...t Index Number Item Number Input Values Programming To enter the Dumb Programming mode 1 Press CTRL key and V key simultaneously when Main Menu screen is displayed at VT programming mode 2 At the Dumb programming initial prompt type PRG The screen displays the programming prompt PRG as follows PRG Assigning Items Polarity Reversal Detection Input Value Y or N Y Detects reversal of CO line polarity...

Page 1221: ...ment No 2011 Y INPUT N Equipment No 2012 Y INPUT 3 Follow the step 2 for other CO line ports of an RCOT card 4 To store the new assignments to the system at input prompt INPUT type PRG PRD AT Equipment No 2011 Y INPUT N Equipment No 2012 Y INPUT N Equipment No 2018 Y INPUT N Equipment No 2011 N INPUT EOD This assigns the new setting to the system and the programming prompt PRG appears again To fin...

Page 1222: ...To return to the VT programming mode At initial prompt press CTRL and V keys simultaneously The screen displays the Main Menu of the VT programming mode 11 C 96 ...

Page 1223: ...ormat Index Number None Item Number Input Values Programming Example When DN 109 to 112 are connected to the Voice Mail ports To assign the Voice Mail DN 1 At the programming prompt PRG type PRG VMD AT 01 The screen displays the Input prompt INPUT as follows PRG VMD AT 01 01 Voice Mail DN 0 INPUT 2 At Input prompt INPUT type PRG VMD AT 01 01 Voice Mail DN 0 INPUT DN109 The screen displays the next...

Page 1224: ...G appears again To confirm the assignments At the programming prompt PRG type PRG VMD SH The screen displays the Voice Mail DN assignments as follows PRG VMD SH 01 Voice Mail DN DN109 02 Voice Mail DN DN110 03 Voice Mail DN DN111 04 Voice Mail DN DN112 05 Voice Mail DN 0 06 Voice Mail DN 0 16 Voice Mail DN 0 PRG To remove the existing Voice Mail DN 1 At the programming prompt PRG type PRG VMD AT 0...

Page 1225: ...ail DN DN110 INPUT CLR 03 Voice Mail DN DN111 INPUT CLR 04 Voice Mail DN DN112 INPUT CLR 05 Voice Mail DN 0 INPUT EOD This assigns the changed data to the system and the programming prompt PRG appears again To finish the programming At the programming prompt PRG type PRG EXIT The screen displays the initial prompt of the Dumb programming mode as follows PRG EXIT To return to the VT programming mod...

Page 1226: ...pause time as follows PRG WSD AT Dial Entry Table No 01 1 Dial 811 2 Pause 1 Note 1 Dial One through four digits number consisting of numeric characters 1 9 can be entered One character X can be used as a wild card character that substitutes any numeric character in its position 2 Pause One digit 1 4 which indicates the number of pause characters A pause character may be used to help ensure the re...

Page 1227: ...number consisting of numeric characters 1 9 X can be used as a wild card character Default None One digit 1 4 which indicates the number of pause characters Each pause character causes a fixed dialing delay of four and one half 4 5 seconds Default 0 11 C 101 CLR clearing function is effective for the item ...

Page 1228: ...ontrol Used to remove TAFAS confirmation tone By default this tone sounds when a TAFAS call is answered by an extension user Parameters Y Enable default N Disable 4 Paging Confirmation Tone Control Used to remove paging confirmation tone By default this tone sounds when paging announcement is answered by an extension Parameters Y Enable default N Disable 5 Call Park Confirmation Tone Control Used ...

Page 1229: ...ntrol Used to remove Call Pickup Confirmation Tone By default this tone sounds when the call ringing at an extension is answered by another extension Parameters Y Enable default N Disable Input Format Index Number None W S 4 Mode Item Number CR ...

Page 1230: ...ne Control Paging Confirmation Tone Control Call Park Confirmation Tone Call Pickup Confirmation Tone Input Value X 1 or 2 1 350 440 Hz 2 660 Hz Default 1 Y or N Y Enable N Disable Default Y Y or N Y Enable N Disable Default Y Y or N Y Enable N Disable Default Y Y or N Y Enable N Disable Default Y Y or N Y Enable N Disable Default Y 11 C 104 ...

Page 1231: ... Line Cording 02 03 04 Channel No 01 05 Channel No 02 06 Channel No 03 07 Channel No 04 08 Channel No 05 09 Channel No 06 10 Channel No 07 11 Channel No 08 12 Channel No 09 13 Channel No 10 14 Channel No 11 15 Channel No 12 16 Channel No 13 17 Channel No 14 18 Channel No 15 0 none 1 LCO 2 GCO 3 DID 4 OPX 5 TIE Default none Note will be displayed in the following items and cannot be assigned Item n...

Page 1232: ...ned Item numbers 19 and 35 T 1 card KX T96187 E 1 card KX T98188 Input Value Conditions This command is available only for the system is installed T 1 or E 1 card It is not available to assign for item No 01 Frame Sequence D4 and ESF are available for T 1 card only PCM30 and PCM30 CRC are available for E 1 card only Line Cording B8ZS is available for T 1 card only HDB3 is available for E 1 card on...

Page 1233: ...ssword level Two or higher Input Format Index Number None Item Number Input Values Assigning Item TSW clock mode C L K Mode SH AT BT Item Number 1 CR Note TSW clock mode can be changed only when all T 1 cards status are OUS or FAULT Programming To change the default setting 1 At the programming prompt PRG enter CLK AT 1 PRG CLK AT 1 The screen displays the current value and the input prompt INPUT ...

Page 1234: ...t Values C L P Mode SH AT BT Item Number CR Programming To enter the Dumb Programming mode 1 Press CTRL key and V key simultaneously when Main Menu screen is displayed at VT programming mode 2 At the Dumb programming initial prompt enter PRG PRG The screen displays the programming prompt PRG as follows PRG To change the default setting 1 At the programming prompt PRG enter CLP AT 1 PRG CLP AT 1 Th...

Page 1235: ...101 INPUT EOD The new assignment is stored to the system and the programming prompt PRG appears again To finish the programming At the programming prompt PRG enter EXIT PRG EXIT The screen displays the initial prompt of the Dumb programming mode as follows PRG EXIT To return to the VT programming mode At initial prompt press CTRL and V keys simultaneously The screen displays the Main Menu of the V...

Page 1236: ...put Format CR E F O Index Number Explanation X XX Slot No 01 05 09 Shelf 1 to 3 Physical number 101 105 109 201 205 209 301 305 309 Index Number Index Number Input Values Assigning Item Explanation X 1 to 5 1 Option 4 C A D B 2 Option 16 C 0 D 0 3 Option 16 C 1 D 0 4 Option 16 C 0 D 1 5 Option 16 C 1 D 1 Default 1 Values for C bit and D bit Mode SH AT BT Index Number ...

Page 1237: ...number 101 105 109 201 205 209 301 305 309 Index Number Item Number Input Values Assigning Items Input Value DTMF Output Level DTMF Detect Level MFC R2 Output Level MFC R2 Detect Level Item Number 1 2 3 4 XX 01 to 16 01 3dB 02 2dB 4 NdB N 1 to 16 16 12dB Default 07 XX 01 to 32 01 42 0dB 02 41 0dB N 43 0dB N 1 to 32 32 11 0dB Default 17 XX 01 to 32 01 0dB 02 1dB 4 NdB N 1 to 32 32 31dB Default 17 X...

Page 1238: ...g Items Input Value Item Number 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 48 X 1 to 7 Default 7 Conditions This parameter is active when the channel type is DR 2 and the dial mode of the CO line is MFC R2 of the E 1 card Refer to section 56 01 Channel Assignment CHA for the channel type and section 20 00 CO Line COL for the dial mode This parameter is active when the trunk group type is not DID A system regar...

Page 1239: ...ing CO calls only 3 Both ways Default 0 XX 01 to 15 01 15 Group A Code Default 05 XX 00 to 15 00 None 00 15 Group I Code Default 14 XX 01 to 15 01 15 Group I Code Default 15 XX 01 to 15 01 15 Group I Code Default 12 XX 01 to 15 01 15 Group B Code If the called extension is out of service the system sends this code to the CO Default 04 XX 01 to 15 01 15 Group A Code If the system receives this code...

Page 1240: ...tect Position Meter Pulse Length Dial Pulse Control Position Clear Back Signal Control Position Item Number XX 0 to 2 0 No detection 1 Outgoing CO calls only 2 Both Incoming and Outgoing CO calls Default 1 X A to B A Detect position is A Bit B Detect position is B Bit Default B XX 01 to 60 01 8msec 02 16msec N 8 msec 60 480msec Default 16 X A to B A Dial Pulse is controlled by A Bit B Dial Pulse i...

Page 1241: ...o or higher Input Format Mode SH AT BT CR P E M Item Number Input Values Assigning Items Input Value Seizure Pulse Answer Pulse Clear Pulse Item Number X 1 or 2 1 Short Pulse 150msec 2 Long Pulse 600msec Default 1 X 1 or 2 1 Short Pulse 150msec 2 Long Pulse 600msec Default 2 1 Short Pulse 150msec 2 Long Pulse 600msec Default 2 1 2 3 Conditions None Item Number ...

Page 1242: ...wo or higher Input Format Index Number Up to three digits 0 9 X wild card 0 to 4 number of deleting digit s Up to four digits dialing number to be added 01 to 48 trunk group number whose type is set to TIE Assigning Items Input Value Item Number Explanation TIE Line Routing Table number 01 to 36 Index Number Item Number Input Values 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Code Delete digit Insert Dial Trunk Group Hunt Se...

Page 1243: ...Tie callers must enter a TIE Account Code to make a CO call via tie lines if TIE Forced Account Code Mode is set to Yes Refer to Section 3 F 14 02 Calling form Tie to CO for further information Password Level Two or higher Input Format Item Number Input Values C A T Mode SH AT BT CR Item Number 01 32 Item Number Input Value 01 to 32 Assigning Items Tie Account Code Four digits numeric number 0 9 1...

Page 1244: ...ndex Number Explanation 01 to 48 Trunk Group Number Call receiver side Index Number Input Value 01 48 Assigning Items Conditions TRR command is valid for the trunk group whose type is set to TIE Programming example Trunk Group Number Call sender side Y Restricted N Allowed Default N T R R CR Tie Trunk Relay Restriction setting TG10 TG11 In above case if you want to restrict tie call relay from TG1...

Page 1245: ...tion between a certain two locations In this case we recommend to change the hunting sequence at one location from 1 smallest largest to 2 largest smallest Password Level Two or higher Input Format Index Number S H L Mode SH AT BT Index Number Index Number 01 to 48 Explanation Index Number Input Values Input Value X 1 or 2 1 From the smallest to the largest physical number of tie lines 2 From the ...

Page 1246: ...e 2 Voice Path Type 3 Voice Level Transmit 4 Voice Level Receive 5 Balance Network Password Level Two or higher Input Format Mode SH AT BT Item Number CR Index Number E S M Index Number Explanation Physical number of E M trunk ports 10101 to 31416 Input Value Assigning Items E M Interface Type Voice Path Type X 1 to 4 Should be fixed to 4 Default 4 X 1 or 2 1 2 wire 2 4 wire Default 1 1 2 Item Num...

Page 1247: ...ansmit Voice Level Receive Balance Network X 1 to 4 1 6dB 2 3dB 3 0 4 3dB Default 2 3 4 5 Valid when Voice Path Type is set to 2 4 wire Conditions This command is valid only when E M card KX T96184 is installed to the system X 1 to 4 Should be fixed to 1 Default 1 ...

Page 1248: ... higher Input Format Index Number Input Values T I C Index Number Explanation Trunk Group Number Index Number 01 to 48 Input Value Assigning Items X Y or N Y Tie Caller ID Integration Mode Yes N Tie Caller ID Integration Mode No Default N The Caller ID Integration Mode Conditions This command is available for a trunk group type assigned as TIE If no trunk groups are assigned as type TIE this comma...

Page 1249: ...ent for further information Password Level Two or higher Input Format Item Number Input Values D P C Mode SH AT BT Input Value Assigning Items Conditions The password assigned by CPD command can be changed by an extension user in the PITS System Programming mode Refer to Section 12 C 10 00 Setting Charge Management Password for further information CR Item Number 1 2 Tenant 1 Tenant 2 Item Number F...

Page 1250: ...imun 8 digits or 7 digits when included a decimal point on a PITS and SMDR So if the value exceeded this limit the KX TD500 display only the last 7 or 8 figures of a charge for calls The Rate item can also be assigned by an extension user in the PITS station programming mode Refer to Section 13 C 9 11 Setting Charge Rate Supplement The KX TD500 informs the charge for calls that is calculated by mu...

Page 1251: ...Item Number Input Values T L C Mode SH AT BT Index Number Explanation DNXXXX or Five digit physical number Extension directory number XXXX three or four digits Physical location of extension Input Value 0 No limitation 1 99999 The number of charge meter allowable for the extension Assigning Items CR Item Number Charge Limitation Conditions Charge limitation can also be assigned by an extension use...

Page 1252: ... trunk call This command is used to select a type of tones which applies to Tone Detection for DISA AGC For example if 2 cyclic tone only is selected the system disconnects the lines only when it detects cyclic tone during a DISA trunk to trunk call Explanation Trunk Group Number Index Number 01 to 48 Assigning Item Tone Detection Mode DISA AGC Input Value X 0 1 or 2 0 all tones 1 no tone or cycli...

Page 1253: ...talled the following system programming is required to make use of it Password Level Two or higher 01 15 Group2 01 15 Used to assign the destination of incoming calls on Group 2 signal codes 01 15 respectively Parameters 0 Undefined default for 01 03 through 15 1 Extension default for 02 2 Operator 16 Idle code 17 Busy code 18 Unallocated code 19 Congestion code After receiving a DID call the syst...

Page 1254: ...allocated code Congestion code 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 X 01 to 15 01 to 15 a code for 15 types of signal of Group B Default Idle code 01 Busy code 02 Unallocated code 03 Congestion code 04 X 01 to 30 01 1 second 30 30 seconds Default 15 X 0 1 or 2 0 Undefined 1 Extention 2 Operator Default 0 Default for Item Number 02 is 1 Forward Timer Backward Timer 22 Disa...

Page 1255: ...ail transfer key the system transfers the line to the Voice Mail which is specified by the directory number Input Format Index Number None Item Number Input Values Conditions None T Mode SH AT BT Item Number V M CR Item Number 1 CLR Assigning Items Voice Mail DN Input Value Voice Mail Directory Number 0 none DNxxxx xxxx three or four digits Voice Mail Directory Number ...

Page 1256: ... to section 3 D 2 05 Uniform Call Distribution UCD General for further information Password Level Two or higher Input Format Index Number Item Number Input Values Conditions None O Mode SH AT BT Index Number U L CR Index Number 01 to 32 Input Value UCD Group Number Assigning Items UCD Auto Logout Mode Input Value X Y or N Y Enable Auto Logout Mode N Disble Auto Logout Mode Default Y ...

Page 1257: ...Index Number Item Number Input Values Conditions None Mode SH AT BT D L C Input Value XX 00 to 60 00 No Limit 01 60 Time Limit Default 00 X 0 to 2 0 Outgoing CO calls 1 Incoming CO calls 2 Both way Default 0 Index Number 01 to 32 Explanation COS Class of Service Number Item Number 1 2 Index Number Item Number CR Assigning Items Ext CO Call Duration Time Minutes Call Type ...

Page 1258: ...DR 02 and the dial mode of the CO line is MFC R2 of the E 1 card Refer to section 56 01 Channel Assignment CHA for the channel type and section 20 00 CO Line COL for the dial mode This parameter is active when the trunk group type is not DID The system regards the dial as complete after receiving the dials defined by this command Then it determines the destination extensions Assigning Items No Ans...

Page 1259: ...e H is automatically replaced with user s mail box number which is determined by Extension Station 1 4 screen or EXT command Only one H character can be used for an input value Mode SH AT BT CR C V M Assigning Items Forward to VM Sequence Message Button Sequence Input Value Maximum 10 digits consist of numbers and H 0 9 dial data H mail box number Default 6H Maximum 10 digits consist of numbers an...

Page 1260: ......

Page 1261: ...en Both the XDP mode and the Parallel Connect mode are set at the same time Countermeasure Make page length skip length 6 Make receive digit delete digit Make Restriction Level Operation Restriction Level International Change the day night combination in incoming mode Change the combination of terminals for operators 1 2 Designate the installed DN Set FDN of other UCD or extension directory number...

Page 1262: ...without canceling extensions As assigned to the destination of paging from attendant console impossible to change Tenant As assigned to call placing mode of Trunk group impossible to change Tenant As assigned to night answer point for CO line impossible to change Tenant Attempting to change the tenant of Trunk group without removing the CO lines which belong to the trunk group Attempting to change...

Page 1263: ...te the extension which is registered as an operator of the tenant Attempting to delete the extension which is registered as the destination of intercept routing for the Trunk group Attempting to delete the extension which is registered as an ATT busy out extension of Trunk group Attempting to delete the extension which is registered as an ATT overflow extension for Trunk group DATA ERROR No 342 34...

Page 1264: ... incoming mode for Trunk group Attempting to delete the external pager which is registered as a paging destination for the ATT Attempting to delete the ATT which is specified for maintenance device When deleting ATT combination of operators 1 and 2 is incorrect Impossible to delete the card for all of the ports belonging to the card is not made pre installed Impossible to delete the card for DN is...

Page 1265: ...nant Service from Yes to No is impossible as all music sources are not assigned to tenant 1 Changing Tenant Service from Yes to No is impossible as all external pagers are not assigned to tenant 1 Changing Tenant Service from Yes to No is impossible as all doorphones are not assigned to tenant 1 Changing Tenant Service from Yes to No is impossible as all DISA s are not assigned to tenant 1 Changin...

Page 1266: ...O 1 Port Match the backup version 3 00 Fixed Error Messages Probable Cause Unacceptable value is assigned Space exists between items Some items are left blank At least one blank should be left among multiple items Assigned selection value is not for the item The number which is set previously in this screen is assigned again The number which is set previously in a different screen is assigned Devi...

Page 1267: ...enerator Receiver card Specify the DTMF Generator Receiver of the same card Probable Cause A checksum error has been detected Improper data is received Execution is impossible during off line Impossible change such as INS INS OUS OUS is attempted Some required items are omitted The number of equipment you attempt to assign is over the limit Slot number you specified is not valid DTM LBT command Ca...

Page 1268: ...ed in off line mode has some logical error Assigned data is invalid Countermeasure Enter the correct password Change the mode Enter the correct command Select the correct type SH AT BT Enter the correct index number Enter the correct item number Assign the correct data Refer to the DATA ERROR No list 4 00 Other Error Messages Error Message PASSWORD ERROR MODE ERROR COMMAND ERROR TYPE ERROR INDEX E...

Page 1269: ...Section 12 System Programming Proprietary Integrated Telephone System PITS ...

Page 1270: ......

Page 1271: ...ering PITS System Programming Mode 12 C 2 1 02 Exiting PITS System Programming Mode 12 C 3 2 00 Setting Date and Time 12 C 5 3 00 Storing Speed Dialing System 12 C 7 4 00 Changing Extension Number 12 C 10 5 00 Changing Extension Name 12 C 12 6 00 Changing PITS Programming Password 12 C 15 7 00 Changing DISA User Code 12 C 17 8 00 Changing Walking COS Password 12 C 19 9 00 Setting Charge Limitation...

Page 1272: ......

Page 1273: ...information on system programming 2 It is recommended to use PITS telephones provided with the display which are KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7030 KX T7130 KX T123235 KX T123230D KX T123230 KX T61630 and KX T30830 3 The system is on line communication mode 4 Password for PITS system programming is required to enter into PITS system programming mode The password is assigned in System Operation PITS Progra...

Page 1274: ......

Page 1275: ...H button END button Overlay sheet button button 12 B 1 For the convenience of PITS system station programming function names for programming are printed on the overlay sheet This sheet is provided for PITS telephones equipped with the display Location of Controls with the Overlay In PITS system and PITS station programming modes the functions of the fixed feature buttons on a PITS are changed as i...

Page 1276: ... PAUSE AUTO DIAL STORE AUTO ANSWER MUTE SP PHONE REDIAL FLASH HOLD SECRET CLEAR PAUSE STORE AUTO SELECT NEXT END PREV FLASH Overlay sheet SECRET PAUSE STORE AUTO SELECT NEXT PREV FLASH END INTERCOM CONF FWD DND MESSAGE ABC 2 JKL 5 TUV 8 OPER0 1 GHI 4 PRS7 DEF 3 MNO 6 WXY 9 TRANSFER PAUSE AUTO DIAL STORE AUTO ANSWER MUTE SP PHONE REDIAL FLASH HOLD SECRET CLEAR PAUSE STORE AUTO SELECT NEXT END PREV ...

Page 1277: ...programming mode PROGRAM Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3 SHIFT Soft Buttons and SHIFT Button on the Display DPITS Three soft buttons are provided on Digital Proprietary Telephones DPITS The functions of these soft buttons vary as the programming procedures advance from step to step Those functions that are currently assigned to the buttons are shown on the lower line of the display Soft button variations CON...

Page 1278: ...lled the Message Line and the lower one is called the Function Line The Message Line upper shows you what you should do or what you should select It also allows you to confirm what you have just entered The display capacity is 16 digits If your entry exceeds the capacity you can shift the display by pressing or button SYS PGM NO KX T7230 Display Message Line Function Line SYS PRG NO KX T7235 Displ...

Page 1279: ...1 Describes actual operation 2 Shows the result of the operation 3 Describes comment or note related the operation Note The procedures in this section are described from the viewpoint of type 30 PITS telephone users If KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7030 or KX T7130 is used in PITS station programming mode press the STORE button instead of MEMORY button Operation Result Comment Note 1 2 3 ...

Page 1280: ...system programming mode The password characters are not displayed when you entered for security reasons If an incorrect password is entered an alarm tone will sound If the following message appears the system was already accessed by another administration device The following message is displayed PITS PGM No The MEMORY button indicator lights in red The PITS programming password entry screen appea...

Page 1281: ...programming mode Operation Result Comment Note 4 Slide the MEMORY switch at the rear of APITS to SET In the case of DPITS push the PROGRAM button or Lift the handset then replace it again The present time is displayed Feb 16 12 00 AM The MEMORY button indicator turns off SET PROGRAM MEMORY ...

Page 1282: ...ogramming mode Initial display for PITS system programming mode Result from the operation PITS system programming mode Note To end the PITS system programming mode and return to the PITS station programming mode press the END button while Initial display for PITS system programming mode is displayed In the PITS system programming mode you can return to Initial display for PITS system programming m...

Page 1283: ... The MEMORY button indicator lights in red The current date and time appears on the display Example 88 01 01 4 12 00 0 The MEMORY button indicator light goes out Dialed digits appear in dialed order Example When you set 9 00 a m July 6 Friday 1990 90 07 06 5 90 07 06 5 9 00 0 The MEMORY button indicator lights in red Confirmation tone sounds Displayed details and conditions for entry are as follow...

Page 1284: ... Initial display for PITS system programming mode Status 1 by pressing the END button Status 1 Dial the date and time To clear a wrong entry press the END button then dial 0 0 and enter again Result from the operation Press the MEMORY button to store the entry The current date and time appears on the display The MEMORY button indicator light goes out PITS system programming mode Initial display fo...

Page 1285: ...eed dialing code 01 Toll restriction level 9 Feature number for selecting the CO line 555 1212 Telephone number If nothing is stored 100 Not Stored Dialed digits appear on the display Example 100 16 1 Set PITS system programming mode See 12 C 1 01 2 Dial 0 1 program number 3 Dial the appropriate speed dialing code three digits 001 to 200 4 Dial the toll restriction level two digits 00 to 16 Contin...

Page 1286: ...and if necessary trunk group specifying number 1 to 8 6 Dial the telephone number 7 Press the MEMORY button to store the entry To exit from the programming mode See 12 C 1 02 The feature numbers for selecting a CO line are Local CO line Access Trunk Group 01 48 Access Up to 32 digits consisting of the feature number and telephone number can be stored You can enter 0 to 9 Pause Flash hyphen SECRET ...

Page 1287: ...dialing code 200 Press the MEMORY button to store the entry Confirmation tone sounds The MEMORY button indicator lights in red Status 1 Status 2 Result from the operation Note Pressing the END button in any status after Status 1 restores Status 1 Pressing the SELECT button in any status after Status 2 restores Status 2 You can also advance to the next speed dialing code by pressing the NEXT button...

Page 1288: ...e display and requires you to enter the new directory number Example DN 100 DN Newly entered number appears on the display as follows DN 100 DN 2000 The MEMORY button indicator lights in red Confirmation tone sounds Operation Comment Note Result 1 Set PITS system programming mode See 12 C 1 01 2 Dial 0 2 program number 3 Dial the directory number of the extension that you want to change three or f...

Page 1289: ...hest directory number press the NEXT button and then the PREV button The message appears on the display to require you to enter the new directory number Dialed number appears on the display Dial the new directory number three or four digits To correct a wrong entry press the CLEAR button and dial again Press the MEMORY button to store the entry Confirmation tone sounds The MEMORY button indicator ...

Page 1290: ...he display SYS PGM No The MEMORY button indicator lights in red A message appears on the display and requires you to enter the directory number of the extension whose name you want to change CHG Name DN The MEMORY button indicator light goes out Current entry appears Example 100 Smith Dialed name appears on the display 100 Jack The MEMORY button indicator lights in red Confirmation tone sounds Res...

Page 1291: ... O S V Y 6 c f i l o s v y Dial 1 Dial 2 Dial 3 Dial 4 Dial 5 Dial 6 Dial 7 Dial 8 Dial 9 Dial 0 Dial Dial 3 Z B E H K N R U X Example Here is an example of changing a name to Jack at step 4 on the previous page Refer to Combination Table at left Display Resulted Now Jack is entered 0 Dial 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 Dial 5 2 Press the SELECT AUTO ANS MUTE button once 3 Dial 2 4 Press the SELECT AUTO AN...

Page 1292: ...on indicator lights in red Current contents appear on the display Dialed name appears on the display Press the MEMORY button to store the name Status 2 Status 1 Result from the operation Operation chart for changing extension name Note Pressing the END button in any status after Status 1 restores Status 1 Pressing the SELECT button in any status after Status 2 restores Status 2 You can also advanc...

Page 1293: ...ndicator lights in red Current password appears on the display Example System PW 1111 The MEMORY button indicator light goes out Dialed password appears on the display Example System PW 5555 The MEMORY button indicator lights in red Confirmation tone sounds Result Comment Note 6 00 Changing PITS Programming Password The following operation is used to change the PITS programming password which is r...

Page 1294: ...ming mode Press the MEMORY button to store the password Current password appears on the display The MEMORY button indicator light goes out Dialed password appears on the display Confirmation tone sounds The MEMORY button indicator lights in red Note Pressing the END button in PITS system programming mode restores the Initial display for PITS system programming mode Result from the operation PITS s...

Page 1295: ...om the programming mode See 12 C 1 02 The following message appears on the display SYS PGM No The MEMORY button indicator lights in red A message appears on the display and requires you to enter the DISA code number DISA CD No The MEMORY button indicator light goes out Current user code of the selected DISA code number appears on the display Example USR CD 8 1234 8 DISA code number 1234 DISA user ...

Page 1296: ...SA code number Press the PREV button to return to the previous DISA code number The MEMORY button indicator light goes out Operation chart for changing DISA user code Press the MEMORY button to store the code Status 1 Status 2 Result due to the operation The MEMORY button indicator light goes out Current user code appears on the display PITS system programming mode Note Pressing the END button in ...

Page 1297: ...n red Current password appears on the display Example Walk PW 1111 The MEMORY button indicator light goes out Dialed password appears on the display Example Walk PW 5555 The MEMORY button indicator lights in red Confirmation tone sounds 1 Set PITS system programming mode See 12 C 1 01 2 Dial 0 6 program number 3 Dial new password four digits 4 Press the MEMORY button to store the newly dialed pass...

Page 1298: ... error entry press the CLEAR button and dial again To remove the password for Walking COS press the CLEAR button Press the MEMORY button to store the password Note Pressing the END button in PITS system programming mode restores the Initial display for PITS system programming mode Confirmation tone sounds The MEMORY button indicator lights in red Dialed password appears on the display Result from ...

Page 1299: ...00 30000 The MEMORY indicator lights in red Confirmation tone sounds Operation Display Indicator Tone Comment Note AUTO MEMORY 1 Set PITS system programming mode See 12 C 1 01 2 Enter 07 program number 3 Press NEXT 4 Enter an extension directory number DN three or four digits 5 Enter a charge limitation 0 through 99999 6 Press MEMORY to store the entry You can press NEXT to go to the lowest direct...

Page 1300: ...gramming 8 Press END To exit from the programming mode See 12 C 1 02 Example 101 99999 The next extension directory number is displayed EXT No SYS PGM No Initial Display of PITS Station Programming Mode Operation Display Indicator Tone Comment Note Repeat steps 4 through 7 Repeat steps 3 through 7 ...

Page 1301: ... to store the entry 6 To finish the programming press END To exit from the programming mode See 12 C 1 02 SYS PGM No The MEMORY indicator lights in red Charge Password The MEMORY indicator goes out Password 1234 Example Password 3939 The MEMORY indicator lights in red Confirmation tone sounds SYS PGM No Default 1234 To correct the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new value again AUTO MEMORY...

Page 1302: ......

Page 1303: ...Section 13 Station Programming Proprietary Integrated Telephone System PITS ...

Page 1304: ......

Page 1305: ...3 6 00 Call Waiting Tone Selection 13 C 26 7 00 Confirmation of Directory Number Port Number 13 C 29 8 00 PITS Automatic Test 13 C 31 9 00 Charge Management 13 C 38 9 01 Charge Management Outline 13 C 38 9 02 Entering Charge Management Mode 13 C 39 9 03 Exiting Charge Management Mode 13 C 40 9 04 Checking Clearing the Charge Meter Extensions 13 C 41 9 05 Checking Clearing the Charge Meter ATT 13 C...

Page 1306: ......

Page 1307: ... PF and DSS buttons on the DSS console can be done using the associated PITS telephone In the programming procedures described in Section 13 C 2 00 PF Button Assignment and 13 C 3 00 DSS Button Assignment press a PF or DSS button on the DSS console instead of pressing a PF or DSS button on the PITS telephone Refer to Section 4 B 2 00 Assignable Feature Buttons for further information about feature...

Page 1308: ......

Page 1309: ...1 Using the Overlay A programming overlay is packed with the telephone at the factory This overlay should be used at all times while in programming mode since the functions of the telephone keys change while in programming mode as follows The original names are in parentheses Location of Controls with the Overlay In PITS system and PITS station programming modes the functions of the buttons are ch...

Page 1310: ...MUTE SP PHONE REDIAL FLASH HOLD SECRET CLEAR PAUSE STORE AUTO SELECT NEXT END PREV FLASH Overlay sheet For users with PITS Model KX T7130 SECRET PAUSE STORE AUTO SELECT NEXT PREV FLASH END INTERCOM CONF FWD DND MESSAGE ABC 2 JKL 5 TUV 8 OPER0 1 GHI 4 PRS7 DEF 3 MNO 6 WXY 9 TRANSFER PAUSE AUTO DIAL STORE AUTO ANSWER MUTE SP PHONE REDIAL FLASH HOLD SECRET CLEAR PAUSE STORE AUTO SELECT NEXT END PREV ...

Page 1311: ...the KX T7230 and KX T7235 while in programming mode Soft Buttons and SHIFT Button on the Display DPITS Three soft buttons are provided on Digital Proprietary Telephones DPITS The functions of these soft buttons vary as the programming procedures advance from step to step Those functions that are currently assigned to the buttons are shown on the lower line of the display Soft button variations CON...

Page 1312: ...lled the Message Line and the lower one is called the Function Line The Message Line upper shows you what you should do or what you should select It also allows you to confirm what you have just entered The display capacity is 16 digits If your entry exceeds the capacity you can shift the display by pressing or button SYS PGM NO KX T7230 Display Message Line Function Line SYS PRG NO KX T7235 Displ...

Page 1313: ...ibes actual operation 2 Shows the result of the operation 3 Describes comment or note related the operation Note The procedures in this section are described from the viewpoint of type 30 PITS telephone users If KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7030 or KX T7130 is used in PITS station programming mode press the STORE button instead of MEMORY button Operation Result Comment Note 1 2 3 13 C 1 ...

Page 1314: ...sible in this mode and can be changed only by the system programming Example PDN DN 1011 Primary Directory Number Example SDN DN 1012 Secondary Directory Number Example PRV CO T20201 Private CO Example Off Hook Call Announcement Example UCD Log in Example Local Alarm Result Operation Comment Note Continued 1 00 DN Directory Number Button Assignment Assigning various features to the DN buttons of i...

Page 1315: ...ssage appears on the display If the dialed number does not exist as a directory number alarm tone sounds If you want to erase an entry press the CLEAR button and enter the correct number Refer to Section 3 F 10 04 Voice Mail Transfer Key for further information Refer to Section 4 C 4 01 One Touch Dialing for further information Up to 16 digits can be entered 1 The following message appears on the ...

Page 1316: ...re is assignable to only one button among DN buttons and DSS buttons Refer to Section 4 G 2 00 Privacy Release and Section 4 G 3 00 Privacy Attach for further information about Priacy Change feature Refer to Section 4 G 9 00 External Feature Access for further information Refer to Section 4 E 5 01 Call Park System for further information Refer to Section 4 E 5 02 Call Park Station for further info...

Page 1317: ...age appears on the display The following message appears on the display The MEMORY button indicator lights in red The associated DN button indicator light goes out A confirmation tone sounds Initial display for PITS station programming mode is displayed again The PITS station programming mode is ended and returns to the operation mode SET PROGRAM MEMORY Tone Break FWD DND Refer to Section 4 G 12 0...

Page 1318: ...ut PITS PGM No Dial 8 To assign Ringing Transfer feature Dial 7 To assign Call Park Station feature Dial 6 Dial 5 To assign External Feature Access Privacy Change Dial 4 To assign Privacy Change feature Dial 3 To assign One Touch Dialing 123 Dial One touch dial example 123 To assign Call Park System feature VM Transfer Dial 2 To assign Voice Mail Transfer feature Dial 9 To assign Call Splitting fe...

Page 1319: ...END button is pressed while programming the above message appears on the display again If nothing is stored Not Stored appears Stored data as one touch dialing To scroll use the or button P means the PF button of the PITS If the PF button on the DSS console associated with PITS is pressed C appears instead of P PF button number If nothing is entered within one minute after pressing a PF button Ini...

Page 1320: ...lowing message appears on the display M01 P 2 The following message appears on the display Example when entering a telephone number M01 P 9123456 Example when entering a feature number M01 P 01 The following message appears on the display M01 P EXT FEAT The following message appears on the display M01 P PARK SYS The following message appears on the display M01 P PARK ST The following message appea...

Page 1321: ...ok to on hook Result Operation Comment Note The following message appears on the display M01 P Tone Break The following message appears on the display M01 P SNR The MEMORY button indicator lights red A confirmation tone sounds Initial display for PITS station programming mode is displayed again The PITS station programming mode is ended and returns to the operation mode Continued This feature is a...

Page 1322: ...appears on the display PITS PGM No The MEMORY button indicator lights red If a phone number has already been stored in memory the number is displayed If not Not Stored is displayed This status is called Initial display for PITS station programming mode If the programming data of your PITS has already been accessed by another administration device the following message appears on the display Alread...

Page 1323: ... Reset the MEMORY switch to SET With DPITS press the PROGRAM button or changethe handset from off hook to on hook You hear the confirmation tone and the main programming menu is restored The PITS station programming mode is ended and returns to the operation mode MEMORY Continued SET PROGRAM MEMORY ...

Page 1324: ...lowing message appears on the display Already Accessed If the END button is pressed while programming the above message appears on the display again Continued The following message appears on the display PITS PGM No The MEMORY button indicator lights red If a phone number has already been stored in memory the number is displayed If not Not Stored is displayed If a dialing number has already been s...

Page 1325: ...name in memory M N O A6 m n o A6 m n o An m n o Ann You can change between a capital letter and lower case by pressing the shift button The initial programming display is returned PROGRAM Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3 SHIFT PROGRAM Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3 SHIFT PROGRAM Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3 SHIFT PROGRAM Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3 SHIFT PROGRAM Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3 SHIFT PROGRAM Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3 SHIFT PROGRAM So...

Page 1326: ...etters Q Z A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P R S T U V W X Y How to enter characters and symbols Button No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 SPACE Characters and Symbols Small letters q z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p r s t u v w x y ...

Page 1327: ...plit feature M01 P RING TRNS Dial 8 To assign Ringing Transfer feature M01 P PARK ST Dial 7 To assign Call Park Station feature M01 P PARK SYS Dial 6 To assign Call Park System feature M01 P EXT FEAT Dial 5 To assign External Feature Access M01 P 01 Assigning Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb is limited to the PITS type 50 and KX T7050 only M01 P M01 P 924312111 Dial the feature number or Dial or M01...

Page 1328: ...ng mode 1 Set the MEMORY switch at the rear of the PITS to PROGRAM 2 Press a DSS button 3 To change the stored data dial the program number corresponding to the desired feature To assign DSS DN feature 1 Dial 1 This status is called initial display for PITS station programming mode If the programming data of your PITS has already been accessed by another administration device the following message...

Page 1329: ... appears on the display 2 The following message appears on the display Example 1 when entering a telephone number 123456 Example 2 when entering a feature number 01 The following message appears on the display The following message appears on the display The following message appears on the display The following message appears on the display Continued 2 Dial a directory number three or four digit...

Page 1330: ...ght goes out A confirmation tone sounds Initial display for PITS station programming mode is shown on the display The PITS station programming mode is ended and returns to the operation mode Result To assign Ringing Transfer feature dial 8 To assign Call Splitting feature dial 9 To assign Tone Through Break feature dial 4 Press the MEMORY button to store the assignment Exits from the programming m...

Page 1331: ...To assign Call Splitting feature Ringing Transfer Dial 8 To assign Ringing Transfer feature Park Station Dial 7 To assign Call Park Station feature Dial 6 To assign Call Park System feature Dial 5 To assign External Feature Access Dial 4 To assign Privacy Change feature Split Dial 3 To assign One Touch Dialing feature M01 P 123 Dial feature number example 123 Note In any status pressing END key re...

Page 1332: ... display To change the assignment simply dial the appropriate number again To enter into the programming mode 1 Set the MEMORY switch at the rear of the PITS to PROGRAM With DPITS press the PROGRAM button 2 Dial 00 3 To change the preset feature dial the appropriate program number corresponding to the desired feature To set No Line Preference dial 1 The following message appears on the display PIT...

Page 1333: ...ears on the display Pref Out DN xx Example 2 When pressing the PDN 01 button the following message appears on the display Pref Out DN 01 The MEMORY button indicator lights red A confirmation tone sounds Initial display for PITS station programming mode is shown on the display The PITS station programming mode is ended and returns to the operation mode To set Idle Line Preference dial 2 To set Prim...

Page 1334: ...set No Line Preference Dial 2 Pref Out Idle To set Idle Line Preference PITS PGM No The MEMORY button indicator lights in red Note In any status pressing the END key restores STATUS 1 Pref Out DN 01 The assignment can be changed before pressing the MEMORY button To set Prime Line Preference Press the MEMORY button Press PDN SDN PrivateCO SingleCO GRP CO Example Press the PDN 01 button ...

Page 1335: ...mming mode is shown on the display again To change the assignment simply dial the appropriate number again To enter into the programming mode 1 Set the MEMORY switch at the rear of the PITS to PROGRAM With DPITS press the PROGRAM button 2 Dial 01 3 To change the preset feature dial the program number corresponding to the desired feature To set No Line Preference dial 1 The following message appear...

Page 1336: ...mming mode is displayed again on the display The PITS station programming mode is ended and returns to the operation mode To set Ringing Line Preference dial 2 To set Prime Line Preference press one of the following buttons PDN SDN Private CO Single CO Group CO 4 Press the MEMORY button to store the programming Exits from the programming mode 5 Reset the MEMORY switch to SET With DPITS press the P...

Page 1337: ...et No Line Preference Dial 2 Pref In Ring To set Ringing Line Preference PITS PGM No The MEMORY button indicator lights in red Note In any status pressing the END key restores STATUS 1 Pref In DN 01 The assignment can be changed before pressing the MEMORY button To set Prime Line Preference Press the MEMORY button Press PDN SDN PrivateCO SingleCO GRP CO Example Press the PDN 01 button ...

Page 1338: ...ears on the display again If nothing is entered within one minute after dialing 02 Initial display for PITS station programming mode is shown again on the display The following message appears on the display PIT PGM No The MEMORY button indicator lights red The preset tone type appears on the display Example C W Tone 1 The MEMORY button indicator light goes out The following message appears on the...

Page 1339: ...MEMORY switch to SET With DPITS press the PROGRAM button or change the handset from off hook to on hook SET PROGRAM MEMORY The MEMORY button indicator lights red A confirmation tone sounds Initial display for PITS station programming mode is shown on the display The PITS station programming mode is ended and returns to the operation mode ...

Page 1340: ...on the display The MEMORY button indicator light goes out Dial 0 2 Dial 1 C W Tone 1 Dial 2 C W Tone 2 PITS PGM No The MEMORY button indicator lights in red Note In any status pressing the END key restores STATUS 1 To assign Call Waiting Tone 2 To assign Call Waiting Tone 1 Press the MEMORY button ...

Page 1341: ...fter dialing 03 Initial display for PITS station programming mode is shown again on the display physical number displayed on the display by the following operation The following message appears on the display PITS PGM No The MEMORY button indicator lights red The physical number and the directory number appear on the display Example P10101 DN1000 The MEMORY button indicator light goes out PITS sta...

Page 1342: ... physical number DN appears on the display The MEMORY button indicator light goes out Dial 0 3 PITS PGM No STATUS 1 PITS station program ming mode Operation Chart Note In any status pressing the END key restores STATUS 1 ...

Page 1343: ...sage appears on the display PITS PGM No The MEMORY button indicator lights red Test sequence is as follows 1 LED Test 2 Ringer Test 3 LCD Test 8 00 PITS Automatic Test Provides automatic test for normal operation of LCD liquid crystal display LED light emitting diode and ringer tone on the PITS telephone Explanation of the message display applies only to a PITS with the display To enter into the p...

Page 1344: ...ight off means the light on means flashing LED test 2 Testing the DN button indicators and the ICM button indicator for flashing in green 1 Testing the DN button indicators and the ICM button indicator for lighting in green Panasonic LED TEST EASA PHONE Panasonic LED TEST EASA PHONE ICM button DN buttons ICM button DN buttons ...

Page 1345: ... DN buttons With the PITS model KX T30830 the indicators on the DSS buttons also flash in red 4 Testing the DN button indicators and the DSS button indicators for flashing in red LED TEST EASA PHONE Panasonic AUTO MEMORY button AUTO ANS MUTE button SP PHONE button CONF button FWD DND button 5 Testing the indicators of the Message Waiting CONF FWD DND AUTO MEMORY AUTO ANS MUTE SP PHONE buttons for ...

Page 1346: ... the monitor speaker The following message appears on the display RING TEST Initial display for PITS station program mode is displayed again on the display Conclusion of the test Ringer test LCD test EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH ...

Page 1347: ...ting the DN button indicators and the ICM button indicator for flashing in green 1 Testing the DN button indicators and the ICM button indicator for lighting in green Panasonic 7 PRS 4 GHI 1 0 OPER 8 TUV 5 JKL 2 ABC 9 WXY 6 MNO 3 DEF INTERCOM LED TEST Panasonic 7 PRS 4 GHI 1 0 OPER 8 TUV 5 JKL 2 ABC 9 WXY 6 MNO 3 DEF INTERCOM LED TEST DN buttons DN buttons ICM button ICM buttons ...

Page 1348: ... 0 OPER 8 TUV 5 JKL 2 ABC 9 WXY 6 MNO 3 DEF LED TEST DN buttons 5 Testing the indicators of the MESSAGE CONF FWD DND AUTO DIAL STORE AUTO ANSWER MUTE SP PHONE buttons for lighting in red Panasonic 7 PRS 4 GHI 1 0 OPER 8 TUV 5 JKL 2 ABC 9 WXY 6 MNO 3 DEF CONF FWD DND MESSAGE AUTO DIAL STORE AUTO ANSWER MUTE SP PHONE CONF button FWD DND button MESSAGE button AUTO DIAL STORE button AUTO ANSWER MUTE b...

Page 1349: ... the monitor speaker The following message appears on the display RING TEST Ringer test LCD test Conclusion of the test Initial display for PITS station programming mode is shown again on the display EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH ...

Page 1350: ...T 1 2 ATT Console No 2 Meter Check CO Line 3 Meter Check All CO Lines 4 Meter Check Account Code Account Code Location No 5 Sum Clear Ext Clear 6 0 SMDR All CO Lines All Account Codes 1 SMDR All Extensions 2 SMDR Extension 3 SMDR ATT1 2 CO No 7 Charge Rate Setting 8 Account Code Entry Change Deletion END Station Programming Extension No CLEAR CLEAR CLEAR CLEAR CLEAR NEXT ...

Page 1351: ...isplay for PITS station program mode Default 1234 If the password is not correct you hear alatm tone Operation Display Indicator Tone Comment Note SET PROGRAM MEMORY 9 02 Entering Charge Management Mode PITS PGM No The MEMORY indicator lights in red Password Password 1234 Charge Management Initial Display Charge Meter To enter into the programming mode 1 Set the MEMORY switch at the rear of the PI...

Page 1352: ...g mode 1 With APITS reset the MEMORY switch to SET With DPITS press the PROGRAM button or change the handset from off hook to on hook Operation Display Indicator Tone Comment Note SET PROGRAM MEMORY 9 03 Exiting Charge Management Mode ...

Page 1353: ... 100 00005 100 00001 15DM Example 100 00000 The MEMORY indicator lights red EXT No The meter of the next extension directory number is displayed Example 101 00008 SYS PGM No Initial Display of PITS Station Programming Mode 9 04 Checking Clearing the Charge Meter Extensions Used to check and clear the charge meter of each extension DN100 Refer to Section 13 C 9 02 Entering Charge Management Mode Yo...

Page 1354: ...another ATT 6 Press MEMORY to store the data 7 Press NEXT To finish the programming 8 Press END Charge Meter ATT No Example ATT1 00005 Example ATT1 00005 ATT1 00001 15DM Example ATT1 00000 The MEMORY indicator lights red Example ATT2 00020 SYS PGM No Initial Display of PITS Station Programming Mode Refer to Section 13 C 9 02 Entering Charge Management Mode You can press NEXT to go to the lowest di...

Page 1355: ...e Used to check the charge meter of each CO line Refer to Section 13 C 9 02 Entering Charge Management Mode You can press NEXT to go to the lowest CO line physical number The value of rate is valid only the last 7 or 8 figures Refer to Section 11 C 58 02 Charge Rate RAT for further informations Repeat steps 3 and 4 Charge Meter CO No Example 10101 00005 10101 00001 15DM CO No The meter of the next...

Page 1356: ...e and the meter press SELECT To continue the Charge Management 3 Press PREV To finish the operation 4 Press END Refer to Section 13 C 9 02 Entering Charge Management Mode The value of rate is valid only the last 7 or 8 figures Refer to Section 11 C 58 02 Charge Rate RAT for further information Charge Meter Example Sum 00450 Sum 00099 99DM Charge Meter SYS PGM No Initial Display of PITS Station Pro...

Page 1357: ...ghts red Example 001 00000 SYS PGM No Initial Display of PITS Station Programming Mode 9 08 Checking Clearing the Charge Meter Account Code Used to check the charge meter of each account code Refer to Section 13 C 9 02 Entering Charge Management Mode You can press NEXT to enter 001 If the account code is not registered Not Stored is displayed The value of rate is valid only the last 7 or 8 figures...

Page 1358: ...t Sum meter 3 Press CLEAR To go to Ext 4 Press NEXT To reset the meter 5 Press CLEAR 6 Press MEMORY 7 Press END Charge Meter Meter Sum Clear Example 21 Jan 95 14 30 This is the date when you last reset the meter Meter Ext Clear Example 21 Jan 95 14 30 This is the date when you last reset the meter 21 Jan 95 14 30 SYS PGM No Refer to Section 13 C 9 02 Entering Charge Management Mode The meter is re...

Page 1359: ... 2 Enter 1 Each extension 3 3 Enter 2 Enter extension directory number three or four digits ATT Consoles 3 4 Enter 3 4 Press END Charge Meter Print Mode Total CHG Print Ext CHG Print Example 100 CHG Print ATT CHG Print SYS PGM No Refer to Section 13 C 9 02 Entering Charge Management Mode Error Messages When the printer is not ready SMDR Not Ready When the printer is in use SMDR Busy Repeat steps 3...

Page 1360: ...030 031 032 033 45 00000 034 93 00000 035 6792 00000 036 37 00000 Charge Meter Print Out Total all Account Total Charge 00175 95DM CO Line 10101 00044 62 DM 10102 00016 79 DM 10103 00037 03 DM 10104 00007 59 DM 10105 00005 29 DM 10106 00012 42 DM 10107 00020 01 DM 10108 00000 97 DM 10201 00000 00 DM 10202 00012 88 DM 10203 00009 89 DM 10204 00001 84 DM 10205 00002 99 DM 10206 00000 92 DM 10207 000...

Page 1361: ...Ext 306 00007 82 DM Ext 229 00175 95 DM Ext 329 00002 30 DM Ext 230 00001 15 DM Ext 330 00007 82 DM Ext 231 00003 22 DM Ext 331 00010 12 DM Ext 232 00006 21 DM Ext 332 00007 82 DM Charge Meter Print Out All Extensions Ext 201 00765 Ext 301 00010 Ext 202 00005 Ext 302 00034 Ext 203 00014 Ext 303 00044 Ext 204 00027 Ext 304 00034 Ext 205 00765 Ext 305 00010 Ext 206 00005 Ext 306 00034 Ext 229 00765 ...

Page 1362: ...t Extension Ext 234 00175 95 DM Charge Charge Meter Print Out Attendant Console ATT 1 00175 95DM ATT 2 12345 78 DM 4 Attendant Console Meter Charge Meter Print Out Attendant Console ATT 1 00765 ATT 2 12345 Conditions This function is available when the SMDR parameter is Yes on the System Operation 2 3 screen ...

Page 1363: ...g rate up to eight digits including decimal point 4 Press MEMORY to store the entry 5 Press END Charge Meter Example Rate 0 23 Example Rate 1 10 The MEMORY indicator lights in red Confirmation tone sounds SYS PGM No Refer to Section 13 C 9 02 Entering Charge Management Mode Press key to enter a decimal point Press CLEAR to delete the current entry and enter the newone ...

Page 1364: ...00 4 Enter new account code up to 10 digits 5 Press MEMORY to store the entry 6 Press END Charge Meter Account Code Example 001 23456 If not stored 001 Not Stored Example 001 10001 The MEMORY indicator lights in red Confirmation tone sounds SYS PGM No Refer to Section 13 C 9 02 Entering Charge Management Mode You can press NEXT to enter 001 Press CLEAR to delete the current entry and enter the new...

Page 1365: ...he following message appears PITS PGM No The MEMORY button indicator lights red The Current setting appears Example Handset The MEMORY button indicator light goes out The following message appears Handset The following message appears Headset This status is called Initial display for PITS station programming mode If the following message appears on the display the programming data of your PITS has...

Page 1366: ... station programming mode is shown The PITS station programming mode is enabled and you return to the operation mode Result Operation Comment Note 4 Press the MEMORY button to store the entry Exiting from the programming mode 5 Press the PROGRAM button or change the handset from off hook to on hook ...

Page 1367: ...on program ming mode The current data disappears on the display The MEMORY button indicator light goes out Dial 0 5 Dial 1 Handset Dial 2 Headset PITS PGM No The MEMORY button indicator lights red To select headset To select handset Press the MEMORY button ...

Page 1368: ......

Page 1369: ...Section 14 Station Programming Attendant Console ...

Page 1370: ......

Page 1371: ... 03 Command Entry 14 A 3 3 04 Control Key Combinations 14 A 4 3 05 Special Keys 14 A 4 4 00 Entering Local Diagnosis Mode 14 A 5 B Local Diagnosis Mode 14 B 1 1 00 Summary 14 B 1 2 00 Diagnosis of Display 14 B 2 3 00 Diagnosis of LEDs 14 B 5 4 00 Diagnosis of Operation Keyboard 14 B 6 5 00 Diagnosis of Full Keyboard 14 B 8 6 00 REP Command 14 B 10 7 00 All Diagnosis 14 B 11 8 00 HELP Command 14 B ...

Page 1372: ......

Page 1373: ... Local Mode is used to test the console by itself Attendant Console becomes off line and Local Mode when the Local Switch on the right side of the Console is turned on The operator at Attendant Console can utilize the Local Diagnosis mode on local mode 14 A 1 ...

Page 1374: ...de Diagnosis Command DIG Local Diagnosis mode DSP Diagnosis of display LED Diagnosis of LED indicators OPR Diagnosis of keys on function keyboard KEY Diagnosis of keys on full keyboard REP IC diagnosis report ALL Diagnosis of all the above items HELP Display of HELP screen for DIG END Ending Local Diagnosis mode HELP Help mode ...

Page 1375: ... the screen then call processing mode of attendant console is obtained automatically 3 03 Command Entry The Local Mode comands can be entered either by simply pressing the associated function key or entering each command character at Full keyboard To execute a command line press the RETURN key after entering a command 14 A 3 Local mode for attendant console DIG enter the diagnostic mode of attenda...

Page 1376: ...as already executed by pressing the RETURN key in entered order When the newest command is recalled recalls again from the oldest command 3 04 Control Key Combinations You can perform specific operations by using the CTRL key in combination with certain other keys as follows To use a CTRL key combination hold down the CTRL key and press the other key CTRL C terminates the execution of entered comm...

Page 1377: ...agnosis mode press the F3 key or enter the DIG command and press the RETURN key at Local Mode Main Menu screen F3 D I G Return or Local Diagnosis mode DIG See page 14 B 1 F4 H E L or P Return Displays HELP screen to enter individual mode Local Mode Main Menu Screen ...

Page 1378: ......

Page 1379: ... the command from the full keyboard 1 DSP CR 2 LED CR 3 OPR CR 4 KEY CR 5 REP CR 6 ALL CR 7 HELP CR 8 END CR DIG DIG Lets you diagnose the display Lets you diagnose LEDs on the operation keyboard Lets you diagnose the operation keyboard Lets you diagnose the full keyboard Lets you display the IC diagnosis report Lets you diagnose all the items above sequentially Lets you display the HELP screen Le...

Page 1380: ...bsequent procedures for diagnosis of display 1 When the following outer frame appears confirm the distortion of vertical and horizontal lines after two seconds 2 The outer frame disappears and nothing appears for approximately two seconds 3 The outer frame appears in reverse video after two seconds after two seconds Continued ...

Page 1381: ...econds 5 Letters and numbers appear ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZAB ABCD ABCD abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzabc abcd abcd 01234567890123456789012345 01234 01234 6 The character generator codes and the attributes appear Low 0123 F 0 NU 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 p Low 0123 F 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Continued NORMAL BLINK REVERSE UNDERLINE 25 lines ...

Page 1382: ...SP C R 2 LED C R 3 OPR C R 4 KEY C R 5 REP C R 6 ALL C R 7 HELP C R 8 END C R Note Pressing the F8 key or CRTL C key during the diagnosis stops the diagnosis and displays Abort Displayed Message Meaning Displayed Message Error Illegal main command Error Illegal sub command There is an error in the main command There is an error in the sub command ...

Page 1383: ...D Test start LOOP1 SRC LED is lighting Displays the LED which is lit Note Pressing the F8 key or CTRL C key during the diagnosis stops the diagnosis and displays Abort 2 After the diagnosis of LED ends Complete appears and waits for command entry 1 DSP CR 2 LED CR 3 OPR CR 4 KEY CR 8 END CR 7 HELP CR 6 ALL CR 5 REP C R DIG LED LED Test start LOOP6 DES LED is lighting Displays the LED which is lit ...

Page 1384: ...yboard is displayed in reverse video on the screen 1 2 3 4 5 6 OPR TEST START 01 02 03 1 2 3 ALM NIG 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 CANCEL RELEASE L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 HLD MSG SPL PAG ANSWER F2 F3 F4 F1 F6 F7 F8 F5 Note Pressing the F8 key or the CTRL C key during the diagnosis stops diagnosis and displays Abort Displaying all keys in reverse video means the conclusion of diagnosis of opera...

Page 1385: ...F ON OFF ON Complete DIG 7 6 5 Displayed Message Meaning Displayed Message Error Illegal main command Error Illegal sub command There is an error in the main command There is an error in the sub command 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 1 2 3 ALM NIG 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 CANCEL RELEASE L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 HLD MSG SPL PAG ANSWER F2 F3 F4 F1 F6 F7 F8 F5 L6 ...

Page 1386: ...ssed on the full keyboard is displayed in reverse video on the screen 1 2 3 4 5 KEY TEST START 1 Q 2 W A Z 3 E S X 4 R D C 5 T F V 6 Y G B 7 U H N 8 I J M 9 O K 0 P L RET BS LF DL BR SHIFT EC TAB SHIFT CT FN EM SPACE Note Pressing the F8 key or CTRL C key during the diagnosis stops the diagnosis and displays Abort Displaying all keys in reverse video means the conclusion of diagnosis of full keybo...

Page 1387: ...ry of the next command 7 HELP C R 6 ALL C R 5 REP C R Displayed Message Meaning Displayed Message Error Illegal main command Error Illegal sub command There is an error in the main command There is an error in the sub command 1 Q 2 W A Z 3 E S X 4 R D C 5 T F V 6 Y G B 7 U H N 8 I J M 9 O K 0 P L RET BS LF DL BR SHIFT EC TAB SHIFT CT FN EM SPACE ...

Page 1388: ...ayed Message Meaning Displayed Message Error Illegal main command Error Illegal sub command There is an error in the main command There is an error in the sub command DIG REP Report the result of IC diagnostic 1 ROM IC 3 OK 2 RAM RAM 1 IC 4 OK RAM 2 IC 5 OK VRAM IC 56 OK 3 I O 8259A IC 9 OK 8253A IC 9 OK 8255A IC 9 OK 89322 IC 10 OK 8255 IC 43 OK 8952 IC 11 NG ...

Page 1389: ...conclusion of all diagnosis Complete appears and waits for the entry of the next command Note Pressing the F8 key or the CTRL C key stops the current diagnosis with displaying Abort and advances to the next diagnosis Displayed Message Meaning Displayed Message Error Illegal main command Error Illegal sub command There is an error in the main command There is an error in the sub command ...

Page 1390: ...command DSP CR To diagnose display LED CR To diagnose LED OPR CR To diagnose operation keyboard KEY CR To diagnose full keyboard REP CR To diagnose the diagnostic result of memory and I O ALL CR To diagnose all items HELP CR To diagnose the command information END CR To quite the diagnostic mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DSP CR LED CR OPR CR KEY CR REP CR ALL CR HELP CR END CR DIG 14 B 12 Displayed Message ...

Page 1391: ...ng END command concludes Local Diagnosis mode and displays the prompt which indicates that you can enter another command Displayed Message DIG END 1 2 3 DIG C R 4 HELP C r 5 6 7 8 Meaning Displayed Message Error Illegal main command Error Illegal sub command There is an error in the main command There is an error in the sub command ...

Page 1392: ......

Page 1393: ...the diagnostic mode DIG help for using command HELP 14 C 1 Displayed Message Displayed Message Error Illegal main command Error Illegal sub command Meaning There is an error in the main command There is an error in the sub command Conditions After displaying the HELP screen prompt is displayed on the screen and you can enter the desired mode by entering the DIG command Local Diagnosis ...

Page 1394: ......

Page 1395: ...Section 15 Maintenance VT220 and Compatibles ...

Page 1396: ......

Page 1397: ...s 15 C 5 2 05 Changes of the Slot Status 15 C 6 D Self Test System Detected Troubles 15 D 1 1 00 Error Record Display 15 D 1 1 01 Start Time of Self Test 15 D 1 1 02 Error Log 15 D 1 1 03 Printing Out the Automatic Failure Reporting 15 D 1 1 04 Local Alarm 15 D 2 1 05 Remote Alarm 15 D 3 2 00 Clearing System Detected Troubles 15 D 4 2 01 Introduction 15 D 4 2 02 Consulting the Error Log 15 D 4 2 0...

Page 1398: ... 25 OGM lost DISA 15 E 28 3 26 OPX power down 15 E 29 3 27 DTMF generator failure COT card 15 E 30 3 28 DTMF receiver failure SLC HLC OPX card 15 E 31 3 29 Tone detector failure DISA AGC card 15 E 32 3 30 HDLC failure ATLC card 15 E 33 3 31 Port link failure ATT DPH 15 E 34 3 32 TSW additional OHCA failure 15 E 35 3 33 OHCA not installed PLC HLC 15 E 36 3 34 TSW DTMF G R failure 15 E 37 3 35 Digit...

Page 1399: ...screen 15 G 1 2 00 Error Log screen 15 G 2 3 00 Device Status screen 15 G 3 3 01 System Status Initial screen 15 G 3 3 02 Card Status screen 15 G 4 3 03 Port Status Basic Shelf screen 15 G 5 3 04 Port Status Expansion Shelf 1 screen 15 G 6 3 05 Port Status Expansion Shelf 2 screen 15 G 7 3 06 Conference Trunk Status screen 15 G 8 4 00 Traffic Submenu screen 15 G 9 4 01 Station Initial screen 15 G ...

Page 1400: ......

Page 1401: ...tenance to be reduced to simple procedures You can administer the system programming and maintenance of the system using a VT220 VT100 Compatibles Dumb terminals or an Attendant Console Only one terminal can be performing system administration at any one time Changing the System Administration Device is done by programming To execute the change you must exit system administration mode and then ree...

Page 1402: ......

Page 1403: ...e location The followings are the functions available to each password level The 1st Level To access to all levels The 2nd Level To set system level parameters The 3rd Level To set Port level parameters The 4th Level To read parameters only When you log in to the system using the first level password you can execute all functions but are increasingly restricted when entering levels 2 3 and 4 Those...

Page 1404: ...fic measurements 4 Print Out Allows you to print out the system programming parameters and traffic information 5 Change Password Allows you to change the current password 6 Change Date Time Allows you to change the date and time 7 Backup Utility Allows you to save and load the system programming data and the Attendant Console database 8 Restart Allows you to reset the system 9 Exit Allows you to e...

Page 1405: ...Remote Directory Number using Direct Inward System Access DISA feature For further information about Remote Directory Number refer to Section 10 D 1 02 Operation 2 3 And for further information about DISA feature refer to Section 3 D 2 02 Direct Inward System Access DISA Program DID feature so that the incoming telephone number is converted to the Remote Directory Number For further information ab...

Page 1406: ......

Page 1407: ... Service REMOVE Removes the programmed parameters of target device when removing a device EXIT Exits the general command mode and displays the current command function screen INDEX Lets you enter a specific programming screen COPY Lets you copy programming parameters READ Lets you read parameters from any progrmming screen HRD CPY Lets you print out the displayed programming parameters AUTOCNF Let...

Page 1408: ...ervice No xxxxxx 1 2 3 Device Shelf Card Port Station ATT DTMF CNF Input Value 1 to 3 physical number 101 to 314 physical number 10101 to 31416 physical number DNxxxx xxxx extension number three or four digits or Physical number five digits A1 or A2 or Physical number five digits Rxxxy xxx Card number y 1 or 2 CFBxx or CFOyy xx 01 to 08 yy 01 to 64 Refer to Section 15 F Functional Test by Entering...

Page 1409: ...mber of the desired device Four input values see below Refer to Section 15 F Functional Test by Entering Commands for details about the test command When you change the status of an upper device shelf card the status of lower devices port station changes as follows Upper device INS OUS Lower device INS OUS Fault Fault Normal operation The following message appears on the screen OK Operation failed...

Page 1410: ...port is not programmed even though the card may be physically installed Pre Installed Programming data for the slot upper device of port is entered but programming data for the port is not entered Out of Service OUS Programming data for the target device is entered but the target device is not assigned to the system In Service INS The target device is operating normally Fault FLT Defective device ...

Page 1411: ...OUS INS Fault defective device Port OUS INS Fault defective device Resource OUS INS Fault defective device No changes in other status 3 INS Fault Expansion Shelf INS Fault Slot INS Fault Port INS Fault Resource INS Fault No changes in other status 4 Automatic recovery Fault INS Device in Fault status becomes in good status without any special care Expansion Shelf Fault INS Slot Fault INS Port Faul...

Page 1412: ...d DPH Pre installed DISA OUS AGC OUS RMT OUS Resource DTMF receiver OUS When you change the status of target slot the status of devices port resource in the slot changes as follows 1 INS OUS Slot INS OUS Port INS OUS Resource INS OUS No changes in other status FIFO communication is terminated 2 OUS INS Slot OUS INS Port OUS INS Fault defective device Resource OUS INS Fault defective device No chan...

Page 1413: ... 15 major or minor error records are stored in this error log The error tables are organized by time of occurence The newest error record appears on the bottom of the screen If more than 15 errors have occured in that time error records already stored in the error log will be overwritten starting with the first Error Log 2 2 Light Alarm Up to 15 light error records can be stored in this error log ...

Page 1414: ...iple troubles occur at a time only the most serious trouble appears on the screen of attendant console or display of PITS if provided System Programming Reference VT Dumb Extension Station 2 4 or 3 4 DN key Type 10 G 1 02 7 The alarm message on the display of PITS if provided disappears if making a call from that telephone an incoming call arrives at that telephone held call reminder occurs The al...

Page 1415: ...inistration device in Destination Address Installing the RMT card is required for this feature Main Unit Modem Data Terminal Central Office System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Operation 2 3 Remote Alarm Destination Address 11 C 4 00 10 D 1 02 Conditions Setting System Operation 2 3 Remote Alarm to Yes is not available if the RMT card is not installed All system detected error messages are ...

Page 1416: ...then selecting 1 Error Log Refer to Section 15 G 2 00 Error Log Screen The error log is comprised of the following two error tables Error Log 1 2 Major and Minor Alarms Error Log 2 2 Light Alarms Each error record is reported as one line on the screen Error Log 1 2 and Error Log 2 2 use the same format and exist independently These error records provide the location of the error the date and time ...

Page 1417: ...X power down OPX power down bell DTMF generator failure DTMF receiver failure Tone detector failure HDLC failure Port link failure ATT DPH OHCA SW failure OHCA not installed TSW DTMF G R failure ERROR LOG AUTO REPORT ERRORS LOCAL ALARM REMOTE ALARM OTHERS LED ALARM PFT soft LED PFT hard LED PFT hard LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED X X X MJ X X X X X X X X X X X X X ...

Page 1418: ......

Page 1419: ...sonnel in efficient and systematic testing and fault location The system troubleshooting flow charts provides service personnel with a step by step sequence to use for system evaluation Isolated steps in a flow chart should never be used out of context since any step assumes that proper results were obtained on all previous tests ...

Page 1420: ...xx 0700 0C00 0300 0600 0900 D000 FFFF 10xx 21xx 11xx 12xx 14xx 13xx 0410 0500 0510 0B00 2 00 Troubleshooting via the LED Indicators When the system detects a problem the alarm LED indicator located on the top shelf will turn red Refer to the figure below If the detected trouble is generated by a card the alarm LED indicator on the card will light up Refer to the table below When the trouble is cle...

Page 1421: ...ible to read out the Error Log records Check the status of the followings CPU RAM TSW OHCA SW CONF SW LPR SMDR Is Error Log record printed out Is the Local Alarm reported Is the Remote Alarm reported Infer the defective device through the User s report or the indication of the LED on the card Repair or replace the probable defective device Consult the nearest Service Center End ...

Page 1422: ...one detector failure HDLC failure Port link failure OHCA SW failure ADD CONF SW failure OHCA not installed TSW DTMF G R failure 3 00 Troubleshooting via Error Log Records 3 01 Error Log Record List Background Diagnostic Errors ERR CODE ATT PITS LOCAL ALARM MESSAGE AUTOMATIC FAILURE REPORT SMDR MESSAGE COMMENTS WDT overflow soft timer overflow DC power down AC power down DC power down AC power down...

Page 1423: ...t activated and the system will be shut down Press the RESET button to restart the procedure It is recommended to have a current copy of the program on disk or tape to facilitate accurate and rapid recovery Error Code Possible cause of the malfunction Countermeasures Note Yes No change in condition No change in condition No change in condition No change in condition Does the trouble occur frequent...

Page 1424: ...n No Yes If the TSW clock malfunction occurs 1 The attendant console does not function Communication to the LPR becomes impossible 2 Calling becomes impossible 3 Power Failure Transfer will be activated After confirming the TSW card connection press the RESET button Is the trouble registered in the Error Log Is an Extension CO call possible Replace the TSW card Replace the Shelf End ...

Page 1425: ...lf or the trouble with the Power Supply System Backboard CPU card of the Shelf No Yes No OK OK No change in condition No change in condition No Yes It is recommended to have a current copy of the program on disk or tape to facilitate accurate and rapid recovery Did the above item 1 2 or 3 occur at the recorded time of the Error Log Does the trouble occur frequently Replace the Power Supply Unit Re...

Page 1426: ...ble to store the system programming data on a floppy disk or tape to facilitate accurate and rapid recovery considering the limited running time about 3 years of the backup battery in case the Power Failure continues for a long time No Yes No OK OK No change in condition No change in condition No Yes Did the above item 1 or 2 occur at the recorded time of the Error Log Does the troubles occur freq...

Page 1427: ...ossible cause of the malfunction Countermeasures Note No Yes Yes No OK Yes OK No change in condition No change in condition No It is recommended to have a current copy of the program on disk or tape to facilitate accurate and rapid recovery Did the above item 1 occur at the recorded time of the Error Log Is a new error recorded in the Error Log when the RESET button is pressed Does the trouble occ...

Page 1428: ...stem Backboard CPU card of the Shelf It is recommended to have a current copy of the program on disk or tape to facilitate accurate and rapid recovery Did the above item 1 occur at the recorded time of the Error Log Is there a new error message in the Error Log when the RESET button is pressed Does the trouble occur frequently Replace the Power Supply Unit Replace the CPU card Replace the Shelf En...

Page 1429: ...rd 0600 1 Defective progress tone IC on the TSW card 2 Defective Tone Detector on the TSW card 1 Unless the Call Progress Tone failure is cleared the following item is not executed Tone Detector for the DISA AGC card 1 The Reorder tone Ringback tone Confirmation tone 1 2 3 4 and Held Call Reminder tones Refer to Section 3 B 16 00 Tone and Ringing Patterns for these tone patterns and frequency 2 Co...

Page 1430: ...e of the malfunction Countermeasures Note None Yes End No It is recommended to have a current copy of the program on disk or tape to facilitate accurate and rapid recovery Yes Confirm the time displayed on the PITS ATT Is the displayed time correct Is the Real Time Clock IC counting up Set the time from the ATT PITS maintenance terminal etc Is the Real Time Clock IC set cor rectly and counting up ...

Page 1431: ...erence trunks 1 to 8 1 to 8 for individual basic conference trunk 1 to 8 1 Basic conference trunk on TSW card failure No Pass Refer to Section 15 F 4 03 Port Test procedure Enter INS command for the port from the maintenance terminal Enter port test command to check the faulty trunk from the mainte nance terminal Replace the TSW card End ...

Page 1432: ...n the TSW card is defective 2 Malfunction of the TSW card Faulty Pass Enter INS command from the maintenance terminal Error Code Possible cause of the malfunction Countermeasures Note INS Enter test command to check the faulty trunk from the maintenance terminal Replace the optional TSW Conference Expansion Card After turning the power switch on check the optional conference trunk status Replace t...

Page 1433: ...ace the CPU card Enter the system data End 3 12 System memory error Major 0Axx xx 01 RAM IC 1 08 RAM IC 8 1 RAM IC of the CPU card failure Including Input Output bus It is recommended to have a current copy of the program on disk or tape to facilitate accurate and rapid recovery ...

Page 1434: ...the malfunction Countermeasures Note 3 13 System memory error Minor 0Axx xx 01 RAM IC 1 08 RAM IC 8 1 Intermittent defect of RAM IC on the CPU card Including Input Output bus 2 Introduced noise None Reset the CPU Enter the system data End ...

Page 1435: ...s not connected 2 RS 232C cable is defective 3 Printer is turned off including out of paper It is recommended to have a current copy of the program on disk or tape to facilitate accurate and rapid recovery Do you use SMDR Yes Check above item 1 2 3 No Problem Replace the CPU card End NG Assign SMDR to No in the system programming No ...

Page 1436: ...d After replacing lithium battery turn on the POWER switch Is there a new related error mes sage in the Error Log Replace the CPU card Enter the system data End 3 15 CPU RAM backup battery down Yes No 1 1 Consult the nearest service center 2 It is recommended to have a current copy of the program on disk or tape to facilitate accurate and rapid recovery 2 ...

Page 1437: ...urate and rapid recovery 3 16 Card link failure LPR 01 to 12 Basic Shelf 13 to 26 Expansion Shelf 1 27 to 40 Expansion Shelf 2 Enter INS command from the maintenance terminal OK OK OK OK Faulty Faulty Faulty Faulty Check the status of the associated card Enter card test command from the maintenance terminal Replace the faulty LPR card Enter card test command from the maintenance terminal Replace t...

Page 1438: ...15 E 20 Replace the ROM of faulty LPR card End Error Code Possible cause of the malfunction Countermeasures Note 3 17 LPR ROM checksum error 11xx xx 01 to 40 Slot number 1 LPR ROM checksum error None ...

Page 1439: ...15 E 21 Error Code Possible cause of the malfunction Countermeasures Note 3 18 LPR RAM failure 12xx xx 01 to 40 Slot number 1 LPR RAM failure Replace the faulty LPR card End None ...

Page 1440: ...ror Code Possible cause of the malfunction Countermeasures Note After confirming the TSW card connection press the RESET button Is there a new related message in the Error Log After replacing CPU card turn on the POWER switch Replace the Shelf End After confirming the TSW card connection enter the card INS command from the maintenance terminal After replacing the LPR card enter the card INS comman...

Page 1441: ...15 E 23 3 20 Modem failure RMT card Error Code Possible cause of the malfunction Countermeasures Note 14xx xx 01 to 40 Slot number 1 Modem failure None Replace the card End ...

Page 1442: ...rmeasures Note 3 21 LPR memory checksum error 20xx xx 01 to 40 Slot number 1 Defective LPR RAM INS Faulty None INS Faulty Check the status of the related card Enter INS command from the maintenance terminal Check the status of the card Replace the LPR card End ...

Page 1443: ...asures Note 3 22 Card type error LPR 21xx xx 01 to 40 Slot number 1 Assigned card type doesn t correspond to the installed card type None Change the card assignment or replace the installed card with correct one Enter INS command from the maintenance terminal End ...

Page 1444: ...INS None Faulty Faulty End Error Code Possible cause of the malfunction Countermeasures Note Check the status of the related card Enter INS command from the maintenance terminal Check the status of the card Replace the LPR card Enter INS command from the maintenance terminal ...

Page 1445: ...ible to play the OGM through the telephone of the operator 1 After entering OUS command enter the card test command from the maintenance terminal Replace the DISA card Fault Error Code Possible cause of the malfunction Countermeasures Note Enter the card INS command from the maintenance terminal End No Pass Yes None ...

Page 1446: ... playback through the phone of Operator 1 press the RESET button Is there a new related error message in the Error Log Replace the DISA card 51xx xx 01 to 40 Slot number 1 Power failure or power off for long duration 6 7 days 2 Defective backup battery for DISA card 3 OGM was not recorded after the installation End No None Yes ...

Page 1447: ...ode Possible cause of the malfunction Countermeasures Note No change in condition INS status Check the port status of the related OPX card Check external OPX Power Unit Power Power cable Connector etc Check the port status of the related OPX card Replace the OPX card Power on the external OPX Power Unit and then enter INS command from the maintenance terminal End ...

Page 1448: ...ransmission path is defective 3 27 DTMF generator failure COT card Error Code Possible cause of the malfunction Countermeasures Note Set the related port to OUS Set the smallest physical extension number SLC HLC port to OUS enter port test command for 2 ports COT SLC Set the related port to INS Confirm that a CO outgoing call through the faulty port is possible from a PITS telephone Replace the CO...

Page 1449: ...ble cause of the malfunction Countermeasures Note Set working receiver to OUS Is the DTMF dialing 0 9 from the extension SLT in the faulty card acceptable Set faulty receiver to OUS another receiver to INS perform port test for the port in the faulty card and the port 1 in the smallest physical numbered COT card Perform the same test on other COT card Replace the TSW card and perform the same test...

Page 1450: ...e the LPR card End Error Code Possible cause of the malfunction Countermeasures Note 3 29 Tone detector failure DISA AGC card A yxx xx 01 to 40 Slot number y 1 to 4 Port number 1 Tone detector failure 2 Defective tone receiving path from the faulty port Faulty Pass None ...

Page 1451: ... malfunction Countermeasures Note 3 30 HDLC failure ATLC card None Pass Set the faulty port to OUS then enter the port test command Replace the faulty ATLC card End Faulty B yxx xx 01 to 40 Slot number y 1 to 2 Port number 1 Defective HDLC IC ...

Page 1452: ...n set to INS and check the status of the faulty port Replace the LPR card End 3 31 Port link failure ATT DPH C yxx xx 01 to 40 Slot number y 1 to 4 Port number 1 Communication disconnection due to unplugged terminal etc INS Faulty Not unplugged OK NG Error Code Possible cause of the malfunction Countermeasures Note Faulty None INS AC power cord was unplugged ...

Page 1453: ... 32 TSW additional OHCA failure D 000 1 TSW additional OHCA is assigned to Yes in the System Assignment but TSW additional OHCA card is not installed None Error Code Possible cause of the malfunction Countermeasures Note Yes Yes No No Install the TSW additional card Change the assignment ...

Page 1454: ...D yxx xx 01 to 40 Slot number y 1 to 8 Port number 1 In spite of assigning OHCA to Yes in the station programming OHCA circuit card KX T96136 is not installed Change the assignment No Yes None Do you use OHCA Is the OHCA circuit installed in the faulty port Replace the LPR card End Install the OHCA card No ...

Page 1455: ...15 E 37 FFFF 1 DTMF Generator or Receiver for test is defective Error Code Possible cause of the malfunction Countermeasures Note 3 34 TSW DTMF G R failure Replace the TSW card End None ...

Page 1456: ...al clock Confirm that the setting of Frame Sequence and Line Coding are matched with that of the leased lines If not change the setting of your KX TD500 and CUS Then check the clock mode Check the cabling between T 1 E 1 and CSU and CSU and NIU If not properly cabled change and cabling Execute Loopback Test Internal Replace the T 1 E 1 card with a new one Execute Loopback Test External between KX ...

Page 1457: ... signal reception None 71xx xx 01 to 40 Slot number T 1 E 1 card physical number xx received the RAI Remote Alarn indication signal sent from the Central Office Ask the T 1 E 1 carrier to check the line conditions Or check the equipment in other switching system which your T 1 E 1 lines are connected with ...

Page 1458: ...l clock Confirm that the setting of Frame Sequence and Line Cording are matched with that of the leased lines If not change the setting of your KX TD500 and CUS Then check the clock mode Check the cabling between T 1 E 1 and CSU and CSU and NIU If not properly cabled change and cabling Execute Loopback Test Internal Replace the T 1 E 1 card with a new one Execute Loopback Test External between KX ...

Page 1459: ...nternal clock Confirm that the setting of Frame Sequence and Line Cording are matched with that of the leased lines If not change the setting of your KX TD500 and CUS Then check the clock mode Check the cabling between T 1 E 1 and CSU and CSU and NIU If not properly cabled change and cabling Execute Loopback Test Internal Replace the T 1 E 1 card with a new one Execute Loopback Test External betwe...

Page 1460: ... the User Reports Replace the probable defective device Enter the system data End 4 00 Troubleshooting via User Reported Troubles If a problem is not detected by the system a report from the user is very useful to determine the trouble The basic procedure to determine the cause of the trouble according to a report from the user is shown in the following flow chart Fault Yes Not fault No Detect fai...

Page 1461: ...l test must be done during on line communication mode both at on site and from a remote location For remote access a data terminal and modem are required at a remote location and you must install the RMT card in the system and assign Remote Directory Number to the system in system programming operation Remote Directory Number Refer to Section 15 B 2 00 System Administration from a Remote Location ...

Page 1462: ...u appears on the screen Description 1 Card Test Verifies the card status 2 Port Test Verifies the port status 3 PITS and ATT Test Verifies the PITS and ATT Attendant Console status 1 Card Test 2 Post Test 3 PITS and ATT Test 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COMMON HRD CPY Test Main Menu ONL TST LIN DIR 15 F 2 ...

Page 1463: ...Card to be verified SLC PLC HLC MSLC DLC DHLC ESLC LCOT GCOT RCOT PCOT DID DID MFC DID 2W E M T 1 E 1 ATLC AGC OPX DISA RMT DPH Item Link Card type ROM RAM Link Card type ROM RAM Power Supply Link Card type ROM RAM OGM Rec Play Link Card type ROM RAM Modem Card Type Remarks Card to be verified should be OUS or FAULT 15 F 3 ...

Page 1464: ...L TST LIN DIR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COMMON HRD CPY Basic Shelf 01 PLC 02 PLC 03 PLC 04 PLC 05 PLC 06 PLC 07 PLC 08 PLC 09 PLC 10 PLC 11 PLC 12 PLC 01 PLC 02 PLC 03 PLC 04 PLC 05 PLC 06 PLC 07 PLC 08 PLC 09 PLC 10 PLC 11 PLC 12 LCOT 13 LCOT 14 01 LCOT 02 LCOT 03 LCOT 04 LCOT 05 LCOT 06 LCOT 07 LCOT 08 LCOT 09 LCOT 10 ATLC 11 DPH 12 RMT 13 14 Expansion Shelf 1 Expansion Shelf 2 Tested at 12 05 AM JUL 09 9...

Page 1465: ...elves Note can be used as a wild card character Example Executing card No 208 test Note When you test the DISA card the following message appears on the screen 105 OGM Test Y N C When you select Y the previously recorded OGM message is erased When you finish the card test go to the Test Main Menu by pressing the PF2 key 208 Executing COMMON 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 15 F 5 ...

Page 1466: ...6 LCOT 07 LCOT 08 LCOT 09 LCOT 10 LCOT 11 LCOT 12 LCOT 13 ATLC 14 DPH Expansion Shelf 1 Expansion Shelf 2 P 1 5 5 2 3 P 2 P P P P Tested at 12 05 AM JUL 09 96 P Pass 1 F Fault 107 Failed Error Code 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G P Description A card is not installed in the specified slot Card link error Assigned card type doesn t correspond to the installed card type Card ROM error Card RAM error...

Page 1467: ...OHCA Detect HDLC HDLC Speech Path DTMF Receiver Tone Detector Speech Path Repeater Tone Detector Port to be tested should be OUS or FAULT Card Functions Remarks LCOT GCOT RCOT PCOT SLC HLC MSLC OPX DHLC ESLC Speech Path Loop Current Bell Detect DTMF Dial DTMF Generator Pulse Dial Speech Path Bell DTMF Detector DTMF Receiver Pulse Detect 2 ports to be tested should be OUS or FAULT SLC HLC OPX MSLC ...

Page 1468: ...is not assigned or the card type is not LCOT GCOT RCOT PCOT SLC PLC HLC DLC DHLC ESLC OPX DISA AGC or ATLC Tested at 12 05 AM JUL 09 96 P Pass 1 F Fault 4 02 Port Test Initial screen 1 3 3 3 Slot 1 2 P 3 o 4 r 5 t 6 7 8 Slot 09 10 P 11 o 12 r 13 t 14 15 16 000000000111 123456789012 000000000111 123456789012 Basic Shelf ...

Page 1469: ... DHLC ESLC port and CO trunk port LCOT GCOT RCOT PCOT in pairs Extension port No CO trunk port No Example 10101 20101 DN4000 20102 c To verify the status of the speech path of the specified conference trunk enter the conference trunk No as follows Before testing change the status of target conference trunk to Out of Service by entering OUS command Refer to Section 15 G 3 06 Conference Trunk Status...

Page 1470: ...eceivers SLC HLC MSLC DHLC ESLC and OPX card contains DTMF receivers respectively For further information about OUS command refer to Section 15 C 1 02 OUS command This port test is available only for ports on the following cards LCOT GCOT RCOT PCOT SLC MSLC DLC DHLC ESLC PLC HLC DISA AGC OPX and ATLC card When you test the SLC HLC MSLC OPX DLC DHLC ESLC LCOT GCOT PCOT and RCOT cards change the sta...

Page 1471: ...5 KX T7130 and All types of DPITS Link DTMF generator ROM RAM 5 00 Testing PITS and ATT 5 01 Functions to be Verified This test verifies the status of a PITS or an Attendant Console ATT for the functions listed below Card to be verified Function Remarks Card to be tested should be OUS or FAULT PLC HLC DLC DHLC ATLC Note You cannot test the ATT port which is used as the maintenance device ...

Page 1472: ... ports are assigned to a PITS or an ATT Attendant Console 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 PITS and ATT Test ONL TST LIN DIR Tested at 12 05 AM JUL 09 96 P Pass 1 F Fault Slot 1 2 P 3 o 4 r 5 t 6 7 8 Slot 09 10 P 11 o 12 r 13 t 14 15 16 000000000111 123456789012 000000000111 123456789012 Basic Shelf ...

Page 1473: ...number three or four digits Example DN 4000 Executing DN4000 Port Test b Aa Attendant console number 1 2 or PITS and ATT test can be done by entering physical port number of PITS or ATT c x y y zz Port number 01 to 16 or Card number 01 to 14 or Shelf number 1 Basic 2 Expansion 1 3 Expansion 2 2 3 4 DN4000 Executing 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 ...

Page 1474: ...PB Generator failure ATT ROM failure ATT RAM failure No errors PITS and ATT Test Error Code List 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 PITS and ATT Test ONL TST LIN DIR Tested at 12 05 AM JUL 09 96 P Pass 1 F Fault Slot 1 2 P 3 o 4 r 5 t 6 7 8 Slot 09 10 P 11 o 12 r 13 t 14 15 16 000000000111 123456789012 2 P P P P P P P P 000000000111 123456789012 P P1 P P P 2 P Basic Shelf If a trouble results from a c...

Page 1475: ...g Executing device test Illegal Parameter Entered parameter is out of format or related device is not installed Invalid status The status of the card or port being verified is not OUS or Fault Illegal level The password level is illegal DN4000 Executing 2 3 4 Message line 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 ...

Page 1476: ......

Page 1477: ...ng an item from this screen you can monitor the current operating information 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Monitor Main Menu Description 1 Error Log Displays error records 2 Device status Displays current device status 3 Traffic Displays traffic measurement for extensions CO trunks attendant consoles and resources 1 Error Log 2 Device Status 3 Traffic ONL MON LIN DIR ...

Page 1478: ...B 13 90 8 39 10 00 11 12 6 32 1 57 9 01 6 59 6 59 5 45 Fur further informations about Error Log refer to Section 15 D 1 02 Error Log ONL MON AM AM PM AM PM AM PM PM PM 0100 0300 0400 0600 0700 0800 0B00 1270 1300 CPR runaway TSW clock down Basic shelf power down Progress tone failure Check date time Conference trunk failure Device not connect for SMDR LPR RAM failure Card disconnect ...

Page 1479: ...status of SMDR device Clock Mode Displayed only when T 1 or E 1 trunk card is installed External is displayed when the system synchronizes with the external clock Internal is displayed when the system synchronizes with the internal clock Master Clock Card Displayed only T 1 or E 1 trunk card is installed XXX physical card No of the master card is displayed when the external clock mode is utilized ...

Page 1480: ...C 09 PLC 10 PLC 11 PLC 12 LCOT 13 LCOT 14 LCOT Expansion Shelf 2 01 LCOT 02 LCOT 03 LCOT 04 LCOT 05 LCOT 06 LCOT 07 LCOT 08 LCOT 09 LCOT 10 LCOT 11 LCOT 12 LCOT 13 ATLC 14 DPH I I I I I I I I I I I I F F F F F F F F F F F F F F O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Card Status Description In the above screen a blank indicates that a card is not installed in the slot I In Service O Out of Service F Fault 1 C...

Page 1481: ...inistrator can change the status of a CO trunk port from Busy Out to INS by entering INS command In the above screen a blank indicates that a port is not assigned to the system Slot 1 2 P 3 o 4 r 5 t 6 7 8 DTMF 1 Rec 2 000000000111 123456789012 I I O I I I O O I I O O I I B O I I B O I I B O I I B O I I B O I I I I I I I I Port Status Basic Shelf I In Service O Out of Service F Fault B Busy Out Sl...

Page 1482: ... above screen a blank indicates that a port is not assigned to the system 3 04 Port Status Expansion Shelf 1 screen 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 Device Status 4 6 ONL TST Slot 1 2 P 3 o 4 r 5 t 6 7 8 DTMF 1 Rec 2 00000000011111 12345678901234 I I O I I I O O I I O O I I B O I I B O I I B O I I B O I I B O I I I I I I I I Port Status Expansion Shelf 1 I In Service O Out of Service F Fault B Busy ...

Page 1483: ... above screen a blank indicates that a port is not assigned to the system 3 05 Port Status Expansion Shelf 2 screen 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 Device Status 5 6 ONL TST Slot 1 2 P 3 o 4 r 5 t 6 7 8 DTMF 1 Rec 2 00000000011111 12345678901234 I I O I I I O O I I O O I I B O I I B O I I B O I I B O I I B O I I I I I I I I Port Status Expansion Shelf 2 I In Service O Out of Service F Fault B Busy ...

Page 1484: ...2 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 Description This screen shows the current operating status of both basic and optional conference trunks Conditions If the Conf card is installed on the TSW card and set TSW Additional CONF parameter to Yes in the Configuration System Assignment screen appears at the Conference Trunk Status of Basic field Refer to section 10 C 1 00...

Page 1485: ...raffic measurements of each attendant console 4 DISA OGM1 OGM2 AGC Displays traffic measurements of each resource If tenant service is employed traffic measure ments of each resource will be displayed by each tenant individually 1 Station 2 Trunk Group 3 Attendant Console 4 DISA 5 OGM1 6 OGM2 7 AGC Reference VT Dumb System Programming Programming System Operation 2 3 Start Time of Traffic Measure ...

Page 1486: ...easurements of all extensions from up to 24 hours before the current time In above screen 9 00 AM indicates the traffic measurement from 9 00 AM to 10 00 AM one day ago Incoming Calls The number of incoming calls both extension and CO Answer Calls The number of answered calls both extension and CO Outgoing Calls The number of outgoing calls both extension and CO during the pre set time period Comp...

Page 1487: ... 195 932 7 00AM 412 303 291 162 68 582 2 00AM 653 572 599 472 201 831 8 00AM 311 200 183 99 35 411 11 00AM 430 291 381 263 95 755 5 00AM 529 427 395 312 112 683 Feb 22 1991 Trunk Group No 01 Traffic Information Trunk Group 1 2 Description Busy Calls The number of outgoing calls encountering a busy For a description of other items refer to Section 15 G 4 01 Station Initial screen ONL MON 9 00AM 406...

Page 1488: ...00AM 140 99 121 83 69 240 6 00AM 592 482 468 352 311 762 1 00AM 809 680 762 611 491 998 7 00AM 483 362 411 348 298 700 2 00AM 751 612 592 464 391 900 8 00AM 301 188 165 100 83 583 11 00AM 590 476 555 411 299 768 5 00AM 683 521 549 401 281 800 Feb 22 1991 Attendant No 01 Traffic Information Attendant Console 1 2 Description Handled Calls The number of calls transfered by the attendant console For a...

Page 1489: ...1 Station Initial screen Busy Calls The number of DISA calls which failed to access any DISA re sources CCS One hundred call seconds or one hundred seconds of telephone conversation One hour of telephone traffic is equal to 36 CCS Tenant If tenant service is employed this screen can be displayed by each tenant individually By pressing the PREV or NEXT key you can enter into the previous or next sc...

Page 1490: ... 00PM 12 3 5 00PM 12 6 Feb 22 1991 Tenant 1 Traffic Information OGM1 Description Start Time Refer to Section 15 G 4 01 Station Initial screen Busy Calls The number of calls which failed to access any OGM1 resources CCS One hundred call seconds or one hundred seconds of telephone conversation One hour of telephone traffic is equal to 36 CCS Tenant If tenant service is employed this screen can be di...

Page 1491: ...00PM 12 3 5 00PM 12 6 Feb 22 1991 Tenant 1 Traffic Information OGM2 Description Start Time Refer to Section 15 G 4 01 Station Initial screen Busy Calls The number of calls which failed to access any OGM2 resources CCS One hundred call seconds or one hundred seconds of telephone conversation One hour of telephone traffic is equal to 36 CCS Tenant If tenant service is employed this screen can be dis...

Page 1492: ...1 00PM 12 3 5 00PM 12 6 Feb 22 1991 Tenant 1 Traffic Information AGC Description Start Time Refer to Section 15 G 4 01 Station Initial screen Busy Calls The number of calls which failed to access any AGC resources CCS One hundred call seconds or one hundred seconds of telephone conversation One hour of telephone traffic is equal to 36 CCS Tenant If tenant service is employed this screen can be dis...

Page 1493: ...his is not programmed then power restoration or TSW recovery drops any existing conversa tions H Other Features From the main menu screen first select 1 Programming and select 10 Miscellaneous then you can enter into the screen below by selecting 2 Power Failure Transfer To program this assignment you must log in to the system by entering the 2nd level or higher password ...

Page 1494: ...ailure Transfer Assignment for further information about programming Conditions SLT telephones and some PITS telephones can be used during power failure if power failure transfer assignment had been done in advance The following PITS telephones can be used during power failure KX T123230 KX T123230D KX T123235 KX T61630 KX T30830 When you are using above listed PITS tele phones set the POWER FAILU...

Page 1495: ...Section 16 Maintenance Dumb Type Terminal ...

Page 1496: ......

Page 1497: ...D 1 1 00 Error Record Display 16 D 1 1 01 Start Time of Self Test 16 D 1 1 02 Error Log 16 D 1 1 03 Printing Out the Automatic Failure Reporting 16 D 1 1 04 Local Alarm 16 D 2 1 05 Remote Alarm 16 D 3 E Functional Test by Entering Commands 16 E 1 1 00 Introduction 16 E 1 2 00 Functions to be Verified 16 E 2 2 01 Card Test 16 E 2 2 02 Port Test 16 E 3 2 03 PITS and ATT Test 16 E 4 3 00 TST command ...

Page 1498: ...1 05 Port Status Expansion Shelf 2 screen 16 F 6 1 06 Conference Trunk Status screen 16 F 7 2 00 TFD command Traffic Display 16 F 8 2 01 Station screen 16 F 9 2 02 Trunk Group screen 16 F 10 2 03 Attendant Console screen 16 F 11 2 04 DISA screen 16 F 12 2 05 OGM 1 screen 16 F 13 2 06 OGM 2 screen 16 F 14 2 07 AGC screen 16 F 15 G Other Features 16 G 1 1 00 PFT command Power Failure Transfer 16 G 1...

Page 1499: ...performing system administration at any one time Changing the System Administration Device is done in programming To execute the change the user must exit system administration mode and then reenter system administration mode Note The following subsections are defined in Section 15 C Device Status 2 00 Definition of Operating Status 2 01 Shelf Slot Resource 2 02 Port 2 03 Interactions among Device...

Page 1500: ......

Page 1501: ...to each password level 1st Level Access to all levels 2nd Level Set System level parameters 3rd Level Set Port level parameters 4th Level Read parameters only When you log in to the system using the 1st level password you can execute all functions but are increasingly restricted when entering level 2 3 and 4 Passwords are originally factory programmed but may be changed when logging in to the syst...

Page 1502: ...umber using Direct Inward System Access DISA feature For further information about Remote Directory Number refer to Section 11 C 4 00 Operation OPR And for further information about DISA feature refer to 3 D 2 02 Direct Inward System Access DISA Program DID feature so that the incoming telephone number is converted to the Remote Directory Number For further information about DID feature refer to S...

Page 1503: ...S status the error message Invalid Status appears on the screen Device Shelf Card Port Station ATT DTMF CNF Input Value 1 to 3 physical number 101 to 314 physical number 10101 to 31416 physical number DNxxxx xxxx extension number three or four digits or Physical number five digits A1 or A2 or Physical number five digits Rxxxy xxx Card number y 1 or 2 CFBxx or CFOyy xx 01 to 08 yy 01 to 64 When you...

Page 1504: ...nitial prompt appears again on the screen Device Shelf Card Port Station ATT DTMF CNF Input Value 1 to 3 physical number 101 to 314 physical number 10101 to 31416 physical number DNxxxx xxxx extension number three or four digits or Physical number five digits A1 or A2 or Physical number five digits Rxxxy xxx Card number y 1 or 2 CFBxx or CFOyy xx 01 to 08 yy 01 to 64 Operation failed An error mess...

Page 1505: ...error record appears on the top of the screen If more than 15 errors have occured in that time error records already stored in the error log will be overwritten starting with the first Error Log 2 2 Light Alarm Up to 15 light error records can be stored in this error log Other conditions are the same as error log 1 2 Each error log screen 1 2 2 2 exists independently The error log is accessible by...

Page 1506: ...erious trouble appears on the screen of Attendant Console or display of PITS if provided System Programming Reference VT Dumb Extension Station 2 4 3 4 DN key Type DSS Button Assignment DSK 11 C 26 00 11 C 28 00 10 G 1 02 10 G 1 03 7 The alarm message on the display of PITS if provided disappears when placing a call from that telephone when an incoming call arrives at that telephone or if a held c...

Page 1507: ...er the telephone Modem number of the remote administration device in Destination Address System Programming Reference VT Dumb System Operation 2 3 Remote Alarm Destination Address 11 C 4 00 10 D 1 02 Main Unit Modem Data Terminal Central Office Conditions Setting Remote Alarm to Y is not available if the RMT card is not installed All system detected error messages are displayed in the error log bu...

Page 1508: ......

Page 1509: ...functional test must be done during on line communication mode both at on site and from a remote location For remote access a data terminal and modem are required at a remote location and you must install RMT card in the system and assign Remote Directory Number to the system in system programming operation Remote Directory Number Refer to Section 15 B 2 00 System Administration from a Remote Loca...

Page 1510: ...rd to be tested SLC PLC HLC MSLC DLC DHLC ESLC LCOT GCOT RCOT PCOT DID DID MFC DID 2W E M T 1 E 1 ATLC AGC OPX DISA RMT DPH Item Link Card type ROM RAM Link Card type ROM RAM Power Supply Link Card type ROM RAM OGM Rec Play Link Card type ROM RAM Modem Card Type Remarks Card to be tested should be OUS or FAULT 16 E 2 ...

Page 1511: ... Detect 2 ports to be tested should be OUS or FAULT SLC HLC OPX MSLC DHLC ESLC and DTMF receiver to be tested should be OUS or FAULT Card Functions Remarks Note If you want to verify the status of the DTMF receiver 1 or 2 change it s status to Out of Service by entering OUS command and verify the status of a card which contains DTMF receivers SLC HLC and OPX card contains two DTMF receivers respec...

Page 1512: ... Function Remarks Card to be tested should be OUS or FAULT PLC HLC DLC DHLC ATLC Link All types of APITS DTMF generator KX T123235 and KX T7130 only Link All types of DPITS DTMF generator All types of DPITS Link All types of APITS DPITS DTMF generator KX T123235 KX T7130 and All types of DPITS Link DTMF generator ROM RAM ...

Page 1513: ... Extension Physical No xyyzz or DN DN dddd CO line Physical No xyyzz CFB tt 01 08 CFO tt 01 64 Physical No xyyzz Physical No xyyzz or DN DN dddd Physical No xyyzz or ATT No Ax Item 2 CO line Physical No xyyzz Extension Physical No xyyzz or DN DN dddd Description x Shelf No 1 Basic 2 Expansion 1 3 Expansion 2 yy Slot No 01 14 or zz Port No 01 16 or a Attendant console No 1 2 or dddd Directory No 3 ...

Page 1514: ... E 1 Item 3 None R xxxyy DTMF Receiver No xxx Card No yy 01 to 24 T 1 01 to 08 E 1 Command Format 1 2 1 Loopback test is done automatically inside the T 1 E 1 card 2 Loopback test is done between the T 1 E 1 card and the external equipment CSU DSU In this case loopback mode should be set at the external terminal beforehand 3 When a card No is specified DTMF Generator No 1 and DTMF Receiver No 1 of...

Page 1515: ...01 to 24 T 1 01 to 08 E 1 or Receiver No 01 to 24 T 1 01 to 08 E 1 101 105 109 201 205 209 301 305 309 Card No Result Display G R status display G R test results display OPE DTM STS XXX DTMF G 01 02 03 04 05 06 0 DTMF R 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 0 0 0 DTMF R 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 DTMF R 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 OPE DTM TST 101 DTMF G 01 02 03 04 05 06 OK NG DTMF R 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 OK OK OK O...

Page 1516: ...ard No Y DSP No 1 or 2 xxx Card No 1 DSP test is done using signals generated by DSP on the E 1 card 2 DSP test is done using signals generated by DTMF G on the E 1 card Results Display 1 Test Diagnosis Pattern 1 Diagnosis Pattern 2 Note 01 through 08 Channel No of DSP 2 INS OUS 3 Status check OPE DSP TST 101 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 DSP 1 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK NG DSP 2 OK OK NG OK OK OK OK OK OPE O...

Page 1517: ...Modem failure OPX POW OPX power down BEL POW OPX power down Bell REC PLY OGM Recording Playing back failure TSW TSW card PB generator PB receiver failure FAULT 00 FF MFC DID failure Card Test Message List The description of the MFC DID failure is shown below FAULT X Y Receiving test failure line Sending test failure line Description Error Indication X or Y 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Descripti...

Page 1518: ...FAULT04 FAULT05 FAULT06 FAULT07 FAULT08 FAULT09 FAULT0A FAULT0B FAULT0C FAULT0D FAULT0E FAULT0F Loop current failure Bell detection failure PB Generator failure Dial pulse failure PB Receiver 1 failure PB Receiver 2 failure Tone detection circuit 1 failure Tone detection circuit 2 failure HDLC failure OHCA card is not installed Pulse detection failure Speech path failure PB Receiver 3 failure PB R...

Page 1519: ...01 CR 10101 PASS 10201 FAULT01 OPE PITS and ATT Test Error Code List FAULT01 FAULT02 FAULT03 FAULT04 FAULT09 FAULT0A FAULT0B FAULT0C FAULT0D FAULT0E FAULT0F If trouble results from card an error message Card Fault appeares on the screen Description Code PITS Link failure ATT Link failure PITS PB Generator failure ATT PB Generator failure ATT ROM failure ATT RAM failure ...

Page 1520: ......

Page 1521: ...erating status of the following items can be displayed on the screen by entering SYM command Command Format OPE SYM Index Index 1 System Status 2 Card Status 3 Port Status Basic Shelf 4 Port Status Expansion Shelf 1 5 Port Status Expansion Shelf 2 6 Conference Trunk Status ...

Page 1522: ...ONF Current status of optional Conference card Additional OHCA Current status of optional OHCA card SMDR Current status of SMDR device Clock Mode Current status of clock Master Clock Card The card number Master of an external clock or for an internal clock In above screen indicates that the device is not installed ONL MON ROM Version Date For Place CPU RAM Basic Shelf Expansion Shelf 1 Expansion S...

Page 1523: ...C 05 PLC 06 PLC 07 PLC 08 PLC 09 PLC 10 PLC 11 PLC 12 LCOT 13 LCOT 14 LCOT Expansion Shelf 2 01 LCOT 02 LCOT 03 LCOT 04 LCOT 05 LCOT 06 LCOT 07 LCOT 08 LCOT 09 LCOT 10 LCOT 11 LCOT 12 LCOT 13 ATLC 14 DPH I I I I I I I I I I I I F F F F F F F F F F F F F F O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Card Status Description In the above screen a blank indicates that a card is not installed in the slot I In Service ...

Page 1524: ...status of a CO port from Busy Out to INS by entering INS command In the above screen a blank indicates that a port is not assigned to the system Device Status 3 6 ONL TST Slot 1 2 P 3 o 4 r 5 t 6 7 8 DTMF 1 Rec 2 000000000111 123456789012 I I O I I I O O I I O O I I B O I I B O I I B O I I B O I I B O I I I I I I I I Port Status Basic Shelf I In Service O Out of Service F Fault B Busy Out Slot 09 ...

Page 1525: ...status of a CO port from Busy Out to INS by entering INS command In the above screen a blank indicates that a port is not assigned to the system Device Status 4 6 ONL TST Slot 1 2 P 3 o 4 r 5 t 6 7 8 DTMF 1 Rec 2 000000000111 123456789012 I I O I I I O O I I O O I I B O I I B O I I B O I I B O I I B O I I I I I I I I Port Status Expansion Shelf 1 I In Service O Out of Service F Fault B Busy Out Sl...

Page 1526: ...status of a CO port from Busy Out to INS by entering INS command In the above screen a blank indicates that a port is not assigned to the system Device Status 5 6 ONL TST Slot 1 2 P 3 o 4 r 5 t 6 7 8 DTMF 1 Rec 2 000000000111 123456789012 I I O I I I O O I I O O I I B O I I B O I I B O I I B O I I B O I I I I I I I I Port Status Expansion Shelf 2 I In Service O Out of Service F Fault B Busy Out Sl...

Page 1527: ...42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 INS In Service OUS Out of Service FLT Fault Description This screen shows the current operating status of both basic and optional conference trunks Conditions If the Conf card is installed on the TSW card and set TSW Additional CONF parameter to Yes in the Configuration System Assignment screen appears at the Conference Trunk Sta...

Page 1528: ...t half 1 Tenant 1 The second half 2 Tenant 2 Description 1 Station Displays traffic measurements of all extensions 2 Trunk Group Displays traffic measurements of each trunk group 3 Attendant Console Displays traffic measurements of each attendant console 4 DISA OGM1 OGM2 AGC Displays traffic measurements of each resource If tenant service is assigned to the system traffic measurements of each reso...

Page 1529: ...rt Time The system can be programmed to display traffic measurements of the extensions from up to 24 hours before the current time In above example 9 00 AM indicates the traffic measurement from 9 00 AM to 10 00 AM one day ago Incoming Calls The number of incoming calls both extension and CO Answer Calls The number of answered calls both extension and CO Outgoing Calls The number of outgoing calls...

Page 1530: ...62 419 311 120 801 4 00PM 555 412 400 282 99 703 12 00AM 110 65 98 60 39 215 6 00PM 511 400 382 300 95 663 1 00AM 763 580 601 449 195 932 7 00PM 412 303 291 162 68 582 2 00AM 653 572 599 472 201 831 8 00PM 311 200 183 99 35 411 11 00AM 430 291 381 263 95 755 5 00PM 529 427 395 312 112 683 Feb 22 1990 Trunk Group No 01 Traffic Information Trunk Group 1 2 Description Busy Calls The number of outgoin...

Page 1531: ...88 471 403 381 853 4 00PM 700 550 603 423 301 862 12 00AM 140 99 121 83 69 240 6 00PM 592 482 468 352 311 762 1 00AM 809 680 762 611 491 998 7 00PM 483 362 411 348 298 700 2 00AM 751 612 592 464 391 900 8 00PM 301 188 165 100 83 583 11 00AM 590 476 555 411 299 768 5 00PM 683 521 549 401 281 800 Feb 22 1990 Attendant No 01 Traffic Information Attendant Console 1 2 Description Handled Call The numbe...

Page 1532: ...1 1 00PM 2 1 7 00PM 2 1 2 00PM 8 3 8 00PM 4 2 2 00PM 4 2 8 00PM 4 2 11 00AM 12 2 5 00PM 12 8 11 00AM 12 3 5 00PM 12 6 Feb 22 1990 Tenant 1 Traffic Information DISA Description Start Time Refer to Section 16 F 2 01 Station screen Busy Calls The number of DISA calls which failed to access any DISA resources CCS One hundred call seconds or one hundred seconds of telephone conver sation One hour of te...

Page 1533: ...1 1 00PM 2 1 7 00PM 2 1 2 00PM 4 4 8 00PM 4 2 2 00PM 4 2 8 00PM 4 2 11 00AM 12 2 5 00PM 12 8 11 00AM 12 3 5 00PM 12 6 Feb 22 1990 Tenant 1 Traffic Information OGM1 Description Start Time Refer to Section 16 F 2 01 Station screen Busy Calls The number of calls which failed to access any OGM1 resources CCS One hundred call seconds or one hundred seconds of telephone conver sation One hour of telepho...

Page 1534: ...1 1 00PM 2 1 7 00PM 2 1 2 00PM 4 4 8 00PM 4 2 2 00PM 4 2 8 00PM 4 2 11 00AM 12 2 5 00PM 12 8 11 00AM 12 3 5 00PM 12 6 Feb 22 1990 Tenant 1 Traffic Information OGM2 Description Start Time Refer to Section 16 F 2 01 Station screen Busy Calls The number of calls which failed to access any OGM2 resources CCS One hundred call seconds or one hundred seconds of telephone conver sation One hour of telepho...

Page 1535: ...2 1 1 00PM 2 1 7 00PM 2 1 2 00PM 4 4 8 00PM 4 2 2 00PM 4 2 8 00PM 4 2 11 00AM 12 2 5 00PM 12 8 11 00AM 12 3 5 00PM 12 6 Feb 22 1990 Tenant 1 Traffic Information AGC Description Start Time Refer to Section 16 F 2 01 Station screen Busy Calls The number of calls which failed to access any AGC resources CCS One hundred call seconds or one hundred seconds of telephone conversa tion One hour of telepho...

Page 1536: ......

Page 1537: ... PFT No 01 18 Screen display PRG PFT SH01 CR PFT No 01 1 Trunk Slot No 101 2 Extension Slot No 107 PFT No 02 1 Trunk Slot No 102 2 Extension Slot No 108 PFT No 18 1 Trunk Slot No 206 2 Extension Slot No 212 PRG Item 1 2 Data 101 314 101 314 Explanation Assign LCOT GCOT PCOT or RCOT card No which are available for power failure transfer Assign HLC SLC DHLC ESLC or MSLC card No which are available f...

Page 1538: ...D KX T123235 KX T61630 KX T30830 When you are using the PITS telephones avail able with power failure transfer set the POWER FAILURE switch to ON when power failure occurs If dialing cannot be done set the DIALING MODE selector to another position PULSE or TONE When the power is restored set the POWER FAILURE switch to OFF If the power is restored during a conversation set the POWER FAILURE switch...

Page 1539: ...le Conditions After replacing an old version of ROM with a new version of ROM Additional System Memory Initialization should be done before programming the newly added features Then newly added system memory is initialized by default values Note If you do not execute this operation after replac ing the ROM the system malfunction may occur OPE VUP V1 18 CR V1 18 V2 00 version up Are You Sure Y Yes ...

Page 1540: ......

Page 1541: ...Section 17 Backup Utility On Site ...

Page 1542: ......

Page 1543: ...nals 17 B 1 2 00 Before Beginning Backup 17 B 2 3 00 Using VT220 Compatibles 17 B 3 3 01 Backup Main Menu 17 B 3 3 02 Saving Procedure Using Procomm Plus Ver 2 01 17 B 4 3 03 Loading Procedure Using Procomm Plus Ver 2 01 17 B 6 4 00 Using Dumb Terminal 17 B 9 4 01 Saving Procedure 17 B 9 4 02 Loading Procedure 17 B 9 C Troubleshooting 17 C 1 ...

Page 1544: ......

Page 1545: ...ion device saving the system programming data can be done using a personal computer with external storage medium 2 Load Backup Device Main Unit Loading system programming data from the backup device to the system can be done during off line mode only When an attendant console is used as the system administration device loading the system programming data can be done using a personal computer with ...

Page 1546: ......

Page 1547: ...e by operation in Dumb mode from Dumb to VT220 and using the exit command at the initial prompt or interrupting the communication between the system and maintenance device once and then restarting communication 2 When key key are pressed simultaneously while the Main Menu is being displayed in VT mode the mode will be switched from VT220 to Dumb When key key are pressed simultaneously while the in...

Page 1548: ...trol codes corresponding to ASCII 00h 1Fh are transmitted and written to the storage device Also is the backup device set so that these stored control codes can be sent without limitation to the system The above settings are necessary to ensure that the SOH STX EOT ETX codes etc specified in the transmission format correspond to the control codes In addition in order to perform a backup with a pro...

Page 1549: ... Backup Utility Main Menu appears on the screen Description 1 Load Loading the system programming data from backup device to the Main Unit 2 Save Saving the system programming data from the Main Unit to backup device 17 B 3 Backup Utility Main Menu ONL BCK LIN DIR 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 Load SIO 1 PBX 2 Save PBX SIO 1 ...

Page 1550: ...n is the receive file function of Procomm Plus 2 Press the R key to select RAW ASCII then the file name entry box will appear on the screen Continued 17 B 4 Backup Utility Main Menu OFL BCK LIN DIR 1 Load SIO 1 PBX 2 Save PBX SIO 1 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Backup Utility Main Menu OFL BCK LIN DIR Download Protocol 375610 Byte Free X XMODEM A ASCII Z ZMODEM R RAW ASCII Y YMODEM Batch T TELINK G YMODE...

Page 1551: ... the data from PBX 4 Enter 2 and press the Enter key PBX starts to send the system data If data transmission finishes the following message appears on the screen Transfer End 5 Press the ESC key to close the file 6 End 17 B 5 Backup Utility Main Menu OFL BCK LIN DIR 1 Load SIO 1 PBX 2 Save PBX SIO 1 2 Transfer End 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Backup Utility Main Menu OFL BCK LIN DIR 1 Load SIO 1 PBX 2 S...

Page 1552: ...Backup Utility from the Main Menu PBX starts to receive the data from PC 2 Press the PgUp key on the PC keyboard then the protocol selection pop up box will appear on the screen PgUp is the send file function of Procomm Plus Continued 17 B 6 Backup Utility Main Menu OFL BCK LIN DIR 1 Load SIO 1 PBX 2 Save PBX SIO 1 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Backup Utility Main Menu OFL BCK LIN DIR 1 Load SIO 1 PBX 2 ...

Page 1553: ...I IMODEM C COMPUSERVE BT 1 EXT 1 K KERMIT 2 EXT 2 S SEALINK 3 EXT 3 Your Selection 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 Press the R key to select RAW ASCII then the file name entry box will appear on the screen 4 Enter the file name and press the Enter key Procomm Plus start to send the data to PBX 5 If data transmission finishes the message Transfer End will appear on the screen 6 End 17 B 7 Backup Utility M...

Page 1554: ...on ASCII code The number of byte 1 to 256 ASCII code Data area System data ASCII code Checksum Address The number of bytes data The complement of the sum of all bytes ASCII code ETX End of text EOT End of data transfer 17 B 8 EXT EXT EOT STX SOH STX Address Area Data Area The number of bytes Data Area Address Area Checksum Area Checksum Area ...

Page 1555: ...have been made like uniform communication parameters for sender and receiver etc 2 Enter the loading command a Command format OPE LOD Item 1 b Item explanation Item 1 1 to 3 1 No procedure Hex 2 CRC 16 binary code decimal available only in remote operation 3 CRC CCITT binary code decimal available only in remote operation Note To select the option 2 or 3 of Item 1 is available only when you are lo...

Page 1556: ......

Page 1557: ...VT220 DATA ERROR 030 Dumb Illegal code detected VT220 DATA ERROR 031 Dumb Contents Backup device is not connected only when maintenance device is attendant console Different version at the time of backup A checksum error has been detected Incorrect data has been received Countermeasures Connect the backup device to SIO 1 Port Match the backup version Communication line is defective or backup data ...

Page 1558: ......

Page 1559: ...Section 18 Backup Utility Remote Location ...

Page 1560: ......

Page 1561: ...Remote Location Contents Page A Introduction 18 A 1 B Backup Utility Types 18 B 1 1 00 Before Beginning Backup 18 B 1 2 00 Using Dumb Terminal 18 B 2 2 01 Saving Procedure 18 B 2 2 02 Loading Procedure 18 B 4 C Troubleshooting 18 C 1 ...

Page 1562: ......

Page 1563: ...ion For further information about communication parameters refer to Section 10 D 7 00 Communication Interface RMT card Modem must be installed to the system To administer the system from a remote location assign System Operation Remote Directory Number in system programming Backup Save and Load from a remote location is possible only in Dumb mode When system administration from a remote location i...

Page 1564: ......

Page 1565: ...ontrol codes corresponding to ASCII 00h 1Fh are transmitted and written to the storage device Also is the backup device set so that these stored control codes can be sent without limitation to the system The above settings are necessary to ensure that the SOH STX EOT ETX codes etc specified in the transmission format correspond to the control codes In addition in order to perform a backup with a p...

Page 1566: ... ASCII codes from the system to the remote terminal 4 When the saving is finished the following message appears on the screen Transfer end 5 Release the Data Receive mode of the backup device Using the protocol CRC 16 CRC CCITT 1 Select the area and enter the saving command A message Transfer start appears on the screen and the system will wait for protocol linking Refer to the explanations for wi...

Page 1567: ...h it would be software version Binary data The number of byte 1 to 256 Binary data Data area System data Binary data Checksum Address The number of bytes data ETX End of text EOT End of data transfer 18 B 3 SOH STX Address Area The number of byte Data Area Data Area Address Area ETX ETX EOT STX The number of byte ...

Page 1568: ...lease the Data Send mode of the backup device 7 When the remote operation is terminated the system is reset automatically Using the protocol CRC 16 CRT CCITT 1 Enter the loading command Refer to the explanations for without protocol in regard to a Command format and b Item explanation 2 The loading start message Transfer start appears on the screen and the system waits for Protocol Linking 3 Chang...

Page 1569: ...rror 031 Contents Backup device is not connected only when maintenance device is attendant console Different version at the time of backup A checksum error has been detected Incorrect data has been received Countermeasures Connect the backup device to SIO 1 Port Match the backup version Communication line is defective or backup data is destroyed Communication line is defective or backup data is de...

Page 1570: ......

Page 1571: ...Section 19 Abbreviations ...

Page 1572: ......

Page 1573: ...ernal Feature Access EXT Extension F FDN Floating Directory Number FWD Call Forwarding G GCO Group CO GCOT Ground Start Central Office Trunk H HLC Hybrid Line Circuit I ICM Intercom INS In Service IRNA Intercept Routing No Answer L LCD Liquid Crystal Display LCOT Loop Start Central Office Trunk LED Light Emitting Diode LNR Last Number Redial M MOD Modification MODEM Modulator and Demodulator Unit ...

Page 1574: ... SLT Single Line Telephone SMDR Station Message Detail Recording SNR Saved Number Redial SRC Source T TAFAS Trunk Answer From Any Station TG Trunk Group TSW Time Sharing Switch U UCD Uniform Call Distribution UNA Universal Night Answer W WT Warning Tone X XDP Extra Device Port 19 2 ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for KX-TD500

Brand: EasyIO Pages: 18

Brand: Harpo Pages: 35

Brand: Hardi Pages: 2

Brand: Parker Pages: 28

Brand: Kärcher Pages: 4

MusicCAST MCX-CA15

Brand: Yamaha Pages: 176

Brand: Yamaha Pages: 92

Brand: Vag Pages: 12

Brand: M-system Pages: 13

AMES 4000SS Series

Brand: Watts Pages: 8

LDSBus LC020101A-F

Brand: BRT Systems Pages: 15

Brand: GeoVision Pages: 21

Brand: Tenpilot Pages: 2

Brand: QUICK DAM Pages: 16

SR-ZG9001T-RGBW

Brand: Sunricher Pages: 3

Brand: FASAR ELETTRONICA Pages: 2

Brand: ACS Pages: 2

Brand: Litex Pages: 1

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands